Digital PDFs

AA-5279C-TC

March 1984

474 pages

Original

188MB

view download

OCR Version

91MB

view download

Document:	RT-11 System User's Guide
Order Number:	AA-5279C-TC
Revision:	0
Pages:	474
Original Filename:

OCR Text

RT-11 System
User’s Guide
AA-5279C-TC

March 1983
This document describes how to use the RT-11 operating system. It
provides the information required to perform ordinary tasks such as

program development, program execution, and file maintenance by using RT-11 keyboard commands.

This manual supersedes the RT-171
System User's Guide,
AA-5279B-TC. This manual contains Update Notice 1, AD-5279C—-T1.

Operating System:

RT—11 Version 5.1

To order additional documents from within DIGITAL, contact the Software Distribution

Center, Northboro, Massachusetts 01532.
To order additional documents from outside DIGITAL, refer to the instructions at the back

of this document.

digital equipment corporation - maynard, massachusetts

First Printing, March 1980
Updated, March 1981
Revised, March 1983
Updated, July 1984

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not
be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital Equipment
Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.

The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is
not supplied by DIGITAL or its affiliated companies.

Digital Equipment Corporation 1980, 1981, 1983, 1984.
All Rights Reserved.

Printed in U.S.A.

A postage-paid READER’'S COMMENTS form is included on the last page of this
document. Your comments will assist us in preparing future documentation.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

DEC
DECmate
DECsystem—10
DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOL

dlilgliltial

MASSBUS
PDP
P/OS
Professional
Rainbow
RSTS
RSX

M33800

RT-11
UNIBUS
VAX
VMS
VT
Work Processor

Contents
Page

Preface

Part]|

RT-11 Overview

Chapter 1

System Components
1.1
1.2

Hardware . . . . . . . . . . .
Software. . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1

Monitors.

1.2.1.1
1.2.1.2
1.2.1.3
1.2.2
1.2.3

1.3
1.4

e e

e e 1-3

Single-Job (SJ) Monitor . . . . . . . e
e e 1-3
Foreground/Background (FB) Monitor . . . . . . . . 14
Extended Memory (XM) Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Editing. . . . . . . . ..o 1-6
General Purpose . . . . . . . . . ... ... ... . 1-6
Systemdobs . . . . . . .. ..o 1-8
Debugging and Patching. . . . . . . . . . .. ... 1-9
BATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... ..... 1-9

Language Processors.

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . ... ..

... 1-9

RT-11 Software Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... 1-9
System Services . . . . . . . . .. ... 1-10
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3

Keyboard Monitor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 1-10
System Programs . . . . . . . . . . .. ... ... ... 1-11
The Relationship Between Complex Ce:)mmamds-; and
System Programs

1.4.4
1.4.5

Chapter 2

. . . .

DeviceHandlers.
. . . . . . . . . . .. ... ... ... .. 1-5
System Utility Programs. . . . . . . . . e
e e e e e 1-6
1.2.31
1.2.3.2
1.233
1.2.3.4
1.235

1.2.4

. . . .

e Ce e 1-1
e e e e e
e e e e 1-2

. .

. . . . ...

...

.. 1-11

The System Macro Library and ngmmm&ad Requests . . . . 1-12
SYSLIB FORTRAN-Callable Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Program Development
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4

Using an Editor (EDIT, KED, KEX, ORK52)
Using the Assembler MACRO) . . . . . . .
Using the Linker (LINK) . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Debugger (ODT or VDT). . . . . .

. . .
. . .
...
. . .

. . . . ... ... 2—1
. . . .. .. ... 2-1
...
... .. 2-2
. . . . . . . ... 2-2

iii

2.5
2.6

Part Il

Using the Librarian (LIBR) . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... ... ... 2-2
Using a High-Level Language (FORTRAN, BASIC, or DIBOL) . . . . . 2—3

System Communication

Chapter 3

System Conventions

3.2

Data Formats .

Start-Up Procedure
. .

. . .
. . .

. .
. .

3.3

Device

3.4

File Names and File Types.

3.5

Device Structures .

3.1

Chapter 4

Names .

. ... 3—3

3.6

. .
Special Function Keys .

3.7

Foreground/Background Terminal I/O

3.8

Type-Ahead Feature .

.. .. .. .. ... .....81
... ... 3-2
.

. .

... 3-4

. .

. . .. .. ... ... ... ......36
. . . . . . . . . . ... ... ... ... 3—6
.

e 3-10

.. 3-9

Keyboard Commands
4.1

4.2
4.3

4.4

4.5

Version 5.1, July 1984

Command Syntax .

..., 4-1

4.1.1

Factoring File Specifications .

4.1.2

File Type Specification.

...

... 4-5

4.1.3

Abbreviating Keyboard Commands.

414

Keyboard Prompts.

e 4-5

.
.

...

.. 4-4

.. 4-5

Wildeards . . . . . . . . . ... ... e
e e e
e e 4-6
Editing Command Lines and Terminal Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
431

TheGOLD Key (PF1)

. .

43.2

TheHelpKey (PF2) .

43.3

MovingtheCursor.

4.3.4

Reproduce Last Command Executed .

4.3.5

Delete Line from Cursor to End of Line

4.3.6

Restore Last Line Deleted .

4.3.7

Delete One Character to Left of Cursor.

. .

... 4-10

...

... 4-11

. .

.. 4-13

e e

. .

.. 4-14

. e

Switch Positions of Two Characters

4.3.9

Delete All Characters to Left of Cursor.

4.3.10

Truncate and Execute Command Line .

4.3.11

Execute Entire Command Line.

... 4-10

4.3.8

...

. 4-12
4-13

. .

. 4-13

. 4-14

.. 4-15

4.3.12

Redisplay Current Line

...

... 4-15

4.3.13

Redisplay Line Before Last Line Executed .

.. 4-15

. 4-15

Defining Commands with Distributed UCL.SAV .

441

Command Definition Syntax .

.. 4-15

44,2

Defining Command Abbreviations .

443

Displaying Command Definitions.

4-16.1

444

Adding Information from a Command Line.

445

Redefining Commands .

.
..

.
.

. . .
...

.
.

4-16.1
4-16.1

446

Deleting Commands .

...

4-16.2

..o

4-16.2
4-16.2

Indirect Files

4.5.1

Creating Indirect Files.

4.5.2

Executing Indirect Files .

...

.. 4-19

4.5.3

Start-Up Indirect Files.

...

.. 4-22

. 4-16

Keyboard Monitor Commands . . . . . . . . . . ... ... ....422
ABORT ® ® » » » »
ASSIGN - \v # ;s - >

¥ ® * » " » » " * » " - ® " ® " " " » » " » ® "
w - " # - # e % " - # w # " # % “ # " #» o e » %

» 4‘“‘24
w 4—._25

w 4"“27

BACKUP w » » - w » # » » F * - » » " » " ® # » » ® » " * ® ® ® * » 4‘“’23
BOOT " ® » » " " " » » " * @ W " » ® " ® # » # " » » * # » " P » ¥ » 4‘“32
CLOSE # - * » ® # » ® » » % " ® » * w » m * » . » ® " " # * w » ® » M4
COMPILE » » » * » » " # ® . » » » * " w " w » . » # » » ® » ® » " w 4‘“35
COPY " ® " » * " » " » " » * » " » » " » ® w * W » # * ® * ® # » * » MZ
CREATE " ® * " » * » " w » [ * " ¥ » # * w » " » w » ® » # " » " " 4‘“58
D »

DATE "

» MO

® Y

» -

» @

# *

. 4—‘6 1

DEASSIGN w " -r » « » w » ¥ " [ " » » » ® ® » » ® w
DELETE w » » » » " ® » . v # » # » w w * » » # » "
DIBOL » # » ® " * » ¥ » » » [ » # * # " ¥ » # ” w *

DIFFERENCES
DIRE CTORY ® DISMOUNT » # »
DUMP ® » - w ' "
E [ » " ® " » » #
EDIT s w # # " »
EXECUTE » " » "
FORMAT » w » FORTRAN . " * "
FRUN " ® . " ® #

GET ® w » @ GT » » » ® #
HE LP ¥ » » "
INITIALIZE "
INSTALL » »
LIBRARY W* E
LINK L3 L # #
LOAD ® # " »
MACRO @ [ "
MOUNT ® * »

»
»
®
[
w
#
Ed
"
»
-

PRINT ®

#
"
*
»

w
w
»
"

#
®
»
#

»
w
"
-

#
»
»
#

» #
» *
» »
# w

w 0

» . »
" »
» "

# # ¥
» " w
& 4« e
“ # »

TM
»
"
"

w
»
»
.

»
®
"
*

# » #
# w
» ®
[

w w

® » * 4“-62
® ® m 4"'“63
» » * Mfi

W » " » "
# # ¥
» » #®

» "
» *
. w
w *

4-72
i » " 4‘"80
" # " 4"“92
» # w 4""93
" * # 4"98

" »

w
w
#
w

®
»
»
#

»
"
»
-

»
¥
»
»

"
®
»
»

w
" »
* "
. ®
» "

¥ ® 4“‘99

.
#
#
"

» * » ®
" » » » »
" % ® w "
" " " w "
# " » » N

»
»
"
»

»
» » w
» * »
» " »
» " »

*
»
¥
®

w " # *
® » " » »
* " " w w
® » w » w
* » » " -

®
»
"
w

»
"
w
»

» 4""103’
* 4’”’1 l 3
® 4."-‘"1 1—8
*4.-—'1 24

*
»
w
»
"
k.
*®
»
"
»

»
®
»
#
L
L
»
-«
"

»
»
®
*
"
#
W
*
v
*

w
»
#»
»
»
w
W
"
»
»

»
»
»
¥
»
&
i
m
.
»

»
«
»
"
»
L3
W
»
»
*

»
»
»
®
®
®
L
w
»
#

»
®
»
*
*
id
#
»
»
»

»
»
»
"
&
w®
w
»
&

»
*
¥
»
»
»
#»
»
®
»

"
»
»
»
w
i
L3
»
#
»

¥
*
*
»
»
3
L3
»
w
»

"
"
»
»
®
o
o
#
*
»

.
"
w
»
»
L
£
»
»

»
N
»
.
#
#
w
»
.
w

"
®
»
®
#
L3
L
*
»
-

#
»
®
»
»
W
Ll
%
w
w

»
»
»
"
.
i
#
»
»
*

»
>
»
»
"
#
L
w
»
»

»
»
®
»
#
&
A
w
»
[

w
*
w
"
»
o
w
®
»
»

#
»
"
¥
®
#
W
»
"
»

w
"
"
"
"
W
&
"
"
¥

®
»
»
®
®
Ed
L
»
»
-

»
»
»
"
*
&
&
®
"
*

»
"
w
»
»
w
Ll
#
"

» 4‘“127
» '4-‘1 28
® 4“”130
* 4’“132
" 4“138
# 4*139
# 4’“]—46
» 4—155
w 4"—}-57
" 4‘“163

" 4"‘1 65

PROTE CT ®

» @

» "

#® » #

» )

“ 4‘"‘“1 7 1

[ .

w - #

® *

» s

» ®

® #

. » #* 4‘”—1 75

"
"
»
»
w
#
*
»
»
"
"

»
»
»
*
®
w
w
»
»
®
»

»
.
»
"
»
»
[
*
"
»
»

»
®
"
*
»
va
#
%
w
¥
"

®
*
¥
»
*
®
»
»
w
"
»

w
u
w
®
"
®
»
»
e
»

®
»
®
»
#
»
»
»
»
"
»

»
#
"
"
*
#
[
w
»
*
.

.
®
w
"
»
»
»
»
»
“

»
»
*
®
®
»
®
»
»
[
.

*
“
"
»
w
»
®
»
*
»

»
"
»
"
¥
v
w
»
w
"
TM

*
"
w
»
#
»
#
»
»
m
»

»
»
w
»
w
»
w
[
#
W
w

[
#
»
»
#
»
*
#
»
au
®

»
®
®
w
»
#
»
»
%
#®
"

®
»
»
»
"
&
*
®
»
M
"

»
W
"
#
»
»
#
.
»
»
®

»
®
»
®
»
W
»
®
"
m
®

®
#
»
»
®
*
»
“
»
w
#

» » * » *
w " " ¥ .
w W L e 3 L3 #

L ki

R ® »

»
"
®
"

® * » # »
w » » » @
» ¥ [ " "

® » »

REENTER&
REMOVE ®
RENAME .
RESET ® »
RE SUME »
RUN " » [
SAVE P » #
SET * » » »
SHOW » # »
SQUEEZE @
SRUN " ® "
START
.
® "
SUSPEND a
TIME " » »
TYPE ®

id L

»
"
»
@
»
w
»
*
*
*
w

»
"
»
»
"
W
"
#
»
"

»
»
»
"
"
"
[
»
»
"
w

w
»
”
¥
»
»
[
#
»

.
"
»
"
»
»
»
»
"
#

®
»
v
»
*
»
.
"
"
#
»

»
»
»
"
#
#
¥
»
»
"
»

»
*
¥
»
"
w
“
w
w
®

w” »

» » » # "
# # L

&4—_"176
» 4"‘"1 77
» ‘4‘“1 78
» 4‘"]— 83
» 4—"1 84
# 4‘”1 85
. 4‘""1 87
# 4’""1 Bg
» 4"‘207
a 4‘“‘2 16
¥ 4‘“2 1 8
» ® » # * » » » » » # "> " » » » % » » * » 4-220
w » » # # » " * # " » » . % " ® " # ¥ » ® 4’"22 ]»
® » » * » » ® w # - w " W » » » * " » " » 4"’"222
L 3 %223

Version 5.1, July 1984

4.7

Chapter 5

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)
5.1

Creating an Indirect Control File
51.1
5.1.2

5.1.3
0.2

. . . . . . . .

Labels.

. . . . . . . . .. ..
IND Directives and Keyboard Commands
5.1.2.1

IND Directives.

5.1.2.2

Keyboard Commands.

Comments.

. .

5.2.3
5.2.4

. .

oL 5-2
. . . . . . .. 5-3

...

...5-3

L 5-5

... 5-1

...

52.1

. .

. ..

. . . . .

. . . .e

INDOptions.

. .

. . .

Executing Indirect Control Files . . .

5.2.2

. . . .. .. .54

e e e

e e 5-6

.., 5-7

5.2.1.1
5.2.1.2
5.2.1.3

Delete Control File Option (/D) . . . . . . . . .
Suppress Keyboard Commands Option /N) . . .
Suppress Console Display Option (/Q). . . . . .

5.2.1.4

Command Tracing Option (/T)

. .

. . .

. .. 5-7
. . . 5-8
. . . 58

. . . .. o—8

Passing Parameters . .

. . . . . . . . .. ... ... ... 5-8
Nested Indirect Control Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 5-9
Executing Indirect Command Files from Control Files . . . . 5-10

5.3

Directive Summary

. . . . . .

5.4

Symbols . .

L 5-16

5.4.1
54.2
54.3

. .

5.4.3.1
544

54.5
5.4.6
9.5

Defining the Radix of a Numeric Symbol . .
Numeric Expressions. . . . . . . . . . ..

. .

... 5-23

. . . . . . . . . .. . ... . ... 5-23

Label Processing . .

. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 5-24
Direct Access Labels . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 5-24

Define Logical Endof File (/). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5-24
.ASK Directive. . . . . . . . ..o 5-25

5531
5533

Version 5.1, July 1984

Define a Label (label:).

5532
5.5.4

. . . . 5-17
.. .. 5-18

. . . . . . .. ... 5-19
Special Symbols . . . . . .. ... 0oL
L . . . 519
Symbol Value Substitution. . . . . . . . . . . .. ... .. 5-22

5.5.1.1
5.5.1.2
5.5.2
553

. . . L. 5-11

String Symbols

IND Directives.

55.1

Local and Global Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... 5-17
Logical Symbols . . . . . . . . . ... ...
... .. 5-17
NumericSymbols . . . . . . . . .. .. ... ... 5-17
5.4.3.2

. . .

Syntax. . . . . . . . . ..
QuestionDisplay.
. . . . .
Responses . . . . . .. . .

.ASKN Directive.

... 5-25
. ... .. ... ... 5-26
.. .. ... .. . . . 5-26

C e

... b5=27

5641
5.5.4.2

Syntax. . . . . . . . . ..
Determining the Radix. . .

... 5-27
. . . . . . . .. ... 5-28

55.43
5544

QuestionDisplay. . . . . . . . . . .. ... ... 5-29
Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . ... .. ... 5-29

555

55.6
557
558

.ASKSDirective . . . . . . . . . . . . .

... . .530
. . . 530

5.5.5.1
5.5.5.2

Syntax. . . .
Determining the Radm af Range: and Tlmmut

5.5.5.3
5554

&
Question Dmplay e
Responses . . . . . . . . . .. . ... ......532

Values . . . .

N
o

BeginBlock (BEGIN) . . . . . ... ............533
Chain to Another File (CHAIN). . . . . . . . .. . ... . 534
CloseFile(CLOSE) . . . ... ... ... .........534

Version 5.1, July 1984

5.5.9
5.5.10
5.5.11
5.5.12
5.5.13
5.5.14

5.5.15

5.5.16
5.5.17
5.5.18
5.5.19
5.5.20

5.5.21

5.5.22

5.5.23

wwwwwwwwwwwwww

5.5.25
5.5.26
5.5.27
5.5.28
5.5.29
5.5.30
5.5.31
5.5.32

5.5.20.1
5.5.20.2

Test If Symbol Meets Specified Condition (.IF) . . .
Test If Symbol Is Defined or Not Defined

5.5.20.3

Test If Operating Mode Is Emmbl@d or Disabled

5.5.20.4
5.5.20.5
5.5.20.6

Compound Tests

. . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... 5-50

(IFDF/IFNDF)

(IFENABLED/IFDISABLED) . . . . . . . . . .. 5-50
. 551
Test If Device Is Loaded (.IFLOA/. IFNLOA)
5-61
(IFT/IFF)
False
or
True
Is
Symbol
Test If
flflflflfl

5-53

wwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwww

Increment Numeric Symbol (INC) . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5-563
Branch on Error (CONERR). . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 5—o4
Opening Data Files . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... .. ... 5—55
OpenFile (COPEN). . . . . . . . . . . . ... .. 5-55
Open File for Append (OPENA) . . . . . . . . .. 5-56
Open File for Read (OPENR). . . . . C e e e 5-56

Parse a String (PARSE) . . . . . . . .. . .. .. ... .. 5-56
e e e e 5—-58
Purge File (PURGE). . . . . . . .. e
Read a Record (READ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... 5-58

Return from a Subroutine (. RETURN) ,,,,,,,,,,,, 5-59

Set Numeric Symbol to Decimal or Octal (. SETDf SETO) . . .
Set Symbol to Logical Value (SETL). . . . . . . . . . . ..

5-89

5-59

Set Symbol to Numeric Value (SETN) . . . . . C e e e 5—-60
Set Symbol to String Value (SETS) . . . . . . . . . . ... 5-61
Set Symbol to True or False (SETT/.SETF). . . . . . . . .. 5-62
5.5.32.1
5.5.32.2

.SETT Directive
.SETF Directive

562
5-63

o®

fififififififififififififififififififi

5.5.34

Terminate Processing (STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5-63
Test a Symbol (TEST). . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ... 564

5.5.35
5.56.36
5.5.37

Test for File (TESTFILE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 567
Obtain Volume Identification (VOL). . . . . . . . . . . .. 5-67

5.5.33

Part lli

. . . . . .. . . .. ..
. . . . . . . . ... ..

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

Logical Tests.

5.5.23.1
5.5.23.2
5.5.23.3
5.5.24

. . . . . . . .. ..
. . . . . . . . . ..
. . ... ... ...
. . . . .. .. ...
. . . . . .. . ...
.. .. . ... ...
oo
. .
.. ... ... ...

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Send Data to File (DATA). . . . .
Decrement Numeric Symbol (DEC)
Delay Execution (DELAY). . . . .
Disable Option (DISABLE) . . . .
Display Symbol Table (DUMP) . .
Enable Option (ENABLE). . . . .
End Block (END) . . . . . . . . .
Delete Symbols CERASE) . . . . .
Exit Current Control File (EXIT)
Call a Subroutine (GOSUB). . . .
Branch to a Label (GOTO). . . . .

Test for Installed Device (. TESTDEVICE)

wwwwwwwwww

5—65

Text Editing

Chapter 6

Text Editor (EDIT)
6.1
6.2
6.3

6.4

Calling EDIT
Modes of Operation
Ll

#®

Special Key Commands
Command Structure

wwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwww

wwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwww

vii

6.4.1

6.4.2

6.4.3
6.4.4

Arguments. . . . . . ..
Command Strings . . . .
Current Location Pointer.

6.6.5

6.6.6

6.6.7

viil

. 6-7

..e

.
.

6.4.4.1

Character-Oriented Commands. . .
Line-Oriented Commands . . . ..

Command Repetition.

...

.. 6-8

6-9

...

.. 6-11

...

6-12

. 6-12

...

.. 6—-12

...

66.1.1

EditRead

...

6.6.1.2

6.6.1.3

EditWrite. .
EditBackup .

...

6614

... . .

C e

EndFile.

...

.6-5

. . . . . . . ... .. .. ... .. .

File Open and Close Commands .

. 6—-13

e 6-14

. 6-14

File Input/Output Commands

... ... ... ... ... 6-15
. 6—-16
. .. ... ... 6—-18

6621

Read.

6622

Write

6.6.23

Next.

6.6.24

Exit .

...

..
.

6.6.3.1

Beginning .

6632

Jump

6.633

Advance .

...

Search Commands.
6.64.1

Get

6642

Find.

6.6.4.3

Position

...

. 6-15

. 6-19

e 6—-20

...

. 6-19

... . 6—-20
...
.

. 6-21
. 6—-22

... 6-22
... ... ... . ... .. 623
. . .. ... 6—24
...

Text Listing Commands .

6651

List

6652

Verify .

...

Pointer Relocation Commands .

Text Modification Commands

...

6-24

.. 6-24
... ... .. .. . 6-26

...

... 626

...

6661

Insert

6.6.6.2

Delete .

6.663

Kill

626

6.664

Change

6.6.6.5

Exchange

e e 6-27
... 6-28
. . . . . .. .. . ...
...
. 629
. . . . . e
e e e e e e 6—-30

Utility Commands .

6.6.7.1

Save.

...

6.6.72

Unsave.

6.6.73

...

6.6.75

Macro . . . . . .
ExecuteMacro.
.
Edit Version . . .

...

6.6.7.6

Uppercase and Lowercase Commands.

6.6.74

6.7

Memory Usage.

6.6.4

. . . . . . . . . .
. . .
Character- and Line-Oriented Command Properties. .

Editing Commands

6.6.3

e 6—6

6.5

6.6.2

6.6

6.6.1

6.4.4.2

6.4.5

...

Display Editor. .

6.7.1

Using the Display Editor.

6.7.2

Immediate Mode .

...

6-31

...

. 6-31

...

.. 6—-32

... 6-33

6-34
. 634

. 6—-35

...

... 6—-36

...

.. 637

6-38

EDIT Example. . . . . . . . . . o . .
o e 6-39
EDIT Error Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. .640

6.8
6.9

Part IV

Setting Hardware Characteristics

Chapter 7

Hardware Characteristics Program (SETUP)
SETUP Commands

7.1

71.1
71.2
7.2

7.4

Appendix A

e e e e 7—1

Mode Commands. . . . . . . . . . .
.
e 7-1
Control Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... -2

SETUPModes . . . . . . . . . . . . .. e
721
7.2.2
793

7.3

. . . . . . . . . .. e

e e 7-2

Terminal Modes . . . . . . . . . . . .o.72
Terminal and Printer Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. T-T7
Clock Modes . . . . . . . . . . . e 7-11

SETUP Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... e
e e 7-13
Summary of SETUP Modes and Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7-14

Monitor Command Abbreviations and System Utility Program
Equivalents

index

Figures
2-1
4-1
4-2
5-1
6-1

Program Development Cycle . . . . . .
Sample Command Syntax . . . . . . .
Format of a 12-Bit Binary Number. . .
Indirect Control File Line Elements . .
Display Editor Format, 12-Inch Screen.

.
.
.
.
.

...
...
. . .
. . .
. . .

... ... ... 2-3
... 4-3
. . . . . . .. 4-190
. . . . .. ... 5-1
. . . . . . .. 6-36

Tables
1-1 RT-11 Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 1-2
3-1 Permanent Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. ... 3-3
3-2 Standard File Types . . . . . . . . . . . .
. o 0 34
3-3 Device Structures . . . . . . . . . . .. e
e e e e e e e e 3-7
3—4 Special FunctionKeys . . . . . . . . . ...
0 0oL 37
4-1 Commands Supporting Wildcards . . . . . . . . . . . .. ...
L. 4-7
4-2 Wildcard Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 4-8
4-3 Single-Line Editor FunctionKeys . . . . . . . . . .. .. ... .. 4-11
4-4 DIRECTORY
Sort Categories . . . . . . . . . . .. .. ... ...488
4-5 Verification
Bit Patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... .. .. .4-115
4-6 FORTRAN Listing Codes . . . . . . . . . .. e
e e e e e e 4-122
4-7 Display Screen Values. . . . . . . . . . .. ... ... ... .. 4-129
4-8 Default Directory Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..o 4-136
49 Execution and Prompting Sequence of LIBRARY ()ptmm ******* 4-144
4-10 Prompting Sequence for LINK Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4-147
Version 5.1, July 1984

4-11

4-12

Cross-Reference Sections. . . . . . . . ...
.DSABL and .ENABL Directive Summary . .

4-13 LIST and .NLIST Directive Summary . .
4--14 SET Device Conditions and Modifications

5-1
o—2
-3
5-5
517

6-1
62
6-3

6—-5
6-6

6-8

6-9

INDOptions. . . . . . .
IND Directive Summary .

. .
. .

..
. .

...
. . .

... .4-158
. ... 4-158

.. 4-161

. .

. .
. .

.
.

. .

. 4-190

517
.

... 5-11
... 5-14

Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special IND Characters . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. ... .... 5-15
Arithmetic, Logical and Relational Operators . . . . . . . . . S 5-16
IND Special Symbols. . . . . . . . . .
..., 5-20
IND Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... ..... . 5-40
Errors Intercepted by .ONERR Directive.
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. 5-54
EDIT Key Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... ... 62
EDIT Command Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... 6—4
Command Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... ... ... . . .6-5
EDIT Commands and File Status ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 6-15
Write Command Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... ... 617
Jump Command Arguments . . . . . . . . . . .. .. ... ....6-20
Advance Command Arguments. . . . . . . . . . . . . e
e e 6-21
List Command Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... 6—-25
Delete Command Arguments.

. .

. . . . . . .
e
e e e
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
6-13 Unsave Command Arguments . . . . . . . . .
6-14 M Command and Arguments. . . . . . . . . .
615 Immediate Mode Commands. . . . . . . . . .
6-10 Kill Command Arguments .

. . .
6-11 Change Command Arguments . .
6—12 Exchange Command Arguments .

. . . . ..
Ce
. . .. ... ....
. N
. .. .. ... ...

...

6-27
628
6-29
-S |
6-32

.. 6-33

... 6-39

Preface

This manual describes how to use the RT-11 operating system,; it provides
enough information for you to perform ordinary tasks such as program
development, program execution, and file maintenance.

s
|

The manual is written for you if you are already familiar with computer
software fundamentals and have some experience using RT-11. If you have
no RT-11 experience, you should first read the Introduction to RT—11 before consulting this manual. If you have experience with an earlier release
of RT-11 (this is Version 5), you should read the RT—-11 System Release
Notes to learn how RT-11 Version 5 differs from earlier versions. You can
also read the RT—11 System Utilities Manual to learn how to use the RT-11
system utilities that perform the keyboard commands described in this
manual. If you are interested in more sophisticated programming techniques or in system programming, you should read this manual first and

then proceed to the RT—11 Programmer’s Reference Manual and the
Software Support Manual.

RT—-11

The next section, Chapter Summary, briefly describes the chapters in this
manual and suggests a reading path to help you use the manual efficiently.

Chapter Summary
Part I, RT-11 Overview, Chapter 1 and 2, describes the RT-11 operating
system in general. It lists the hardware and software components of the
RT-11 system, describes the monitors, and explains the program development process with RT-11.

Part II, System Communication, Chapters 3 through 5, describes system
conventions, such as data formats, physical device names, file naming conventions, and special function key commands. Chapter 4 introduces the
keyboard monitor commands that you use to communicate with the monitor and to perform system jobs. Chapter 5 describes how to use IND, the
indirect control file processor.

Part III, Text Editing, Chapter 6, describes the RT-11 text editor, (EDIT)
and shows you how to create and modify files with it.

Part IV, Setting Hardware Characteristics (SETUP), shows you how to set
hardware characteristics for your terminal, printer, and system clock.

Appendix A contains a summary of the keyboard monitor commands, their
abbreviations, and their system program equivalents.

Version 5.1, July 1984

Documentation Conventions
A description of the symbolic conventions used throughout this manual follows. Familiarize yourself with these conventions before you continue
reading.
1. In examples that show user input and computer output, user input is in

red.

. This manual uses the symbol
to represent a carriage return (the
RETURN key), @ to represent a line feed, @ for a space, and {8 to represent a tab. Unless the manual indicates otherwise, terminate all commands or command strings with a carriage return.

. Terminal and console terminal are general terms used throughout all

RT-11 documentation to represent any terminal device, including
DECwriters and video terminals.

. To produce certain characters in system commands, you must type a letter key while pressing the control (CTRL) key. For example, while hold-

ing down the CTRL key, type C to produce the CTRL/C character. Key
combinations of this type are documented as €R0), €A 0), and so on.

In discussions of command syntax, uppercase letters represent the com-

mand name, which you must type. Lowercase letters represent a variable, for which you must supply a value.

Square brackets ([ ]) enclose optional items; you may include the item in
brackets or you may omit it, as you choose.
The ellipsis symbol (...) represents repetition. You can repeat the item

that precedes the ellipsis.

This is a typical illustration of command syntax:
.DELETE[/option...] filespec[/option...]

This example shows that you must type the word DELETE, as shown,

and that you can follow it with one or more options of your choice, but
none are required. You must then leave a space, and supply a file spec-

ification. The file specification can also be followed by one or more
options, but none are required. Here is a typical command string:
+DELETE/QUERY/INFORMATION

xii

DLO:MYFILE.FOR

Part |

RT-11 Overview

Part I of this manual provides a description of the hardware and software
components that make up the RT-11 operating system, and a summary of

the program development cycle.

Chapter 1 lists all the hardware devices, monitors, utility programs, and
language processors available in the RT-11 computer system. This chapter
also lists the keyboard commands available in RT-11.
Chapter 2 gives a general description of the steps involved in the program
development cycle. This chapter also summarizes the use of the RT-11
librarian and high-level languages.

Chapter 1

System Components

RT-11is DIGITAL’s smallest real-time and program development operating
system for the PDP-11 family of minicomputers. This single-user operating
system runs on hardware configurations ranging from the microprocessorbased PDP-11/03 through the larger PDP-11/44 with cache memory. RT-11
is designed to be small, efficient, reliable, and easy to use.

The RT-11 computer system consists of hardware, software, and documentation. This chapter describes briefly the components available for you to use
with RT-11.

1.1

Hardware
The hardware components of an RT-11 system are drawn from the following
categories:

e PDP-11, LSI-11, Professional 300 series, and SBC—11 family computers
(except the 11/70 or VAX computers)

® Printing and video terminals
® Core and solid-state memory

® Line frequency and programmable clocks
® Random-access mass storage devices
® Other peripheral devices

The smallest possible hardware configuration for an RT-11 system must
include a PDP-11, LSI-11, Professional 300 series, or SBC—11 computer,
one terminal, 16K words of memory, a random-access mass storage device
for the system device, and a system backup device. Larger systems can
have a clock, more memory, more terminals, and more peripheral devices.

Table 1-1 lists specific hardware devices that can make up an RT-11 computer system.

Version 5.1, July 1984

1-1

Table 1-1: RT-11 Hardware Components
Device Type

Controller

Device Name

Card reader

CR11

Clock

KW11-L,KW11-P

DECtape Il data

DL11,DLV11

TU58

cartridge

Disk

Diskette

Display processor

Line printer

RK11, RKV11

RKO05, RKO5F

RK611

RKO0O6, RK07

RL11,RLV11,RLV12

RLO1, RLO2

RC11
RQDX1

RC25
RD50/RD51

UDA-50

RAS80

RX11, RXV11

RX01

RX211,RXV21

RX02

RQDX1

RX50

VT11

—

VS60

VS11

LS11

LV11

LP11,LPV11

All LP11—controlled
printers (LPO05,

LP25, LP26)

Magtape

Asynchronous terminal

TM11, TMA11

TU10, TE16

RH11

TJU16, TU45, TV77

TS11

TS11, TS05, TU80, TK25

DL11, DLV11

LA120,LA34,LA12,

DZ11,DZV11

LQPO02

interface

LA100
VT100, VT101,

VT102, VT105,
VT125

1.2

Software
The software components of the RT-11 computer system can be divided into
four general groups:

® Monitors

® Device handlers
e Utility programs

® Language processors

These are described in the following sections.
Version 5.1, July 1984

1-2

System Components

1.2.1

Monitors

An RT-11 monitor is a collection of routines that control the operation of
programs, schedule operations, allocate resources, and perform input and
output. A monitor comprises three major components: RMON (resident monitor); USR (User Service Routine); and KMON (keyboard monitor). The resi-

dent monitor (RMON) is the part of the monitor that is always present in
memory. It is the executive controller for the entire system. The user service
routine (USR) performs operations related to input and output, such as
opening and closing files. The keyboard monitor (KMON) is the interface
between you and the other parts of the system. It contains routines to process the keyboard monitor commands, which are your means of performing
common system operations such as loading and running programs, assigning alternate device names, and copying and deleting files.
RT-11 provides three different operating environments that represent compromises among size, speed, and capability. Three types of monitors, all con-

taining the main parts described above, supervise the different environments. These three monitors are the single-job (SJ) monitor, the foreground/
background (FB) monitor, and the extended memory (XM) monitor. The
three environments are upward compatible:
® The single-job (SJ) monitor supports the basic environment.
® The foreground/background (FB) monitor includes all the support of the
single-job monitor and adds the ability to run more than one job, as well

as some extra features.
® The extended memory (XM) monitor is an extension of the foreground/
background monitor that includes all the foreground/background fea-

tures, plus extended memory capabilities.

1.2.1.1

Single-Job (SJ) Monitor — The single-job monitor, called the SJ moni-

tor, can run one job at a time. It is the smallest of the three monitors. While

the SJ monitor does not offer some of the optional features that the other
monitors have, you can use all the system utility programs, most of the keyboard monitor commands, and many of the programmed requests.
Only 16K words of memory are required for a single-job system, though, and
since the SJ monitor uses approximately 2K words itself, this leaves

approximately 14K words for system utility programs or for your application program. The SJ monitor is ideal for real-time applications that require
a high data transfer rate because it services interrupts quickly. In the
single-job environment, programs can access up to 28K words of memory (up
to 30K words on some LSI-11s).
A version of the SJ monitor, the base-line (BL) monitor, also runs in a minimum configuration of 16K words of memory, but it does not support optional
monitor and device functions. The BL monitor is best suited for very small

hardware configurations, or for larger configurations where the application
requires minimal executive support.

System Components

1-3

1.2.1.2

Foreground/Background (FB) Monitor — The foreground/background

monitor, called the FB monitor, can accommodate two jobs that appear to

run concurrently: a foreground job and a background job. All programs that

run in the single-job environment, including system utility programs and

language processors, can run as background jobs in the foreground/
background environment. The foreground job is the time-critical, real-time
job, and the FB monitor gives it priority over the background job. The FB
monitor can also run system jobs. System job support is a system generation
option which allows you to run up to eight jobs, including the foreground and
background jobs. A foreground/background system requires 24K words of
memory and a system clock.
Quite often, the central processor of a computer system spends much of its
time waiting for some external event to occur. Usually, this event is a realtime interrupt or the completion of an I/O transfer. The FB monitor lets you
take advantage of the unused processor capacity to accomplish lower priority work in the background.
Whenever the foreground job reaches a state in which no useful processing

can be done until some external event occurs, the monitor executes the background job. The background job runs until the foreground job is again ready

to execute. The processor then interrupts the background job and resumes
the foreground job.
In effect, the FB monitor allows a time-critical job to run in the foreground

while less critical work takes place in the background. All the system utility
programs and language processors can run as background jobs in a

foreground/background system, although more than 16K words of memory
may be required. Thus, you can use FORTRAN or KED, for example, in the
background, while the foreground job is collecting, storing, and analyzing

data.

Compared to the SJ monitor, the FB monitor is somewhat larger and has
slightly slower response time. However, it provides support for the
foreground/background environment. In this environment, programs can
access 28K words of memory (up to 30K words on some LSI-11s). Special
keyboard monitor commands link, run, suspend, and resume foreground
jobs. In addition, programmed requests permit a foreground job and a background job to transmit data to one another. Special system jobs (described in
Part II of the RT-11 System Utilities Manual) run in the foreground/
background environment.

1.2.1.3

Extended Memory (XM) Monitor — The extended memory monitor,

called the XM monitor, includes all the features of the FB monitor.
Throughout this manual, references to the foreground/background environment also apply to the extended memory environment, unless otherwise
stated.
The XM monitor allows you to use memory configurations larger than the

28K words supported by the SJ and FB monitors. On 18-bit Q-bus and

Version 5.1, July 1984

1-4

System Components

UNIBUS processors, the XM monitor supports up to 124K words. On 22-bit

Q-bus processors, the XM monitor supports up to 2048K words (2 megawords). This permits foreground and background jobs to extend their logical
program space beyond the 32K-word limit imposed by the 16-bit PDP-11

address word to a total of 128K words per job. The XM monitor requires a
system with the Extended Instruction Set (EIS), a KT11 memory management unit, and more than 32K words of memory.

Extended memory services, or the ability to use memory mapping, are avail-

able at a variety of levels. For DIBOL users, for example, the mapping to
extended memory is completely transparent. FORTRAN programmers can
use virtual arrays to store large amounts of data in extended memory. A
LINK option permits RT—-11 programmers to store overlays in extended
memory instead of on disk, thus increasing an overlaid program’s execution

speed markedly. A virtual .SETTOP programmed request permits a
MACRO-11 program to dynamically allocate buffers in extended memory
without concern for memory mapping. Finally, on the most basic level,
RT-11 provides other programmed requests that MACRO-11 programs can
use to control their own mapping to extended memory. (Keep in mind that

designing an application program to use extended memory this way requires
considerable thought and careful planning. The RT-11 Software Support
Manual and Chapter 11 of the RT-11 System Utilities Manual provide more
detailed information on using extended memory.)
In the extended memory environment, jobs are described as being either
privileged or virtual jobs. Foreground or background jobs that execute in the
foreground/background or single-job environment can also execute in the

extended memory environment as privileged jobs. That is, they use a one-toone default mapping from logical virtual to physical memory. Except for jobs
that include interrupt service routines, these privileged jobs need no major
changes to execute properly in the extended memory environment.

1.2.2

Device Handlers

Device handlers are routines that provide the interface to the various hardware devices in the computer system. The handlers drive, or service, periph-

eral devices and control the physical activities on the devices. In RT-11, the
terms device handler and device driver are used interchangeably.
A handler exists for every device the system supports (except for the VT11).
When you reference a device by its physical name, such as DL: for the RL02
disk, you are actually referring to the name of the device handler for that
peripheral.

Chapter 3 contains a list of all the devices that RT—11 supports, along with
their physical names. If you need to use a peripheral device that is not supported by RT-11, you usually must write the handler for it yourself. The pro-

cedure for doing this is documented in the RT-11 Software Support Manual.

System Components

1-5

1.2.3

System Utility Programs

RT-11 provides a number of utility programs to help you develop programs
and perform system housekeeping. The following sections describe these
utilities briefly and refer you to more detailed descriptions in the documentation set.

1.2.3.1

Editing — You use text editors to create and modify source programs

and to maintain files of any ASCII data, such as memos or documentation
for your own application programs. DIGITAL distributes two text file editors with RT—-11, so you can choose the one that best suits your needs and
experience: EDIT and KED. DIGITAL also distributes, but does not support
the K52 text editor for use with VT52 terminals.
The RT-11 text editor (EDIT, described in Chapter 6 of this manual) is a
character-oriented editor suitable for hard copy terminals. Its text manipulation commands permit you to make text insertions or changes quickly and
easily. EDIT also has a special mode for VT11 or VS60 graphics display
terminals.

The keypad editors (KED and K52 described in the PDP-11 Keypad Editor
User’s Guide) are for the video terminals that have the special function keypad. The keypad keys control the editing functions. They permit you to position a visible cursor anywhere in your text file and make insertions or
changes easily. KED runs on the VT100 family of terminals, and K52 runs
on VT52 terminals. A virtual keypad editor, KEX, is also available for editing when running under the XM monitor. You use KEX exactly as you
would KED; see the PDP-11 Keypad Editor User’s Guide for information on
how to use KED.

A subset of the keypad editor, the single-line editor, allows you to edit command lines and input as you type them by using the PF1-PF4 and cursor
control keys. The single-line editor is described in Section 4.3 of this
manual.

1.2.3.2 General Purpose —RT-11 provides several utility programs that help
you perform maintenance on your system and aid in program development.
You can obtain the services these programs provide by using the keyboard
commands described in this manual, or you can call these programs directly
as described in the RT—11 System Utilities Manual. Each of these programs
is described in greater detail in separate chapters of the RT—11 System
Utilities Manual.

The binary file comparison program (BINCOM) compares two binary files
and lists the differences between them. It can provide a quick way of telling
whether two data files, or output from two versions of a program, are identical. BINCOM can also produce a file that can be run as an indirect command
file for the save image patch program (SIPP) to patch one file in the binary
comparison so it matches the other.
The backup utility program (BUP) provides an easy way to back up and
restore large files and entire volumes onto several smaller volumes.
Version 5.1, July 1984

1-6

System Components

The directory listing program (DIR) performs a wide range of directory listing operations and can list details about certain files, such as file names, file
types, and block sizes.
The dump utility program (DUMP) prints all or any part of a file or volume
in octal words, octal bytes, ASCII characters, or Radix—50 characters.
The general device utility program (DUP) performs general device tasks
such as initializing devices, scanning for bad blocks, duplicating device contents, and reorganizing files on the device. It operates only on RT-11 filestructured devices.

The file exchange utility program (FILEX) transfers files between RT-11
and the following systems, on DECtape and disks: DECsystem—10, PDP-11
RSTS/E, and DOS BATCH. FILEX also transfers files between RT—11 and
other systems on diskettes that use IBM interchange format.
The volume formatting utility program (FORMAT) provides a way to format
RKO05, RK06, and RKO07 disks, and diskettes. It also provides disk verification by writing patterns and reading them on each block of your volume.

The logical disk subsetting handler (LD) allows you to assign files as logical
disks. Thereafter you can treat them as if they were separate RT-11
directory-structured volumes.
The librarian utility (LIBR) lets you create and maintain libraries of functions and routines. These routines can be stored on a random-access device
in library files where the linker can reference them and add them to a program’s memory image file. You can create object libraries and macro libraries. The latter are used by the MACRO assembler.
The linker utility (LINK) converts a collection of object modules from compiled or assembled programs and subroutines into a memory image file that
RT-11 can load and execute. The linker also allows you to:

® Search library files for subroutines that you specify
® Produce a load map that lists the assigned absolute addresses
® Set up a disk or memory resident overlay structure for large programs
@ Create a symbol table file that lists all the global symbols used in the
program

® Produce files suitable for execution as foreground jobs

The peripheral interchange program (PIP) is the RT-11 file maintenance
program. It transfers files between devices that are part of the RT-11 system, and it deletes and renames files as well.
The resource program (RESORC) lists information about your system
configuration and system generation special features.

System Components

1-7

The SETUP program lets you set hardware characteristics for your terminal, printer, or system clock. Although developed specifically for the Professional 300 series processors, SETUP can be used to set some hardware
characteristics for other devices supported by RT-11. A complete description of SETUP is located in Chapter 7.
The source file comparison program (SRCCOM) performs a character-bycharacter comparison of two ASCII text files. You can request that the
differences be listed in an output file or directly on the line printer or
terminal to make sure that edits to a file have been performed correctly.
SRCCOM can also produce a file that is suitable as input to SLP, the source
file patching utility.
i

1.2.3.3 System Jobs — RT-11 provides five utilities that you can run as
foreground jobs or, if you have enabled system job support through the

system generation process, as system jobs: the Error Logger, the Queue
Package, the Transparent Spooler Package (SPOOL), the Virtual Terminal

Communication Package (VI'COM), and KEX. The Error Logger, the

Queue Package, SPOOL, and VICOM run under both the FB and XM
monitors; KEX runs only under the XM monitor. (The Error Logger also
runs under the SJ monitor.) System jobs are described in more detail in
the RT-11 System Utilities Manual.
The Error Logger keeps a statistical record of all I/O transfers for each
device it supports. The Error Logger also records memory parity and cache
errors as they occur. With the Error Logger enabled on your system volume, you can collect data on each I/O and memory error that occurs. The
Error Logger consists of three programs, a data file, and a handler. This
utility is a special feature; that is, you must enable it through the system
generation process.

The Queue Package transfers files to any valid non-file-structured RT-11
device. The Queue Package is particularly useful for queuing files for subsequent printing, although output is not restricted to the line printer. Unlike the Error Logger, the Queue Package is not a special feature available
only through system generation.
The transparent spooler (SPOOL) transfers files to the line printer. Unlike
the QUEUE package, SPOOL does not require complete files, but rather
accepts output as it becomes available. A software customization can be
applied to direct SPOOL’s output to any valid non-file-structured RT-11
device. SPOOL is not a special feature and does not require system generation to be available.
The virtual terminal communication package (VTCOM) lets your computer
act as a terminal when connected to a host computer. When running
VTCOM, you can access facilities on an RT-11, RSX-11, RTEM-11, or
VAX/VMS host system and perform ASCII file transfers between the host
computer and your stand-alone system. Binary files can be transferred if
the host system is running RTEM-11 with the TRANSF program installed.
VTCOM is not a special feature and does not require system generation to
be available.
Version 5.1, July 1984

1-8

System Components

1.2.3.4

Debugging and Patching — These utility programs help you to find,

diagnose, and correct programming errors. Debugging and patching pro-

grams are described in more detail in the RT—11 System Utilities Manual.

The on-line debugging technique (ODT) is an abjec:t module that you link
with your program. It helps you debug assembled and linked programs.
ODT can:
¢ Print and change the contents of specified locations
¢ Execute all or part of the object program

¢ Search the object program for specific bit patterns
The object module patch program (PAT) performs minor modifications to
files in object format (output files produced by the FORTRAN compiler or
the MACRO assembler). It can merge several object files into one.
The save image patch program (SIPP) can update programs that were

linked with the RT-11 V4 or V5 linker. It can also update non-overlaid
programs from versions V3 and V3B of RT-11.

The source language patch program (SLP) provides an easy way to make
changes to source files. SLP can use an indirect command file created by a
SRCCOM option to make two source files match.
1.2.3.5 BATCH — The batch program (BATCH, described in Appendix A of
the RT—11 System Utilities Manual) is a complete job-control language that
allows RT-11 to operate unattended.

1.2.4

Language Processors

RT-11 supports a number of language processors to help you develop pro-

grams. The Introduction to RT-11 contains detailed information on the

differences between assembly language and high-level languages. It also

offers guidelines for choosing a programming language and provides demonstrations of MACRO, BASIC, and FORTRAN programs.
The MACRO-11 assembler (see Chapter 12 of the

RT—11 System Utilities

Manual) is part of the RT-11 system. Because MACRO-11 is an assembly

language, it gives you control over the system at the most elementary
However, it may be more difficult to learn and use than any of the highlevel languages.
The high-level languages RT-11 supports are:

* DIBOL
e BASIC
e FORTRAN IV

1.3

RT-11 Software Documentation
The software documentation for the RT-11 system consists of the manuals
that document the RT-11 system itself, plus the documentation for any
optional languages or application packages you may have.

System Components

1-9

The Guide to

RT-11 Documentation summarizes the manuals in the RT-11

documentation set. Reading this guide gives you a general picture of the
topics covered in the manuals.
To find more specific information, refer to the RT—-11 Master Index. This is
a compilation of the indexes of the other RT-11 manuals. It pinpoints references by manual name and page number. It also indicates which reference
is the primary source of information on the specific topic.

1.4

System Services
The RT-11 system provides many services that allow you, for example, to
copy and delete files, to examine locations in memory, to run programs, and
to open and close files. Some of these services are available to you at the
console terminal; others are available to application programs.

1.4.1

Keyboard Monitor Commands

The keyboard monitor commands are a set of English—language commands
that permit you to perform common system operations. When you type a
keyboard monitor command at the console terminal, RT-11 responds by
performing the operation you specify. The monitor then prompts you for

another command and waits for you to respond. Chapter 4 describes the
syntax and function of each of the keyboard monitor commands.
The set of keyboard monitor commands consists of two types of commands:

simple and complex. Simple, or direct, commands are executed directly by
the keyboard monitor, and no other software components are required. The
complete set of simple commands is as follows:
ABORT
ASSIGN
Base
CLOSE
DATE

DEASSIGN
Deposit
Examine
FRUN
GET

GT
INSTALL
LOAD
R
REENTER

REMOVE
RESET
RESUME
RUN
SAVE

SET
SRUN
START
SUSPEND
TIME

UNLOAD

Complex, or expanded, commands are not executed directly by the keyboard monitor. Instead, a utility program or language processor is called by
the keyboard monitor to perform the operation. The keyboard monitor expands the command line piece by piece and translates the command into an
R command followed by a program name and one or more lines of file
specifications and options for that program. When the operation completes,
control returns to the keyboard monitor and it prompts you for another
command. The set of complex commands is as follows:
BACKUP
BOOT

DIBOL
DIFFERENCES

EXECUTE
FORMAT

LINK
MACRO

SHOW
SQUEEZE

COMPILE
COPY
CREATE
DELETE

DIRECTORY
DISMOUNT
DUMP
EDIT

FORTRAN
HELP
INITIALIZE
LIBRARY

MOUNT
PRINT
PROTECT
RENAME

TYPE
UNPROTECT

Version 5.1, July 1984

1-10

System Components

1.4.2

System Programs

Another way to obtain services from RT-11 is to invoke system utility
programs or language processors yourself, instead of invoking them indirectly through the keyboard monitor commands. By using this method you
can obtain all the services provided by the complex keyboard monitor commands. (The only way to obtain the services provided by the simple keyboard monitor commands is to issue those commands.) A limited number
of utility program operations are not implemented through the keyboard
monitor. In addition, you must run some of the utility programs directly in
order to use them at all. Programs in this group include the patching and
debugging utilities.

To invoke a system utility program or a language processor, you run the
appropriate program and specify a combination of file specifications and
single alphabetic character options. The RT-11 System Utilities Manual
describes how to use the system utility programs and MACRO language
processor directly. Chapter 1 describes the syntax you use to interact with
the utility programs and language processors. Chapters 2 through 23 contain detailed information on each program.

You can also invoke the system utility programs and language processors
by using CCL, the concise command language. Section 4.7 of this manual
describes how to use CCL.

1.4.3 The Relationship Between Complex Commands and System
Programs

It is possible to obtain the services provided by the complex keyboard monitor commands by directly running the appropriate system programs. Appendix A of this manual provides a complete list of the keyboard monitor
commands and the system programs they invoke.

The following examples demonstrate two ways of copying a listing of a
program from the default disk, where it is stored as MYFILET, to the line
printer. The keyboard monitor command to do this is as follows:
JPRINT MYFILEGRE

The commands to invoke a utility program, specify the same operation, and
return control to the monitor are:
*L . P:=DK:MYFILE.LSTEE

#CTRLc
)

(CTRL/C echoes on your terminal as "C.)

So, although there are two ways of obtaining the same services, bear in
mind that the syntax for using the utility programs and language processors is quite different from the keyboard monitor command syntax. Since
the keyboard commands are easy to remember and easy to use, it makes
sense to use them whenever possible.
Version 5.1, July 1984

System Components

1-11

1.4.4

The System Macro Library and Programmed Requests

The system macro library, called SYSMAC.SML, contains macro definitions that you can use in MACRO assembly language programs and in
device handlers. You reference the definitions in your assembly language
program, and they expand into lines of source code. These macros can save

you considerable programming effort. See the

RT—11 Programmer’s Refer-

ence Manual.

1.4.5

SYSLIB FORTRAN-Callable Subprograms

All of the system subroutine library (SYSLIB) routines are written in

MACRO. They give the FORTRAN programmer many of the services that
the MACRO programmer can obtain from the system macro library (SYSMAC.SML). These subprograms can be called from a program written in
any programming language, as long as the program conforms to the FORTRAN calling conventions described in the RT—-11 Programmer’s Reference

Manual.

1-12

System Components

Chapter 2
Program Development

RT-11 provides several program development aids, including editors, an

assembler, a linker, a debugger, and a librarian. High-level languages, such
as FORTRAN or BASIC, are optionally available.
This chapter describes briefly the program development cycle, which is illus-

trated in Figure 2—1. The Introduction to RT—11 contains a much more thorough treatment of program development including demonstrations of
MACRO, BASIC, and FORTRAN programs.

2.1

Using an Editor (EDIT, KED, KEX, or K52)
You use an editor to create and modify textual material. Text may be the
statements in a source program, or any other ASCII data such as reports or
memos. In this respect, using an editor is analogous to using a typewriter;
you sit at a keyboard and type text. However, the functions of an editor far
exceed those of a typewriter. Once a text file has been created, you can
modify, relocate, replace, merge, or delete text, all by means of editing commands. When you are satisfied with your text, you can save it on a storage
device where it is available for later reference.

2.2

Usingthe Assembler (MACRO)
Program development does not stop with the creation of a source program.

Since the computer cannot understand any language but machine language,
you need an intermediary program to convert source code into instructions
the computer can execute. This is the function of an assembler.
The assembler accepts alphanumeric representations of PDP-11 instruc-

tions, and produces as output the appropriate machine code, called object
code. You can direct the assembler to generate a listing of both the source
code and binary output, as well as cross-reference listings that are helpful
during the program debugging process. In addition, the assembler is capable
of detecting certain common coding errors and issuing appropriate
warnings.

The assembler’s output is called object output because it is composed of

object, or binary, code. On PDP-11 systems, the object output is called a
module; it contains your source program in the binary language that, when
linked, is executable by a PDP-11 computer.

2-1

2.3

Using the Linker (LINK)
Source programs may be complete and functional by themselves; however,
some programs are written in such a way that they must be used with other
programs or modules to form a complete and logical flow of instructions. For
this reason, the object code produced by the assembler must be relocatable.
That is, assignment of memory locations must be deferred until the code is
combined with all other necessary object modules. The linker performs this
function.
The linker combines and relocates separately assembled object programs.
The output produced by the linker is a load module, the final linked program
that is ready for execution. You can, if you wish, request a load map that displays all addresses assigned by the linker.

2.4

Using the Debugger (ODT or VDT)
You can rarely create a program that does not contain at least one error,
either in the logic of the program or in its coding. You may discover errors
while you are editing the program, or the assembler may find errors during
the assembly process and inform you by means of error codes. The linker
may also catch certain errors and issue appropriate messages. Often, however, it is not until execution that you discover your program is not working
properly. Programming errors may be extremely difficult to find, and for this
reason, a debugging tool, ODT (described in Chapter 20 of the RT—11 System
Utilities Manual), is available to help you find the cause of errors.
ODT allows you to control the execution of your program interactively. With
it, you can examine the contents of individual locations, search for specific
bit patterns, set designated stopping points during execution, change the
contents of locations, continue execution, and test the results — all without
editing and reassembling the program.
Note that it is advisable to test new programs by having them process data
for which results are already known. If the results do not match, you know

you have errors.

Use VDT, the Virtual Debugging Technique, to debug virtual and privileged
jobs in an XM system. You can also use VDT to debug jobs in FB, SJ, and
multiterminal systems. See the RT-11 Software Suppport Manual for more
information on using VDT.

2.5

Using the Librarian (LIBR)
When programs are written and debugged, they are useful to other programmers. Often, routines that are common to many programs, such as input and

output routines, or sections of code that are used over and over again, are
more useful if they are placed in a library where they can be retrieved by
any interested user. A librarian provides such a service by allowing creation
of a library file. Once created, the library can be expanded or updated, or a
directory of its contents can be listed.
Version 5.1, July 1984

2-2

Program Development

2.6

Using a High-Level Language (FORTRAN, BASIC, or DIBOL)
High-level languages simplify your work by providing an alternative
means, other than assembly language, of writing a source program.
Generally, high-level languages are easy to learn. A single command causes
the computer to perform many machine-language instructions. You do not
need to know about the mechanics of the computer to use a high-level language. In addition, some high-level languages, such as BASIC, offer a special immediate mode that allows you to solve equations and formulas as
though you were using a calculator. You can concentrate on solving the
problem rather than on using the system.
Figure 2-1:

( START )

Program Development Cycle

Y
SOURCE

LOAD

FILE

IMAGE

WITH

RUN

ASSEMBLE

COMPILE

ERRORS?

OBJECT

LINK

ooT

RESULTS

oK?

( DONE

)

FILE

Program Development

2-3

Part I
System Communication

The monitor is the center of RT-11 system communications; it provides
access to system and user programs, performs input and output functions,
and controls foreground and background jobs.
You communicate with the monitor through keyboard commands and programmed requests. You can use the keyboard commands (described in
Chapter 4) to load and run programs, start or restart programs at specific
addresses, modify the contents of memory, and assign and deassign alternate device names, to name only a few of the functions.
Programmed requests (described in detail in the RT—11 Programmer’s
Reference Manual) are instructions that request the monitor to perform
services. These instructions allow assembly language programs to use the
monitor features. A running program communicates with the monitor
through programmed requests. FORTRAN programs have access to programmed requests through the system subroutine library (SYSLIB).
Programmed requests can, for example, manipulate files, perform input and

output, and suspend and resume program operations.

Of the three chapters in this part, Chapter 3 describes system conventions
and contains information that helps you get started with RT-11. Chapter 4
introduces the keyboard monitor commands, which are your means of controlling the RT—11 system, and Chapter 5 describes how to use IND, the
indirect control file processor.

Chapter 3

System Conventions

This chapter contains information that will help you start using the RT-11
system. It describes:
® Start-up procedure
® Data formats
® Physical device names
® ['ile names and file types
® Device structures

Special function keys
® Foreground/background terminal I/O
® Type-ahead feature
Before you operate the RT-11 system, you should be familiar with the spe-

cial character commands, file naming procedures, and other conventions
that are standard for the system. These conventions are described in this

chapter.

3.1

Start-Up Procedure
For information on building the system and loading the monitor, refer to the

Introduction to RT-11, to your RT—11 Automatic Installation Booklet, or to
the RT-11 Installation Guide.
When the system is built and you load the monitor into memory, the monitor
prints one of the following identification messages on the terminal:
RT-115J

(8)

Uxx.nn

RT-11FB

(5)

Uxxenn

RT-11XM

(85)

Uxx.nn

The message indicates which monitor (SJ, FB, or XM) is loaded; you specify
that monitor when you install the system. The (S) indicates that the monitor
was created through the system generation process. (The S designation does
not appear with distributed monitors.)
Vxx represents the version and release number of the monitor — for example, V05 for Version 5. nn represents the submission number and the patch
level — for example, 01B for number 1.

3-1

As soon as a monitor takes control of the system, it attempts to execute keyboard monitor commands from a start-up indirect command file called
STARTS.COM for the SJ monitor, STARTF.COM for the FB monitor, or
STARTX.COM for the XM monitor. You can place commands in this startup file that will perform routine tasks, such as assigning logical device
names to physical devices or setting the current date. If the monitor does not
find the appropriate file, it issues a warning message. (Note that if you do
not want the start-up indirect command file feature, you can disable it during system generation or you can apply a software customization.)

After executing the start-up indirect command file, the system prints its
prompt (.) indicating that it is ready to accept commands. Make sure the sys-

tem device is write-enabled.

3.2

Data Formats
The RT—11 system stores data in two formats: ASCII and binary. The binary
data can be organized in many formats, including object, memory image,
relocatable image, and load image.
Files in ASCII format conform to the American Standard Code for
Information Interchange, in which each character is represented by a 7-bit

code. Files in ASCII format include program source files created by the editor and BASIC, listing and map files created by various system programs,

and data files consisting of alphanumeric characters.
Files in binary object format consist of data and PDP-11 machine language

code. Object files are the files the assembler or language compiler produces;
they are used as input to the linker.
The linker can produce runnable files in one of three formats: memory image
format (.SAV), relocatable image format ((REL), or load image format

(.LDA).
A memory image (.SAV) file is a picture of what memory looks like after you

load a program. The file itself requires the same number of disk blocks as the
corresponding number of 256-word memory blocks. A memory image file
does not require relocation and can run in a single-job environment, as a
background program under the FB or XM monitor, or as a foreground virtual job under the XM monitor.
A relocatable image (.REL) file is linked as though its bottom address were
1000, but relocation information is included with its memory image. When

you call the program with the FRUN or SRUN command, the file is relocated as it is loaded into memory. A relocatable image file can run in a foreground environment.
You can produce a load image (.LDA) file for compatibility with the PDP-11

paper tape system. The absolute binary loader loads this file. You can load
and execute load image files in stand-alone environments without relocating
them.

3-2

System Conventions

3.3

Device Names
When you request services from the monitor, you must sometimes specify a
peripheral device. You can specify these devices by means of standard twocharacter device names. Table 3—1 lists each name and its related device. If
you do not specify a unit number (n) for devices with more than one unit, the
system assumes unit 0.

Table 3-1: Permanent Device Names
I/0 Device

Permanent Name
DDn:

TUS8 DECtape II (n is an integer in the range 0-3)

DK:

Default logical storage device for all files (DK: is initially the
same as SY:)

DKn:

Specified unit of same device type as DK

DLn:

RLO1, RLO2 disk (n is an integer in the range 0-3)

DMn:

RKO06, RK07 disk (n is an integer in the range 0-7)

DUn:

MSCP disk or diskette: RC25 fixed/removable, RD51 and RD52

DW:

RD50/RD51 disk (Professional 300 series)

DXn:

RX01 diskette (n is an integer in the range 0-3)

DYn:

RX02 diskette (n is an integer in the range 0-3)

DZ:

RX50 diskette (Professional 300 series)

EL:

SJ monitor Error Logger pseudodevice

LD:

Logical disk subsetting handler pseudodevice

LP:

Line printer

LS:

fixed, and RA8O fixed Winchester disk; RX50 diskette (n is an
integer in the range 0-7)

Serial line printer (hard-copy output device connected to a DL11
interface)

MMn:

TJU16/TU45 (industry-compatible) magtape (n is an integer in
the range 0-7)

MQ:

Message queue pseudodevice for interjob communication under
FB and XM monitors.

MSn:

TK25/TS11/TS05/TU80 magtape (n is an integer in the range 0-7)

MTn:

TM11/TMA11/TS03/TE16 (industry-compatible) magtape (n is an
integer in the range 0-7)

NL:

Null pseudodevice

PI:

Professional 300 series interface handler

RKn:

RKO05 disk cartridge drive (n is an integer in the range 0-7)

SP:

Transparent spooler handler

SY:

Default logical system device; device and unit from which system
is bootstrapped

SYn:

Specified unit of same device type as SY:

Console terminal keyboard and display (hard-copy or video screen)
VM:

Extended memory handler

XC:

Communication port handler (Professional 300 series)

XL:

Communication port handler
Version 5.1, July 1984

System Conventions

3-3

In addition to using the permanent names shown in Table 3-1, you can

assign logical names to devices. A logical name takes precedence over a
physical name and thus provides device independence. With this feature,
you do not have to rewrite a program that is coded to use a specific device if

the device becomes unavailable. You associate logical names with physical
devices by using the ASSIGN command. This command is described in
Section 4.6.

3.4

File Names and File Types
You can reference files symbolically by using a name of one to six alphanu-

meric characters (followed, optionally, by a period and a file type of up to
three alphanumeric characters). No spaces or tabs are allowed in the file
name or file type.
The file type generally indicates the format or contents of a file. It is good
practice to conform to the standard file types for RT—11. If you do not specify

a file type for an input or output file, most system programs use or assign an
appropriate default file type. Table 3-2 lists the standard file types used in

RT-11.

Table 3-2: Standard File Types
File Type

Meaning

ANS

SYSGEN answer file

.BAC

Compiled BASIC program

.BAD

Files with bad (unreadable) blocks; you can assign this file type whenever
bad areas occur on a device. The .BAD file type makes the file permanent in
that area, preventing other files from using it and consequently becoming
unreadable

.BAK

Editor backup file

.BAS

BASIC source file (BASIC input)

BAT

BATCH command file

.BLD

Command file to execute SYSGEN monitor ((MON) and device handler
(.DEV) build files

.BUP

Backup utility program output file

.CND

SYSGEN conditional file

.COM

EMON indirect command file, IND indirect control file, or SIPP command
e

.CTL

BATCH control file generated by BATCH compiler

.CTT

BATCH internal temporary file

.DAT

BASIC, FORTRAN, or IND data file
(Continued on next page)

Version 5.1, July 1984

3—4

System Conventions

Table 3-2: Standard File Types (Cont.)
Meaning

File Type
.DBL

DIBOL source file

DDF

DIBOL data file

DEV

SYSGEN device handler build file

DIF

BINCOM or SRCCOM differences file

.DIR

Directory listing file

.DMP

DUMP output file

.DSK

Logical disk file (for use with LD handler)

FOR

FORTRAN IV source file (FORTRAN input)

LDA

Absolute binary (load image) file (optional linker output)

LOG

BATCH log file

.LST

Listing file (MACRO, FORTRAN, LIBR, or DIBOL output)

.MAC

MACRO source file (LIBR, MACRO or SRCCOM input)

MAP

Map file (linker output)

.MLB

MACRO library output file

.MON

SYSGEN monitor build file

.OBJ

Relocatable binary file (MACRO or FORTRAN output, linker input, LIBR
input and output)

.REL

Foreground job relocatable image (linker output, default for monitor FRUN
and SRUN commands)

SAV

Memory image; default for R, RUN, SAVE, and GET keyboard monitor

commands; default for linker output

SLP

SLP command file

SML

System MACRO library

SOU

Temporary source file generated by BATCH

STB

?y?:bwl table file in object format containing the symbols produced during
ink

SYG

Monitor and handler filtfas resulting from system generation

SYS

Monitor files and handlers

TBL

Monitor device table section created during SYSGEN

TMP

ERROUT temporary file

TXT

Text file

WRK

Temporary work file

System Conventions

3-5

3.5

Device Structures
RT-11 devices are categorized according to two characteristics: their method
of processing information and their physical structure.

All RT-11 devices are either randomly accessed or sequentially accessed.

Random-access devices allow the system to process blocks of data in a random order; that is, independent of the data’s physical location on the device
or its location relative to any other information. All disks, diskettes,
DECtape, and DECtape II fall into this category. Random-access devices are
sometimes called block-replaceable devices, because you can manipulate
(rewrite) individual data blocks without affecting other data blocks on the

device.

Sequential-access devices require sequential processing of data; the order in
which the system processes the data must be the same as the physical order
of the data. RT-11 sequential devices are magtape, line printer, and terminal.
File-structured devices are those devices that allow the system to store data

under assigned file names. RT—11 devices that are file-structured include all
disk, diskette, DECtape II, and magtape devices. Non-file-structured

devices, however,
do not store files; they contain a single logical collection of

data. These devices, which include the line printer and terminal, are gener- ally used for reading and listing information.
File-structured devices that have a standard RT-11 directory at the beginning are called RT-11 directory-structured devices. A device directory con-

sists of a series of directory segments that contain the names, lengths, and
dates of the files on that device. The system updates the directory each time
a program moves, changes, adds, or deletes a file on the device. (The RT-11

Software Support Manual contains a more detailed explanation of a device
directory.) RT-11 directory-structured devices include all disks and

DECtapes. Some devices that do not have the standard RT-11 directory
structure, such as magtape, store directory information at the beginning of

each file, but the system must read the device sequentially to obtain all
information about all files.

Table 3-3 shows the relationships among devices, access methods, and
structures.

3.6

Special Function Keys
Special function keys and keyboard commands let you communicate with
the RT-11 monitor to allocate system resources, manipulate memory
images, start programs, and use foreground/background services.

The special functions of certain terminal keys you need for communication

with the keyboard monitor are explained in Table 3—4. In an FB system, the
keyboard monitor runs as a background job when no other background job is

running.

3—6

System Conventions

Table 3-3: Device Structures
Structure

Device

File

= Non-file

RT-directory Non-RT-directory

Random Access
Disk, diskette

DECtape I1

Sequential Access
Magtape

Line printer

Terminal

Enter CTRL commands by holding the CTRL key down while typing the
appropriate letter.

Table 3-4: Special Function Keys
Keys

Function

CTRL/A

Valid only after you type the monitor GT ON command and use the display.
CTRL/A, a command that does not echo on the terminal, pages output if you
use it after CTRL/S. The system permits console output to resume until the
screen is completely filled; text currently displayed scrolls upward off the
screen. CTRL/A has no effect if the keyboard monitor command GT ON is not
in effect.

CTRL/B

Causes the system to direct all keyboard input to the background job. The FB
monitor echoes B> on the terminal. The system takes at least one line of output from the background job. The foreground or system job, however, has priority, so the system returns control to the foreground or system job when it has
output. In multiterminal systems, CTRL/B has no effect if the background console is not shared. CTRL/B directs all typed input to the background job until a
CTRL/F redirects input to the foreground job or a CTRL/X directs input to a
system job. CTRL/B has no effect when used under an SJ monitor or when a
SET TT NOFB command is in effect.

CTRL/C

Terminates program execution and returns control to the keyboard monitor.
CTRL/C echoes AC on the terminal. You must type two CTRL/Cs to terminate
execution unless the program to be terminated is waiting for terminal input or
is using the TT handler for input. In these cases, one CTRL/C terminates
execution. Under the FB monitor, the job that is currently receiving input is
the job that is stopped (determined by the most recently typed command,
CTRL/F or CTRL/B). To make sure that the command is directed to the proper
job, type CTRL/B, CTRL/F, or CTRL/X before typing CTRL/C.

CTRL/E

Causes all terminal output to appear on the graphics display screen and the
console terminal simultaneously. CTRL/E is valid after you type the monitor
GT ON command and use the display. The command does not echo on the terminal. A second CTRL/E disables console terminal output. CTRL/E has no
effect if GT ON is not in effect.

(Continued on next page)

System Conventions

3-7

Table 3—4: Special Function Keys (Cont.)
Keys
CTRL/F

Function
Causes the system to direct all keyboard input to the foreground job and take
all output from the foreground job. The FB monitor echoes F> on the terminal
unless output is already coming from the foreground job. If no foreground job
exists, the monitor prints an error message (F?). Otherwise, control remains
with the foreground job until redirected to the background job (with CTRL/B),

or redirected to a system job (with CTRL/X), or until the foreground job terminates. In multiterminal systems, CTRL/F has no effect if the foreground con-

sole is not shared. CTRL/F has no effect when used under an SJ monitor, or
when a SET TT NOFB command is in effect.

CTRL/O

Suppresses terminal output while continuing program execution. CTRL/O echoes as A0 on the terminal. RT-11 reenables terminal output when one of the
following occurs:
1. You type a second CTRL/O.

2. You return control to the monitor by typing CTRL/C or by issuing the
EXIT request in your program.
3. The running program issues a .RCTRLO or MTRCTO programmed request

(see the RT-11 Programmer’s Reference Manual). RT-11 system programs
reset CTRL/O to the echoing state each time you enter a new command
string.

When you are using CTRL/O under the SJ monitor, the system may print an
extraneous character after the monitor echoes the CTRL/O and a carriage

return/line feed.

CTRL/Q

Resumes printing characters on the terminal from the point printing previously stopped because of a CTRL/S. CTRL/Q echoes but has no effect under a
multiterminal SJ or FB monitor if a SET TT NOPAGE command is in effect.

CTRL/R

Redisplays the current line if you are using the CTRL/W single-line editor.
This function is useful to verify a line you have edited, to verify that your
screen is displaying information correctly, or if another job prints a message on
your screen while you are typing input to the console.

CTRL/S

Temporarily suspends output to the terminal until you type a CTRL/Q. CTRL/

S does not echo. Under a multiterminal SJ or FB monitor, CTRL/S is not intercepted by the monitor if TT NOPAGE is in effect.

CTRL/U

Cancels the current input line (all characters back to, but not including, the
most recent line feed, CTRL/C, or CTRL/Z). When SL is running, CTRL/U

deletes the current input line. When SL is not running, CTRL/U echoes as AU

followed by a carrage return/line feed at the terminal.

CTRL/W

Redisplays the current line if you are using the single-line editor. This func-

tion is useful to verify a line that you have edited, to verify that your screen is
displaying information correctly, or if another job prints a message on your
screen while you are typing input to the console.

CTRL/X

Causes the system to prompt you for a job name, then to direct all keyboard
input to the system job you specify. When you type CTRL/X, the system prints

Job? at the terminal. Specify the system job name (or logical job name) of the

system job to which you want to direct input. Specify B or F to direct keyboard
input to the background or foreground job, respectively. If the specified job does

(Continued on next page)

3-8

System Conventions

Table 3—4: Special Function Keys (Cont.)
Function

Keys

not exist, the system prints a question mark (?); otherwise it prints the system
job name at the terminal. Control remains with the specified system job until
the job terminates, or control is redirected to the background job (with CTRL/
B), the foreground job (with CTRL/F), or another system job (with CTRL/X).
CTRL/X has no effect when used with a monitor that does not have system job
support or when a SET TT NOFB commmand is in effect.

CTRL/Z

Terminates input when used with the terminal device handler (TT). It echoes

as AZ on the terminal. The CTRL/Z itself does not appear in the input buffer.
Because CTRL/Z is a line terminator, you cannot delete it, once typed. If TT is
not being used, CTRL/Z has no effect.

DELETE
or
RUBOUT

3.7

Deletes the last character from the current line and echoes a backslash plus
the character deleted. Each succeeding DELETE deletes and echoes another
character. The system prints an enclosing backslash when you type a key other
than DELETE. This erasure is performed from right to left up to the beginning
of the current line. If you are using a video display terminal and you have
issued the SET TT SCOPE command, DELETE erases characters with a backspace, space, backspace sequence. Your corrections appear on the screen; pressing the DELETE key does not enclose them with backslash characters.

Foreground/Background Terminal I/O
Console input and output under the FB monitor are independent functions;
therefore, you can type input to one job while another job prints output. You
may be in the process of typing input to one job when the system is ready to
print output from another job on the terminal. In this case, the job that is
ready to print interrupts you and prints the message on the terminal; the
system does not redirect input control to this job, however, unless you type a
CTRL/B, CTRL/F, or CTRL/X, whichever applies. If you type input to one job
while another has output control, the system suppresses the echo of the
input until the job accepting input gains output control; at this point, all
accumulated input echoes.

If the two jobs are ready to print output at the same time, the job with the
higher job number has priority. For example, in an FB system, the system
prints output from the foreground job until it encounters a line feed. Each
time the system prints a line feed, it checks to see if the foreground job (or, in
a monitor with system job support, any higher priority job) has output; if so,
the system gives control to the highest priority job that is ready to print.

When the foreground job terminates, control reverts automatically to the
background job, or to the highest priority job if you are running system jobs.

System Conventions

3-9

3.8

Type-Ahead Feature
The monitor has a type-ahead feature that lets you enter terminal input
while a program is executing. For example:
+DIRECTORY/PRINTER

DATE

While the first command line is executing, you can type the second line.

Although the system echoes the characters you type immediately after you

type them, the system stores this terminal input in a buffer and uses it when
the system completes the first operation.

If type-ahead input exceeds the input buffer capacity (usually 134 charac-

ters), the terminal bell rings and the system accepts no characters until a

program uses part of the type-ahead buffer, or until you delete character

Any input typed after the terminal bell rings is lost. Type-ahead is particu-

larly useful when you specify multiple command lines to system programs.

Note that after you bootstrap any RT—11 monitor, the system does not recognize the type-ahead feature until either the keyboard prompting character
(.) prints or the start-up indirect command file begins executing. If you type

ahead prior to this, the system either ignores or truncates your input.

If you type a single CTRL/C while the system is in this mode, the system
puts CTRL/C into the buffer. The program currently executing exits when it
makes a terminal input request. Typing a double CTRL/C returns control to

the monitor immediately. If you terminate a job by typing two CTRL/Cs, the
system discards any unprocessed type-ahead input.

3—-10

System Conventions

Chapter 4

Keyboard Commands
Keyboard commands allow you to communicate with the RT—11 system. You
enter keyboard commands at the terminal in response to the keyboard monitor dot (.), and the operating system invokes the appropriate system programs to service these commands.

This chapter uses some symbolic conventions to describe the monitor command language. The preface to this manual contains a detailed list of the
symbolic conventions used throughout the manual. You should familiarize
yourself with the symbols and their meaning before reading this chapter.

4.1

Command Syntax
The system accepts commands as either a complete string containing all
information necessary to execute a command, or a partial string. In the latter case the system prompts you to supply the rest of the information.
Terminate each command with a carriage return.

The general syntax for a command is:

command[/option...] input-filespec|/option...]

output-filespec[/option...]
or

command|/option...|

promptl? input-filespec[/option...}
prompt2? output-filespec|/option...]
where:

command

is the command name

/option

represents a command qualifier that specifies the

exact action to be taken. Any option you supply
immediately following the command applies to the
entire command string

promptl prompt2

represents the keyboard monitor prompt for more

information. The keyboard monitor prints an

appropriate prompt only if you omit input and/or
output file or device specifications in the initial
command line. (Note that not all keyboard monitor
commands print prompts, and some print more
than two prompts.)

input-filespec

represents the file on which the action is to be

taken
/option

represents a file qualifier that specifies more
detailed information about that particular file or

action to be taken. Some of the command and file
options are mutually exclusive. You should avoid

using combinations of options that give contradictory instructions to the system. For example:
+DELETE/QUERY/NOQUERY

output-filespec

TEST.LST

represents the file that is to receive the results of

the operation
/option

represents a file qualifier that specifies more
detailed information about that particular file or
action to be taken

You can use a hyphen the end of a line to continue the command to the next
line. However, the entire command line, including wildcard file names and

types and default devices, must include no more than 80 characters. For
example, the following keyboard command copies three input files to the

output file DK:OUTFIL.TXT.
+COPY/CONCATENATE

MYFIL3.TXT

MYFIL1.TXTsRKO:MYFILZ,THT -

DK:OQUTFIL,TXT

In the alphabetical listing of keyboard monitor commands in Section 4.5,

each command begins with a graphic presentation of the syntax involved

(see Figure 4-1 for an illustration of a typical command). These presentations provide a ready-reference list of the options that the commands accept,
as well as information that makes the commands easier to use. The following list describes the conventions used.

1. Capital letters represent command names or options, which you must
type as shown. (Abbreviations are discussed later in this section.)
2. Lowercase letters represent arguments or variables, for which you must
supply values. For options that accept numeric arguments, the system
interprets the values as decimal, unless otherwise stated. Some values,

usually memory addresses, are interpreted as octal: these cases are noted
in the accompanying text.

3. Square brackets ([ ]) enclose options; you can include the item enclosed in
the brackets or you can omit it, as you choose. If a vertical list of items is
enclosed in square brackets, you can combine the options that appear in

the list. However, an option set off from the others by blank lines (see
/BOOT and /DEVICE in Figure 4-1) indicates that you cannot combine
that option with any other option in the list.

4. Braces ({}) enclose options that are mutually exclusive. You can choose
only one option from a group of options that appear in braces.

4-2

Keyboard Commands

5. It is conventional to place command options (those qualifiers that apply
to the entire command line) immediately after the command. However, it
is also acceptable to specify a command option after a file specification.
File option s (those that qualify a particular file specification) must

appear in the command line directly after the file to which they apply.
The graphic representation of each command shows which options are file
qualifiers, and whether they must follow input or output file specifications.

A line such as [NOJQUERY represents two mutually exclusive options:
QUERY and NOQUERY.

Underlining indicates default options, that is, the option that the system
uses if you do not specify any choice of action.
Sample Command Syntax

Figure 4-1:

—

”{

SP)

/BOOT[:dev]

coPY

/WAIT

/DEVICE

input-filespecs

DOS
QWNER:[nnn,nnnj
ANTERCHANGE
fi
TOPS

GP)

output-filespec

INTERCHANGE[
:size]

/ALLOCATE :size
|

FILE

| 'DOS

/START:n

/END:n

WAIT

ISTART:n

{

/ASCHI

/BINARY

/POSITION:n

IMAGE

/PACKED
/BEFORE[:date]
/SINCE[:date]
/DATE[:date]

/NEWFILES

/CONCATENATE
/DELETE

/EXCLUDE
NGNORE

/INFORMATION
/[NOJLOG
/MULTIVOLUME
/PREDELETE
/[NOJPROTECTION
/[NOJQUERY

/[NO]REPLACE

/RETAIN
/SETDATE[ date]
/SLOWLY

/SYSTEM
NERIFY
/WAIT

A filespec represents a specific file and the device on which it is stored. Its
syntax is:

dev:filnam.typ
where:
dev:

represents either a logical device name or a physical device

name, which is a two- or three-character name from Table
3-1

filnam

represents the one- to six-character alphanumeric name of
the file

Keyboard Commands

4-3

typ

represents the zero- to three-character alphanumeric file
type, some of which are listed in Table 3-2

There are two ways to indicate the device on which a file is stored. You can
explicitly type the device name in the file specification:
DX1:TEST.LST

You can omit the device name:
TEST.LST

If you omit the device name, the system assumes that the file is stored on the

default device, DK:.

4.1.1

Factoring File Specifications

If you want to specify several files on the same device, you can use factoring.
That is, you can enclose multiple file names in parentheses, as in the following example:
DYO: (TEST +A+B)

LSBT

The file specification shown above has the same meaning as and is easier to

use than the next:

DYO:TEST.LET+DYO:ALST+DYO:BLST

When you use factoring the device name outside the parentheses applies to

each file specification inside the parentheses. Without factoring, the system

interprets each file you specify to reside on DK: (the default device) unless

you explicitly specify another device name.

Factoring is useful for complicated command lines. It is a general method of
string replacement that you can use in many different situations. The fol-

lowing example shows how a command line expands after factoring. Note
that the /SYSTEM option appears only once in the resulting output line.

Original command line:
+COPY

DX:FIL(4+2:3).8Y5/SYSTEM

RK1:

Resulting command line (after factoring):
+COPY

DX:FIL.SYSDX:FILZ.8YS5DX:FIL3.5Y5/5YSTEM

RK1:

NOTE

The command string that results from the expansion of the
line you enter must not exceed 80 characters. If you use six-

character file names and you also use factoring, it is recommended that you specify only five files in a command line.

Keyboard Commands

4.1.2

File Type Specification

If you omit the file type in a file specification, the system assumes a default,
depending on which command you issue. The MACRO command, for example, assumes a file type of .MAC for the input file specification, and the
PRINT command assumes .LST. Some commands (such as COPY) do not
assume a particular file type, and may assume a wildcard default (see
Section 4.2). If you need to specify a file that has no file type in a command
that assumes a default file type, type a period after the file name. For example, to run the file called TEST, type:
+RUN

TEST.,

In this example, if you omit the period after the file name, the system
assumes a .SAV file type and tries to execute a file called TEST.SAV.

4.1.3

Abbreviating Keyboard Commands

Although the keyboard monitor commands are all English-language words
and therefore easy to use, it can become tedious to type words like
CROSSREFERENCE and ALLOCATE frequently. You can use as abbreviations the minimum number of characters that are needed to make the command or option unique. Table A-1 in Appendix A lists the minimum abbreviations for the commands and options.
An easy way to abbreviate the commands, and one that is always correct, is
to use the first four characters or the first six characters if the qualifier
starts with NO. For example:
CONCATENATE can be shortened to CONC

NOCONCATENATE can be shortened to

NOCONC

The system prints an error message if you use an abbreviation that is not
unique. For example, typing the following command produces an error,
because C could mean COPY or COMPILE.
+C

TEST.LST

4.1.4

Keyboard Prompts

The prompting form of the command may be easier for you to learn if you are
a new user. If you type a command followed by a carriage return, the system
prompts you for an input file specification:
+COPY/CONCATENATE
From?

You should enter the input file specification and a carriage return:
From

DA1:(TEST.LST,TESTA.LSET)

Keyboard Commands

4-5

The system prompts you for an output file specification:
To

You should enter the output file specification and a carriage return:
To

DXZ2:TEST.LST

The command now executes.
The system continues to prompt for an input and output file specification
until you provide them. If you respond to a prompt by entering only a carriage return, the prompt prints again.

You can combine the normal form of a command with the prompting form,
~as this example shows:
+COPY

ABC
. LST

DEF.LST

The system always prompts you for information if any required part of the
command is missing.

You can also enter just an option in response to a prompt. The two following
examples are equivalent.
+COPRPY

From

GHI.MAC/NOLOG

GHI.BAK

L COPY

4.2

From

/NOLOG

From

GHI.MAC

GHI.BAK

Wildcards
Some commands accept wildcards (% and *) in place of the file name, file
type, or characters in the file name or file type. The system ignores the con-

tents of the wildcard field and selects all the files that match the remaining

fields.

An asterisk (*) can replace a file name:
* . MAC

The system selects all files on device DK: that have a .MAC file type, regard-

less of their name.

An asterisk (*) can replace a file type:
TEST
. #

4-6

Keyboard Commands

The system selects all files on device DK: that are named TEST, regardless
of their file type.
An asterisk (*) can replace both a file name and a file type:
#* g W

The system selects all files on device DK:.

An embedded asterisk (*) can replace any number of characters in the input
file name or file type:
AX*B
. MAC

The system selects all files on device DK: with a file type of MAC whose file

names start with A and end with B. For example, AB, AXB, AXYB, etc.,
would be selected.
The percentage symbol (%) is always considered to be an embedded wildcard. It can replace a single character in the input file name or file type:
AZLB +MAC

The system selects all files on device DK: with a file type of MAC whose file
names are three characters long, start with A, and end with B. For example,
AXB, AYB, AZB, etc., would be selected.
Table 4—1 lists commands that support wildcards.

Table 4-1: Commands Supporting Wildcards

Command
COPY

Input File

Output File

Specification

DIFFERENCES

DIRECTORY

DELETE

PROTECT

HELP

TYPE

UNPROTECT

RENAME

Keyboard Commands

4-7

Note that wildcards work differently with the DIFFERENCES command.
See the description of the DIFFERENCES command in Section 4.5 of this
manual for more information.
For commands that support wildcards the system has a special way of inter-

preting the file specifications you type. You can omit certain parts of the

input and output specifications, and the system assumes an asterisk (*) for
the omitted item. Table 4-2 shows the defaults that the system assumes for

the input and output specifications of the valid commands.
Table 4-2: Wildcard Defaults
Default

Command
COPY, RENAME
DIRECTORY

Input

Output

* K

DK:*.*

PRINT, TYPE

* LST

DELETE, PROTECT,
UNPROTECT

filnam.*

For example, if you need to copy all the files called MYPROG from DK: to
DX1:, use this command:
+COPY/QUERY

MYPROG

DX1:

The system interprets this command to mean:
+COPY/QUERY

DK:MYPROG.*

DX1:%.,%

The system copies all the files called MYPROG, regardless of their file type,

to device DX1: and gives them the same names.

If you need a directory listing of all the files on device DK:, type the following command:

v DIRECTORY

The system interprets this command to mean:
+DIRECTORY

DK:¥*,*

To list on the printer all the files on device DK: that have a .LST file type,
use this command:
+PRINT

DK:

The system interprets this command to mean:
+PRINT

4-8

DK:*.LST

Keyboard Commands

To delete all the files on device DK: called MYPROG, regardless of their file

type, use this command:
DELETE/NOQUERY

MYPROG

The system interprets this to mean:
DELETE/NOQUERY

DK:MYPROG.,*

You can use the SET WILDCARDS EXPLICIT command (described in
Section 4.5) to change the way the system interprets these commands.

4.3

Editing Command Lines and Terminal Input
The single-line editor (SL) allows you to change a monitor command line,
CSI string, or other lines you type at the console. Without using SL, there
are only two ways that you can change a line: you can use the delete key to
erase characters to the left of the cursor one at a time; or you can type CTRL/
U, which erases the entire line, and retype the line. With SL, you can edit
parts of a line by moving the cursor to different positions and inserting or
deleting characters.

You can use SL only if you have a VT100-compatible video terminal; SL is
not available for hard-copy terminals. SL is always available at keyboard
monitor level and for background programs. Refer to the RT-11 Software

Support Manual for information on how to use SL with foreground
programs.

To use SL, you must perform the following steps:

1. Make sure the SL handler is installed. If it is not, type:
INSTALL

If the INSTALL command fails, make sure the characteristics of the SL

handler match those of the current monitor by typing:
.SET

SYSGEN

Then type INSTALL SL once again.

2. Allow SL to determine what type of terminal you are using, or tell SL
what type of terminal you are using. It is recommended that you allow SL
to determine your terminal type, by typing:
LSET

ASK

If instead you want to specify your terminal type to SL, type:
LSET

UTxxx

where xxx represents your terminal type.

Keyboard Commands

4-9

You must then enable SL by typing:
+SET SL ON

Then, you can use SL functions as you type on the terminal. When you

finish using SL, disable SL by typing the following command:
. SET SL OFF

SLMIN.SYS

SLMIN.SYS is a smaller SL handler for use under SJ/FB monitors. The
HELP frame has been removed. SLMIN.SYS cannot be used with the
VT52 terminal. To use SLMIN.SYS:
« RENAME SL.8YS SLMAX,5YS
« RENAME SLMIN.SYS SL.SYS
« REMOVE 5L

« INSTALL SL

After you have enabled SL, you can edit console input. If you want the
ability to edit responses to prompts printed by the system utilities, you

must issue the .SET SL TTYIN command.

See the SET command in Section 4.5 for more information on these com-

mands.

The following sections describe the functions you can perform with SL.
Table 4-3 shows the function keys that SL uses. You must perform all edits

before you type a line terminator, such as a carriage return (D). Also, you
can use the up-arrow < 1 > function to recall the last line.

In the examples, the position of the cursor is indicated by an underline
character.

4.3.1

The GOLD Key (PF1)

The GOLD or PF1 key on a VT100 performs no function by itself. This key
is always used in combination with another function key to direct SL to

perform an alternate function.

If you type a function key without first typing the PF1 key, the regular

function is performed. However, if you type the PF1 key and immediately
you type a function key, an alternate function is performed. For example, if

you type only <, the cursor moves one position to the left. However, if
you
type the PF1 key immediately followed by < (PF1 <), the cursor moves
to

the beginning of the line.

4.3.2

The Help Key (PF2)

The help or PF2 key provides error message and function key information.

If you press the PF2 key once, SL prints an error message for the last error

that occurred. If you press the PF2 key a second time, SL functions keys are
displayed. Return to the original screen by typing any key except PF2. Note
that any key you type will then perform its single-line editor function.

To help you learn to use SL, you can lock the display of the SL functions
keys on the upper half of your screen by typing the command SET SL
Version 5.1, July 1984

4-10

Keyboard Commands

LEARN, then pressing the PF2 key twice (PF2 PF2). You can then use the
lower half of your screen to type and edit command lines. To unlock the
display, type the command SET SL NOLEARN.
Table 4-3:

Single-Line Ediwr Function Keys
Function

Key(s)

GOLD prefix key; used with other function keys to perform

PF1

alternate function operations

PF2

SL help key

Move cursor one character to left

—>

Move cursor one character to right

PF1 «

Move cursor to beginning of line

PF1 —

Move cursor to end of line

Reproduce last line terminated with a carriage return

PF1 1

Reproduce line before last

PF4

Delete line from cursor to end of line

PF1 PF4

Restore last line deleted

DELETE

Delete one character to left of cursor

PF1 DELETE

Restore last character deleted

BACKSPACE
Py,
MMWW(
i

Trade positions of two characters; character under cursor

switched with character to right

PF1 BACKSPACE

Trade positions of two characters; character under cursor

CTRL/U

Deleted all characters to left of cursor

PF1 CTRL/U

Restore last line deleted

CTRL/R

Redisplay current line

CTRL/W

Redisplay current line

PF1 RETURN

Truncate and execute command line

RETURN

Execute entire command line

4.3.3

switched with character to left

Moving the Cursor

Use the < key to move the cursor one or more characters to the left. For
example:
.COPY

DLO:A.MAC

DL1:B.MSC_ « =~

produces:
.COPY

DLO:A.MAC DL1:B.M5C

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-11

Use the - key to move the cursor one or more characters to the right. In the

example below, the cursor is moved from the T in DELETE to the X in DXO0:
by typing the - key four times.
iDELElE

DXO2FILE,THT

produces:
+DELETE

DMO:FILE.TXT

Instead of moving the cursor to the left one character at a time, you can use
the PF1 and « keys to move the cursor directly to the beginning of a line. For

example:
+RENAME

DYO:FILE.TXT

DY1:FILE.BAKFEr
)«

DYO:FILE.TXT

DY1:FILE.BAK

produces:
+RENAME

Similarly, you can use the PF1 and - keys to move the cursor directly to the
end of a line. In the example below, the cursor is moved from the 1 of

FIL1.MAC to the end of the command line by typing the PF1 key followed by
the - key.
+COPY

FIL1.MACFIL2.MACFIL3.MAC

FILES.MACH
1

produces:
+COPY

FIL1.MAC,FILZ.MACFIL3,MAC

4.3.4

Reproduce Last Command Executed

FILES.MAC

Use the up-arrow (1) key in response to the monitor prompt (.) or CSI

prompt (*) to reproduce the last command that you terminated with a car-

riage return.

Lines that contain only a carriage return are not stored as the last line.
Therefore, if the last line you typed contains only a carriage return, the previous line is reproduced.

After you reproduce the line, you can edit it and execute the new command.
The cursor is placed at the end of the line reproduced on the screen.
For example:
+LINK

RTN1RTNZ2)RTN3sRTN4 +PROGRM/EXECUTE /MAPEE

+ BED
+ TLINK

4-12

RTN1 +RTNZ »RTN3sRTN4 yPROGRM/EXECUTE/MAP_

Keyboard Commands

435 Delete Line from Cursor to End of Line

the end of a line. In
Use the PF4 key to delete characters from the cursor toDY1:
and all characthe example below, typing the PF4 key deletes the D of
ters that immediately follow it in the command line.
,RENAME FIL1.,MAC,,FILZ.MAC DY1:MYFILE.MACEE
produces:

,RENAME FIL1.MACFILZ.MAC

4.3.6

Restore Last Line Deleted

Use the PF1 key with the PF4 key, or the PF'1 key with CTRL/U, to restore
all the characters that you have just deleted on a line. In the example below,
the characters after the D in DY1: are deleted by typing the PF4 key, then
restored by typing the PF1 and PF4 keys.

,RENAME FIL1.MAC:FILZ.MAC DY1:MYFILE.MACE
produces:
,RENAME FIL1.MAC,FILZ2.MAC D
Then:

produces:

,RENAME FIL1.MACsFIL2.MAC DY1:MYFILE.MAC

Typing GEDERL) instead of

produces the same result.

4.3.7 Delete One Character to Left of Cursor

Use the DELETE key to delete the character to the left of the cursor. For
example:
,COPY

A.MAC B.MAC_(QD

produces:
.COPY A.MAC B.MA

You can use the PF1 key with the DELETE key to restore the last character
that you deleted.

Keyboard Commands

4-13

4.3.8

Switch Positions of Two Characters

Use the BACKSPACE key to switch the positi

ons of the character under the

cursor and the character to the right of the cursor
same character in its new position. For examp

le:

+COPY

MYFIL1.5aY

. The cursor remains on the

MYFILZ2.:SVABACKSPACE)

produces:
+COPY

MYFIL1.SAY

MYFILZ,5AV

You can use the PF1 and BACKSPACE keys
to switch the positions of the
character under the cursor and the character
to the left of the cursor. For
example:
‘
+CPOY

MYFIL1.S5AY

MYFILZ.,SAUE)EACKSTACE)

produces:
+COPY

MYFIL1.5AY

MYFILZ2,S5AY

This function is useful to restore the positi
ons of two characters you
switched with the BACKSPACE key.

4.3.9

Delete All Characters to Left of Cursor

Use the CTRL/U command to delete all characters
from the character to the
left of the cursor to the monitor prompt (.) or
CSI prompt (*). In the example
below, all characters to the left of the colon
(:) in DLO: are deleted by typing
CTRL/U.
+RENAME

DLO:MAIN,MAC

DL1:5UB1.,MACCHAIU)

produces:
+2MAIN.MAC

DL1:SUB1.MAC

You can type FFi) CTRL/ U) to restore the deleted chara

cters.

4.3.10

Truncate and Execute Command Line

Use the PF1 key and the RETURN key to trunc

cursor and execute the remaining line.

ate the command line at the

In the example below, a command

line has been edited and characters have been

(PEDRED to truncate the command line begin

command.
+COPY

4-14

DXO:%,MAC

Keyboard Commands

inserted before DL1:. Type

ning with DL1: and execute the

DX1:%,BAK

DL1:FILES.,BAKFrED

executes:

,COPY DXO:%.MAC DX1:%,BAK

4.3.11

Execute Entire Command Line

Use the RETURN key to execute the entire command line, regardless of the
position of the cursor. In the example below, the original command line did
not include the file LIB2.0OBJ. The cursor has been moved back to the
middle of the line and LIB2.0BJ has been inserted after LIB1.OBJ. To
execute the entire command line, type RETURN.
+LINK MYPROG,LIB1.0BJ»LIB2.,0BJ5UB1 +SUBZ2RD
executes:
,LINK MYPROG,:LIB1.0BJsLIB2.0BJ:SUB1,SUBZ

4.3.12

Redisplay Current Line

Both CTRL/R and CTRL/W redisplay the current line you are typing or the
last line you typed. This function is useful if you are not sure that your
screen is displaying information accurately, or if another job prints a message on your screen while you are typing input. When you type either
CTRL/R or CTRL/W, the interrupting messages and data are removed and
the line you are typing (or the line you just typed) is redisplayed, unaltered.

4.3.13

Redisplay Line Before Last Line Executed

When you press the PF1 (GOLD) key, then the 1 (UPARROW) key, SL
reproduces the line before the last line terminated with a carriage return.
This extends the functionality of the 7 (UPARROW) key by letting you
recall an older line for editing.

In the following example, pressing the

1 recalls the next-to-last com-

mand line for editing:

.RENAME FILE1.MAC FILE1.BAK®RED
+ (RET

,ASSIGN DLO: LOG:RED
.(GOlD T RENAME FILE1.MAC FILEL1.BAK

4.4 Defining Commands with Distributed UCL.SAV
The user command linkage (UCL) feature lets you define your own commands. You can write your own UCL.SAV command parser or you can use
the distributed file UCL.SAV.

4.4.1

Command Definition Syntax

To define a command using the distributed UCL.SAV, type a command line
with the following syntax:

newcommand

:==

oldcommand[/options][\oldcommand\oldcommand..\\]
Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-15

where:
newcommand

represents the name of the new command you want
to define. The command name can include up to 16

letters and numbers.

are the command definition symbols that separate

the new command from old commands.

oldcommand

represents an RT-11 keyboard command or a command you have previously defined with UCL.SAV.

To include several old commands in a command definition, separate the old commands with a back-

slash character (\), and terminate the string of old
commands with a double backslash (\\). You can include up to four old commands in a command definition. You cannot call indirect files (@filename) in a
command

definition.

The

keyboard

monitor

for expansion as part of its command processing.

/options

represents any valid options for that command.

You can type command definitions in response to the keyboard monitor
prompt (.), or you can include them in indirect files. Command definitions
are stored in the file UCL.DAT on the system disk SY:. As UCL processes
and stores command definitions, it prints:
PUCL-I-Processindg...

PUCL~I~Successfully entered new command

After defining a command, you can use it like any keyboard command in
response to the keyboard monitor prompt (.) or in indirect files.

The following defines the new command FILES as the RT-11 keyboard
command DIRECTORY including the /VOLUMEID and /COLUMNS:1 options.
+FILES :== DIRECTORY/VOLUME /COLUMNS : 16
PUCL-I-Processing...
PUCL-I-Successfully

entered new command

The

FILES command processes the RT-11 keyboard command
DIRECTORY/VOLUMEID/COLUMNS:1 to produce a single-column directory listing including volume identification and owner name.

The next example defines the command WHEN using two RT-11 keyboard
commands, DATE and TIME.
+WHEN

:== DATE\NTIME\\GD

4.4.2

Defining Command Abbreviations

When you define a command using UCL.SAV, you can choose a command
abbreviation by inserting an asterisk (*) in the command name. Characters

in the command name that appear before the asterisk constitute the shortest valid abbreviation for the command.
Version 5.1, July 1984

4-16

Keyboard Commands

For example, the following defines the new command STATUS, whose
shortest valid abbreviation is STAT.

,STAT*US :== SHOW ALL\SHOW QUEUEN\GEED

4.4.3 Displaying Command Definitions

To display a list of UCL commands, run UCL.SAV. The following shows a
sample list of UCL commands.
, UCLEED

User Command Landuage (UCL)

FILES

WHEN
STAT*US

:== DIRECTORY/VOLUMEID/COLUMNS:1
== DATENTIMENN
:== SHOW ALLASHOW QUEUENN

4.4.4 Adding Information from a Command Line

Some information that you include in a command, such as a file specification, can change with each command. You plan for this kind of information
change by including the append symbol (") in command definitions. The
append symbol (*) lets you tell UCL where to add information given at
command time.

For example, the following command definition includes two append sym-

bols where additional information is required.

JKILL :== UNPROTECT “\DELETE/NOQUERY "\WHEN\\GED

When the KILL command is issued, any text following the word KILL is
inserted in place of the append symbols when the command is processed.
Suppose you typed this command:
%
., *RED
JKILL DZ1:

The command would perform the following operations:

UNPROTECT DZ1:%, %

Unprotect all files on DZ1:

DELETE/NOQUERY DZ1:

Delete, without confirmation, all files on

WHEN

Show date and time. Since no append symbol

DZ1:.

follows the WHEN command, no additional
information is included.

4.4.5 Redefining Commands

To redefine a UCL command, type a new command definition. UCL
prompts:
.
PUCL-I~-Processing.

Command already exists. Rerplace: Are vou sure?

Type Y to replace the old definition with the new one. Type N to keep the
old definition and ignore the new one.

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-16.1

4.4.6

Deleting Commands

To delete a UCL command, type the command and the definiti

on symbols

==, and press the RETURN key. For example, the followi

command WHEN.
+WHEN

ng deletes the

& = =T

UCL prompts:
PUCL-I-Processindg,s
.
Delete commands? Are vou sure?

Type Y to delete the command or N to save the command.

4.5

Indirect Files
You can group together, as a file, a collection of keyboard command

you want to execute sequentially. This collection is called an

s that

indirect com-

mand file, or indirect file. Indirect files are best suited to perform tasks

require a significant amount of computer time and that do not require

supervision or intervention. Any series of commands that you are

that
your

likely to

type often can also run easily as an indirect file.

The indirect file concept is similar to BATCH processing. Althoug
h indirect
files lack some of the capabilities of BATCH, they are easier to use,
use the
same commands as normal operations, and generally require less

memory

overhead than the BATCH processor. (RT-11 BATCH is describe

pendix A of the

RT-11 System Utilities Manual.)

d in Ap-

Another type of file contains a collection of keyboard commands and
IND
directives that you want to execute. This collection is called an
indirect
control file, or control file. Chapter 5 of this manual describes IND
directives and explains how to create and execute indirect control files.

This section describes how to create indirect command files and

execute them.

4.5.1

how to

Creating Indirect Files

Create an indirect file by using the EDIT/CREATE command describe

d in

Section 4.6. It is conventional to use a .COM file type for an indirect file,

but you can choose any file name that you wish. Structure the lines
of text
to look like keyboard input, placing one command on each line
of the file
and terminating each line with a carriage return. Do
not include the

prompt character (.) in the line.

Any keyboard monitor command you can type at the terminal can
also be
included in an indirect file. The following file, for example, prints
the date
and time, and creates backup copies of all FORTRAN source
files:
DATE
TIME
COPY *.,FOR *,BAK

Control returns to the monitor at the console terminal after this
indirect
file executes.
Version 5.1, July 1984

4-16.2

Keyboard Commands

In addition to using the keyboard monitor commands, you can also run one
of the RT-11 system utility programs in an indirect file. In this case, structure your input to conform to the Command String Interpreter (CSI) syntax
described in Chapter 1 of the RT-11 System Utilities Manual. Do not include the CSI asterisk (*) in any line that provides input or output to a
utility program.

The following file starts the directory system utility program and lists the

directory of two devices on the line printer.
RDIR

LP:=CTO:/C:3
LP:=DT1:/C:3
“C

Note that the last command line is "C. This is not the standard CTRL/C
sequence you enter by holding down the CTRL key and typing a C. Rather,
it is a character sequence that consists of two separate characters: a circumflex (%) followed by a C. This sequence represents CTRL/C in indirect files.
This sequence terminates the directory program so that control returns to
the monitor when the indirect file finishes executing. Otherwise, the directory program would be left waiting for input from the console terminal
when the indirect file finishes executing.

Remember to terminate the last command line with a carriage return, as

you would any other line.

NOTE

If you have a minimal configuration (16K) or a very large
indirect command file, use frequent "C sequences in your indirect files. When the system processes an indirect file, it
first places each line in a special memory buffer. This memory

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-16.3

buffer must expand to accommodate each line in an indirect
file, and if there are too many lines before the system reaches
a AC, the processor’s memory area may become filled. Placing
a ~C every 10 or so lines avoids this problem.

Some commands normally require a response from you as they execute.e The
and
INITIALIZE command, for example, prints the Are you sure? messag The
s.
execute
it
waits for you to type Y and a carriage return before
DELETE command also requests confirmation from you before it deletes a
file if you use wildcards in the file specification.

There are three ways to control interaction with the executing command.
it.
One way is to use the /NOQUERY option on each command that allows
This option suppresses the confirmation messages entirely when you use the
command in an indirect file.

Another method of interacting applies to a command like DELETE: Thisa
command can have a variable number of confirmation queries, if you usecawildcard in the file specification. (If you use no wildcards in the file specifi ed
tion, the DELETE command does not query before deleting the specifi
file(s).) This type of command accepts your responses directly from the terminal and allows you to make a decision before deleting each file. However,

in this case the indirect file cannot operate unattended.
There is yet another way to deal with commands that require a response

from you. Both the INITIALIZE and LINK commands have options thats
cause the system to prompt you for data. This section describes two methodis
of responding to these prompts, where more than just a Y response
required.

The INITIALIZE command with the /VOLUMEID option permits you to
specify a volume ID and owner name for a device. You can place your
responses in the indirect file, as this example shows:
INITIALIZE/NOQUERY/VOLUMEID DT:

TAPEB
PAYROLL

You can change the indirect file so that the prompts appear on the console
terminal and you can type your responses there:
INITIALIZE/NOQUERY/VOLUMEID DT:
h

The ~C informs the system that the responses are to be entered at the terminal. Execution of the indirect file pauses until you enter the responses.

Similarly, the LINK command lets you specify some data either in thensindirect file or from the console terminal. The following example contai the
response to the TRANSFER prompt.
LINK/TRANSFER MYPROG,ODT
0.0DT

Keyboard Commands

4-17

You can specify the same information intera

ctively, as this example shows:

LINK/TRANSFER
W

MYPROG,0ODT

The AC informs the system that the respo

nse to the prompt is to be entered
at the terminal. Execution of the indirect
file pauses until you enter your

response.

NOTE
You cannot place in indirect files responses
to prompts that
result in destruction of data. For example,
you cannot use the

INITTIALIZE command followed by a Y on the
following line
in an indirect file. Commands like INITI
ALIZE require

responses that you must enter at the termin

al. (You can avoid

the need for a response by using the/ NOQUER

Y option.)

You can specify overlays to the LINK command
by either of these two methods. The following indirect file links an overla
id program consisting of a root
module and four overlay modules that reside in
two overlay segments.
LINK/PROMPT

ROOT

OUR1/0:1
OVRZ2/0:1
OUR3/0:2

OUR4/0:2/7/

Note in the above example that two slashes

You can also enter all or part of the overlay

this example shows:
LINK/PROMPT
OVR1/0:1
i

(//) terminate the module list.

information interactively, as

ROOT

(’:‘:

The AC informs the system that more overl
ay information is to be entered
from the terminal. Execution of the indirect
file pauses when the system

requires the information. Respond to
the asterisk prompt by entering the
overlay information. Terminate the last
overlay line with two slashes (//).
Execution of the indirect file then proceeds.
Chapter 11 of the RT-11 System

Utilities Manual describes the LINK progr
am and explains how to use

overlays.

If you need to link more than six modules,

you can specify the extra modules
on the next line in the indirect file, as this examp
le shows:
LINK/PROMPT

FIL7FILB//

FIL1+FILZFIL3+FILAFILS,FILG

Or, you can enter the extra modules from the
LINK/PROMPT

4-18

Keyboard Commands

terminal:

FIL1FILZsFIL3sFILAFILS FILB

Execution of the indirect file pauses until you enter the remaining module
names. Remember to follow the last name with two slashes (//).

You can include comments in an indirect file to help you document your

work. These comments do not print on the console terminal when the indirect file executes. You begin each line of comment with an exclamation point
(). The system ignores any characters it finds between the exclamation
point and the end of the current line. The following example shows an indirect file that contains comments.
FPINDIRECT

FILE

DATE
TIME
RENAME *,MAC *.BAK

BPROCES
DIRECTORY

FPRINT DATE
FPRINT TIME
ISAVE +MAC FILES

ICALL ANOTHER INDIRECT FILE
'LIST DIRECTORY OF DK:

Executing Indirect Files

4.5.2

You can use indirect files to supply input to jobs running under the SJ monitor and to background jobs running under the FB or XM monitor. Indirect
files are unavailable for foregound or system jobs.

To execute an indirect file, specify a command string according to the following syntax:

@filespec

(when SET KMON NOIND is in effect)

$@filespec

(always)

or:

where:

is the command that causes KMON to execute a file as an

is the monitor command that indicates an indirect file

filespec

represents the name and file type of the indirect file, as
well as the device on which it is stored. The default file

indirect file when SET KMON IND is enabled

type is .COM

If you omit the device specification, DK: is assumed. If you specify any other
block-replaceable device, the monitor automatically loads the handler for
that device.

After you type the SET KMON IND command, the command syntax (@filespec causes IND (the Indirect Control File Processor) to execute the specified
file as an IND control file. Once SET KMON IND is in effect, you can force
KMON to execute a file as an indirect command file by typing a dollar sign
($) before the at sign (@) in the command line as follows:
$@filesrec

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-19

Use the SET KMON NOIND command to disable IND processing. See
Section 4.6 of this manual for more information on the SET KMON
INOJIND command.
Note that indirect control files are quite different from indirect command
files. Chapter 5 of this manual describes IND and indirect control files in
detail.

It is conventional to type the indirect file command directly in response to
the monitor’s prompt, as this example shows:
+@INDCT

However, you can place the indirect command anywhere in a keyboard monitor command string, as long as it is the last element in the string, not
including comments. For example:
+DELETE/NOQUERY

BINDCT!comments

This is a valid command string. The first line of the indirect file should contain the specifications of files to be deleted. In the example above, assume
the first line of the indirect file is:
*, BAK

This is the command that will actually execute:
DELETE/NOQUERY

=*,BAK

Check your indirect file carefully for errors before you execute it. When the

monitor or any program that has control of the system encounters an invalid

command line, or if an execution error of any kind occurs, that particular

line does not execute properly. Execution of the indirect file does proceed,
however, until any program that may be running relinquishes control to the

monitor. Be careful of this if you run a system utility program in an indirect

file, as this example shows:
R

PIP
|
DX1:%,%=DX0Oz%,%
DXO:
%, MAC/D
m”»fi

DXO:%,LST

If device DX1: becomes full before all the files from DXO0: are copied to it, the

second line of the indirect file does not execute completely. Execution then

passes to the next line and the system deletes all MACRO files from DXO:.

The AC returns control to the monitor, which aborts the rest of the indirect
file. This example shows that it is possible to destroy files accidentally
because of the way indirect files execute. To be safe, use only keyboard monitor commands in an indirect file. This way the monitor regains control after

Version 5.1, July 1984

4-20

Keyboard Commands

each operation and can abort the indirect file as soon as it detects an error. A
better way to perform the same operations as the indirect file shown above is
as follows:

COPY DHOzs*.% DH1:%,%
DELETE DXO:%.MAC
PRINT DXO:%,LST

You can use the SET ERROR command, described in Section 4.6, to define
the severity of error that causes an indirect file to stop executing.
Normally, as each line of an indirect file executes, it echos on the console terminal so that you can observe the progress of the job. However, you can use
the SET TT QUIET command, described in Section 4.6, to suppress this

printout. In this case, only the prompting messages, if any, print.

You can stop execution of an indirect file at any time by typing two CTRL/C

characters. Control returns to the monitor and you can enter a new com-

mand. You can also abort the indirect file by typing a single CTRL/C in
response to a query or prompt. If you use an indirect file to execute a
MACRO program, read the appropriate section in the RT-11 Programmer’s
Reference Manual to learn about certain restrictions on using the .EXIT call
with indirect files.

You can call another indirect file from within an indirect file. This procedure
is called nesting. Restrict nesting to three levels of indirect files (see the
RT-11 Installation Guide for details on selecting the indirect file nesting
depth). The following example shows two-level nesting. Assume a program-

mer types this command at the console terminal in response to the monitor’s

prompt:
WBFIRST

The file FIRST.COM contains these lines:
DATE
TIME

COPY

*.MAC

*.BAK

@SECOND
PRINT C

DIRECTORY/PRINTER DK:
DELETE/NOQUERY *.MAC

When this file executes it calls another indirect file, SECOND.COM, which
contains this line:

MACRO/CROSSREFERENCE A+B+C/LIST

When the file SECOND.COM finishes executing, control returns to
FIRST.COM, at the line following the indirect file specification
(@SECOND). FIRST.COM then prints the contents of the file C.LST on the

line printer, followed by a directory listing of device DK:. Then control
returns to the monitor at the console terminal.

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-21

4.5.3

Start-Up Indirect Files

Section 3.1 introduced the start-up indirect command files: STARTS.COM
(for SJ), STARTF.COM (for FB), and STARTX.COM (for XM). Each monitor

automatically invokes its own indirect command file when you bootstrap the
system, and you can modify these files to perform standard system configu-

rations. Since many of the system parameters are reset by a bootstrap opera-

tion (see the SET command, Section 4.6), you should use the start-up indirect files to set the system parameters you normally use.

For example, if you use the FB monitor and have a visual display console
terminal that supports hardware tabs, add the SET TT: SCOPE and SET TT:

TAB commands to the file STARTF.COM. You could also include a SET TT:

QUIET command at the beginning of STARTF.COM and a SET TT:
NOQUIET command at the end to suppress extra type-out at bootstrap time.
If you have a list of commands that you need to execute, regardless of the

monitor you bootstrap, include these commands in a separate indirect file,

such as COMMON.COM, and invoke this file from all three start-up indirect
files. The following example shows a typical STARTF.COM file.
SET

TT:

WUIET +SCOPEsCRLF

@COMMON
SET

TT:

NOQUIET

'TURN

OFF

TTY

PRINTING

'PERFORM

COMMON

'TURN

TTY

OPERATIONS

PRINTING

You can also use the start-up indirect files to run your own programs, set the
date, or do other file maintenance operations. You can use IND to run an
interactive dialog to assign devices and load handlers.

4.6

Keyboard Monitor Commands
The keyboard monitor commands are your means of communicating with
the system and controlling the monitor. This section lists the keyboard mon-

itor commands in alphabetical order. Each command description includes
the command syntax, a table of valid options, and some sample command

lines, as well as a general discussion of how to use the command.

You can type almost all the commands to any of the three monitors. The

exceptions are ABORT, FRUN, SRUN, SUSPEND, and RESUME. These
are not valid for the SJ monitor because they apply to foreground programs.

Any reference to the background program applies also to the program running under the SJ monitor. Any reference to FB operation also applies to

XM operation.

NOTE

Unless noted otherwise, all numeric values you supply to keyboard commands should be in decimal.

Version 5.1, July 1984

4-22

Keyboard Commands

If you make a mistake in a command line, or if the system cannot perform
the action you request, an error message prints on your terminal. The error
message indicates which error occurred; see the RT-11 System Message
Manual for a more complete description of the error and for the recommended action to take. The error message also indicates which system util-

ity program detected the error. For example, if your keyboard monitor command line contains a syntax error, the keyboard monitor prints an error
message. If the utility program the keyboard monitor invokes cannot execute a command, that utility prints the error message.

RT-11 permits you to remove some of the monitor commands at system
generation time. If you type a command that the system does not recognize

as a keyboard monitor command, the system checks the concise command
language (CCL) and user command linkage (UCL) tables. If the command
is not part of your system, the system prints an error message. See Section
4.7 for instructions on using CCL. Refer to Section 4.4 for more information
on UCL.

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-23

ABORT
The ABORT command, typed on the system console, aborts a foreground or

system job that has been assigned a private terminal for communication.

(See the description of the FRUN or SRUN /TERMINAL:n option in this

chapter for more information.)

ABORT

jobname

When you type the ABORT command at the system console, the foreground
or system job is immediately aborted.

You can enter the ABORT command as one line, or you can rely on the sys-

tem to prompt you. If you type ABORT followed by a carriage return, the
system prompts Jobname?.

When running under an FB or XM monitor, if your monitor does not include

system job support, use F as the jobname to abort the foreground job. If your
monitor includes system job support, type the name of the job you want
to

abort.

4-24

Keyboard Commands

ASSIGN

The ASSIGN command associates the logical name you specify with a physical device.

ASSIGN (P) | physical-device-name [ (SP) logical-device-name
logical-device-name

ents
In the command syntax illustrated above, physical-device-name repres
on
led
instal
device
the RT—11 permanent name that refers to a particular
folthat
your system. Table 3-1 contains a list of these names. (The colon
ents
repres
e
ce-nam
l-devi
logica
term
lows the device name is optional.) The
an
by
ed
follow
and
long
an alphanumeric name, from one to three characters
not
can
you
optional colon, that you assign to a particular device. Note that

followed
use spaces or tabs in the logical device name. If you type ASSIGN,follow
the
by a carriage return, the system prompts Device name?. If you l device
Logica
ts
promp
m
first device name with a carriage return, the syste
name?.

by
Assigning a logical name to a physical device simplifies programminagproallowing you to write device-independent programs. When you write and
gram, for example, you can request input from a device called INP:e the
direct output to a device called OUT:. When you are ready to executs you
program, you can assign those logical names to the physical device
a
need to use for that job. The ASSIGN command is especially helpful when
the
;
system
n
program refers to a device that is not available on a certai
ASSIGN command allows you to direct input and output to an available
device.

,
If the logical name you supply is already associated with a physical device
to
it
s
assign
the system disassociates the logical name from that device and ASSIGN
the current device. You can assign only one logical name with each different
command, but you can use several ASSIGN commands to assign
logical names to the same device. Note that BA and SY are always invalid as
logical device names.

The following command, for example, causes data that you write to device
LST: to print on the line printer.
+ASSIGN LP:

LST:

If your program attempts to access a device by using a logical name (such as
L.ST:) and you do not issue an appropriate ASSIGN command, an error 1s
reported to the program.

The following command redirects the printer output to the terminal.
+ASSIGNTT:

LP:

The command shown above illustrates how you can run a program that specifically references LP: without using a line printer.

Keyboard Commands

4-25

ASSIGN

The next command redefines the defa

ult file device.

+ASSIGNDL1:

DK:

If after executing this command you
supply a file specification in a command
and omit the device name, it now defau
lts to DL1:. Note that this does not
affect the default system device, SY:.

The last example is typical for a syst
em that uses a dual-drive diskette
device. Several users can share the
same system software on DYO: and
maintain their own data files on diske
ttes that they run in drive 1. When

you use the following command, refer
name automatically access DY1:

+ASSIGN

DY1:

ences to files without an explicit devic

DK:

Use the SHOW command to display logica

terminal.

4-26

Keyboard Commands

l device name assignments on the

The B (Base) command sets a relocation base. To obtain the address of the
location to be referenced in a subsequent Examine or Deposit command, the
system adds this relocation base to the address you specify.
B

[

address]

In the command syntax shown above, address represents an octal address
that the system uses as a base address for subsequent Examine and Deposit
commands. If the address you supply is an odd number, the system decreases
it by one to make the address even. If you do not specify an address, this command sets the base to zero.

Use the B command when using the Examine and Deposit commands to reference linked modules that you have loaded into memory with the GET command. (Note that the B command has no effect on program execution.) The
system adds the current base address to the value you supply in an Examine
or Deposit command. You can set the current base address to the address
where a particular module is loaded. Then you can use the relocatable
addresses printed in the assembler, compiler, or map listing of that module
to reference locations within the module.

The following command sets the base to 0.
. B

The next two commands both set the base to 1000.

Keyboard Commands

4-27

BACKUP
The BACKUP command backs up and restores RT—11 files

BACKUP

!E)EW!CE:I

/RESTOR E

or volumes.

input-filespec (SP) output-filespec

The BACKUP command copies the contents of a large file or

ume to a set of smaller volumes. Since you can

an entire vol-

not use the file or volume

while it is fragmented on several smaller volumes, you
should use the
BACKUP command only as a means of storing information.
The BACKUP command also performs the reverse operation

of restoring the
fragmented file or volume to its original form on a single large
volume so

you can again use the file or volume.

In the command syntax shown above, input-filespec represe

nts the data to

copy. Output-filespec represents the device or file to

receive the data. You

cannot use wildcards with the BACKUP command; when

the BACKUP command you must specify the input file

storing a file with

name and device.
The output file name is the same as the input file unless otherwi
se specified.
When copying an entire volume, the output file name is the two-lett

er device

mnemonic of the volume you are copying, unless
otherwise specified. In

either case, the default output file type is .BUP. For
assigns the name DL.BUP to the output file on the

RLO2 is copied.

+BACKUP/DEVICEDLO:

example, the system
diskettes to which the

DYO:

You can use random-access volumes as either input or

both backup and restore operations. Magtapes, however,

output volumes for

can be used only as

output volumes for a backup operation, and only
as input volumes for a
restore operation. If you use TSV05 magtapes as backup
volumes, you must
set the Extended Features Switch (switch SO on switch
pack E58) if you
want the tape to stream at 100 in/s. See Appendix A
of either the TSV05

Installation Guide or the TSV05 User’s Guide for more
ting the Extended Features Switch.

information on set-

You can use the BACKUP command to store a file or
volume only if the
input file is larger than the type of output volume you
are using unless the
output volume is magtape. Otherwise, if you use the
BACKUP command to
copy a file or volume that fits on only one of the selecte
d output volumes, an

error occurs.

When you use the BACKUP command, the system copies
input as will fit on the first output volume. When that

as much of the
volume becomes full,

the system prompts you to mount another volume in the
same drive unit. As
each output volume is filled, the system notifies you which
volume is being
created, so you can label the volumes accordingly.
The process continues
until the entire file or volume has been copied.

4-28

Keyboard Commands

BACKUP

(see the
The output volumes must be specially initialized as backup volumes
,
volume
p
backu
a
not
is
that
e
INITIALIZE command). If you mount a volum
systhe
files,
ns
is not an RT—11 block-replaceable volume, or already contai
e with
tem notifies you. You can then choose to replace that output volum
another backup volume, or you can allow the system to initialize the output
volume that is already mounted without disrupting the backup operation.
backs
When you use the BACKUP command without any option, the system in
up the specified input file to a set of volumes successively mounted ACthe
is
specified output device. In the following example, the file MYPROG.M the
that
detects
backed up to several double-density diskettes. The system
second output diskette has not been initialized as a backup volume.
BACKUP DLO:MYPROG.MAC DYO:

Mount output volume in DYO:3
2BUP-I-Creatindg volume <nz

Continue? ¥

Mount next output volume 1n DYO:3
SBUP-W-Not a backup volume DYO:

DY:/7?BUP Initializes

Continue? Y

Are vou sure? Y

"BUP-I-Bad block scan started...
?BUP-I-No bad blocks detected
PBUP-I-Creating volume <n?z

Mount next output volume in DYO:3
PBUP-I-Creating volume <n?’

Continue? Y

The following sections describe the BACKUP command options and include
command examples.

r
/DEVICE Use this option to back up an entire volume to several smalle
a set of
volumes, or use /DEVICE with /'RESTORE to restore a volume from
to sevup
d
backe
is
disk
RLO2
backup volumes. In the following example, an
output
second
eral double-density diskettes. The system detects that the
diskette has not been initialized as a backup volume.
BACKUP/DEVICE DLO: DYO:DL.BUP

Mount outeput volume in DYO:3
2BUP-I-Creating volume <nz

Continue? Y

Mount next output volume iIin DY¥O:3
"BUP-W-Not a bacKup volume DY O

DY:/7?BUP Initialize’s

Continue? Y

Are vou sureTM Y

..
SBUP-I-Bad blocK scan started.
2BUP-I-No bad blocks detected
2BUP-I-Creatingd volume <n>z

Mount next output volume in DYO:3%
2BUP-I-Creating volume <n>

Continue? Y

you have
/RESTORE This option restores to its original state a file
backed up using the BACKUP command. Use /DEVICE with /RESTORE to
restore an entire volume.

m uses the
When restoring a file, if you specify no input file name the syste
.BUP. If
is
type
file
name of the file on the volume you specify. The default
you specify no output file, the system uses the input file name and type.
Keyboard Commands

4-29

BACKUP

The system prompts you to mount each
volume of the set that contains the
full volume or file, and copies the conte
nts of each volume to the volume you

specify. If you mount the input volumes
in the wrong order, or if you mount a
volume that contains the wrong file,
the system notifies you and reprompts

you to mount the correct volume.

finished the restore operation.

The system also notifies you when

it has

The following command restores the
volume DL: from several RX02 diskettes to a single RL02 disk.
+BACKUP/DEVICE/RESTORE

4-30

Keyboard Commands

DYO:DL,BUP

DL1:

Note:

The BASIC command no longer exists.

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-31

BOOT
The BOOT command directs a new monitor to take control of the system. It

can also read into memory a new copy of the monitor that is currently controlling the system.

BOOT | /FOREIGN | (SP)

filespec

/WAIT

In the command syntax illustrated above, filespec represents the device or

monitor file to be bootstrapped. If you omit filespec, the system prompts you
with Device or file?. The BOOT command can perform either of two oper-

ations: a hardware bootstrap of a specific device, or a direct bootstrap of a
particular monitor file without using the bootstrap blocks on the device.

When you bootstrap a volume, make sure that the appropriate device handler is present on that volume.
To perform a hardware bootstrap, specify only a device name in the command line. The following supported devices are valid for this operation:

DDO0:-DD1:

DXO0:-DX1:

DK:

DZ0:-DZ1:

DLO0:-DL3:
DMO:-DM7:
DS0:-DS7:
DW:

DYO0:-DY1:
DUO0:-DUT7:

RKO:-RK7:
SY:

NOTE

The following unsupported devices are also valid for the
BOOT command:

DPO:-DPT7:
DTO0:-DT7:
PDO:-PD1:

RF:
You can also boot any of the above storage volumes by specifying its logical

name, if assigned (see the ASSIGN command). The hardware bootstrap
operation gives control of the system to the monitor whose bootstrap is

written

the

device.

(You

can

change

this

monitor

COPY/BOOT command.) This example bootstraps the SJ
RT11SJ, whose bootstrap information is written on device DK:.

using

the

monitor,

+BOOT DK«

RT-1154

VO5.00

To bootstrap a particular monitor file, specify that file name and the device
on which it is stored, if necessary, in the command line. SY: is the default
device, and .SYS is the default file type.

Version 5.1, July 1984

4-32

Keyboard Commands

BOOT

SJ and FB moniYou can use the BOOT command to alternate between the
you do not have
tors. When you use the BOOT command to change monitors
lose a few secmay
er,
to reenter the date and time. The system clock, howev
or on device
monit
onds during a reboot. The next example bootstraps the FB
SY:.

+BOOT RT11FB

RT-11FB V05.00

NOTE

If you are running a foreground or system job that is sending
I/O to the system volume, using the BOOT command may
cause your system to hang. You should terminate such a job in
the foreground before using the BOOT command.

or a non-RT-11
/FOREIGN Use this option to boot a pre-version 4 volume The
/FOREIGN
system. You may not specify a file name with /FOREIGN.
option does not preserve the date or time.

, or if you
/WAIT This option is useful if you have a single-disk systemoccupi
ed by
want to bootstrap a different volume in the drive unit currently
m initiates the
your system volume. When you use this option, the systethe
volume you
mount
to
BOOT procedure but then pauses and waits for you
want to bootstrap. When the system pauses, it prints Mount input volume in

<device>: Continue? at the terminal, where <device> represents the device
rap,
into which you mount the volume. Mount the volume you want to bootst
.
return
ge
carria
a
then type Y or any string beginning with Y followed by
operathe
Type N or any string beginning with N, or two CTRL/Cs, to abort se causes
tion and return control to the original monitor. Any other respon
the message to repeat. Make sure DUP is on the system volume when you
use the /WAIT option.

The following sample command line boots an RKO05 disk:
LBOOT/WAIT

RKO:

Mount input volume 1in RKO=*3s Continue? Y

Keyboard Commands

4-33

CLOSE
The CLOSE command closes and makes

currently open in the background job.

permanent all output files that are

The CLOSE command accepts no options

or arguments.

You can use the CLOSE command to make
tentative open files permanent;
otherwise, they do not appear in a norm
al directory listing and the space
associated with the files is available for
reuse. The CLOSE command is particularly useful after you type a CTRL/C
to abort a background job. You can
also use it after an unexpected program
termination to preserve any new
files that were being used by the terminated
program. The CLOSE command
has no effect on a foreground Job and
will not make permanent any files
opened on magnetic tape.
The CLOSE command does not work if your
program defines new channels
(with the .CDFN programmed reque
st). Because CTRL/C or .EXIT reset
s|
channel definitions, the CLOSE command
has no effect on channels it does

not recognize.

The following example shows how the CLOS

files permanent.
+R

PROG

+CLOSE

4-34

Keyboard Commands

E command makes temporary

COMPILE
The COMPILE command invokes the appropriate language processor to
assemble or compile the files you specify.

flespec

ILIST[:fllespec]

COMPILE

[/LIBRARY]

size
/ALLOCATE

fllespec]

!A!lm[:atm

/[NOJOBJECT]

( /DIBOL

~ /ALPHABETIZE

/BUFFERING
/ICROSSREFERENCE
/[NOJLINENUMBERS

/ONDEBUG
/PAGE:n
/TABLES
| /[NO]JWARNINGS

ffam%"""‘
ICODE:type
/DIAGNOSE

/EXTEND

/HEADER
4

/INOJLINENUMBERS

/ONDEBUG

/RECORD:length
ISHOW[:type]
/STATISTICS
/[NOISWAP
/UNITS:n
/[NOJVECTORS

| /[NO]JWARNINGS
/MA;

mmssnwemucmxwmm:tym]]:l
/DISABLE type|...:type]
/[ENABLE :typel....type]

| /[NOJSHOW :typel....type]

In the command line shown above, filespecs represents one or more files to be
included in the assembly or compilation. The default file types for the output
files are .LST for listing files and .OBJ for object files. The defaults for input
files depend on the particular language processor involved and include
MAC for MACRO files, .FOR for FORTRAN files, and .DBL for DIBOL files.
To compile (or assemble) multiple source files into a single object file, separate the files by plus (+) signs in the command line. Unless you specify otherwise, the system creates an object file with the same name as the first
input file and gives it an .OBJ file type. You can combine up to six files for a
compilation producing a single object file. To compile multiple files in independent compilations, separate the files by commas (,) in the command line.
This generates a corresponding object file for each set of input files.

Keyboard Commands

4-35

COMPILE
You can specify the entire COMPILE command as one line, or you can rely
on the system to prompt you for information. The COMPILE command

prompt is Fiiles?.

There are three ways to establish which language processor the COMPILE
command invokes.

1. Specify a language-name option, such as /MACRO which invokes the
MACRO assembler.
2. Omit the language-name option and explicitly specify the file type for the
source files. The COMPILE command then invokes the language processor that corresponds to that file type. Specifying the file SOURCE.MAC,

for example, invokes the MACRO assembler.

3. Let the system choose a file type of MAC, .DBL, or .FOR for the source

file you name. To do this, the handler for the device you specify must be
loaded. If you specify DX1:A and the DX handler is loaded, the system

searches for source files A.MAC and A.DBL, in that order. If it finds one
of these files, the system invokes the corresponding language processor. If

it cannot find one of these files, or if the device handler associated with

the input file is not resident, the system assumes a file type of .FOR and
invokes the FORTRAN compiler.

If the language processor selected as a result of one of the procedures
described above is not on the system device (SY:), the system issues an error
message.

The following sections explain the options you can use with the COMPILE
command.

/ALLOCATE:size

Use this option with /LIST or /OBJECT to reserve
space on the device for the output file. The argument size represents the

number of blocks of space to allocate. The meaningful range for this value is

from 1 to 65535. A value of —1 is a special case that creates the largest file
possible on the device.
/ALPHABETIZE
Use this option with /DIBOL to alphabetize the entries
in the symbol table listing. This is useful for program maintenance and

debugging.

/BUFFERING

Use this option with /DIBOL to direct the compiler to use
single buffering for I/O. Normally the compiler uses double buffering.

/CODE:type

Use this option with /FORTRAN to produce object code that
is designed for a particular hardware configuration. The argument type

represents a three-letter abbreviation for the type of code to produce. The

valid values are: EAE, EIS, FIS, and THR. See the R7T-11/RSTS/E
FORTRAN 1V User’s Guide for a complete description of the types of code
and their functions.
|

4-36

Keyboard Commands

COMPILE

Use this option with /MACRO or
/ICROSSREFERENCEI[:typel....typell rence
on in the listing. This
/DIBOL to generate a symbol cross-refe ncesecti
and debugging. Note that
information is useful for program maintenadefault.
You must also specify
the system does not generate a listing by
/LIST in the command line to get a cross-reference listing.

ment. The argument type
With /MACRO, this option takes an optional argu
which sections of the crossrepresents a one-character code that indicatesSee
MACRO command in
reference listing the assembler should include.s and the
meaning.
their
this chapter for a summary of valid argument

to help analyze an internal
/'DIAGNOSE Use this option with /FORTRANdump
information to include
compiler error. D' IAGNOSE expands the crash
the diagnostic printout to
internal compiler tables and buffers. Submit in
g can help the
DIGITAL with an SPR form. The information the listin
ct it.
DIGITAL programmers locate the compiler error and corre

/DIBOL This option invokes the DIBOL language processor to compile the
associated files.

with /MACRO to specify a
/DISABLE:typel...type] Use this option in
chapter for a summary
DSABL directive. See the MACRO command this 11
RO Language
of the arguments and their meaning. See the PDP- andMAC
of all valid
list
a
tive
Reference Manual for a description of the direc
types.

/MACRO to specify an
/JENABLE:typel....type]l Use this option with
chapter for a summary
ENABL directive. See the MACRO command in this11
RO Language
PDPof the arguments and their meaning. See the tive andMAC
of all valid
list
a
Reference Manual for a description of the direc
types.

to change the right margin
/JEXTEND Use this option with /FORTRAN 80.
for source input lines from column 72 to column

to
/FORTRAN This option invokes the FORTRAN language processor
compile the associated files.

out a
/HEADER Use this option with /FORTRAN to include in the print
list of options that are currently in effect.

two words for the default
/14 Use this option with /FORTRAN to allocate
integer data type (FORTRAN uses only one-word integers) so that it takes
the same physical space as real variables.

ify a macro library file;
LIBRARY Use this option with /MACROionto ident
the command line. The
use it only after a library file specificat RO inlibra
ries you specify before
MACRO assembler looks first to any MAC
SYSMAC.SML, to satisfy refegoing to the default system macro library, from
MACRO programs. In the
rences (made with the MCALL directive)

Keyboard Commands 4-37

COMPILE
example below, the two files A.FO

R and B.FOR are compiled together,

ducing B.OBJ and B.LST. The MAC

pro-

RO assembler assembles C.MAC, satis
fying MCALL references from MYL
IB.MAC and SYSMAC.SML. It produces C.OBJ and C.LST.
+COMPILE

&+fl/LIflT/QfiJEfiT&MVLI&

/LI@W&W?%G»MfiCfLIfiT/mBJ

ECT

/LINENUMBERS

Use this option with /DIBOL or /FO
RTRAN to include
internal sequence numbers in the execu
table program. These numbers are

especially useful in debugging prog

rams. This is the default operation.

/NOLINENUMBERS

Use this option with /DIBOL or /FORTR

AN to sup-

press the generation of internal

sequence numbers in the executab

le proram and optimizes execution speed
. Use

gram. This produces a smaller prog

this option to compile only those prog

rams that are already debugged; other
wise the line numbers in DIBOL or FOR
TRAN error messages are difficult

to interpret.

/LIST[:filespec]

You must specify this option to produce

assembly listing. The /LIST optio

a compilation or

n has different meanings dependin

g on its
that anytime you type a colon after
the
/LIST option (/LIST:) you must speci
fy a device or a file specification after

position in the command line. Note

the colon.

If you specify /LIST without a file
specification in the list of options that
immediately follows the COMPILE
command, the system generates a
listing that prints on the line printer. If
you follow /LIST with a device name,
the system creates a listing file on
that device. If the device 1s a filestructured device, the system store

s the listing file on that device, assig

it the first input file name and a .LST

duces a listing on the terminal:
+COMPILE/LIST:TT:

A.FOR

The next command creates a listing file
+LCOMPILE/LIST:RK3:

ning

file type. The following command pro-

called A.LLST on RK3:.

A.MAC

If the /LIST option contains a name

and file type to override the default

of
file with that name and file type. The
following command, for example, comp
iles A.FOR and B.FOR together, producing files A.OBJ and FILE1.OUT on
device DK:.
.LST, the system generates a listing

e@@MWfiLWfiW%WTW%MKLIQT%W

ILE&amUT

A+B

Another way to specify /LIST is to type

it after the file specification to which
with the same name as a particular
input
file, you can use a command similar
to this one:
it applies. To produce a listing file

+COMPILE/DIBOL

4-38

Keyboard Commands

A+B/LIST:RK3:

COMPILE

ucing
A.DBL and B.DBL together, prodopti
" The command shown above compiles
on
specify a file name on a /LIST ing
files DK:A.OBJ and RK3:B.LST. If you
mean
same
the
mand line, it has
following a file specification in the com
following two commands have the
The
as when it follows the command.
same results:

,COMPILE/MACRO A/LIST:B
,COMPILE/MACRO/LIST:BA

DK:
Both the commands shown above generate A.OBJ and B.LST on device
as output files.
d
Remember that file options apply only to the file (or group of files separate
by plus signs) they follow in the command string. For example:
,COMPILE A.MAC/LISTB.FOR

;m DK:. It
g A.OBJ and A.LSTnot
A.MAC, producinDK:.
This command compR,iles
However, it does produce
producing B.OBJ on
also compiles B.FO

any listing file for the compilation of B.FOR.

ages gene
ILOG Use this option with /DIBOL to create a log of error mess
ated by the compiler.

the
/MACRO This option invokes the MACRO assembler to assemble
associated files.
on to specify a file name or device for the
JOBJECT(:filespec] Use this optitype
colon after the /OBJECT option
object file. Note that anytime you ce or aafile
specification after the colon.
(/OBJECT:) you must specify a devi
wBecause the COMPILE command creates object files by default, the follo
ing two commands have the same meaning:
,COMPILE/FORTRAN A

,COMPILE/FORTRAN/OBJECT A

and produce A.OBJ as output. Thed
Both commands compile A.FOR /LIS
JOBJECT option functions like the T option; it can be either a comman
or a file qualifier.
across the entire command string.
As a command option, /OBJECT applies
s AMAC and B.MAC sepaThe following command, for example, assemble
on RK1:.
rately, creating object files A.OBJ and B.OBJ
,COMPILE/OBJECT:RK1: (A+B).MAC

Keyboard Commands 4-39

COMPILE
Use /OBJECT as a file option to
create an object file with a specific
name or
destination. The following comman
d compiles A.DBL and B.DBL, toge
ther,
creating
files B.LST and B.ORJ.

+COMPILE/DIBOL

/INOOBJECT

A+B/LIST/0BJECT

Use this option to suppress crea

command option, /NOOBJECT

tion of an object file. As a

suppresses all object files; as

a file option,

it
suppresses only the object
file produced by the rela
ted input files. In this

command, for example, the
system compiles A.FOR and

B.FOR toge

ther,
producing files A.OBJ and B.LS
T. It also compiles C.DBL and
produces
C.LST, but it does not produce C.OB
J.
+COMPILE

%fiwmw%@waWflhifiTfmwm%%

fwwwwdfimvfhifiT

/ONDEBUG

Use this option with /DIBOL to
include an expanded symbol
table in the object file. You can
then use a debugging program
to find and
correct
errors in the object file.

Use /ONDEBUG with FORTRAN
to include debug lines (those that
have a
D in column 1) in the compilation.
You do not, therefore, have to edit
the
file
to include these lines in the comp
ilation or to logically remove
them. This
option means that you can incl
ude messages, flags, and conditio
nal branches
to help you trace program executio
n and find errors.

/PAGE:n

Use this option with /DIBOL to over
ride the default listing page
length of 66 lines. The meaningful
range of values for the decimal argu
ment
nis1to 32768 (decimal).
/RECORD:length
Use this option with /FORTR
AN to override the
default record length of 132 characte
rs for ASCII sequential formatted
input
and outp
4095.

ut. The meaningful range for
the

argument length is from 4 to

/SHOW:type

Use this option with /FORTRAN
to control FORTRAN listing format. The argument type
represents a code that indicates
which listings the compiler is to produce.
Table 4-6 summarizes the code
s and their

meaning.

Use this option with /MACRO
to specify any MACRO .LIST dire
ctive. Table
4-13 summarizes the valid
arguments and their meaning.
The PDP—-77
MACRO

Language Reference Manual expl

ains how to use these directives.

/NOSHOW:type

Use this option with MACRO
to specify any MACRO
NLIST directive. Table 4-13
summarizes the valid argument
s and their
meaning.
The PDP-11 MACRO Lan

guage Reference Manual expl

to use these directives.

/STATISTICS

Use this option with /FORTR

statistics in the listing, such

Keyboard Commands

AN to include compilation

as amount of memory used, amo

elapsed, and length of the symbol

4-40

ains how

table.

unt of time

COMPILE

JSWAP Use this option with /FORTRAN to permit the USR (User Service
Routine) to swap over the FORTRAN program in memory. This is the
default operation.

INOSWAP Use this option with /FORTRAN to keep the USR resident
during execution of a FORTRAN program. This may be necessary if the
FORTRAN program uses some of the RT-11 system subroutine calls (see the
RT-11 Programmer’s Reference Manual). If the program frequently updates
or creates a large number of files, making the USR resident can improve program execution. However, the cost for making the USR resident is 2K words
of memory.

/TABLES Use this option with /DIBOL to generate a symbol table and
label table as part of the listing. This information is useful for program
maintenance and debugging. The system does not generate a listing by
default. You must also specify /LIST in the command line to produce an
|

assembly listing.

/JUNITS:n Use this option with /FORTRAN to override the default number of logical units (6) to be open at one time. The maximum value you can
specify for n is 16.

/'VECTORS

This option directs FORTRAN to use tables to access multidi-

mensional arrays. This is the default mode of operation.

/INOVECTORS

This option directs FORTRAN to use multiplication oper-

ations to access multidimensional arrays.

/WARNINGS Use this option to include warning messages in DIBOL or
FORTRAN compiler diagnostic error messages. These messages call certain
conditions to your attention but do not interfere with the compilation. This
is the default operation for DIBOL.

INOWARNINGS Use this option with /DIBOL or /FORTRAN to suppress
warning messages during compilation. These messages are for your information only; they do not affect the compilation. This is the default operation
for FORTRAN.

Keyboard Commands

4-41

COPY
The COPY command performs a variety of file transfer and maintenance
operations.

CoPY B /BOOT[:dev]

[

/DOS

/WAIT

/OWNER:[nnn,nnn)
ANTERCHANGE

/DEVICE

TOPS

FILE

WAIT

/END:n

output-filespec

/START:n

/ASCI
/BINARY

/DOS
ANTERCHANGE[:size

)

/ALLOCATE :size

/START:n
/POSITION:n

/POSITION:n

/IMAGE
/PACKED

/BEFORE[:date]

/SINCE[:date]
/DATE[:date]

/NEWFILES

/CONCATENATE
/DELETE
/EXCLUDE

/IGNORE

/INFORMATION
/INOJILOG

/MULTIVOLUME
/PREDELETE
/INOIPROTECTION

INOJQUERY

/INOJREPLACE
/RETAIN

/SETDATE[:date]
/SLOWLY
/SYSTEM
VERIFY
WAIT

The COPY command performs the following transfers:

® One file to another file
® A number offiles to a single file by concatenation

Files from a large volume to several smaller volumes

The bootstrap code to a volume
® The contents of a volume to a file and vice versa

® The contents of a device to another device

In the command syntax shown above, input-filespecs represents the data to
copy. The input-filespec can be a device name, if you use the /DEVICE
option. Otherwise, you can specify as many as six files for input. Output-

filespec represents the device or file to receive the data. You can specify only
one output device or file.

Normally, commas separate the input files if you specify more than one.

However, you can separate them by plus (+) signs if you want to combine
them, as the following example shows:
+ COPY

4-42

A.FOR+B.FOR

Keyboard Commands

C.FOR

COPY

This command combines DK:A.FOR with DK:B.FOR and stores the results
in DK:C.FOR.

cannot execute any
Note that because of the file protection feature, youcted
file. For example,

COPY operations that result in the deletion of a prote
er if a protected file of the
you cannot copy a file from one volume to anothvolum
e.
same name and type already exists on the output

fication of the comYou can use wildcards in the input or output filetspeci
contain embedded wildmand. However, the output file specification canno
ATE, if you use a wilATEN
cards. Note that for all operations except CONCsponding
output file name or
deard in the input file specification, the corre wildcards
correctly:
file type must be an asterisk (%). This example uses
,COPY A%LB.MAC *.BAK

In the CONCATENATE operation, the output specification must represent
a single file. Therefore, no wildcards are allowed.

can rely on the system
You can enter the COPY command as one line, or youfollo
by a carriage
to prompt you for information. If you type COPY inputwed
specification fol-

the
return, the system prompts From?. If you typeTo?.
lowed by a carriage return, the system prompts

) files and files that
The system has a special way of handling system (.SYS
to
you use the /ISYSTEM
cover bad blocks (.BAD files). The system requireswildc
are used in the
option when you need to copy system files andoption. ards
You cannot copy sysinput file type, or when you use the /EXCLUDE
ns. To copy a .BAD
icatio
tem files simply by placing wildcards in file specif
type. (You can use wildfile, you must specify it by explicitly giving its filefiles
cover bad blocks on a
cards when specifying the file name.) Since BAD other
wise manipulate
device, you usually do not need to copy, delete, or
these files.

and options and include
The following sections describe the COPY commdate
as an argument. The
command examples. Some of the options accept a
syntax for specifying the date is:
[dd][:mmm][:yy]
where:

represents the day (a decimal integer in the range 1-31)

represents the year (a decimal integer in the range 73—-99)

mmm represents the first three characters of the name of the month

m date. If you omit any of
The default value for the date is the current syste
values from the current
these values (dd, mmm, or yy), the system uses theyear
::82 and the current
system date. For example, if you specify only the
Keyboard Commands 443

COPY

system date is May 4, 1983, the
system uses the date 4:MAY:82.
If the current date is not set, it is consider
ed 0 (the same as for an undated
file in a
dire

ctory listing).

If you have selected timer support
through the system generation proce
ss,
but have not selected automatic endof-month date advancement, make sure
that you set the date at the beginnin
g of each month with the DATE com-

mand. If you fail to set the date
at the beginning of each month,
the system
prints -BAD- in the creation date
column of each file created beyond
the end-

of-month. (Note that you can elim
inate -BAD- by using the RENAME
/
SETDATE command after you set
the date.)
|
|
/ALLOCATE:size
Use this option after the output
file specification to
rese
rve space on the device for the

the number of blocks of space to

output file. The argument size

value is from 1 to 65535. A valu

largest file possible on the device.

/ASCII

represents

allocate. The meaningful range for

e of —1 is a special case that creat

this

es the

This option copies files in ASCII mode

nulls and rubout characters. It conv

treats CTRL/Z (32 octal) as the

, ignoring and eliminating

erts data to the ASCII 7-bit form

logical end-of-file on input. Files

at and

that consist

of ASCII-format data include sour
ce files you create with the editor,
map
files, and list files. The /ASCII option
cannot be used with /VERIFY.

The following example copies a FOR
TRAN source program from DYO:
to
DY1:, giving it a new name, and
reserving 50 blocks of space for it.
+COPY/ASCII

DYO:MATRIY,.FOR

/BEFORE[:date]

DY1:TEST.FOR/ALLOCATE:50

This option copies all files on a devic

e created before a

specified date. The following comm

created before February 4, 1983.
+COPY/BEFORE:4:FEB:873
Filescoried:
DK:A.MAC
DK:B.MAC

DH&GwMflC

*MAC
to

and copies only those .MAC files

on DK:

DLGO:%,MAD

DLO:zA.MAC
DLO:B,.MAC

ULQ&CaMME

/BINARY
Use this option to copy formatted bina
ry files, such as .OBJ files
produced by the assembler or the
FORTRAN compiler, and .LDA files
produced by the linker. The system verif
ies checksums and prints a warning
if a

checksum error occurs. If this happ
ens, the copy operation does not
complete. The /BINARY option cannot be
used with /VERIFY.
The following command copies a bina

ry file from DK: to a diskette.

+COPY/BINARY

ANALYZ,0BJ

DY1:%,
%

Note that you cannot copy library
files with the /BINARY option beca
use a
checksum error occurs. Copy them in imag
e mode.

4-44

Keyboard Commands

COPY

r and
/BOOT[:dev] This option copies bootstrap information from monito
permit
,
volume
s
-acces
handler files to blocks 0 and 2 through 5 of a random
dev
ent
argum
ting you to use that volume as a system volume. The optional
represents a two-letter target system device. This argument is especially

useful when you are creating a bootable RX01 system while the current system is on an RX02 diskette. Note that you cannot combine /BOOT with any
other option, and that your input and output volume must be the same. Also

note that you can name your monitor file any name you wish; the default file
type is .SYS. When you perform this operation, you must have the correct
device handler to go with the volume. For example, to create a bootable
RLO02 disk, you must have the handler file DL.SYS on that RLO2.
To create a bootable system volume, follow the procedure below:

1 Initialize the volume, using the keyboard monitor command

INITIALIZE. (Note that if the volume is an RK06/07 or an RL01/02, you
should also use the /REPLACE option.)

2. Copy files onto the volume, using the COPY/SYSTEM or SQUEEZE/
OUTPUT command.

3 Write the monitor bootstrap onto the volume, using COPY/BOOT.
The following example creates a system diskette.
JINITIALIZE

DY1:

DYi:/Initialize’s Are vou sure? Y
JCOPY/SYSTEM DYOD:#%,% DY1lui%,%
Files

coried:

DYO:RT11FB.SYS
DYO:SWAP.EYS
DYO:DT.B5YS
DYO:DX.BYS
DYO:LP.S5YS
DYO:DIR.S5AY
DYO:DUP.SAY
DYO:ABC .MAC
DYO:AAF .MAC
DYO:CT.5YS
DYO:PIP.5AY
DYO:MT.5YS
DYO:MM.SYS
DYO:COMB.DAT

to DY1:RT11FB.SYS
to DY1:5WAP.5YS
to D¥Y1:DT.5YS
to DY1:DX.8Y5
to DY1:LP.SYS
to DY1:DIR.5AV
to DY1:DUP.SAY
to DY1:ABC.MAC
to DY1:AAF.MAC
to DY1:CT.5YS
to DY1:PIP.GAYV
to DY1:MT.SYS
to DY1:MM,.8YS
to DY1:COMB.DAT

LCOPY/BOOT DY1:RT11FB.SYS D¥1:

The following example creates a bootable RX01 system diskette on an RX02
drive:

LCOPY/BOOT:D¥

DYO:RT118J.8Y5

DYO:

Note that the monitor file cannot reside on a block that contains a bad sector
error (BSE) if you are doing bad block replacement. If this condition occurs,
a boot error results when you bootstrap the system. In this case, move the
monitor so that it does not reside on a block with a BSE.

Keyboard Commands

4-45

COPY

/CONCATENATE

Use this option to combine several input files

single output file. This option is particular

into a

ly useful to combine several object

modules into a single file for use by the linker

or librarian.

The following command combines all the .FOR
files on DY1: into a file called
MERGE.FOR on DYO:.
+COPY/CONCATENATE

Files

corpied:

DY1:%,.FOR

DY1:A.FOR

DY1:B.FOR

D¥Y1:C,.FOR

DYO:MERGE .FOR

DYO:MERGE.FOR
DYO:MERGE.FOR

DYO:MERGE.FOR

Wildcards are invalid in the output file specificatio

/DATE[:date]

Use this option to copy only those files with
a certain creation date. If no date is specified the current
system date is used. The following command copies all . MAC files created
on February 20, 1983 from DLO:
to DL1:
+COPY/DATE:20:FEB::813
Files

corpied:

DLO:AMAC
DLO:B.MAC

DLO:C.MAC

DLO:*
. MAC

DLI:A.MAC

DL1:B.MAC

DL1:C.MAC

DL1:%,%

/DELETE
Use this option to delete the input file after
it has been copied.
The COPY/DELETE operation does not ask
you for confirmation before it

executes. You must use /QUERY for this

function. If the input specification

and output specification are the same, the

example copies
+COPY/DELETE

file is not deleted. The following
JSPROG.SAV to DY1:, then deletes it from
device DK:.

JSPROG.SAY

DY1:JSPROG.SAU

/DEVICE

This option copies block for block the image
of one device to
another, and copies all data from one disk
to another without changing the
file structure or the location of the files
on the device. This is convenient

because the bootstrap blocks also remain
unchanged. You can copy disks
that are not in RT-11 format if they have
no bad blocks. When copying
RT-11 disks, you should ensure the integ
rity of the results by making sure
the disk being copied contains no bad blocks
. If the system encounters a bad
block during the COPY/DEVICE operation
it prints an error message. When

copying any disk using COPY/DEVICE,
make sure the output device contains no bad blocks because this opera
tion will write over bad blocks on the
output device.

If one device is smaller than the other,
the system copies only as many
blocks as the smaller device contains. For
example, if you copy a large volume to a smaller one, you may copy

the entire directory of the input volum

but not every file on the input volume. When

4-46

Keyboard Commands

you copy a larger device to a

COPY

smaller one, you are asked to confirm the copy operation. If you also use the
/START and /END options with the input specification, the confirmation is
requested only if the number of blocks to be copied is greater than the area
on the output volume defined by the /SSTART option and the end of the output volume.

It is possible to copy blocks between disk and magtape, even though magtape is not a random-access device. The data is stored on tape formatted in
1K-word blocks. Because magtape is not file-structured, there is room for
only one disk image on a magtape. When you use the /DEVICE option with
magtape, you must also use the /FILES option with the magtape input or
output specification.

The following command copies an image of DYO0: to DY1..
+COPY/DEVICE

DYO:DY1:

DY1:/Copvy3 Are

vou

sure?

Respond to the query message by typing Y and a carriage return. Any
response not beginning with Y cancels the command and the COPY operation does not proceed.

NOTE

The COPY command does not copy track O of diskettes.

However, this restriction has no impact on any copy oper-

ations if your diskette was supplied by DIGITAL.

The /DEVICE and /POSITION options are mutually exclusive.

/DOS Use this option to transfer files between RSTS/E or DOS-11 format
and RT-11 format. The option must appear in the command line after the
file to which it applies. Valid DOS input devices are DECtape and RK05;
the only valid DOS output device is DECtape. The only other options allowed with /DOS are /ASCIL, /BINARY, /IMAGE, /OWNER:[nnn,nnnj, and
/WAIT (using two device drives).

The following command transfers a BASIC source file from a DOS-11 disk
to an RT-11 disk.

,COPY RK:PROG.BAS/DOS/0WNER:L2004+200] SY 1%, %

The next command copies a memory image file from an RT-11 disk to a
RSTS/E format DECtape.

+COPY DUMP.SAYV DT:+.%/D05

/END:n Use with /START:n and /DEVICE to specify the last block of the
volume you are copying. The /END:n notation must follow the input file
Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-47

COPY

specification. The argument n represents a decimal block number.
The following example copies blocks 0 to 500 from DLO: to DL1:, starting at
block
501, in a file named ADAM.MAC:
+COPY/DEVICE/FILES

DLO:/START:0/END:500

DL1:ADAM, MAC/START:501

/EXCLUDE

This option copies all the files on a device except the ones you
specify. The following command copies all files from DYO: to DY1:
except
.OBJ and .SAV files.
»COPY/EXCLUDE

DYO:(%*,0BJ,*,.S5AY)

DY1l:%,*

Note that if you are copying system (.SYS) files using the /EXCLU
DE
option, you must also use the /SYSTEM option.

/FILES

Use with /DEVICE to copy a volume to a file on another volume
or
vice versa. If you use magtape in the operation, you must specify a
file name
and the /FILES option with the magtape. Do not include wildcards in
either
the input or output specification when you use the /FILES option.
This
operation is useful if you wish to make several copies of a volume
that is on a
slow device. You can copy the volume as a file onto a volume
that is on a

faster device, and then proceed to make copies. Note that when
you copy a
file to a volume, the bootstrap and directory of the output
volume are
replaced by the equivalent blocks of the input file.

The /FILES option cannot be used with /WAIT.
The following example copies diskette DYO: to DL1: as file FLOPPY

.BAK:

+COPY/DEVICE/FILES DYO:

DL1:FLOPPY.BAK

The following example copies file DECTAP.BAK to DDO:
+COPY/DEVICE/FILES

DECTAP.BAK

DDO:

/IGNORE

Use this option to ignore errors during a copy operation. /IGNORE forces a single-block data transfer, which you can invoke at
any
other time with the /SLOWLY option. Use /IGNORE if an input error
occurred when you tried to perform a normal copy operation. This procedur
e

can sometimes recover a file that is otherwise unreadable. If there

is still

an error, an error message prints on the terminal, but the
copy operatio

continues. This option is invalid with /DOS, /TOPS, and /INTERCHANGE

IMAGE

If you enter a command line without an option, or if you use the

/IMAGE option, the copy operation proceeds in image mode. Use
this
method to transfer memory image files and any files other than
ASCII or
formatted binary. Note that you cannot transfer memory image files
reliably to the line printer or console terminal. You can image-copy ASCII
and
binary data with the following restrictions:
1.

For ASCII data, there is no check for nulls.

Version 5.1, July 1984

4-48

Keyboard Commands

COPY

2. For binary data, there is no checksum consideration.

This command copies a text file to a double density diskette for storage:
,COPY LETTER.SAV DYO:*,%

The primary advantage to using /IMAGE is that it is faster than /ASCII and
/BINARY.

AINFORMATION Use this option to change the severity level of the error
message that prints when not all of the input files you specified are found. If
it
you do not use INFORMATION, the system prints an error message when
procis
nd
comma
the
after
is unable to find an input file, and execution halts
essed. When you use /INFORMATION, the system prints an informational
message to tell you which files it cannot find, but execution continues.
In the following example, the input files FILE1.TXT and FILE3.TXT are
copied to DL1:. However, since the system is unable to find DLO:FILE2.TXT,
the system prints a message to inform you.

LCOPY/INFORMATION DLO: (FILEL1 FILE2»FILE3).TRT

?PIP-I-File not found DLO:FILEZ TKT

DLI:z*,*%

AINTERCHANGE[:size] This option transfers data in interchange format
between interchange diskettes that are compatible with IBM 3741 format
and RT-11 block-replaceable devices or the console. The option must appear
in the command line after the file to which it applies. If the output file is to
be in interchange format, you can specify the length of each record. The
argument size represents the record length in characters (the default record
length is 80 bytes).

If you use the /WAIT option with AINTERCHANGE, you must use two device
drives for the operation. The following command transfers the RT-11 file
WAIT.MAC from device DK: to device DX1: in interchange format, giving it
the name WAIT.MA. The record length is set to 128 (decimal) bytes.
,COPY WAIT.MAC DX1:%*.%/INTERCHANGE:1Z8.

/LOG This option lists on the terminal the names of the files that wereif
copied by the current command. Normally, the system prints a log only
there is a wildcard in the file specification. If you specify /QUERY, the systhe
tem prints the name of each file and asks you for confirmation before
unless
log,
the
e
replac
es
operation proceeds. In this case, the query messag
you specifically type /LOG/QUERY in the command line.

The following example shows a copy command line and the resulting log.
,COPY/LOG DY1:FILE.MAC
Files

coried:

D¥1:FILE.MAC

DYO:FILE.MAC

taog DYO:FILE.MAC

Keyboard Commands

4-49

COPY

/NOLOG

This option prevents a list of the files copied
from appearing on
the terminal.

/MULTIVOLUME

Use this option to copy files from an input

one or more output volumes. This option

volume to

is useful when you are copying sev-

eral files from a large input volume to a small

er output volume and you are

not sure all the files will fit on one output volum

When you use this option the system copies
files to the output volume until
the system finds a file that will not fit. The
system continues to search that
file’s directory segment, copying all files from
that segment that will fit onto
the output volume. When no more files from
that segment will fit on the out-

put volume, the system prompts you to mount
the next output volume and
prints the Continue? message. Mount anoth
er output volume of the same
type and type Y or any string beginning
with Y to continue. The system

begins the copy operation with the first file that

output volume. If you type N or any string

did not fit on the previous

beginning with N, or two CTRL/

Cs, the operation is not completed and the monit
or prompt (.) appears. Any
other response causes the prompt to repeat
. The system continues to copy
files from that directory segment until no more
files from that segment will
fit on the output volume or until all files from
that directory segment have
been copied. When all files from that segment
have been copied, the system
begins copying files from the next directory
segment. File copying continues
in this fashion until all the specified input files
have been copied.
The following example shows all files on
DLO: being copied to several
double-density diskettes:
+COPY/MULTIVOLUME

DLO:%.,%

Mount

outeput

volume

DYO:3

Continue?

output

volume

DYO:3%

Continue?

output

volume

DYO:5

Continue?

output

uvolume

DYO:3

Continue?

(Log of files copied)
next

(Log of files copied)
Mount

DYO:

The /MULTIVOLUME option is not valid
when you are copying from
magtape.

/NEWFILES

Use this option in the command line if you
want to copy only
those files that have the current date.
The following example shows a

convenient way to back up all new files
+COPY/NEWFILES

Files

coried:

DK:A8,FOR
DK:B,.FOR
DK:C.FOR

4-50

Keyboard Commands

%,%

DY{i{:%,#%

to
to

DY1:A,.FOR
DY1:B.FOR

DY1:C,FOR

after a session at the computer.

COPY

/OWNER:[nnn,nnn]

Use this option with /DOS to represent a DOS-11
user identification code (UIC) for a DOS-11 input device. Note that the
square brackets are part of the UIC; you must type them. The initial default
for the UIC is[1,1].

/PACKED

This option copies files in DECsystem—10, DOS, or interchange

mode. You can use /PACKED on an input file specification with the /TOPS,
/DOS, or INTERCHANGE option to transfer files to RT-11 format. This
option transfers DECsystem—-10 files created by MACY11, MACX11, or

LNKX11 with the /P option.

/POSITION:n Use this option when you copy files to or from magtape.
The /POSITION:n option lets you direct the tape operation; you can move
the tape and perform an operation at the point you specify. For all operations, omitting the argument n has the same effect as setting n equal to 0 (n

is interpreted as
a decimal number). Since this option applies to the device
and not to the files, you can specify one /POSITION:n option for the output
file and one for the input files.

The /POSITION and /DEVICE options are mutually exclusive.
For magtape read (copy from tape) operations, the /POSITION:n option
initiates these procedures:
1.

If nisO:

The tape rewinds and the handler searches for the file you specify. If
you specify more than one file, the tape rewinds before each search. If
the file specification contains a wildcard, the tape rewinds only once
and then the handler copies all the appropriate files.

If n is a positive integer:
The handler looks for the file at file sequence number n. If the file it
finds there is the one you specify, the handler copies it. Otherwise, it
prints an error message. If you use a wildcard in the file specification,

the handler goes to file sequence number n and then begins to look for

the appropriate files.
3.

Ifnis-1:
The handler starts its search at the current position. Note that if the

current position is not the beginning of the tape, it is possible that the
file you specify will not be found, even though it does exist on the tape.
For magtape write (copy to tape) operations, the /POSITION:n option has

this effect:
1.

IfnisO:
|
The tape rewinds before the handler copies each file.

A warning message prints on the terminal if the handler finds another file on the tape
with the same name and file type, and the handler does not copy the
file.

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-51

COPY

2. If nis a positive integer:

The handler goes to file sequence number n or to the logical end of tape,
whichever comes first. Then it enters the file you specify. If you specify
more than one file, or if you use a wildcard in the file specification, the
tape does not rewind before the handler writes each file, and the handler
does not check for duplicate file names. If the handler finds the sequence
number n, it creates a new logical end of tape. If there are any files with a
sequence number greater than n, they are lost.
o

. Ifnis-—1:

The handler goes to the logical end-of-tape and enters the file you specify.
It does not rewind, and it does not check for duplicate file names.
4. If nis-2:

The tape rewinds between each copy operation. The handler enters the
file you specify at logical end-of-tape or at the first occurrence of a duplicate file name (but if the handler enters the file over the duplicate file,
you lose everything after that file).

Chapter 13 of the RT—11 System Utilities Manual, Section 13.2.1, contains
more detailed information about operations involving magtape.

/PREDELETE This option deletes a file on the output device that has the
same file name and type as a file you copy to that device, before the copy
occurs. Normally, the system deletes a file of the same file name and type
after the copy operation successfully completes.
This option is useful for operations involving devices that have limited
space, such as diskettes. Be careful when you use the /PREDELETE option;
if for any reason the input file is unreadable, the output file will already
have been deleted and you are left with no usable version of the file.
/PROTECTION Use this option to give an output file protected status so
that it cannot be deleted. Note that if a file is protected, you cannot perform
any operations on the file that result in its deletion. You can copy a protected
file to another volume, change its name, or write to it. However, you cannot
delete a protected file; you must first change its protection status by using
the / NOPROTECTION option.
If during a copy operation neither the /PROTECTION nor the
/NOPROTECTION option is specified, the output file retains the protection
status of the input file.
/INOPROTECTION Use this option to enable an output file for deletion.
When you use the /NOPROTECTION option during a copy operation the
resulting output file is enabled for deletion.
Files that have been assigned as logical disks and active console log files are
protected. You should not use this option to remove protection from an
active logical disk file.

4-52

Keyboard Commands

COPY

/QUERY If you use this option, the system requests confirmation from you
before it performs the operation. /QUERY is particularly useful on operations that involve wildcards, when you may not be sure which files the system selected for an operation. The /QUERY option is valid on the COPY
command only if both input and output are in RT-11 format.
Note that if you specify /QUERY in a copy command line that also contains a
wildcard in the file specification, the confirmation messages that print on
the terminal replace the log messages that would normally appear. You
must respond to a query message by typing Y (or any string that begins with
Y) and a carriage return. The system interprets any other response to mean
NO, and it does not copy the file.
The following example copies three of the four .MAC files stored on DK: to
DY1:.
L,COPY/QUERY
Files

DK:*.,MAC

DY1:%,%

corpied:

DK:A.MAC
DK:B.MAC
DK:C.MAC

DK :DEMOF1.MAC

to
to

DY1:A.MAC
DY1:B.MAC

7Y
7Y

DY1:C+MAC

to DY1:DEMOF1.MAC?

/INOQUERY This option suppresses the confirmation message that the
system prints for some operations, such as COPY/DEVICE. It also suppresses logging of file names if the command line contains a wildcard. You
must explicitly type /LOG to obtain a list of the files copied when you use
INOQUERY.

/REPLACE This is the default mode of operation for the COPY command.
If a file exists on the output device with the same name as the file you specify
for output, the system deletes the duplicate file after the copy operation successfully completes.

/NOREPLACE This option prevents execution of the copy operation if a
file with the same name as the output file you specify already exists on the
output device./ NOREPLACE is valid only if both the input and output are
in RT-11 format.

/RETAIN Use this option with the /DEVICE option to preserve the bad
block table of the output volume. The input and output volumes must be
alike and must support bad block replacement. You must have initialized
the output volume by using the INITIALIZE/REPLACE command before
you can use this option with /DEVICE. The /RETAIN option is invalid with
the /START, /END, and /FILES options.

The following example copies the volume DLO: to DL1:, but preserves DL1:’s
bad block replacement table.
, COPY/DEVICE/RETAIN

DLO:

DL1:

Keyboard Commands

4-53

COPY
/SETDATE[:date] This option causes the system to put the date you
specify on all files it transfers. If you specify no date the current system date
is used. If the current system date is not set, the system places zeros in the

directory entry date position. Normally, the system preserves the existing
file creation date when it copies a file block for block.

This option is invalid for magtape operations; the system always uses the

current date when copying to magtape, and always uses the magtape file’s
creation date when copying from magtape.

/SINCE:[date]

This option copies all files on a specified device that were
created on or after a specified date. The following command copies only those
.MAC files on DK: created on or after February 24, 1983.
+COPY/SINCE:24:FEB:83

Files

*,MAC

DLO:*,MAC

copied:

DK:A.MAC

DLO:A.MAC

DK:B.MAC

DLO:B.MAC

DK:C.MAC

DLO:C.MAC

/SLOWLY

This option transfers files one block at a time. On some devices,
a single-block transfer increases the chances of an error-free transfer. Use
this option if a previous copy operation failed because of a read or write

error.

/START[:n]

Use with the /DEVICE option to specify the starting block
and, with /END:n, to specify the last block of the disk you are copying. The

/START:n notation must follow the input or output file specification. The
argument n with both /START and /END represents a decimal block

number,

You can use /START:n with the output file specification to specify the starting block number for the write operation on the output volume.
The following example copies blocks 500 to 550 of DLO: to DL1: starting at

block 100:

+COPY/DEVICE

DLO:/START:S00/END:550

DL1:/START:100

If you do not supply a value with /START, the system assumes the first block

on the volume. If you do not specify a value with /END, the system assumes

the last block on the volume. Note that the first block of a file or volume is

block 0.

/SYSTEM

Use this option if you need to copy system (.SYS) files and you
use wildcards in an input file type, or you use the /EXCLUDE option. If you

omit this option, the .SYS files are excluded from these operations and a
message is printed on the terminal to remind you.

4-54

Keyboard Commands

COPY

/TOPS This option transfers files on DECsystem—10 DECtape to RT-11
format. The option must follow the input file specification. Note that
DECtape is the only valid input device. You cannot perform this copy operation while a foreground job is running. Use /PACKED with /TOPS to convert
from TOPS-10 7-bit ASCII format to standard PDP-11 byte ASCII format.

If you use the /WAIT option with /TOPS, you must use two device drives for
the operation.

The following command copies in ASCII format all the files named
MODULE from the DECsystem—10 DECtape DTO0: to RT-11 device RKO:.
+COPY/ASCII

DTO:MODULE.*/TOPS

RKO: %, %

/VERIFY Use this option to verify that the output matches the input after
a copy operation between RT—11 directory-structured devices. If the two files
or devices are different, a message is printed on the terminal. This option
cannot be used with /ASCII or /BINARY.

/WAIT Use this option to copy from one disk to another if your system has
only a single-disk drive, if you want to use only one drive unit of a dual-drive
system for a copy operation, or if your system has dual drives but the system
volume is neither the input nor output volume. When you use this option,
the system initiates execution of a command but then pauses and prints the
message Continue?. At this time, you can remove the system disk and mount
the disk on which you want the operation to take place. Mount the new disk
and type a Y or any string beginning with Y, followed by a carriage return,
to resume the operation. If you type N, or any string beginning with N, or
two CTRL/Cs, and the system volume is still in place, the operation is not
performed and the keyboard monitor prompt (.) appears. If the system volume is not in place, the system prompts you to remount the system volume
before the system aborts the operation. Any other response causes the message to repeat.

When the operation completes the system prints the Continue? message
again. Mount the system volume and type a Y or any string beginning with
Y followed by a carriage return. If you type any other response the system
prompts you to mount the system volume until you type Y. The system then
prints the keyboard monitor prompt. Make sure PIP, DUP, and FILEX (if
necessary) are on your system volume when you use the /WAIT option.
The /WAIT option is valid with INTERCHANGE, /TOPS, and /DOS when
you have two device drives available for the operation, and with /DEVICE
when the input and output devices are different.

The /WAIT option cannot be used with /FILES.

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-55

COPY

Single-Volume Operation

If you want to transfer a file between two storage volumes, and you have
only one drive for that type of storage volume, follow the procedure below.
1. Enter a command string according to this general syntax:

.COPY/WAIT input-filespec output-filespec

where output-filespec represents the destination device and file specification, and input-filespec represents the source device and file speci-

fication.

2. The system responds by printing the following message at the terminal.
Mount

input

volume

<devicesj

Continue?

where <device> represents the device into which you are to mount your

input volume. Type a Y followed by a carriage return after you have
mounted your input volume.

3. The system continues the copy procedure and prints the following message on the terminal:
Mount

output

volume

<device>’

Continue?

After you have removed your input volume from the device, mount your
output volume, then type Y followed by a carriage return.
4. Depending on the size of the file, the system may repeat the transfer cycle
(steps 2 and 3) several times before the transfer is complete. When the
transfer is complete, the system prints the following prompt at the terminal:

Mount

svstem

volume

<device
>3

Continue?

When you mount your system volume and type a Y followed by a carriage

return in response to the last instruction, you terminate the copy opera-

tion.

Double-Volume Operation
If you have a small disk system, you can use the /WAIT option for transfer-

ring files between two nonsystem volumes. The procedure for transferring

files this way follows.

4-56

Keyboard Commands

COPY

. With your system volume mounted, enter a command according to the
following general syntax:

.COPY/WAIT input-filespec output-filespec

where output-filespec represents the destination device and file specification, and input-filespec represents the source device and file specification.

. After you have entered the last command string, the system responds
with the following prompt:
Mount

input

volume

<device:s

Continue?

Type a Y followed by a carriage return after you have mounted the input
volume.

. The system then prints the next instruction for you to mount the output
volume:
Mount

output

volume

<device>r3

Continue?

Type a Y followed by a carriage return in response to this message after
you have mounted the output volume.

. Unlike the single-volume transfer, the double-volume transfer involves
only one cycle of mounting the input and output volumes. When the file
transfer is complete, PIP prints the following instruction:
Mount

svystem

volume

1in

<device’s

Continue?

When you mount your system volume and type a Y followed by a carriage
return in response to the last instruction, you terminate the copy operation.

Keyboard Commands

4-57

CREATE

The CREATE command creates or extends a file with a specific name, location, and size on the random-access volume that you specify.

CREATE () filespec [{ /EXTENSION:n

}]

/START:n

/ALLOCATE
size

In the command syntax illustrated above, filespec represents the device and
file specifications of the file you wish to create or extend. If you are using the

CREATE command to create a file, this command creates only a directory
entry for the file. This command does not store any data in a file. You must
specify both the file name and type of the file you wish to create or extend.

If you attempt to create a file over a tentative file (one that was opened but

never closed) and the foreground job is loaded, the system prompts you to
confirm the operation. If you type Y to continue, the tentative file will be

written over. Be sure that you do not write over a tentative file being used by

the foreground job; this will corrupt the file and cause unpredictable results.

If you type a carriage return after typing CREATE, the system prompts

File?.

The following sections describe the options you can use with the CREATE
command.

/ALLOCATE:size

Use this option following the file specification to allocate the number of blocks you specify for the file you are creating; size represents a decimal number of blocks. A value of —1 indicates a file of the maxi-

mum size available on the volume. If you do not use /ALLOCATE, the

system assumes one block.

/EXTENSION:n

Use this option to extend an existing file by the number
of blocks you specify; n is a decimal number of blocks. When you use this
option following the file specification, make sure that there is enough
unused space on the volume for the size you specify (use the

DIRECTORY/FULL command to do this).

The following example illustrates the procedure for extending a file with
the CREATE command. In this example, BUILD.MAC is extended by 20

blocks. First, a DIRECTORY/FULL command determines whether there is
available space adjacent to BUILD.MAC.
+DIRECTORY/FULL DXO:
08-FEB-83

MYPROG.MAC
VTMAC
<

+MAC

UNUSED

Version 5.1, July 1984

4-58

Keyboard Commands

36P

19-JAN-83

«MAC

19-JAN-83

SYSMAC . MAC

19-JAN-B3

RT11S5J.8Y8

19-JAN-83

27-JAN-83

CREATE

1T
LELA
+

2
1

+SYS
JLBM

19-JAN-83
09-FEB-83

+SY5
o
BUILD +MAC

3
g0

19-JAN-B83
19-JAN-83

199
UNUSED >
Filess 262 Blocks
24 Free blocKks

Next, the CREATE command extends BUILD.MAC by 20 blocks.
,CREATE

DX0:BUILD.MAC/EXTENSION:ZO

/START:n Use this option to specify the starting block number of the file
you are creating. The argument n represents a decimal block number. If you
do not use /START, the system uses the first available space on the volume.
The following example illustrates the procedure for creating a file with the
CREATE command. In this example, SWAP.SYS is restored after having
been deleted. First, a DIRECTORY/DELETED command establishes the
starting block numbers of the deleted files on DXO0:
W DIRECTORY/DELETED
09-FEB-83

SWAP

+8YS5

0O Filess
204 Free

O Blocks
blockKs

DXO:

19-JAN-83

117

EMPTY.FIL 179

31-JAN-83 315

Next, the CREATE command restores SWAP.SYS, starting at block 117,
and the /ALLOCATE:n option allocates 25 blocks.

,CREATE DXO:SWAP.SYS/S5TART:117/ALLOCATE:ZS

See the RT-11 Software Support Manual for a detailed description of the
RT-11

file structure.

Keyboard Commands

4-59

D
The D (Deposit) command deposits octal values in memory, beginnin

g at

the location you specify.

(EP

address=valuel,...value]

In the command syntax illustrated above, address represents an octal

address that, when added to the relocation base value from the Base command

(if you used one), provides the actual address where the system must de-

posit the value(s). The argument value represents the new contents

of the
address. If you do not specify a value, the system assumes a value of
0. If
you specify more than one value and separate the values by commas,
the
system deposits the values in sequential locations, beginning at the
location you specify.

The D command accepts both word and byte addresses, but it always
executes the command as though you specified a word address. (If you specify
an odd address, the system decreases it by one to make it even.)
The D
command stores all values as word quantities.
Use commas to separate multiple values in the command line. Two or

more
adjacent commas cause the system to deposit zeroes at the location
you
specify and at subsequent locations, if indicated.

Note that you cannot specify an address that references a location

outside
the area of the background job. You can use the D command with GET
and
START to temporarily alter a program’s execution. Use the SAVE
command before START to make the alteration permanent.

The following command deposits zeroes into locations 300, 302,
306.

304, and

D 300=4 4,

The next command sets the base address to 0.
B

1000=370

The following command deposits 3705 into location 1000.

The next command sets the relocation base to 1000.
B

1000

The next command puts 2503 into location 1500 (offset of 500 from
the last
B command) and 22 into location 1502.
+D 300=2503,22
i

Version 5.1, July 1984

4-60

Keyboard Commands

DATE

Use the DATE command to set or to inspect the current system date.
DATE [

dd-mmm-yy]

In the command syntax shown above, dd represents the day (a decimal number from 1 to 31), mmm represents the first three characters of the name of
the month, and yy represents the year (a decimal number from 73 to 99).
To enter a date into the system, specify the date in the format described
above. The system uses this date for newly created files, for files that you
transfer to magtape or cassette, and for listing files. It is recommended that
you enter the system date as soon as you bootstrap the system.
The following example enters the current date.
+DATE

1B-MAY-B3

To display the current system date, type the DATE command without an
argument, as this example shows.
DATE

18-Mavy-83

The FB and XM monitors automatically increment the date at midnight
each day. The SJ monitor increments the date only if you select timer support as a system generation special feature. Note that you can also select
automatic end-of-month date advancement through system generation.

Keyboard Commands

4-61

DEASSIGN
The DEASSIGN command disassociates
a logical device name from a physical device name.

DEASSIGN [ ©P) logical-device-name]

In the command syntax illustrated above,

logical-device-name represents an
alphanumeric name, from one to three chara
cters long and followed by an

optional colon, that is assigned to a parti
cular device. Note that spaces and
tabs are not permitted in the logical device name.

To remove the assignment of a particular logica

device, specify that logical device name in the

l device name to a particular
command line. The following

example disassociates the logical name
INP: from the physical device to
which it is assigned.
.DEASSIGN

INP:

If you specify a logical name that is not

currently assigned, the system

prints an error message, as this example shows

+DEASSIGN

INP:

TKMON-W-Lodical

rname

not

found

INP:

To disassociate all logical names from physi

cal devices, type the DEASSIGN

command without an argument. The
following example disassociates all

logical device names (except SY:) from physi
cal devices and resets the logical names DK: and SY: to represent the syste
m volume.
+DEASSIGN

If DK: is assigned to a nonsystem device
(such as DY1:), the following command disassociates DK: from DY1: and
restores the default association of
DK: to SY:, the system device.
+DEASSIGN

4-62

Keyboard Commands

DK:

DELETE
The DELETE command deletes the files you specify.

DELETE[ [ /DOS
|

WAIT

)

filespecs

ANTERCHANGE
/WAIT
IENTRY

mmmuamfl
/SINCE[:date]
TDATE[:date]
/NEWFILES
/EXCLUDE
/ANFORMATION
LOG

/POSITION[:n]
/[NOJQUERY
/SYSTEM

—_—"

WAIT

In the command syntax shown above, filespecs represents the file(s) to be
deleted. You can specify up to six files; separate them with commas. You can
enter the DELETE command as one line, or you can rely on the system to
prompt you for information. If you omit the file specification, the DELETE
command prompts Files?. If you delete a file accidentally, it may be possible
to recover the file if you act immediately (see CREATE). A procedure for
doing this is described in Chapter 6 of the RT—11 System U'tilities Manual.
The system has a special way of handling system (.SYS) files and files that
cover bad blocks (.BAD files) so that you do not delete these files by accident.
The system requires you to use the /SYSTEM option when you need to delete
system files and you use wildcards in an input file type. To delete a .BAD
file, you must specify it by explicitly giving its file name and file type. Since
.BAD files cover bad blocks on a device, you do not need to copy, delete, or
otherwise manipulate these files.
To delete a protected file (a P next to the block size of a file’s directory entry
denotes protection), you must first remove protection from that file by using
the UNPROTECT command, the COPY/NOPROTECTION command, or the
RENAME/NOPROTECTION command.

Another feature of the DELETE command is that, unless you use /LOG or
INOQUERY, the system requests confirmation from you before it deletes a
file, if you use wildcards in the input specification. You must respond to the
query message by typing Y followed by a carriage return in order to execute
the command.

The following sections describe the options you can use with the DELETE
command. Some of the options accept a date as an argument. The syntax for
specifying the date is:
[dd][:mmm][:yy]

Keyboard Commands

463

DELETE

where:

represents the day (a decimal integer in the range 1-31)

mmm

represents the first three characters of the name of the month

represents the year (a decimal integer in the range 73—99)

The default value for the date is the current system date. If you omit any of
these values (dd, mmm, or yy), the system uses the values from the current
system date. For example, if you specify only the year ::82 and the current
system date is May 4, 1983, the system uses the date 4:MAY:82. If the cur-

rent date is not set, it is considered 0 (the same as for an undated file in a

directory listing).

If you have selected timer support through the system generation process,
but have not selected automatic end-of-month date advancement, make sure
that you set the date at the beginning of each month with the DATE com-

mand. If you fail to set the date at the beginning of each month, the system

prints -BAD- in the creation date column of each file created beyond the end-

of-month. (Note that you can eliminate -BAD- by using the RENAME/
SETDATE command after you set the date.)
/BEFORE[:date]

Use this option to delete only those files created before a
certain date. If you specify no date the current system date is used. The following command deletes all .SAV files on DYO: that were created before
March 20, 1983.
+DELETE/LOG/BEFORE:20:MAR:83
Files deleted:

:%,5AV

DYOsA..5AY
DYO:B.54AY
DYO:C.5AY

/DATE[:date]

Use this option to delete only those files with a certain creation date. If no date is specified the current system date is used. The follow-

ing command deletes all .MAC files on DK: that were created on February

20, 1983.

+DELETE/LOG/DATE:20:FEB:83
Files deleted:

DK :%,MAC

DK:A.MAC
DK

B ..MAC

DK:C.MAC

/DOS

Use this option to delete a file that is in DOS—-11 or RSTS/E format.
The valid devices for this type of file are disks or DECtapes. You cannot use
any option except /WAIT in combination with /DOS.

/ENTRY

Use this option to delete a job from the queue. Use /ENTRY
when QUEUE is running as a foreground or system job (see Chapter 17 of

the RT—11 System Utilities Manual, Queue Package).

4-64

Keyboard Commands

DELETE

When you use /ENTRY, you do not have to specify the input files in the job,
only the job name. If you have not specified a job name, the system uses the
first file name in the job as the job name. The following example deletes
MILLER from the queue:
+DELETE/ENTRY

MILLER

If QUEUE is printing a job when you delete that job, QUEUE immediately
stops processing that job.

/JEXCLUDE This option deletes all the files on a device except the ones
you specify. The following command, for example, deletes all files from DYO:
except .SAV files.

+DELETE/EXCLUDE DYO:#.5AV
PPIP-W-No +8SYS action
Files deleted:
7Y
DYo:ABC.OLD
Ty
DYO:AAF . OLD
7Y
DYO:COMB.,
DYO:MERGE.OLD 7 ¥

/INFORMATION Use this option to change the severity level of the error
message that prints when not all of the input files you specified are found. If
you do not use INFORMATION, the system prints an error message when it
is unable to find an input file, and execution halts after the command is processed. When you use INFORMATION, the system prints an informational
message to tell you which files it cannot find, but execution continues.
In the following example, the input files FILE1.TXT and FILE3.TXT are
deleted. However, since the system is unable to find DLO:FILE2.TXT, the
system prints a message to inform you.

)
.TXT
yDELETE/INFORMATION DLO:(FILEL1FILEZ2FILED
?PIP-I-File not found DLO:FILEZ.TKT

/INTERCHANGE Use this option to delete from a diskette a file that is in
interchange format. /WAIT is the only option you can use with
/INTERCHANGE.

/LOG This option lists on the terminal a log of the files that are deleted by
the current command. Note that if you specify /LOG, the system does not ask
you for confirmation before execution proceeds (that is, /LOG implies
/NOQUERY). Use both /LOG and /QUERY to invoke logging and querying.
/INEWFILES Use this option to delete only the files that have the current
system date. This is a convenient way to remove all the files that you just
created in a session at the computer. The following example deletes the
.BAK files created today.

yDELETE/NEWFILES DY1:%,.BAK
Files

deleted:

DY1:MERGE.BAK

Keyboard Commands

4-65

DELETE

/POSITION[:n]

You can use this option when you delete files from cassette. It permits you to move the tape and perform an operation at the point

you specify. Omitting the argument n has the same effect as setting n equal

to 0 (nis interpreted as a decimal number). The /POSITION:n option has the
following effect:

IfnisO:

The cassette rewinds and the system searches for the file you specify. If

you specify more than one file, or if you use a wildcard in the file spec-

ification, the cassette rewinds before each search.

Ifnisa positive integer:

The system starts from the cassette’s present position and searches for
the file you specify. If the system does not find the file you specify before
it reaches the nth file from its starting position, it deletes the nth file.
Note that if the starting position is not the beginning of the tape, it is
possible that the system will not find the file you specify, even though it
does exist on the tape.
3.

Ifnisanegative integer:

The cassette rewinds, then the system follows the procedure outlined in
step 2 above.
/QUERY Use this option to request confirmation before the system deletes
each file. This option is particularly useful on operations that involve wildcards, when you may not be completely sure which files the system selected

for the operation. This is the default mode of operation when you use wildcards in the file specifications. Note that specifying /LOG eliminates the

automatic query; you must specify /QUERY with /LOG to retain the query
function.

You must respond to a query message by typing Y or any string beginning
with Y, and a carriage return to initiate execution of a particular operation.

The system interprets any other response as NO:; it does not perform the
operation.

The following example shows querying. Only the file DX1:AAF.MAC is
deleted.
+DELETE/QUERY
Files

DY1:#%,%

deleted:

DY1:ABC.MAC

DY1:AAF .MAC

DY1:MERGE.FOR

/NOQUERY

N
N

This option suppresses the confirmation message the system
prints before it deletes each file.

4-66

Keyboard Commands

DELETE

/SINCE[:date] Use this option to delete only those files created on or after
a certain date. If you specify no date the current system date is used. The following command deletes all .SAV files on DYO0: that were created on or after
March 20, 1983.
+DELETE/LDG/SINCE:20:MAR:83
Files

DYO:%,5AV

deleted:

DYO:A.5AY
DYO:B.5AV
DYO:C.,8AY

/ISYSTEM Use this option if you need to delete system (.SYS) files and you
use wildcards in an input file type. If you omit this option, the system files
are excluded from the DELETE operation, and a message is printed on the
terminal. (Note that the system prints this message only when system files
would have been included in the operation.)
/WAIT This option is useful if you have a single-disk system of if you want
to use only one drive unit of a dual-drive system. When you use this option,

the system initiates the DELETE operation but then pauses for you to
mount the volume that contains the files you want to delete.

When the system pauses, it prints Mount input volume in <device>;
Continue?, where <device> represents the device into which you mount the
volume. Mount the volume and type Y or any string beginning with Y, followed by a carriage return. Type N or any string beginning with N, or two
CTRL/Cs, to abort the operation and return control to the keyboard monitor.
Any other response causes the message to repeat.

When the operation completes the system prints the Continue? message
again. Mount the system volume and type a Y or any string beginning with
Y, followed by a carriage return. If you type any other response the system
prompts you to mount the system volume until you type Y. The system then
prints the keyboard monitor prompt.

Make sure that PIP (and FILEX, if necessary) are on the system volume
when you use the /WAIT option.

The following example deletes FILE.MAC from an RLOZ2 disk:
+DELETE/HWAIT

Mount

ineput

Mount

system

DLO:FILE.MAC

volume

DLO:FILE.MACTMY

DLO:§F

Continue?

volume

DLO:§

Continue?

Keyboard Commands

467

DIBOL
The DIBOL command invokes the DIBOL compiler
to compile one or more
source programs.

DIBOL | /ALPHABETIZE

filespecs

/BUFFERING
/ICROSSREFERENCE

/[NOJLINENUMBERS
/LIST| filespec
/ALLOCATE
size
LOG

/[NOJOBJECT]:filespec]

/ALLOCATE :size

/ONDEBUG
IPAGE:n
/TABLES
[NOJWARNINGS

In the command syntax illustrated above, filespecs represents one or more
files to be included in the compilation. If you omit a file type for an input file,

the system assumes .DBL. Output default file types are for listing files and

.OBJ for object files. To compile multiple source files into a single object file,
separate the files by plus (+) signs in the command line. Unless you specify
otherwise, the system creates an object file with the same name as the first
input file and gives it an .OBJ file type. To compile multiple files in
independent compilations, separate the files by commas (,) in the command

line. This generates a corresponding object file for each set of input files.

Language options are position-dependent — that is, they have different

meanings depending on where you place them in the command line. Options

that qualify a command name apply across the entire command string.
Options that follow a file specification apply only to the file (or group of files
separated by plus signs) they follow in the command string.

You can enter the DIBOL command as one line, or you can rely on the sys-

tem to prompt you for information. The DIBOL command prompt is Files?

for the input specification.

The DIBOL~11 Language Reference Manual contains more detailed infor-

mation about using DIBOL. The following sections describe the options you

can use with the DIBOL command.

/ALLOCATE:size Use this option with /LIST or /OBJECT to reserve space
on the device for the output file. The argument size represents the number of

blocks of space to allocate. The meaningful range for this value is from 1 to

65535. A value of -1 is a special case that creates the largest file possible on
the device.

/ALPHABETIZE Use this option to alphabetize entries in the symbol and
label tables. This is useful for program maintenance and debugging.
/BUFFERING

Use this option to direct the compiler to use single buffering for I/O. Normally the compiler uses double buffering.

468

Keyboard Commands

DIBOL

ICROSSREFERENCE This option generates a symbol cross-reference
section in the listing to which it adds as many as four separate sections to
the listing. These sections are: symbol cross-reference table, label crossreference table, external subroutine cross-reference table, and COMMON
cross-reference table. Note that the system does not generate a listing by
default. You must also specify /LIST in the command line to get a crossreference listing.

/LINENUMBERS This option generates line numbers for the program
during compilation. These line numbers are referenced by the symbol table
segment, label table segment, and cross-reference listing; they are especially useful in debugging DIBOL programs. This is the default operation.
/INOLINENUMBERS This option suppresses the generation of line numbers during compilation, which produces a smaller program and optimizes
execution speed. Use this option to compile only programs that are already
debugged; otherwise the DIBOL error messages are difficult to interpret.
/LIST[:filespec] You must specify this option to produce a DIBOL compilation hsmng The /LIST option has different meanings depending on where
you place it in the command line. Note that anytime you type a colon after
the /LIST option (/LIST:) you must specify a device or a file specification
after the colon.

The /LIST option produces a listing on the line printer when /LIST follows
the DIBOL command. For example, the following command line produces a
line printer listing after compiling a DIBOL source file:
,DIBOL/LIST

MYPROGEED

When the /LIST option follows the file specification, it produces a listing file.
For example, the following command line produces the listing file
DK:MYPROG.LST after compiling a DIBOL source file:
+DIBOL

MYPROG/LISTEED

If you specify /LIST in the list of options that immediately follows the
DIBOL command, but omit a file specification, the DIBOL compiler generates a listing that prints on the line printer. If you follow /LIST with a device
name, the system creates a listing file on that device. If the device is a filestructured device, the system stores the listing file on that device, assigning
it the same name as the input file with a .LST file type. The following command produces a listing on the terminal.
+ODIBOL/LIST:TT:

The next command creates on RK3: a listing file called A.LST.
.DIBOL/LIST:RK3:

Keyboard Commands

4-69

DIBOL

If the /LIST option contains a name and file type to override the

default of
.LST, the system generates a listing file with that name. The following
command, for example, compiles A.DBL and B.DBL together, producin
g on
device DK: files A.OBJ and FILE1.OUT:
«DIBOL/LIST:FILEL.QUT

A+B

Another way to specify /LIST is to type it after the file specification to which
it applies. To produce a listing file with the same name as a particular

file, you can use a command similar to this one:
+DIBOL

input

A+B/LIST:RK3:

The command shown above compiles A.DBL and B.DBL together,
producing
files DK:A.OBJ and RK3:B.LST.
If you specify a file name on a /LIST option following a file specification
in
the command line, it has the same meaning as when it follows the command
.
The following two commands have the same results:
«DIBOLA/LIST:B
+DIBOL/LIST:BA

Both commands generate as output files A.OBJ and B.LST.
Remember that file options apply only to the file (or group of files that

separated by plus signs) they follow in the command string. For example:

are

+DIBOL+A/LIST
+B

This command compiles A.DBL, producing A.OBJ and A.LST. It also
compiles B.DBL, producing B.OBJ. However, it does not produce any
listing file
for the compilation of B.DBL.

/LOG

Use this option to create a log of error messages generated by the

compiler.

/OBJECTI(:filespec]

Use this option to specify a file name or device for the
object file. Note that anytime you type a colon after the /OBJECT option
(/OBJECT:) you must specify a device or a file specification after the
colon.

Because DIBOL creates object files by default, the following two commands

have the same meaning:
+DIBOL

+DIBOL/0OBJECT

4-70

Keyboard Commands

DIBOL

Both commands compile A.DBL and produce A.OBJ as output. The
JOBJECT option functions like the /LIST option; it can be either a command
or a file qualifier.

As a command option, /OBJECT applies across the entire command string.
The following command, for example, compiles A.DBL and B.DBL separately, creating object files A.OBJ and B.OBJ on RK1:.
W DIBOL/OBJECT:RK1:

Use /OBJECT as a file option to create an object file with a specific name or
destination. The following command compiles A.DBL and B.DBL together,
creating files B.LST and B.OBJ.
.DIBOL A+B/LIST/0BJECT

/NOOBJECT Use this option to suppress creation of an object file. As a
command option, /NOOBJECT suppresses all object files; as a file option, 1t
suppresses only the object file produced by the related input files.
In this command, for example, the system compiles A.DBL and B.DBL
together, producing files A.OBJ and B.LST. It also compiles C.DBL and produces C.LST, but does not produce C.OBJ.
,DIBOL A+B/LIST.C/NOOBJECT/LIST

JONDEBUG. This option includes an expanded symbol table in the object
file. You can then use a debugging program to find and correct errors in the
object file.

/PAGE:n Use this option to override the default listing page length of 66

lines. The meaningful range of values for the decimal argument n is 1 to
32768.

/TABLES Use this option to generate a symbol table and label table as
part of the listing. This information is useful for program maintenance and
debugging. Note that the system does not generate a listing by default. You
must also specify /LIST in the command line to produce an assembly listing.
/'WARNINGS Use this option to include warning messages in DIBOL
compiler diagnostic error messages. These messages call certain conditions
to your attention, but they do not interfere with the compilation. This is the
default operation.

/NOWARNINGS Use this option to suppress warning messages during
compilation.

Keyboard Commands

4-71

DIFFERENCES
The DIFFERENCES command compares
two files and lists the differences
between them.

DIFFERENCES

B /BINARY

;M /OUTPUT filespec }

[JALWAYS

]

/ALWAYS

/DEVICE

/END[:n]
IQUIET

EP) oldfile,newfile

/ALLOCATE:siz

/BYTES

/PRINTER

TERMINAL

__J

/SIPP:filespec
ALLOCATE :size

Ljfi“mm“[m]

/BLANKLINES

/CHANGEBAR

/[NOJCOMMENTS

/FORMFEED

/MATCH[:n]
/SLP filespec

ALLOCATE
size
AUDITTRAIL
/[NOJTRIM

m&m@m

In the command syntax shown above, oldfil

e represents the first file to be

compared and newfile represents the second

. The default output device is the

console terminal. The default file type for input
files is MAC; for output listing files it is .DIF. (Default file types do not
apply when you use wildcards in
a DIFFERENCES command line.) You can specif
y the entire command on
one line, or you can rely on the system to
prompt you for information. The
DIFFERENCES command prompts are File 1?
and File 22,

You can use wildcards in either input file specif

source file and binary file comparisons. When

ication to perform multiple

you use wildcards, the system

prints which files are being compared before
it lists the differences. The
DIFFERENCES command allows no implicit
wildcards.

A different type of comparison is performed
use wildcards in only one or in both of the

depending upon whether you
input file specifications. If you use

wildcards in only one of the input file specif
ications, the system compares
the file you specify without any wildcards
to all variations of the file specifi-

cation with wildcards. The wildcard repre
sents the part of the file specification to be varied. You can use this meth
od to compare one file to several
other files. For example, when the following
command line is executed, the

system compares the file TEST1.MAC

DY1: with the file name TEST2:

on device DYO: to all files on device

+ DIFFERENCES/MATCH: 1 /OUTPUT: TEST.D

DYO:TEST1.MAC DY1:TESTZ ., *

You can send the results of all the comparison
s to a file on a volume rather
than to the console by specifying a file name
with the /OUTPUT option. In
the above example, all differences from the
comparisons are sent to the file
TEST.DIF on device DK:.

4-72

Keyboard Commands

DIFFERENCES

If you use wildcards in both input file specifications, the wildcards represent
the part of a file specification you want to be the same in both files being
compared. You can use this method to compare several pairs of files; each
input file is compared to only one other input file. For example, when the following command line is executed, the system compares pairs of files; the first
input file in each pair has the file name PROG1, and the second has the file
name PROG2. The file type of both files in each pair must match.
+DIFFERENCES/BINARY DYO:PROGL.*,DY1:PROGZ . %

The system searches for the first file on DYO: with the file name PROG1, and
takes note of its file type. Then, the system searches DY1: for a file with the
file name PROG2 and the same file type as PROG1. If a match is found, the
system compares the two files and lists the differences on the console (or
sends the differences to an output file if one is specified). The system then
searches DYO: for more files with the file name PROG1 and DY1: for PROG2
files with matching file types.

The DIFFERENCES command is particularly useful when you want to com-

pare two similar versions of a source or binary program, typically an
updated version against a backup version. A file comparison listing highlights the changes made to a program during an editing session.

The DIFFERENCES command is also useful for creating command files that
can install patches to backup versions of programs so they match the
updated versions. The /SLP:filespec and /SIPP:filespec options are designed
especially for this purpose. The default file type for the output files created
by these options is .COM. You cannot use wildcards when creating SLP or
SIPP command files.

The following sections describe the various options you can use with the
DIFFERENCES command. Following the descriptions of the options is a
sample listing and an explanation of how to interpret it.

/ALLOCATE:size Use this option with /OUTPUT, /SLP, or /SIPP to
reserve space on the device for the output listing file. The argument size
represents the number of blocks of space to allocate. The meaningful range
for this value is from 1 to 65535. A value of —1 is a special case that creates
the largest file possible on the device.

JALWAYS When you use this option with /BINARY, /SIPP:filespec, or
/OUTPUT:filespec, the system creates an output file regardless of whether

there are any differences between the two input files. This option is useful
when running BATCH streams to prevent job step failures due to the
absence of a DIFFERENCES output file.

The /ALWAYS option is position dependent. That is, you must use it immediately after the output file to which you want it to apply. If you use it at the
end of the DIFFERENCES command, it applies to all output files.

Keyboard Commands

4-73

DIFFERENCES

/AUDITTRAIL Use this option with /SLP to specify an audit trail. The
/SLP option, described below, creates a command file which, when run with

the source language patch program (SLP), can patch oldfile so it matches

newfile. When you use SLP to modify a file, it creates an output file that has
audit trails. An audit trail is a string of characters that appears in the right
margin of each line that has been changed by the modification procedure.
The audit trail keeps track of the patches you make to the patched source
file.
By default, SLP uses the following characters for the audit trail:

When you use the /AUDITTRAIL option, the system prints the following

prompt at the terminal.
Audit

trail?

Enter a string of up to 12 ASCII characters that you want to use in place of
the default audit trail. Do not use the slash (/) in the audit trail.

/BINARY

When you use this option, the system compares two binary files
and lists the differences between them. This option is useful for comparing

memory image and relocatable image files (that is, machine runnable pro-

grams and object files) and provides a quick way of telling whether two files

are identical. For example, you can use /BINARY to tell whether two versions of a program produce identical output.

When you use /BINARY and do not specify an output file, the system prints

output at the terminal according to the following general syntax:

bbbbbb ooo/ ffffff ssssss xxxxxx
where:

bbbbbb

represents the octal block number of the block that contains
the difference

000

represents the octal offset within the block that contains the

difference

§iding

represents the value in the first file you are comparing

ssssss

represents the value in the second file you are comparing

xxxxxx

represents the logical exclusive OR of the two values in the

input files

If you use the /OUTPUT:filespec option with /BINARY, the system stores

the differences listing in the file you specify (if there are any differences
found), instead of printing the differences at the terminal.

4-74

Keyboard Commands

DIFFERENCES

/BLANKLINES Use this option to include blank lines in the file comparison. Normally, the system disregards blank lines.

/BYTES

When you use this option with /BINARY, the system lists the dif-

ferences byte-by-byte.

/JCHANGEBAR Use this option to create an output file that contains
newfile with a changebar character next to the lines in newfile that differ
from oldfile. The system inserts a vertical bar next to each line that has been
added to newfile, and a bullet (lowercase letter o) next to each line that has
been deleted.

The output defaults to the terminal. Use the /PRINTER option to list the
output on the line printer. Specify an output file with the /OUTPUT:filespec
option.

The sample that follows creates a listing of RTLIB.MAC with a changebar or
bullet character at the left margin of each line that is different from
RTLIB.BAK:

miFFEW%NmE{@fCHfiNQE%MW RTLIB.BAK »RTLIEB.MAC
JCOMMENTS When you use this option, the system includes in the file
comparison all assembly language comments it finds in the two files.
(Comments are preceded by a semicolon on the same line.) This is the
default operation.

/INOCOMMENTS Use this option to exclude comments from the comparison. (Comments are preceded by a semicolon on the same line.) This is useful
if you are comparing two MACRO source programs with similar contents
but different formats.

/DEVICE Use this command with /BINARY to compare two entire volumes starting with block 0. If one input volume is longer than the other the
system prints 2BINCOM-W-Device is longer DEV:. The system prints the
message ?BINCOM-W-Devices are different only if differences are found
before the point where one input volume ends and the longer one continues.

/ENDI[:n] Use this option with /BINARY to specify the ending block number of the file comparison, where n is an octal number that represents the
ending block number. If you do not supply a value with /END, the system
defaults to the last block of the file or volume.

/FORMFEED Use this option to include form feeds in the output listing.
Normally, the system compares form feeds but does not include them in the
output listing.

/MATCH[:n] Use this option to specify the number of lines from each file
that must agree to constitute a match. The value n is an integer in the range
1-200. The default value for n is 3. This option is invalid with /BINARY.

Keyboard Commands

4-75

DIFFERENCES

/OUTPUT:filespec

the output listing file.

Use this option to specify a device and file name for

Normally, the listing appears on the console terminal.
If you omit the file type for the listing file, the system uses .DIF. Note that

the system creates this file only if there are any differences found. Use the
/ALWAYS option, with /BINARY, if you want the system to create an output file regardless of whether any differences are found.

/PRINTER

Use this option to print a listing of differences on the printer.
Normally, the listing appears on the console terminal.

/QUIET

When you use this option with /BINARY, the system suppresses
printing the differences at the terminal and prints ?BINCOM-W-Files are

different or ZBINCOM-W-Devices are different, if applicable.
/SIPP:filespec

Use this option with /BINARY to output a file that you can

use as an input command file to the save image patch program (SIPP), where
filespec represents the name of the output file. The file you create with /SIPP
can patch oldfile so it matches newfile.

The example that follows creates an input command file which, when run
with SIPP, patches DEMOF1.BAK so it matches DEMOF1.SAV.
DIFFERENCES/BINARY/SIPP:PATCH,.COM

DEMOF1.BAK DEMOF1.5AY

To execute the input command file created by /SIPP, see Chapter 22 of the
RT-11 System Utilities Manual, Save Image Patch Program (SIPP).
/SLP[:filespec]

Use this option to create a command file that, when run
with the source language patch utility (SLP), patches oldfile to match
newfile. The default file type is .SLP. If you do not supply a file specification

with /SLP, the system prints the command file at the console.

The sample that follows creates the command file PATCH.COM.
PATCH.COM can be used as input to the SLP program to patch RTLIB.BAK
so that it matches RTLIB.MAC.
+DIFFERENCES/SLP:PATCH

RTLIB.BAK sRTLIB.MAC

To execute the command file you create with /SLP, see Chapter 23 of the
RT-11 System Utilities Manual, Source Language Patch Program (SLP).

You cannot use wildcards in a command line with the /SLP option.
/SPACES

This option includes spaces and tabs in the file comparison.
This is the default operation and is particularly useful when you are com-

paring two text files and must pay careful attention to spacing.

/NOSPACES

Use this option to exclude spaces and tabs from the file comparison. This is useful when you are comparing two source programs with
similar contents but different formats.

Version 5.1, July 1984

4-76

Keyboard Commands

DIFFERENCES

/ISTART[:n] Use this option with /BINARY to specify the starting block
number of the file comparison, where n represents the octal starting block
number. If you do not supply a value with /START, the system defaults to
the first block in the file.

/TERMINAL Use this option to cause the list of differences to appear on
the console terminal. This is the default operation.

To understand how to interpret the output listing, first look at the following
two text files.
«TYPE

FILEL.TXT

HERE’'S A BOTTLE AND AN HONEST FRIEND!

WHAT WAD YE WISH FOR MAIRs MANT?
WHA KENS: BEFORE HIS LIFE MAY END:
WHAT HIS SHAME MAY BE 0O’ CARE: MANT
THEN CATCH THE MOMENTS AS THEY FLY
AND USE THEM AS YE OUGHTs MAN: -BELIEVE ME, HAPPINESS IS SLY
AND COMES NOT AY WHEN SOUGHT. MAN.
-~SCOTTISH SONG

+TYPE

FILEZ.THT

HERE’S A BOTTLE AND AN HONEST FRIEND!

WHAT WAD YE WISH FOR MAIR: MANT?
WHA KENSs BEFORE HIS LIFE MAY END.»
WHAT HIS SHARE MAY BE 0’ CARE» MANY
THEN CATCH THE MOMENTS AS THEY FLY
AND USE THEM AS YE OUGHT,» MAN: -BELIEVE ME, HAPPINESS IS SHY»
AND COMES NOT AY WHEN SOUGHT: MAN.
--SCOTTISH

SONG

Notice that in the fourth line of FILE1.TXT, shame should be share; in the
seventh line, sly should be shy.

The following command compares the two files, creating a listing file called
DIFF.TXT.

*MIVWfiWfiMmfi%fMMYfiMx&fifl”TWUW&@iFF@T%TWILEK@T%T*FILEK@T%T

PORCCOM-W-Files

are

different

The following listing shows file DIFF.TXT.
+TYPE DIFF.THT
1) DK:FILEL.TKT
2) DK:FILEZ2.TXT
L
TE
R
I TEE

WHAT HIS SHAME MAY BE 0’ CAREs MANY
THEN CATCH THE MOMENTS AS THEY FLY

1)1
1)

* % % ¥

2)1
2)
33

WHAT HIS SHARE MAY BE 0O’ CARE. MANTY
THEN CATCH THE MOMENTS AS THEY FLY
N KKK

Keyboard Commands

4-77

DIFFERENCES

1)1

BELIEVE

AND

COMES

ME,»

HAPPINESS

NOT

WHEN

* KK
¥

2)1

BELIEVE

AND

COMES

ME,

HAPPINESS

NOT

WHEN

WKW
R
R
K

SLY,

SOUGHTs MAN.

SHY

SOUGHT
.

MAN,

If the files are different, the system always prints
the file specification of
each file as identification:
1)

DRK:FILEL,TH

DK:FILE2.TH

The numbers at the left margin have the form n)m,

source file (either 1 or 2) and m represents the

specific line is located.

where n represents the

page of that file on which the

The system next prints ten asterisks and then lists

the two files. The MATCH:n option was used in

the differences between
this example to set to 1 the

number of lines that must agree to constitute a match.

The first three lines of the song are the same in

appear in the listing. The fourth line contains

tem prints the fourth line from the first file,

line as a reference.
1)1

WHAT

THEN

HIS

CATCH

both files, so they do not

the first discrepancy. The sysfollowed by the next matching

SHAME
THE

¥ * *

MAY BE 0O’ CARE,; MAN?
MOMENTS AS THEY FLY,

The four asterisks terminate the differences sectio

n from the first file.

The system then prints the fourth line from the
second file, again followed
by the next matching line as a reference:
21

WHAT

2)
LR

THEN
X

TR E

HIS

CATCH

SHARE
THE

MAY BE 0’ CARE, MAN?
MOMENTS AS THEY FLY,

The ten asterisks terminate the listing for a partic

ular difference section.

The system scans the remaining lines in the files

in the same manner. When
OM-W-Files are different on

it reaches the end of each file, it prints ,SRCC

the terminal.

If you compare two files that are identical, the
system does not create an output listing, but prints:
PSRCCOM-I~-No

4-78

Keyboard Commands

differences

found

DIFFERENCES

If you use wildcards in the command line, the system always prints the specifications of the files being compared regardless of whether or not there are
differences.

/TRIM Use the /TRIM option with /SLP to ignore tabs and spaces that

appear at the ends of source lines. This is the default setting.
/INOTRIM Use /NOTRIM with /SLP to include in the comparison spaces

and tabs that appear at the ends of source lines. /TRIM is the default setting.

Keyboard Commands

4-79

DIRECTORY
The DIRECTORY command lists information you request

file, or a group of files.

DIRECTORY

/BACKUP

{ /OUTPUT filespec

/DOS

/ALLOCATE :size

filmpma]
/BEGIN

/TERMINAL

WAIT

WAIT
-

[

/PRINTER

/OWNER:[nnn,nnn)

ANTERCHANGE

}

about a device, a

/TOPS

WAIT

/BADBLOCKS

/END:n

/START:n

WAIT
/ALPHABETIZE

/REVERSE
4

/ORDER[:category]
/REVERSE

|
|

/POSITION

/S0 RT[:category]
/REVERSE

{Esmm;mw ] }
/BEFORE[:date]

/DATE[:date]

/NEWFILES
/BLOCKS
/BRIEF

/COLUMNS:n
/DELETED
/EXCLUDE

IFAST
/FREE

/FULL

/OCTAL

/[NOJPROTECTION
/SUMMARY
/VOLUMEID[:ONLY]

In the command syntax shown above, filespecs

group of files whose directory information

represents the device, file, or

you request. The DIRECTORY

command can list directory information about
a specific device, such as the
number of files stored on the device, their names
, and their creation dates. It
can list details about certain files including their
names, their file types, and
their size in blocks. You can specify up to six
files explicitly, but you can
obtain directory information about many files
by using wildcards in the file
specification. The DIRECTORY command can
also print a device directory

summary, organized in several ways,

such as alphabetical or chronological.

Normally, the DIRECTORY command prints listin

terminal. Read these listings as you would

umns, moving from left to right, one row

gs in two columns on the

read a book; read across the col-

at a time. Directory listings that

are sorted (with /ALPHABETIZE, /ORDE

R, or /SORT) are an exception to

this. Read these listings as you would a teleph

left column from top to bottom, then reading

bottom.

4-80

Keyboard Commands

one directory, by reading the
the right column from top to

DIRECTORY

The DIRECTORY command does not prompt you for any information. If you
omit the file specification, the system lists directory information about
device DK:, as this example shows.
+DIRECTORY
21-Apr-83

G7P
B3P
25P
3P
2P
41
19

RT115J.5%5
RT11BL.SYS
+5Y5
SWAP
+SYS
DP
+85YS5
LP
+ SAY
DUP
+5AYV
EDIT
SIPP

.SAV

Filess

Free

03-Mar-83
15-Mar-83
13-Feb-83
13-Mar-83
27-Jan-83
26-Mar-83
13-Feb-83

13-Feb-B3

RT1I1FB.SYS
+SYE
R
«8YS
TT
+SYS5
DY
+ SAY
PIP
RESORC.SAV
STARTS.COM

BOP
3P
2P
dP
16
15
1

13-Feb-83
13-Feb-B83
13-Apr-B83
13-Apr-83
2Z5-Mar-83
13-Apr-83
27-Jan-83

Blocks

413

blocks

A P next to the block size number of a file’s directory entry indicates that the
file is protected from deletion (see PROTECT, RENAME/PROTECTION,
and COPY/PROTECTION commands).

If you specify only a device in the file specification, the system lists directory
information about all the files on that device. If you specify a file name, the
system lists information about just that file, as this example shows.
JDIRECTORY DYO:RT11FB.SYS
10-Jan-83

RT11IFB.SYS
i

Files

Free

gOoP 89-Jan-83
BlockKs

blocks

The following sections describe the options you can use with the
DIRECTORY command and provide sample directory listings. Some of the
options accept a date or part of a date as an argument. The syntax for specifying the date is:

[dd][:mmm][:yy]
where:

represents the day (a decimal integer in the range 1-31)

mmm

represents the first three characters of the name of the month

represents the year (a decimal integer in the range 73-99)

The default value for the date is the current system date. If you omit any of

these values (dd, mmm, or yy), the system uses the values from the current
system date. For example, if you specify only the year ::82 and the current
system date is May 4, 1983, the system uses the date 4:MAY:82. If the current date is not set, it is considered O (the same as for an undated file in a
directory listing).

Keyboard Commands

4-81

DIRECTORY

prints -BAD- in the creation date column of each file created beyond the endof-month. (Note that you can eliminate -BAD- by using the RENAME/
SETDATE command after you set the date.)

/ALLOCATE:size Use this option with /OUTPUT to reserve space on the
device for the output listing file. The argument size represents the number

of blocks of space to allocate. The meaningful range for this value is from 1
to 65535. A value of —1 is a special case that creates the largest file possible
on the device.

/ALPHABETIZE

This option lists the directory of the device you specify
in alphabetical order by file name and file type. It has the same effect as the

/ORDER:NAME option. Note that this option sorts numbers after letters.
/BACKUP

This option lists the directory of the backup volume you
specify. This option lists only backup information about a volume created

with the/ BACKUP command.

The listing for a random-access volume begins with the system date and the
volume number of the specified backup volume, which indicates its position
within the set of volumes that compose a single file or volume. The volume

number is followed by a four-column listing of information about each volume in the set. The first column lists the volume numbers. The second col-

umn lists the name of the file, part of which resides on that volume. The

third column lists the number of blocks from the file each volume contains.
The last column lists the date on which the file or volume was backed up.

Underneath the four columns the system prints the number of free blocks on
the specified volume. Since this directory information is determined when

you first begin a backup operation, all the predetermined backup directory
information prints when you use this option even if you do not complete the
backup operation.

The following command lists the backup information for backup volume 3 of

the four-volume set that composes the file CAFIL.TXT.
+DIRECTORY/BACKUP

DYO:

23-Jan-83
YVOLUME

VOLUME

4-82

FILENAME

BLOCKS

DATE

CAFIL.BUP

980

£23-Jan-83

CAFIL.BUP

980

23d-Jan-83

Keyboard Commands

DIRECTORY

CAFIL.BUP

980

23-Jan-83

eyl

CAFIL.BUP

400

23-Jan~-83

files

free

980

blocKs

For magtapes, the listing appears in the same four-column format. However,
only the current system date, and information for the one magtape, is displayed. The third column lists the total number of blocks used in the set of
magtapes that compose the file or volume.

The next command lists the backup information for a magtape.
,DIRECTORY/BACKUP MT1:

23-Jan~-83

UVOLUME

FILENAME

DL1

«BUP

BLOCKS

DATE

20450

23-Jan-83

/'BADBLOCKS Sometimes volumes (disks and diskettes) have bad blocks,
or they develop bad blocks as a result of use and age. Use the/ BADBLOCKS
option to scan a volume and locate bad blocks on it. The system prints the
absolute block number of these blocks on the volumes that return hardware
errors when the system tries to read them. This procedure does not destroy
data that is already stored on the volume. Remember that block numbers
are listed in both octal and decimal, and the first block on a volume is block
0.

If a volume has no bad blocks, an informational message prints on the
terminal.

,DIRECTORY/BADBLOCKS DY1:

2DUP-I-No bad blocks detected DY1:

If BADBLOCKS is the only option in the command line, the volume being
scanned does not need a valid RT-11 directory structure.

/'BEFORE[:date] This option prints a directory of files created before the
date you specify. The following command lists on the terminal all files stored
on device DY1: created before February 1983.
,DIRECTORY/BEFORE:1:FEB:83 DY1:
14-Feb-83

MYPROG.MAC
UTMAC +MAC

RT115J.8Y5
+SYS
TT

BUILD .MAC
9 Filess
180 Free

36P
7
0
2

100

281 BlocKs
blocks

19-Nov-82
19-Nov-82
19-Nov-82
19-Nov-82

19-Nov-8B2

+MAC
TM
SYSMAC.MAC
RT115J.5YS
+85YS
DX

25
41

B7
3

27-Nov-BZ
19-Nov-B8Z

189-Nov-8Z
19-Nov-82

Keyboard Commands

4-83

DIRECTORY

/BEGIN

This option lists the directory of the device you
specify, beginning
with the file you name and including all the
files that follow it in the directory. The occurrence of file names in the
listing is the same as the order of
the files on the device.
The following example lists the file VTMA

C.MAC on device DYO: and all

the files that follow it in the directory.
+DIRECTORY

DYO:UTMAC,MAC/BECIN

10-Mar-83
YTMAC

+MAC

+SYS

10-Febh-83
13-Feh-823

STARTS.COM
SRCCOM.SAY

SLP

e SAY

Filess

Free

27-Feb-83

13-Fehbh-83

13-Feh-83

107

BlocKs

DIR

+SAY

EDIT

03-Feh-83

.SAY

DD
+8Y5
BINCOM.S5AY

03-Fehb-873

19-Febh-83

SIPP

0S5-Jan-873

05-Jan-87

.8AV

blocKs

/BLOCKS

This option prints a directory of the device
you specify and
includes the starting block number in decim
al (or in octal if you use
/OCTAL) of all the files listed. The followin g
DXO0:, including the starting block numbers of
+DIRECTORY/BLOCKS

DYO:

FSM
v 5YS
ELCOPY,MAC

31P

19-Nou-87

2955

ELTASK . MAC
ERRTXT.MAC
SYSTBL .BL

19-Nou-87

15P

3088

19-Nov-82

3111

19-Nov-B2
19-Nouv-B2

3174

15-Mar-B2

3204

11-Ser-B2
16-Mar-82

CHESS

3292

LAMP

14-Dec-82

S5YSTBL.DIS

4P 19-Nou-87

ABSLOD,SAY
PETAL

.,S5AY

WUMPUS, SAY
17 Filess
138

Free

30
348

Blocks

3186

BATCH ,MAC
ELINIT.MAC

102P

19-Nov-82

15P

ERROUT . MAC
SYCND .BL

19-Nov-82

3098

48P

19-Nov-82

19-Nov-82
19-Nov-82

3126

3190

SYCND

3195

example lists the directory of

files.

SYCND

3357

.DIS

.HD

SP 19-Nogu-82

298G

3183

13199

,SAU

17-Aug-87

132572

16-Mar-B87?

23328

blocks

/BRIEF

This option lists only file names and file types,
omitting file
lengths and associated dates. It produces a five-c
olumn listing, as the following example shows.
+DIRECTORY/BRIEF

14-Dec-82

RK1:

SWAP

.8YS

RT115J.8Y8

«5YS5

+SYS
+8¥YS8

vy 5Y8

.5YS

MMHD

CR
+ 8YSH
NUMBER . PAS

f SAY

«5YE

v S5

+9Y5

+SYS

s BY 5

+SYS

1 5YS

+SYS

RT11IBL.SYS

MTHD

WLOCK

.8YS

+SAY

MYPROG.MAC

+SYS

DISMT1.COM

PROG

MAP

«SYS

d53

Filess

Free

RT11FB.SYS

ANTONY . BAK

MSEHD

.85YS

+8Y 8

MYPROG.5AV

408

+SYS
BlocKs

«8YS

SYS

0ODT

s SAY

blocks

/COLUMNS:n

Use this option to list a directory in a specifi
c number of
columns. The value n represents an integer in
the range 1-9. Normally, the

4-84

Keyboard Commands

DIRECTORY

system uses two columns for regular listings and five columns for brief listings. The following example lists the directory information for device DY1:
in one column.

«DIRECTORY/COLUMNS:1
289-Jan-83

+8Y5
SWAP
RT115J.85Y%
RT11FB.SYS
RT11BL.SYS
+SYS
TT
«SY8
DT
+5Y5
DP
7 Filess
242 Free

DY¥1:

25P 19-Jan-83
B7P 19-Jan-83
gOP 19-Jan-83
G4P 19-Jan-83
2P 19-Jan-83
3P 19-Jan-83
3P 189-Jan-83
244 Blocks
blockKs

/DATE[:date] Use this option to include in the directory listing only those
files with a certain creation date. The following command lists all the files
on device DYO: that were created on April 21, 1983.
+DIRECTORY/DATE:21:APR:83 DYO:
26-ApPr-83

RT11S84.8YS5
RT11BL .5Y5
+5Y5
SWAP
+5Y5
DP
+SYS
LP
SAV
DUP
» SAY
DIR
+SAVY
EDIT
SRCCOM., SAY
+ SAY
SLP
20

Files:

Free

412

E7P
E3P
25P
3P
2P
41
17
18
13
g

21-Apr-83
21-Apr-83
21-Apr-83
21-Apr-83
21-Apr-83
21-Apr-83
21-Apr-83
21-Apr-83
21-Apr-83
21-Apr-83

RT11FB.5YS
+8YS
"
+5Y8
TT
+8Y5
DY
‘SaY
PIP
RESORC.S5AV
{1 8YS
RK
«BYS
Do
BINCOM.S5AY
.54V
SIPFP

BO0OP
3P
2P
4P
168
15
3
5
11
14

21-Apr-83
Z1-Apr-83
21-Apr-83
21-Apr-83
21-Apr-83
21-Apr-83
21-Apr-83
21-Apr-83
21-Apr-83
21-Apr-83

Blocks

blocKs

/'DELETED This option lists a directory of files that have been deleted
from a specific device, but whose file name information has not been
destroyed. The listing includes the file names, types, sizes, creation dates,
and starting block numbers in decimal of the files. The file names that print
also represent tentative files. The listing can be useful in recovering files
that have been accidentally deleted. Once you identify the file name and
location, you can use DUP or the CREATE command to rename the area (see
Section 6.2.1 of the RT—11 System Utilities Manual for this procedure).
The following command lists files on device DYO: that have been deleted.
+DIRECTORY/DELETED DYOu
14-Jan-83

SYSGEN.CND
+MAC
TM
468DAT.DIR
NUMZ +MAC

11
z6
1
4

O Filess O BlocKs
1164 Free blocks

19-Nov-82
19-Nov-82
14-Dec-8Z2
21-Nov-82

1403
28926
3701
4231

«MAC
TS
«5Y5
MT
468DEL.DIR
NUMZ LST

2
32
527
565

27-Nov-82 2885
27-Nov-82 3415
14-Dec-82 3704
0B6-Ser-82 4230

Note in the example shown above that, since a deleted file does not really
exist, the total number of files and blocks is 0.

Keyboard Commands

4-85

DIRECTORY

/DOS

Use this option to list the directory of a device that is in RSTS/E or
DOS format. The only other options valid with /DOS are /BRIEF, /FAST,

/OWNER, and /WAIT. The valid devices are DECtape (RSTS/E and
and RKO05 (DOS).

DOS),

/END:n

Use with /START:n and /BADBLOCKS to specify the last block
number of a bad block scan. If you do not specify /END:n, the system scans
to
the last block on the volume.

/EXCLUDE

This option lists a directory of all the files on a device except
those files you specify. The following example lists all files on DYO: except

the .SAV and .SYS files.
+DIRECTORY /EXCLUDE
29-0ct-82

DYO: (%,5A8Y,%,5Y8)

RT1154.+MAC

G7P

0G-S5er-82

RT11BL.MAC

B3P

0G-Ser-B82

RTL11FB.MAC

BOP

(0G-S5er-B82

+MAC

0B-S5ep-82

SWAP

+MAC

Z29P

0B-5er-B2

+ MAC

0G-Sep-82

0B6-Ser-B82

+MAC

s MAC

0G-Sep-B2

06-Sepr-82

+ MAC

27-Aug-82

0G6-Sep-82

«MAC

06G-Sep-82

STARTS . COM
12

Filesy

Free

258

BlockKs

blocks

/FAST

This option lists only file names and file types, omitting file lengths
and associated dates. This is the same as /BRIEF.

/FILES

Use this option with /BADBLOCKS to print the file names of bad
blocks. If the system does not find any bad blocks, it prints only the heading,
as the following example shows.
+DIRECTORY /BADBLOCKS/FILES

"DUP-I-No

bad

blocks

DY1:

detected

DY1:

Do not use this option if the volume is not a standard RT-11 directorystructured volume or if the volume does not contain an RT-11 directory.

/FREE

Use this option to print a directory of unused areas and the size of
each. This example lists the unused areas on device DK:.
+DIRECTORY /FREE

14-Jan-83
<

UNUSED

925

UNUSED

365

Filess

1162

4-86

Free

Keyboard Commands

BlocKs

blocks

DIRECTORY

/FULL This option lists the entire directory, including unused areas and
their sizes in blocks (decimal). The following example lists the entire directory for device DXO:.

DXO:

+DIRECTORY/FULL
14-Dec-82

25P 23-0ct-BZ

.5YS

SWAP

BOP 189-Now-BZ
2P 19-Nowv-BZ2
3P 23-0ct-B2
4P 19-Nov-82
3P 19-Nov-82
5P £23-0ct-8Z
5P 23-0ct-82
2P _ 19-Nouv-82
9P 27-Nouv-82
9p 27-Nov-82
11-Dec-8Z2
1
13-Dec-8BZ
1

RTL1IFB.SYS
+S5Y5
1T
+SY5
DP
+SY6
DY
+ SY5
RK
+ SYS
DM
+SY5
DD
+SY5
LS
+5Y5
MS
DISMT1.COM
NUMBER.PAS
+LST
NUM3

B7P 23-0ct-82Z

RT115J4.8YS

B4P
3P
3P
3P
4p
3P
2P
3P
3P
4P
14
164

RTLLBL.SYS
«5Y5
DT
+SY5
s
+8Y5
RF
+SY5
DL
+SY5
DS
+8Y5
LP
+5YS
CR
.5Y¥S
MTHD
.5YS
MMHD
+AGP
TONY
L UNUSED >

18-Nov-82
19-Nowv-8Z
19-Nov-8Z
189-Nouv-8Z
23-0ct-BZ
19-Nov-BZ2
23-0ct-8Z2
18-Nowv-82
23-0ct-8Z
19-Nov-B8Z
17-Aug-B8Z

Blocks

Files:y

322

164

Free

blocKs

Use this option to list the directory of a diskette that
JINTERCHANGE
is in interchange format. The only other options valid with
/INTERCHANGE are /BRIEF, /FAST, /'VOLUMEID, and /WAIT.
/NEWFILES This option includes in the directory listing only those files
created on the current day. This is a convenient way to list the files you created in one session at the computer. The following command lists the new
files created on 19 May 1983.
TDIRECTORY/NEWFILES
19-Mav-83

FILEL
2

+TXT

Filess

B56 Free

BlocKs

DYO:

19-Mav~-83

FILEZ +TXT

19-May-83

blockKs

/JOCTAL This option lists the sizes (and starting block numbers if you also
use /BLOCKS) in octal. If the device you specify is a magtape the system
prints the sequence numbers in octal. The following example shows an octal
listing of device DXO:.
LDIRECTORY/0CTAL
14-Dec-82 Octal

MYPROG.MAC
WTMAC +MAC
.5Y5
SWAP
RT1154.85%5
+5Y5
DX

44P
7
31
103
3

DXO:

12-Nou-B2
18-0ct-82
05-S5ep-8Z
19-Nowv-82
29-Aug-8BZ

+MAC
TM
SYSMAC . MAC
ANTON +MAC
+5Y5
TT
BUILD +MAC

31
51
4
2
144

27-Nov-8Z
19-Nouv-8Z
19-Nouv-B8Z
19-Nov-B8Z
19-Now-BZ

10 Filess 462 BlockKs
2?64 Free blocks

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-87

DIRECTORY

/ORDERI[:category]

This option sorts the directory of a device according
to the category you specify. Table 4-4 summarizes the categories and their

functions.

Table 4-4: DIRECTORY Sort Categories
Category

Function

DATE

Sorts the directory chronologically by creation date. Files that have the
same date are sorted alphabetically by file name and file type.

NAME

Sorts the directory alphabetically by file name. Files that have the same file

name are sorted alphabetically by file type (this has the same effect as the

/ALPHABETIZE option).

POSITION

Lists the files according to their position on the device (this is the same as

using /ORDER with no category).

SIZE

Sorts the directory based on file size in blocks. Files that are the same size
are sorted alphabetically by file name and file type.

TYPE

Sorts the directory alphabetically by file type. Files that have the same file
type are sorted alphabetically by file name.

The following examples list the directory of device DYO:, according to each of
the categories.

+DIRECTORY/ORDER:DATE

DVYO:

14-Dec-82

BUILD

+MAC

100

0B6-8ep-B82

+S5YS

SYSMAC . MAC

0O6-Sep-82

' 88

36P

12-0ct-82

19-Now-82

RFUNCT .MAC

WTMAC

+MAC

19-Nou-82

RT11SJ.5YS

y MAC

19-Nouw-82

27-Nou-B82

SWAP

.5YS

05-Dec-82

MYPROG.MAC

Filess,

3085

180

Free

blocks

Blocks

+DIRECTORY /ORDER :NAME

189-Nou-82

DYO:

14-Dec-82
BUILD

+MAC

100

O06-S5er-82

» 5YS8

SWAP

. 8YS

MYPROG.MAC

0B~-Serp-82

S5YSMAC . MAC

J6P

4
67

19-Nou-82

RFUNCT.S5YS
RT115J.,8Y8S

12-0ct-82

19-Now-82
19-Nov-82

+SYS

27-Nou-82

UTMAC

19-Nouw-82Z

+MAC

19-Nou-82Z

100

O0B-Sep-82

Filesy

306

180

Free

blocks

BlockKks

+DIRECTORY/ORDER:POSITION

+MAC

DY¥O:

14-Dec-82

RT115J.8Y8

189-Nowv-BZ

06-5ep-82

36P

BUILD +MAC
SYS5MAC . MAC

12-0ct-82

.85YS

MAC

05-Dec-82

RFUNCT.SYS

YTMAC

+MAC

19-Nov-82

19~-Nou-82

y BY G

19-Nou-B82

4-88

+5YS5
MYPROG.MAC
SWAP
10

Filessy

306

180

Free

blocks

Keyboard Commands

Blooks

19-Nou-82

27-Nov-82

DIRECTORY

+DIRECTORY/ORDER:SIZE
14-Dec-82

+8YS5
TT
+8YS
DX
RFUNCT.SYS
YTMAC +MAC
.SYS
SWAP

2
3
4
7
25

DYO:

19-Nov-82
0G6-Sep-82
19-Nov-82
19-Nov-82
05-Dec-82

+MAC
TM
MYPROG.MAC
SYSMAC « MAC
RT115J.58Y85
BUILD +MAC

27-Nov-8Z2
23
36P 12-0ct-82
41
19-Nou-82
19-Nouv-82
7
0B-Ser-B2
100

10 Filessy 30B Blocks
180 Free blockKs

+DIRECTORY /ORDER:TYPE
14-Dec-82

BUILD +MAC
MYPROG.MAC
SYSMAC «MAC
TM
+MAC
YTHMAC +MAC

DYO:

0OB-Serp-82
100
36P 12-0ct-82
41
19-Nouv-82
25
27-Nov-82
19-Nov-82
7

+8Y5
) K
RFUNCT.5YS
RT1154.5Y5
SWAP
. 8Y5
+ 8Y6
TT

3
4
67
25
2

06-~Sep-8BZ2
19-Nov-82
19-Nov-82
05-Dec-82
189-Nov-8Z

10 Filesy 306 BlocKs
180 Free blocks

/OUTPUT:filespec Use this option to specify a device and file name for
the output listing file. Normally, the directory listing appears on the console
terminal. If you omit the file type for the listing file, the system uses .DIR.
/OWNER/[:[nnn,nnn]] Use this option with /DOS to specify a user identification code (UIC). Note that the inner set of square brackets (immediately
surrounding the UIC) are part of the UIC; you must type them.

/POSITION

Use this option to list the file sequence numbers of files

stored on a magtape.

/PRINTER Use this option to print the directory listing on the line
printer. The default output device is the terminal. Note that the /PRINTER
option does not use the QUEUE program to queue the directory listing.

/PROTECTION This option includes in the directory listing only those
files on the specified volume that are protected against deletion. The following command lists only those files on DK: that are protected.
+DIRECTORY/ORDER:SIZE/REVERSE/PROTECTION
14-Dec-82

BUILD +MAC
RT1154.8YS
SYSMAC . MAC
MYPROG.MAC
.5YS
SWAP

100P
B7P
41P
36P
25P

0B-S5ep-B2Z
19-Nov-B2
19-Nov-82
12-0ct-82
05-Dec-8Z

+MAC
TM
VTMAC MAC
RFUNCT.EYS
+8YS5
DX
+S5Y5
TT

29P
7P
4P
3P
2P

27-Nouv-82
18-Nouv-82
19-Nov-8Z
0B-Sep-82
189-Nov-82

10 Filess 306 BlocKs
180 Free blocKs

/NOPROTECTION This option includes in the directory listing only
those files on the specified volume that are not protected against deletion.

Keyboard Commands

4-89

DIRECTORY
/REVERSE

This option lists a directory in the reverse order of the sort

you specify with /ALPHABETIZE, /ORDER, or /SORT. The following exam-

ple sorts the directory of DYO0: and lists it in reverse order by size.
+DIRECTORY/ORDER:SIZE/REVERSE

14-Dec-82
BUILD

DYO:

+MAC

100

RT1154.8Y8S

0OBG-Sep-82

+MAC

SYSMAC . MAC

19-Nouv-82

UTMAC

MAC

RFUNCT.S5YS

189-Nou-82

MYPROG.MAC

19-Nov-82

Jd6P

19-Nov-82

SWAP

12-0ct-82

+SY5

05-Dec-82

0G-Ser-82

+SYS

19-Nov-82

.8YS

Filess

306

180

Free

blocks

/SINCEl[:date]

Blocks

27-Nov-B2

This option lists a directory of all files on a specified vol-

ume created on or after a specified date. The following command lists only

those files on DK: created on or after August 13, 1982.
+DIRECTORY/SINCE:13:AUG:B?

14-Dec-83

RT115J.5Y8

G7P

RT11BL.5YS

14-Aug-82

B3P

RTL1FB,5YS5

SWAP

19-Aug-B2

.EBYS

23P

+S¥8

10-Sep-82

SIPP

02-5ep-B2

L, 5AV

+8YS

02-5ep-B2

15-Sep-82

Filess

332

Free

154

BOP

02-5ep-82

BlockKs

blocKs

/SORT[:category] This option sorts the directory of a device according to
the category you specify. It is the same as /ORDER/:category]. (See Table

4-4.)

/START:n

Use this option with the /BADBLOCKS option to specify the
starting block, and optionally the last block if you use /END:n, of the bad

block scan. The argument n represents a block number in decimal. If you do
not supply a value with /START, the system scans from the first block on the

volume. If you do not specify /END:n, the system scans to the end of the volume.

/SUMMARY

This option lists a summary of the device directory. The
summary lists the number of files in each segment and the number of
segments in use on the volume you specify. The /SUMMARY option does not
list

the segments in numerical order, only the order in which they are linked on
the volume. The following example lists the summary of the directory for

device DK:.

+DIRECTORY /SUMMARY
14-Mar-83

4-90

Files

sedment

Files

sedment

Files

sedment

Files

sedment

Files

sedment

Keyboard Commands

DIRECTORY
16 Auailable sedmentss S5 1n use
199 Files: 3647 BlocKs
1115

bhlockKs

Free

/TERMINAL This option lists directory information on the console terminal. This is the default operation.

/TOPS Use this option to list the directory of a DECtape that is in
DECsystem—10 format. The only other options valid with /TOPS are
/BRIEF, /FAST, and INTERCHANGE.

VOLUMEID[:ONLY] Use /VOLUMEID to print the volume ID and
owner name along with the directory listing of the storage volume. If you
include the optional argument, ONLY, the system prints only the volume ID
and owner name.

You can use /VOLUMEID[:ONLY] with /INTERCHANGE to display the
volume identification of the specified interchange diskette.
The following example displays the volume ID of volume DX1:
L,DIRECTORY/VOLUMEID DX1:
14-Dec-82

Yplume

ID:

OQwner

SWAP .8YS5
RT11FB.SYS
s SY 5
TT
+8Y 5
DP
+8YE
DY
v 8SYS
RK
1?2 Filess

?1%

Free

BACKUPZ
Marcy

271

25P 19-Nou-82
BOP 19-Nouv-82
ZP 19-Nouv-82
3P 19-Nov-B82
4P 19-Nov-82
3P 19-Now-8Z2
BlocKs

RT1185J.8Y5
RT11BL.SYS
+SYS
DT
yBY 5
"
s BYE
RF
+BY5
DL

B7P 19-Nov-82
B4P 19-Nov-82Z
3P 19-Nouv-82
3P 19-Nov-82
3P 19-Nou-82
4P 19-Nov-82

blocks

/'WAIT Use with the /BADBLOCKS option when you want the system to

initiate a bad block scan but to pause for you to mount the input volume.
This option is particularly useful if you have a single-disk system. When you
use this option, and the system volume is mounted, the system initiates the
operation you specify, then prints Mount input volume in <device>;
Continue?. The prompt <device> represents the device into which you
mount the volume. Mount your input volume and type Y or any string
beginning with Y, followed by a carriage return. Type N or any string beginning with N, or two CTRL/Cs, to abort the operation and return control to
the keyboard monitor. Any other response causes the message to repeat.

Make sure that DUP or FILEX is on the system volume when you use the

/WAIT option.

The following sample performs a bad block scan on an RLO2 disk.
DIRECTORY/WAIT/BADBLOCKS DLO:

Mount inPput volume in DLO: Continue? Y
?DUP-I-No bad blocKs detected DLO:

Mount svystem volume in DLO: Continue? Y

Keyboard Commands

4-91

DISMOUNT
The DISMOUNT

DISMOUNT

command disassociates a logical disk unit from a file.

logical-disk-unit

In the command syntax illustrated above, logica

l-disk-unit represents the
logical disk unit that you want to free from its current
assignment. Specify a
logical disk unit number in the form LDn:, where
n is an integer in the

range 0-7. If the logical disk has been assign
ed a logical device name, you
can free the logical disk unit by specifying the logical
device name. You can
specify the entire command on one line, or you
can rely on the system to

prompt you for information. The DISMOUNT

command prompt is Device?.

The following example frees logical disk unit 3 (LD3:)
assignment.
vDISMOUNT

LD3:

The following example shows another way of freein
it has been assigned the logical device name DAT.
+ASSIGN

LD3:

+ DISMOUNT

4-92

Keyboard Commands

from it’s current file

DAT

g logical disk unit 3, once

DUMP

or write to a
The DUMP command can print on the terminal or line printer,charac
ters, or
file all or any part of a file in octal words, octal bytes, ASCII
and

Radix—50 characters. It is particularly useful for examining directories
files that contain binary data.

pump

| { JOUTPUT:filespec

/INOJASCH
/BYTES
JEND:n

[FOREIGN
NGNORE
JONLY:n
/RADS0
/START:n

/WORDS

or file
In the command syntax shown above, filespec represents the device
prints on

you want to examine. If you do not specify an output file, the listing system
the line printer. If you do not specify a file type for an output file, thecan rely
uses .DMP. You can specify the entire command on one line, or you
on the system to prompt you for information. The DUMP command prompt
is Device or file?.

a block
Notice that some of the options ((ONLY, /START, and /END) accept
and
octal,
in
are
rs
numbe
block
all
that
number as an argument. Remember
block
l
decima
a
y
specif
To
that the first block of a device or file is block 0.
ng a file,
number, follow the number with a decimal point. If you are dumpi
file. If
the block numbers you specify are relative to the beginning of that
you are dumping a device, the block numbers are the absolute (physical)
block numbers on that device.

The system handles operations involving magtape differently from operations involving random-access devices. If you dump an RT-11 filecation, the
structured tape and specify only a device name in the file specifi
-tape 18
end-of
l
Logica
system reads only as far as the logical end-of-tape.
For
marks.
indicated by an end-of-file label (EOF1) followed by two tape
consecutive
non-file-structured tape, logical end-of-tape 1s indicated by two name
in the
device
the
only
y
tape marks. If you dump a cassette and specif
tape
,
dumps
pe
magta
file specification, the results are unpredictable. For
them
ters
mark messages appear in the output listing as the system encoun
on the tape.

NOTE

The DUMP operation does not print data from track O of diskettes.

Keyboard Commands

4-93

DUMP

The following sections describe the options

you can use with the DUMP com-

mand. Following the options are some sampl

e listings and an explanation of

how to interpret them.

/ALLOCATE:size
Use this option with /OUTPUT to reserve space
on the
device for the output listing file. The argum
ent size represents the number
of blocks of space to allocate. The meaningful
range for this value is from 1

to 65535. A value of -1 is a special case that
creates the largest file possible
on the device.

/ASCII

This option prints the ASCII equivalent of
each octal word or byte
that is dumped. A dot (.) represents characters
that are not printable. This is
the default operation.

/NOASCII

Use this option to suppress the ASCII output
, which appears in
the right hand column of the listing (or below
the bytes if you have specified
/BYTES). This allows the listing to fit in 72 colum
ns.
/BYTES

Use this option to display information in octal
bytes. The system
does not display words unless you also use /WOR
DS.

/END:n
Use this option to specify an ending block
number for the dump.
The system dumps the device or file you specif
y, beginning with block 0
(unless you use /START) and continuing until
it dumps the block you specify
with /END.

/FOREIGN

Use this option to dump a magtape that is not

structured.

/IGNORE

RT-11 file-

Use this option to ignore errors that occur
during a dump

operation. Use /IGNORE if an input or outpu

to perform a normal dump operation.

/ONLY:n

t error occurred when you tried

Use this option to dump only the block you specif

/OUTPUT:filespec

Use this option to specify a device and file
name for
the output listing file. Normally, the listin
g appears on the line printer. If

you omit the file type for the listing file,

the system uses .DMP.

/PRINTER

This option causes the output listing to appea
r on the line
printer. This is the default operation.

/RAD50

This option prints the Radix—50 equivalent
of each octal word
that is dumped.

/START:n

Use this option to specify a starting block
number for the
dump. The system dumps the device or file,
beginning at the block number

you specify with /START and continuing
to the end of the device or file

(unless you use /END).

/TERMINAL

This option causes the output listing to appea
r on the console terminal. Normally, the listing appears
on the line printer.

4-94

Keyboard Commands

040

012

Keyboard Commands

040

~J
st

040

Gonai

£}

fJ
A

Foot

i3
iet

N
=
f

olbe

e
[N

[0 = O

EF b [T] b

ek ] b

% bt e [T] b

rJ
=

£h
h
o

S OEe
rJ
~J
P—

fpcks

b3.—i [y LJ
£h
e
¥}

ot
-

rJ
3

0 s e

¥
81

rJ
L3

(7 =

ggg_q;w&
[y
R
B3

X
e

117

foocte

rJ
2

040

0 = (3 = T == [T] == T

104

)

-3
Ll

=
-t

124

—

PIES

L.
Fot
£n

[

e
£

‘

(#1!

“f

g
o

102

i
o

rJ
rJ

-3
%,
LJ

r-J
&=

forie

105

—

~J
;.s&m%;mt-

X~
O

fay

f3t

106

3
o

b
-

-3
£:3

117

E J

015

rJ
~J

O]
L

1 23

o)
e B o AD

056

o
Gl

fae

040

E 3

040 040 117 106 040 040
£ bon posi Bev (] b oams ¥

o T e
o
=
i
o

2l
L
B
vt

Eaad

J
=

s
§ot
-

i X [
o
=
b
2

122

rJ
&=

i
LJ

105

-3
ehn

=f s F e

rJ
&

L
o

o
0l
i

AN
L3

Pa—

Fonite

122

po—,

T ok

P—

-3
en

{- *%MKN{I{}{-&FMMWQ oo

fomste

.ot

I3
L

1|05

rJ
E2

P-J
.
in

Qw@w@wfiwmwfiwzz—*g} Py
%

53]

foke

-3

o)
3

nd i [F] bk 2 bR o

.
PJ

P
=

s ok

r~J
&=

= = )

fi%i—*“&*’&i%mfifikfizfi*

.
~J

[

040

T pef ek
B
o

Poamw
%

£h

S i - B S eB
| !
<3
=

105

ot
n

e O

3
LJ

[

3
3

106

E ]

%,
PJ
=

040

) e

Foke

=% =

rJ
LJ

107

i [

-3
L

103

E g

R
o

(1}

015

040
s

114

I-J

T bt

110

ool

102

105

110

117

s bd bt

0
:::z

froe

040

—f b

105

116
N
e

105
E

O e

040

r-J
&

131

114

116

-T

il =

040

O
e

040

T3 et 03 0

Yoo

fut

~J
LJ

Ot o]

106 040

T e =
rJ
9%
o

20
O ey
=

040

3
rJ

105

s I o
P

rJ
o

—f e [

~J
LJ

Don T - T S
-

-3

fube

~J
o

rJ
f

e UF A

O
e

O e [

rJ
o

= e

ra
o

75 wee] Pk oef bed

=-ot
e
-3

1 11

» I o

Sonchc

Pyo)
5y
N

015

—

PJ
o

i3
=

sggwgwwwgpfitfiwg}

-3
ot

040

= [0 = b b= [T] Foe

R
eI
-3

)

020/

TM3
3

e T

120 040 117

:z
it
o

e [T

B3
=

040

P
fo

Z e o

&
o

H
T
040 040 1
123
N
U
0
{)
040 040 123 110
116 104
H
D
N
040
1 02 1035 040 040 1
C
B
040 101 1 23 040 040 101 040
1
#

Foow

?p&

E>]

A
1

froatc

440/

20/

420/

400/

o
Gl

U0/

320/
o

2407

200/

160/

300/

140/

120/

[
rJ

100/

360/

fnte

060/

. MAC
SY:SYSMAC
BLOCK NUMBER 00001

000/

040/

)

+PRINT

)

DUMP

/WORDS This option displays information in octal words. This is the
default operation.

The following command dumps block 1 of the file SYSMAC“MA(}‘.. The (m:tw
put listing, which shows octal bytes and their ASCII equivalents, is stored in
file MACLIB.DMP. The PRINT command prints the contents of the file on
the line printer.

,DUMP/0OUTPUT:MACLIB/BYTES/0ONLY:1 SYSMAC.MAC
MACLIB.DMP

4-95

054

056

103

115

fffi

015

012

056

105

116

117

040

056

126

0B2

760/

012

056

115

036

115

103

011

056

103

115

0536

103

115

036

056

103

115

0B2

054

1153

063

054

056

103

115

103

115

064

054

056

0SB

o
o
0l

056

740/

104

lfs}

7207

126

700/

036
%

o
ol

GBO/

G40/

056

058

054

0B3

115

G20/

054

0B1

115

103

0SB

056

o
o

0 UV

114

o
o

101

103

o
i

115

BOO/

056

9B0/

o
53
3

DUMP

In the printout above, the headin g shows which file

was dumped and which
block of the file follow s. The numbers in the leftmo
st column indicate the
byte offset from the beginning of the block. Remem
ber that these are all
octal values, and that there are two bytes per
word. The octal bytes that

were dumped appear in the next 16 columns.

The ASCII equivalent of each
octal byte appears underneath the byte. The system
substitutes a dot (.) for

nonprinting codes, such as those for control charac

ters.

The following example shows block 6 (the direct

put is in octal words with Radix—50 equivalents
+DUMP/NDASCII/RADS0O/0ONLY:6

ory) of device RKO:. The out-

below each word.

RKO:

RKO:/N/X/0:6
BLOCK
OO0/
020/

NUMBER
000C
QOOOZ20

OOO0R
000002

Q73273

000031

8 "mf!' 9

040/

000103

0000C

1007

120/

mmmmm

QO2000
LYY

DOZ2000

016040

mmmmmm

1FB

85YS

141034

073273

SYS

078273

Q75273

073273
mmmmm

073273
0000 03

000004

OO0 0000

027147

GP9
027147
GPY

GPY

Keyboard Commands

mmmmmm

Q02000
ATAY

wwwww

027147

GPY
mmmmm

027147

GPY

C
OQOO000

wwwww

027147

OO0 200 O
TRV

015340

027147

QOZ000
AT

LAY

Q71070

¥X

002000
o

LAY

Q70560

QO2000
LYY

ODOZ2000

GPY
mmmmmm

mmmmm

wwwww

B
QOOO00

GPO

5YS

4-96

RT1

8Y5

8Ys

240/

SYS
Q00120

SYS
Q000000

073273

1BL

GP9

142302

017167

073273

LYY

0B200

141262

QOOO00

0735131
SWA

RT1

071677

RT1

100040

220/

ATRY.

071677

Y X

200/

QOZ000

Q02000

QOZ2000

000000

027147

Q02000

027147
GPY

180/

000046

GPY

027147

015600

mmmmm

VAT

140/

wwwww

GPY

Q00000
S

\tf

A%
OGO/

mmmm

L A

016300
7

016350

wwwwww

m "h{
mmmmmm

{

mmmmmmm

5YS

mmmmmm

mmmmm

FK
QOOO00

075273

SYS

mmmmmm

mmmmm

DUMP

027147

GPSY

Q02000
Y R

014640
DD
340/

00000

360/

075273

QOOOO0O0

075273

000003

DS
000000

5YS
Q00003

000000

075273
SYS

0O000Z

0735273

SYS

000003

420/

Q00000

440/

027147

Q00002 000000

027147
GPY
002000

GWO
GP3

460/
S00/

S20/
540/

002000

QOZ000 015173
YR

051520 014400
MMH

015173

052200

012445

DIS

MTZ2

COM

014400

075273

000004

SYS

075273
000002
B

BOO/

OO0000

G20/

027147
GPY

640/

DOZ2000

023752
FOR

700/
720/

OB0Z223

740/

OOQ000

GPS8
027147 002000
VK
GP9
Q02000 QOBZS0
Y

760/

012620

052070
MS

8YS

012445
COM

000011

SYS

000010

wwwwww

0z27147
002000
YR

012740

027147
002000

062240

0273547

027147
GPO

027147
GPY

027147 QOZ000
YR

002000

KED

054340

¥R

052100
MSH
000000

073273

075273

000003

SYS

GOCO0O0

078273

000003

C
mmmmmm

000007

OO00S1

002000

000000

mmmmmm

027147

GPO

G
mmmmm

027147
GPY

AA
000000

027147

QOZ2000

0GOZ000
YR

070333

GPY

{ ¥

LYY

017751
F

015172

wwwww

DIR

¥R

002000

042614

OOZ2000

SYS

073273

027347

062170

GPY

027147

Q02000

PD
0O0000

S
wwwww

QOO000

¥R

GWO

wwwwwww

5YS

000000

¥R

CT
QOOOOO0

000011

5YS
000003
C

GWO

000000

073273

075273

GPY

000000

LP
000000

SYS

mmmmm

073273

Q00000

052177
MT1

046770

046600

002000

8YS

0QO000

002000

MTH

000023

GPS

002000

075273

030574 073376
SAY
MAT
073376 QO0017

mmmmmm

027147

GPS

014400

SAY

000021

002000

052150

DUP

SAaY

QOO000

O0Z000

073376

027147
GPY

027147

016130 000000

073376
GOo0s82

027147

GPY

E
000000

GPY

ORC

5aY

uuuuuu

000000

GPY

GPY
wwwwww

wwwwww

8Y5
S60/

BBO/

DIS

027147

GP3

000000

000005

8YS

SYS

400/

075273

002000 015410
DM
YK
015770 000000

073273

050533

074324

5YS

MAC

SML

076400

073376

000023

5AY

073376

000073

SAV

S
Q00000
e

wwwwww

Keyboard Commands

4-97

E
The E (Examine) command prints in octal the contents

console terminal.

of an address on the

address|-address]

In the command syntax illustrated above, address represe
nts an octal
address that, when added to the relocation base value
from the Base command, provides the actual address that the system examin
es. This command
permits you to open specific locations in memory and
inspect their contents.
It is most frequently used after a GET command to
examine locations in a

program.

The Examine command accepts both word and byte address
executes the command as though you specified a word

an odd address, the system decreases it by one.

es, but it always

address. If you specify

If you specify more than one address (in the form address
system prints the contents of address1 through

l-address2), the

address2, inclusive. The sec-

ond address (address2) must always be greater than the
first address. If you
do not specify an address, the system prints the contents
of relative location

Note that you cannot examine addresses outside the backgr

ound.

The following example prints the contents of locatio
n 1000, assuming the
relocation base is 0.
JE

1000

127401

The next command sets the relocation base to 1000.
B

1000

The following command prints the contents of locatio
ns 2000 (offset of 1000
from last B command) through 2005.
B

1001-1005

127401

4-98

007624

Keyboard Commands

127400

The EDIT command invokes the text editor.
epit

| [/EDIT

/KED
[TECO

—

KEX
N /K52

T'@ " (/CREATECT
/INSPE

[EXECUTE:filespec

4
|

/QUTPUT filespec
/ALLOCATE :size

P filespec

/ALLOCATE :size

es or modifies ASCII files for
The text editor, EDIT, is a program that creat
RO assembler or the FORTRAN
use as input to programs such as the MAC
input device, makes speccompiler. The editor reads ASCII files fromutany
e. It also allows efficient
ified changes, and writes the files on an outpwaredevic
is part of the system
this
use of VT11 or VS60 graphics display hard , if
configuration (except in multiterminal systems).

or KEX for VT100-compatible terYou can also use the keypad editor (KED alter
native to EDIT if you have a
minals, K52 for VT52 terminals) as an ad edito
with the /KED, /KEX, or
video terminal. You can invoke the keyp informatrion
on the keypad editor,
/K52 options described below. For more
see the PDP-11 Keypad Editor User’s Guide.
NOTE

lt editor
You can use the SET EDIT command to set a defauissue
(EDIT, KED, KEX, K52, or TECO) so that when youm defauthe
lts
EDIT command, you invoke that editor. The syste ver. For
to the EDIT editor each time you bootstrap, howen.
more details, see the SET EDIT command descriptio

al units called pages. A page of
EDIT considers a file to be divided into logic
by form feed characters) and
text is generally 50-60 lines long (delimited
cal page of a program listing. EDIT
corresponds approximately to a physithe
internal buffers
reads one page of text at a time from input file into its use
editing comwhere the page becomes available for editing. You can then
mands to:

e Locate text to be changed
e Execute and verify the changes

e List an edited page on the console terminal
e QOutput a page of text to the output file

filespec represents the file you
In the command syntax illustrated above, and
comm on one line, or you can rely
wish to edit. You can enter the EDITmatio
n. If you do not supply a file specon the system to prompt you for infor prom
pts File?. If you do not specify
ification for the file to edit, the system
Keyboard Commands 4-99

EDIT

any option with the EDIT
command, the text editor perf
orms the

edit
backup operation. To do this, it chan
ges the name of the original file, givi
ng
it a file type of .BAK when you
finish making your editing chan
ges. The
actual

file renaming occurs when you

When you want to edit an existing

operation as a result of your

the editor to read the first page of

I/O

R command to

text and make it available for you

kes EDIT, opens an existing file,

the first page of text:
+EDIT

file, the editor does not perform any

command. You must issue the

on. The following example invo

*¥NE$

successfully exit from the editor.

to work

and reads

MYFILE,THT

When you issue an EDIT command,

the system invokes the text editor.

can use the SET EDIT comman

d to set the default editor. If you

the SET EDIT command, the syst

em assumes EDIT.SAV each time

issue the EDIT command.
information.)

See the

It is possible to receive an error or

command. If, for example, the

(You

do not use

you
SET EDIT command for mor
e

warning message as a result of the

file you need to edit with EDI

EDIT

T does not exist

on device DK:, the editor issues
an error message and remains in
control.
For example:
+EDIT/INSPECT EXAMPI
., THT
PEDIT-F-File not found

*CTRLOESDESC

When a situation like this occur
s, you can either issue another
command
directly to the text editor or ente
r CTRL/C followed by two ESCAPE
s to
return
control to the monitor.

NOTE

To perform any edit operations
on a protected file, you must
disable the file’s protected status
(see the descriptions of the
UNPROTECT command, the COP
Y/NOPROTECTION com-

mand, or the RENAME/N OPR

OTECTION command).

The following sections describe the

mand. A complete description of

/ALLOCATE:size

options you can use with the EDI

EDIT is contained in Chapter 6.

Use this option with /OUTPUT

cation to reserve space on the

represents the number of

or after the file specifi-

device for the output file. The

blocks of space to allocate.

T com-

argument size

The meaningful range

for this value is from 1 to 65535.
A value of -1 is a special case that
creates
the largest file possible on the devi
ce.

4-100

Keyboard Commands

EDIT

JCREATE Use this option to build a new file. With EDIT you can also create a new file while you are working with the text editor by using the Edit
Write (EW) command, described in Chapter 6.

The following example creates a file called NEWFIL.TXT on device DK:,
inserts one line of text, and then closes the file.
JEDIT/CREATE

¥*ITHIS

NEWFIL.TXT
NEW

FILE.

[ESOESO
g

—

To create a file using KED, KEX, or K52, use the /KED, /KEX, or /K52
options with /CREATE. See the PDP-11 Keypad Editor User’s Guide for
more information on creating files with /KED, /KEX, or /K52.

This option invokes the editor EDIT. This is the default editor.
/JEXECUTE:filespec Use this option with /TECO to execute the TECO

/EDIT

commands contained in the file you specify.

/INSPECT Use this option to open a file for reading. This option does not
create any new output files. You can also open a file for inspection while you
are working with EDIT by using the Edit Read (ER) command, which is
explained in Chapter 6 of this manual.

The following commands open an existing file for inspection, list its contents, and then exit.
W EDIT/INSPECT
* RESOESO
* / L (ESO(ESO)
I—

THIS

—

NEW

NEWFIL.TAT

FILE.

*CTRLIOESOESD

/JKED This option invokes the keypad editor (KED). For more information on the keypad editor, see the PDP-11 Keypad Editor User’s Guide. Use
/KED only if you are using a VT100-compatible terminal.
/KEX This option invokes a specialized version of the keypad editor
(KEX). KEX is a version of KED for use only as a background job under the
XM monitor. Use /KEX only if you are using a VT100-compatible terminal.
/K52 This option invokes the Keypad Editor. Use /K52 only if you are
using a VT52 terminal. For more information on the Keypad Editor, see the
PDP-11 Keypad Editor User’s Guide.

Keyboard Commands

4-101

EDIT

/OUTPUT:filespec

This option directs the text you edit to the file you
specify, leaving the input file unchanged. You can also write
text to an
output file while you are working with EDIT by using the Edit Write
(EW)

command, explained in Chapter 6. The following command reads
file
ORIG.TXT, and writes the edited text to file CHANGE.TXT.
+EDIT/0UTPUT:CHANGE . THT

ORIG.THT

/TECO

This option invokes the TECO editor. (TECO is not supported
by
DIGITAL.)

Version 5.1, July 1984

4-102

Keyboard Commands

EXECUTE
The EXECUTE command invokes one or more language processors to
assemble or compile the files you specify. It also links object modules and initiates execution of the resultant program.

EXECUTE

/BOTTOM:n

P filespec [/LIBRARY]

/DEBUG:filespec]
/DUPLICATE
/EXECUTE[ filespec]
size
/ALLOCATE
/GLOBAL
/LINKLIBRARY :filespec
/LIST[:filespec]
/ALLOCATE :size
/MAP[:filespec]
/ALLOCATE
size
WIDE
JOBJECT[ filespec]
/ALLOCATE :size

/PROMPT

/INOJRUN

4 /DIBOL

/ALPHABETIZE
/BUFFERING

/CROSSREFERENCE

/INOJLINENUMBERS

LOG

/ONDEBUG
/PAGE:n

/TABLES
[[NOJWARNINGS
/FORTRAN
JCODE type

/DIAGNOSE

< | EXTEND

/HEADER

/14

/INOJLINENUMBERS

/ONDEBU

/RECORD:length
/SHOW([:type]
/STATISTICS
INOISWAP

JUNITS:n

/INOJVECTORS

/[NO]WARNINGS

/MACRO

TCROSSREFERENCE[:type[....type]
|
/DISABLE typel....type]
/ENABLE:type[...;type]

o flmwmw typel...;type]

In the command line shown above, filespecs represents one or more files to be
included in the assembly. The default file types for the output files are .LLST
for listing files, .MAP for load map files, .OBdJ for object files, and.SAV for
memory image files. The defaults for input files depend on the language
processor involved. These defaults include .MAC for MACRO files, .FOR for
FORTRAN files, and .DBL for DIBOL files.
To compile (or assemble) multiple source files into a single object file, separate the files by plus (+) signs in the command line. Unless you specify

otherwise, the system creates an object file with the same name as the first
input file and gives it an .OBJ file type.

Keyboard Commands

4-103

EXECUTE
To compile multiple files in independent compilations, separate the files by
commas (,) in the command line. This generates a corresponding object file

for each input file. The system then links together all the object files and creates a single executable file.

You can combine up to six files for a compilation producing a single object

file. You can specify the entire EXECUTE command as one line, or you can
rely on the system to prompt you for information. The EXECUTE command
prompt is Files?.

There are several ways to establish which language processor the
EXECUTE command invokes:
1.

Specify a language-name option, such as MACRO to invoke the MACRO
assembler.

Omit the language-name option and explicitly specify the file type for
the source files. The EXECUTE command then invokes the language
processor that corresponds to that file type. Specifying the file

SOURCE.MAC, for example, invokes the MACRO assembler.
3.

Let the system choose a file type of MAC, .DBL, or .FOR for the source
file you name. The handler for the device you specify must be loaded. If
you specify DX1:A, and the DX handler is loaded, the system searches

for source files

A MAC and A.DBL, in that order. If it finds one of these

files, the system invokes the corresponding language processor. If it can-

not find one of these files, or if the device handler associated with the

input file is not resident, the system assumes a file type of .FOR and

invokes the FORTRAN compiler.

If the language processor selected as a result of the procedure described

above is not on the system device (SY:), the system issues an error

message.

Language options are position-dependent. That is, they have different
meanings depending on where you place them in the command line. Options

that qualify a command name apply across the entire command string.
Options that follow a file specification apply only to the file (or group of files
separated by plus signs) that they follow in the command string.

The following sections describe the options you can use with the EXECUTE
command.

/ALLOCATE:size

Use this option with /EXECUTE, /LIST, /MAP, or

/OBJECT to reserve space on the device for the output file. The argument

size represents the number of blocks of space to allocate. The meaningful

range for this value is from 1 to 65535. A value of —1 is a special case that

creates the largest file possible on the device.

4-104

Keyboard Commands

;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;

EXECUTE

/ALPHABETIZE Use this option with /DIBOL to alphabetize the entries
in the symbol table listing. This is useful for program maintenance and
debugging.

/BOTTOM:n Use this option to specify the lowest address to be used by
the relocatable code in the load module. The argument n represents a sixdigit, unsigned, even octal number. If you do not use this option, the system
positions the load module so that the lowest address is location 1000 (octal).
This option is invalid for foreground links.

/'BUFFERING Use this option with /DIBOL to direct the compiler to use
single buffering for I/O. Normally the compiler uses double buifering.

/CODE:type Use this option with /FORTRAN to produce object code that
is designed for a particular hardware configuration. The argument type

represents a three-letter abbreviation for the type of code to be produced.

The valid values are: EAE, EIS, FIS, and THR. See the RT-11/RSTS/E
FORTRAN IV User’s Guide for a complete description of the types of code
and their function.

/ICROSSREFERENCE[:typel....typell Use this option with /MACRO or
/DIBOL to generate a symbol cross-reference section in the listing. This
information is useful for program maintenance and debugging. Note that
the system does not generate a listing by default. You must also specify
/LIST in the command line to get a cross-reference listing.

With MACRO, this option takes an optional argument. The argument type
represents a one-character code that indicates which sections of the crossreference listing the assembler should include. Table 4-11 summarizes the
valid arguments and their meaning.

/DEBUGI:filespec] Use this option to link ODT (On-Line Debugging
Technique, described in Chapter 20 of the RT-11 System Utilities Manual)
with your program to help you debug it. If you supply the name of another
debugging program, the system links the debugger you specify with your
program. The debugger is always linked low in memory relative to your
program.

/DIAGNOSE Use this option with /FORTRAN to help analyze an internal
compiler error. /DIAGNOSE expands the crash dump information to inciude
internal compiler tables and buffers. Submit the diagnostic printout to
DIGITAL with a software performance report (SPR) form. The information
in the listing can help DIGITAL programmers locate the compiler error and
1t.
correct

/DIBOL

This option invokes the DIBOL language processor to compile the

associated files.

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-105

EXECUTE
/DISABLE:typel....type]

Use this option with /MACRO to specify a
.DSABL directive. Table 4-12 summarizes the arguments and their mean-

ing. See the PDP-11 MACRO Language Reference Manual for a description
of the directive and a list of all valid types.

/DUPLICATE
Use this option to place duplicate copies of a library module in each overlay segment that references the module. This option is useful
in reducing the size of the root segment of your program. When you have
entered the complete EXECUTE command, the system prompts you for the
names of the global symbols in the library module you want to duplicate.

The prompt is:
Durplicate

symbol?

Respond by typing the name of each global symbol you want to duplicate.
Terminate each response with a carriage return. Type a carriage return

after the last global symbol you want to duplicate.

See Chapter 11 of the RT-11 System Utilities Manual for more information
on duplicating library modules.
/ENABLE:typel....type]

Use this option with /MACRO to specify an
.ENABL directive. Table 4-12 summarizes the arguments and their mean-

ing. See the PDP-11 MACRO Language Reference Manual for a description
of the directive and a list of all valid types.

/EXECUTE[:filespec]
Use this option to specify a file name or device for
the executable file. Note that anytime you type a colon after the E
/ XECUTE

option (/EXECUTE:) you must specify a device or a file specification after
the colon.

Because the EXECUTE command creates executable files by default, the fol-

lowing two commands have the same meaning:
+EXECUTE

MYPROG

+EAXECUTE/EXECUTE

MYPROG

Both commands link MYPROG.OBJ and produce MYPROG.SAV as a
result. The /EXECUTE option has different meanings when it follows the
command and when it follows the file specification. The following command

creates an executable file called PROG1.SAV on device DL1:.
+EXECUTE/EXECUTE:DL1:

PROG1,PRDGZ

The next command creates an executable file called MYPROG.SAV on
device DK.:.
+EAXAECUTE

4-106

RTN1,,RTNZ sMYPROG/EXECUTE

Keyboard Commands

EXECUTE

/JEXTEND

Use this option with /FORTRAN to change the right margin

/FORTRAN

This option invokes the FORTRAN language processor to

for source input lines from column 72 to column 80.
compile the associated files.

/JGLOBAL Use this option to generate a global symbol cross-reference section in the load map. The global symbols are listed alphabetically. Each
module in which a symbol is referenced or defined is listed in alphabetical
order after the global symbol. A number sign (#) after a module name indicates that the global symbol is defined in that module. A plus sign (+) after
a module name indicates that the module is from a library.

See Chapter 11 of the

RT—-11 System Utilities Manual for an example of a

load map that includes a global symbol cross-reference table, and for a more
detailed description of how to interpret a load map.

Note that the system does not generate a load map by default. You must also
specify /MAP in the command line to get a cross-reference section. The following command produces a map listing file, MYPROG.MAP, that contains
a global symbol cross-reference section:
JEXECUTE/GLOBAL/MAP:DL1:

/HEADER

MYPROG

Use this option with /FORTRAN to include in the printout a

list of options currently in effect.

/14 Use this option with /FORTRAN to allocate two words for the default
integer data type (FORTRAN uses only one-word integers) so that it takes
the same physical space as real variables.

/LIBRARY Use this option with /MACRO to identify the file the option
qualifies as a macro library file. Use it only after a library file specification
in the command line.

The MACRO assembler looks first to the library associated with the most
recent /LIBRARY option to satisfy references (made with the MCALL directive) from MACRO programs. It then looks to any libraries you specified
earlier in the command line, and it looks last to SYSMAC.SML.

In the example below, the two files AFOR and B.FOR are compiled
together, producing B.OBJ and B.LST. The MACRO assembler assembles
C.MAC, satisfying .MCALL references from MYLIB.MAC and
SYSMAC.SML. It produces C.OBJ and C.LST. The system then links B.OBJ
and C.OBJ together, resolving undefined references from SYSLIB.OBdJ, and
produces the executable file B.SAV. Finally, the system loads and executes
B.SAV.

JEXECUTE A+B/LIST/OBJECT sMYLIB/LIBRARY+C.MAC/LIST/0BJECT

Keyboard Commands

4-107

EXECUTE

/LINENUMBERS

Use this option with /DIBOL or /FORTRAN to include
internal sequence numbers in the executable program.
These are especially
useful in debugging programs. This is the default operation.
/NOLINENUMBERS

Use this option with /DIBOL or /FORTRAN to suppress the generation of internal sequence numbers
in the executable program. This produces a smaller program and optimizes
execution speed. Use
this option to compile only those programs that are already
debugged; otherwise the line numbers in DIBOL or FORTRAN error messag
es are difficult
to interpret.
/LINKLIBRARY:filespec

Use this option to include the library file name

you specify as an object module library during the linking

the option if you need to specify more than one library file.

operation. Repeat

/LIST(:filespec]

You must specify this option to produce a compilation or
assembly listing. Note that anytime you type a colon after
the /LIST option
(/LIST:) you must specify a device or a file specification after
the colon.

The /LIST option has different meanings depending on where
you put it in
the command line. If you specify /LIST without filespec in the
list of options
that immediately follows the EXECUTE command, the system
generates a
listing that prints on the line printer. If you follow /LIST
with a device

name, the system creates a listing file on that device. If the
device is a filestructured device, the system stores the listing file on that
device, assigning

it the same name as the input file with a .LST file type.

The following command produces a listing on the terminal:
+EXECUTE/LIST:TT

A.FOR

The next command creates a listing file called A.LST on RK3:.
+EXECUTE/LIST:RK3:

A.MAC

If the /LIST option contains a name and file type to overrid

e the default of
.LST, the system generates a listing file with that specification.
The following command, for example, compiles A.FOR and B.FOR together
, producing
files A.OBJ and FILE1.OUT on device DK:. It then links
A.OBJ (using
SYSLIB.OBJ as needed) and produces A.SAV.
+EXECUTE/NORUN/FORTRAN/LIST:FILEL.OUT

A+B

Another way to specify /LIST is to type it after the file

specification to which
it applies. To produce a listing file with the same name as
a particular input
file, you can use a command similar to this one:
+EXECUTE/DIBOL

4-108

Keyboard Commands

A+B/LIST:RK3:

EXECUTE

The command shown above compiles A.DBL and B.DBL together, producing
files DK:A.OBJ and RK3:B.LST. It then links A.OBJ (using SYSLIB.OBJ as
needed) and produces DK:A.SAV

If you specify a file name on a /LIST option following a file specification in
the command line, it has the same meaning as when it follows the command.
The following two commands have the same results:
L EXECUTE/MACRO A/LIST:B
EXECUTE/MACRO/LIST:B A

Remember that file options apply only to the file (or group of files that are
separated by plus signs) that they follow in the command string. For example:

,EXECUTE/NORUN A.MAC/LIST,B.FOR

This command compiles A.MAC, producing A.OBJ and A.LST. It also compiles B.FOR, producing B.OBJ. However, it does not produce any listing file
for the compilation of B.FOR. Finally, the system links A.OBJ and B.OBdJ
together, producing A.SAV.

/LOG Use this option with /DIBOL to create a log of error messages gener|
ated by the compiler.

/MACRO This option invokes the MACRO assembler to assemble associated files.

/MAP[:filespec] You must specify this option to produce a load map after
a link operation. The /MAP option has different meanings depending on
where you put it in the command line. It follows the same general rules outlined above for /LIST.

JOBJECT!:filespec] Use this option to specify a file name or device for the
object file. Note that anytime you type a colon after the /OBJECT option
(/OBJECT:) you must specify a device or a file specification after the colon.
Because the EXECUTE command creates object files by default, the following two commands have the same meaning:
,EXECUTE/FORTRAN A

L,EXECUTE/FORTRAN/OBJECT A

Both commands compile A.FOR and produce A.OBJ as output. The
JOBJECT option functions like the /LIST option; it can be either a command
option or a file qualifier.

Keyboard Commands

4-109

EXECUTE

As a command option, /OBJECT applies across the entire
command string.
The following command, for example, assembles A.MAC
and B.MAC separately, creating object files A.OBJ and B.OBJ on DL1:.
+EXECUTE/OBJECT:DL1:

ALMAC.:B.,MAC

Use /OBJECT as a file qualifier to create an object file with

a specific name
or destination. The following command compiles
A.DBL and B.DBL
together, creating files B.LST, B.OBJ, and B.SAV.
+EXECUTE/DIBOL

A+B/LIST/0OBJECT/EXECUTE

/ONDEBUG

Use this option with /DIBOL to include an expanded symbol
table in the object file. You can then use a debugging progra
m to find and

correct errors in the object file.

Use /ONDEBUG with /FORTRAN to include debug lines

(those that have a
re, have to edit the

D in column one) in the compilation. You do not, therefo

file to include these lines in the compilation or to logically

can include messages, flags, and conditional branches

gram execution and find an error.

remove them. You
to help you trace pro-

/PAGE:n

Use this option with /DIBOL to override the default listing
page
length of 66 lines. The meaningful range of values for the
decimal argument

nis 1 to32768.

/PROMPT

Use this option to enter additional lines of input for the

operation. The system continues to accept lines of
linker input

link

until you
enter two slashes (//). Chapter 11 of the RT-11 System
Utilities Manual

describes the commands you can enter directly to the linker.
When you use
the /PROMPT option, note that successive lines of input
must conform to
CSI conventions (see Chapter 1, Command String Interpreter,
in the RT—11
System Utilities
Manual).
The example that follows uses the /PROMPT option to
structure for the program COSINE.MAC:
+EAECUTE/PROMPT

create an overlay

COSINE

*TAN/O:
1

*C051/0:1
*¥5IN3/0:2
*LML3/0:2//

The /PROMPT option also gives you a convenient way

to create an overlaid

program from an indirect file. The file LCP.COM contain

s these lines:

A/PROMPT

sUB1/0:1
SUB2/0:1

SUB3.,5UB4/0:1

4-110

Keyboard Commands

EXECUTE

The following command produces an executable file, DK:A.SAV, and a link
map on the printer.
+EXECUTE/MAP

ELCP

/RECORD:length Use this option with /FORTRAN to override the
default record length of 132 characters for ASCII sequentially formatted
input and output. The meaningful range for length is from 4 to 4095.

/RUN Use this option to initiate execution of your program if there are no
errors in the compilation or the link. This is the default operation. Do not
use /RUN with any option that requires a response from the terminal.

/NORUN

Use this option to suppress execution of your program. The sys-

tem performs only the compilation and the link.

/ISHOWI[:typel Use this option with /FORTRAN to control the FORTRAN
listing format. The argument type represents a code that indicates which
listings the compiler is to produce. Table 4-6 summarizes the codes and
their meaning.

Use this option with /MACRO to specify any MACRO .LIST directive. Table
4-13 summarizes the valid arguments and their meaning. The PDP-11
MACRO Language Reference Manual explains how to use these directives.
/NOSHOW:type Use this option with /MACRO to specify any MACRO
NLIST directive. Table 4-13 summarizes the valid arguments and their
meaning. The PDP-11 MACRO Language Reference Manual explains how
to use these directives.

/ISTATISTICS Use this option with /FORTRAN to include compilation
statistics, such as amount of memory used, amount of time elapsed, and
length of the symbol table.

/SWAP Use this option with /FORTRAN to permit the USR (user service
routine) to swap over the FORTRAN program in memory. This is the default
operation.

/INOSWAP Use this option with FORTRAN to keep the USR resident during execution of a FORTRAN program. This may be necessary if the
FORTRAN program uses some of the RT—11 system subroutine library calls
(see the RT—11 Programmer’s Reference Manual). If the program frequently
updates or creates a large number of different files, making the USR resident can improve program execution. However, the cost for making the USR
resident is 2K words of memory.

TABLES Use this option with /DIBOL to generate a symbol table and
label table as part of the assembly listing. This information is useful for program maintenance and debugging. Note that the system does not generate a
listing by default. You must also specify /LIST in the command line to produce an assembly listing.

Keyboard Commands

4-111

EXECUTE
/UNITS:n Use this option with /FORTRAN to override the default number of logical units (6) to be open at one time. The maximum value you can
specify for n is 16.
/VECTORS

This option directs FORTRAN to use tables to access multidimensional arrays. This is the default mode of operation.

/NOVECTORS

This option directs FORTRAN to use multiplication operations to access multidimensional arrays.
|

/NOWARNINGS

Use this option with /DIBOL to suppress warning messages during compilation. These messages are for your information only;

they do not affect the compilation. This is the default operation for
FORTRAN.
/WIDE

Use this option with /MAP to produce a wide load map listing.
Normally, the listing is wide enough for three global value columns, which
is suitable for a page with 72 or 80 columns. The /WIDE option produces a
listing that is six global value columns wide, or 132 columns.

4-112

Keyboard Commands

FORMAT
The FORMAT command formats disks and diskettes, and verifies any disk,
diskette, or DECtape II except MSCP devices.

FORMAT | /[NOJQUERY

/SINGLEDENSITY

SP)

device

/VERIFY[:ONLY]

/PATTERN:value
/WAIT

In the command syntax described above, device represents the storage volume you wish to format and/or verify.

You can FORMAT and /VERIFY the following devices:
RKO06/RK07

RX02

You can only FORMAT the following devices:
RD50/RD51

You can only /VERIFY the following devices:

RLO1/RL0O2
RX01

TU56 (DECtape 1)
TU58 (DECtape II)

When the system formats a volume, it writes headers for each block in the
volume. The header of a block contains data the device controller must use
to transfer data to and from that block. Using the FORMAT command to
format a storage volume makes that volume usable to the RT-11 operating
system. Formatting is advisable under the following circumstances:
e When you receive a new RKO05 disk from DIGITAL
e When you wish to format an RX02 double density diskette to single density, and vice versa

e When you wish to eliminate bad blocks (though formatting does not guarantee the elimination of every bad block, formatting can reduce the number of bad blocks)

When the system verifies a volume, it writes a 16-bit pattern on each block
in the volume, and then reads each pattern. When the system is unable to
write and read a pattern, it reports a bad block. The verification process is
similar to the bad block scan (see INITIALIZE), except that verification is a
data-destructive process. That is, whereas bad block scanning only reads
data from each block on a volume, verifying both writes and reads data,
destroying any data previously existing on the volume. Because the verification process reads and writes data, it can be more effective than a bad
block scan in establishing the validity of data contained in a block. Verifying also makes sure that the previous formatting operation was successful.
When you issue the FORMAT command, the system prints:
Sdevs: > /FORMAT-Are vou sureTM
Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-113

FORMAT
The variable <dev:> represents the drive name and unit number of the volume you want to format. Type Y to continue the format operation. Type N or

any string beginning with N, or CTRL/C, to abort the operation. Any other
response causes the prompt to repeat.

NOTE
You can format a diskette (RX01 or RX02) only when you

have mounted the diskette in a double-density diskette drive
unit (RX02). Unless you use the /SSINGLEDENSITY option,

the system will format diskettes in double-density format. If
you attempt to format a diskette in a single-density drive unit
(RX01), the system will print an error message.

When you format an RK06 or RK07 disk, the system lists the block numbers
of all the bad blocks in the manufacturer’s bad block table and in the soft-

ware bad block table.
If you try to format a volume while a foreground job is loaded the system
prints:
Foredround

Loaded,

“dev:>/FORMAT-Are

vou

sure?

Type Y or any string beginning with Y to continue with the formatting

operation. Type N or any string beginning with N, or CTRL/C, to abort the
operation. Any other response causes the message to repeat
NOTE

Although you can format or verify a volume while a foreground job is loaded, it is not recommended. If you try to format or verify a volume that the foreground job is using, data

on the volume will be written over and corrupted, which may

cause the foreground job or the system to crash.
If you try to format a volume that contains protected files, the system prints:
Yolume

contains

protected

filess

Are

vouw

sure?

Type Y or any string beginning with Y to continue the formatting operation.
Type N or any string beginning with N, or CTRL/C, to abort the operation.
Any other response causes the message to repeat.

The options you can use with the FORMAT command follow.
/PATTERNI[:value]

Use this option with /VERIFY[:ONLY] to specify

which 16-bit patterns you want the system to use when it verifies the volume. The optional argument value represents an octal integer in the range 0

to 177777 that denotes which patterns you want used.

4-114

Keyboard Commands

FORMAT

Table 45 lists the verification patterns FORMAT uses and the corresponding values for the argument value.

Table 4-5: Verification Bit Pattertis
Pattern

Bit Set

Value

16-Bit Pattern

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

1
2
4
10
20
40
100
200
400
1000
2000
4000
10000
20000
40000
100000

000000
177777
163126
125252
052525
007417
021042
104210
155555
145454
146314
*
*
*
*
*

*These patterns are reserved for future use. Currently these bit patterns run the default bit
pattern (pattern 8).

In /PATTERN:value, the number you specify for value indicates which bit
patterns to run during verification. Table 4-5 gives the equivalent values
for each verification bit pattern. If you want to run more than one bit pattern, add together the values for each pattern you select. For example, suppose you want to run bit patterns 1, 3, and 5. The corresponding values are 1,
4, and 20, for a sum of 25. This is the value you would specify with
/PATTERN to run all three bit patterns. If you specify /PATTERN:777, patterns 1 through 9 are run during verification. If you do not use the
/PATTERN:value option, the system runs only pattern 8.

After it completes verification, the system prints at the terminal each bad
block it found during each verification pass. The format of the verification
report is:

PATTERN #x
nnnnnn

In the example above, x represents the pattern number, and nnnnnn represents the bad block number. The system makes a separate verification pass
for each pattern it runs, and reports on each pass.

Keyboard Commands

4-115

FORMAT

The command line that follows verifies an RL02 disk with the 16-bit patterns denoted by the value 25.

+FORMAT/VERIFY/PATTERN:
25
DLO:/FORMAT-Are

vou

sure?

"FORMAT-I-Formatting

PATTERN

#35

PATTERN

DLO:»
Y

complete

?FORMAT-I-Verification

complete

If you do not supply a value with /PATTERN, the system uses pattern 8.
/QUERY

Use this option when you want the system to request confirmation before it performs formatting or verification. You must respond to the
query message by typing a Y (or any string that begins with Y) and a car-

riage return to continue the operation. The system interprets any other
response to mean NO, and it does not continue the operation. QUERY is the

default setting.

/NOQUERY

Use this option if you do not want the system to print a
confirmation message before it performs formatting or verification. When

you use this option in the FORMAT command line, the system prints only
the pattern numbers it uses if it performs verification and the informational
messages indicating the formatting or verification is complete. The default

setting is /QUERY.

/SINGLEDENSITY

Use this option to format an RX02 double-density
diskette in single-density format. The following example uses the
/SINGLEDENSITY option to format a diskette in RX02 drive unit 1 as a
single-density diskette.
+FORMAT/SINGLEDENSITY
DY1:/FORMAT-Are

vou

"FORMAT-I-Formatting

DVY1:

sure?

complete

/VERIFY[:ONLY]

Use this option when you want to verify a volume
following formatting. Use the optional argument, :ONLY, when you want

the system to only verify a volume.

When you use /VERIFY, the system first formats the specified volume, and
then writes a bit pattern to each block on the volume. Next, the system
reads each pattern. After the verification process is complete, the system
prints at the terminal the block number of each bad block it found.
The example that follows uses /VERIFY to format and verify an RL02 disk
in drive unit 2.

Version 5.1, July 1984

4-116

Keyboard Commands

FORMAT

DL2:

+FORMAT/VERIFY

DL2:/FORMAT-Are vou sure? Y
PFORMAT-I-Formatting complete
PATTERN

PEORMAT-I-Yerification complete

The next example uses /VERIFY:ONLY to only verify an RX02 diskette in
drive unit 0.

+FORMAT/VERIFY:ONLY

DYO:/VERIFY-Are
PATTERN

DYO:

vou sure? Y

PFORMAT-I-Verification

complete

/WAIT Use this option to initiate the formatting operation, then pause
before formatting begins to wait for you to change volumes. The /WAIT
option is useful for single drive systems.

After the system accepts your command line, it pauses and prints the message Continue?. At this time, you can exchange volumes. When the new disk
is loaded, type Y or any string beginning with Y, followed by a carriage
return to resume the operation. If you type N or any string beginning with
N, or CTRL/C, the operation is not performed and control returns to the keyboard monitor. Any other response causes the message to repeat.

When formatting completes the system pauses again while you remount the
system volume. Mount the system volume and type Y or any string beginning with Y, followed by a carriage return, to terminate the formatting

operation. If you type any other response the system prompts you to mount

the system volume until you type Y. The system then prints the keyboard
monitor prompt. Make sure FORMAT is on the system volume when you use
the /WAIT option.

The following example uses the /WAIT option to format an RLO2 disk.
+FORMAT/WAIT

DLO:

DLO:/FORMAT-Are

vou sure? Y

Mount input volume in <device>3 Continue? Y
PEFORMAT-I-Formatting complete

Mount system volume in <device>i Continue? Y

Keyboard Commands

4-117

FORTRAN
The FORTRAN command invokes the FORTRAN
one or more source programs.

FORTRAN

Dwm:wm

IV compiler to compile

©P) filespecs

/DIAGNOSE

/EXTEND
/HEADER

N4
/[INOJLINENUMBERS
/LIST:filespec]
/ALLOCATE
size

[[NOJOBJECT] filespec]
/ALLOCATE :size
/ONDEBUG
/RECORD:length

/SHOW[:type]

ISTATISTICS
INQISWAP

UNITS:n
/INOIVECTORS

/[NO]WARNINGS

]

You can enter the FORTRAN command as one line,

system to prompt you for information. The FORT

or you can rely on the

RAN command prompt is

Files? for the input specification.

In the command syntax illustrated above, filespe
files to be included in the compilation. If you omit

cs represents one or more
a file type for an input file,

the system assumes .FOR. Output default file types
are .LST for listing files
and .OBJ for object files. To compile multiple source
files into a single object
file, separate the files with plus (+) signs in the comma
nd line. Unless you
specify otherwise, the system creates an object file
with the same name as
the first input file and gives it an .OBJ file type. To
compile multiple files in
independent compilations, separate the files with
commas (,) in the command line. This generates a corresponding object
file for each set of input
files.
Language options are position-dependent — that
is, they have different

meanings depending on where you place them

in the command line. Options

that follow the FORTRAN command apply across
the entire command
string. Options that follow a file specification

apply only to the file (or group

of files separated by plus signs) that they follow in

the command string.

The RT-11/RSTS/E FORTRAN IV User’s Guide
contains detailed information about using FORTRAN. The following sectio
ns describe the options you

can use with the FORTRAN command.

/ALLOCATE:size

Use this option with /LIST or /OBJECT to reserv
e

space on a device for the output file. The argum

ent size represents the num-

ber of blocks of space to allocate. The meaningful range
1 to 65535. A value of -1 is a special case that create

on the device.

4-118

Keyboard Commands

for this value is from

s the largest file possible

FORTRAN

/CODE:type Use this option to produce object code that is designed for a
particular hardware configuration. The argument type represents a threeletter abbreviation for the type of code to be produced. The valid values are:
EAE, EIS, FIS, and THR. See the RT-11/RSTS/E FORTRAN IV User’s
Guide for a complete description of the types of code and their function.
/DIAGNOSE Use this option to help analyze an internal compiler error.
/DIAGNOSE expands the crash dump information to include internal compiler tables and buffers. Submit the diagnostic printout to DIGITAL with a
software performance report (SPR) form. The information in the listing can
help DIGITAL programmers locate the compiler error and correct it.
/EXTEND

Use this option to change the right margin for source input

/HEADER

This option includes in the printout a list of options that are

lines from column 72 to column 80.
currently in effect.

/14 Use this option to allocate two words for the default integer data type
(FORTRAN uses one-word integers) so that it takes the same physical space
as real variables.

/LINENUMBERS Use this option to include internal sequence numbers
in the executable program. These are especially useful in debugging a
FORTRAN program. They identify the FORTRAN statements that cause
run-time diagnostic error messages. This is the default operation.

/NOLINENUMBERS This option suppresses the generation of internal
sequence numbers in the executable program. This produces a smaller program and optimizes execution speed. Use this option to compile only those
programs that are already debugged; otherwise the line numbers in
FORTRAN error messages are replaced by question marks and the messages are difficult to interpret.

/LIST[:filespec] You must specify this option to produce a FORTRAN
compilation listing. Anytime you type a colon after the /LIST option (/LIST:)
you must specify a device or a file specification after the colon.
The /LIST option has different meanings depending on where you place it in
the command line.

The /LIST option produces a listing on the line printer when /LIST follows
the FORTRAN command. For example, the following command line produces a line printer listing after compiling a FORTRAN source file:
+FORTRAN/LIST

MYPROG

Keyboard Commands

4-119

FORTRAN

+ FORTRAN

MYPROG/LIST

If you specify /LIST without a file specification in the list of options that

immediately follows the FORTRAN command, the FORTRAN compiler generates a listing that prints on the line printer. If you follow /LIST with a

device name, the system creates a listing file on that device. If the device is a
file-structured device, the system stores the listing file on that device,

assigning it the same name as the input file with a .LST file type. The following command produces a listing on the terminal:
+FORTRAN/LIST:TT:

The next command creates a listing file called A.LST on RK3:.
+FORTRAN/LIST:RK3:

If the /LIST option contains a name and file type to override the default of
.LiST, the system generates a listing file with that name. The following com-

mand, for example, compiles A.FOR and B.FOR together, producing files

A.OBJ and FILE1.OUT on device DK:.
+FORTRAN/LIST:FILEL.OUT

A+B

Another way to specify /LIST is to type it after the file specification to which

it applies. To produce a listing file with the same name as a particular input
file, you can use a command similar to this one:
+ FORTRAN

A+B/LIST:RK3:

The above command compiles A.FOR and B.FOR together, producing files
DK:A.OBdJ and RK3:B.LST.

If you specify a file name on a /LIST option following a file specification in

the command line, it has the same meaning as when it follows the command.
The following two commands have the same results:
+FORTRAN

A/LIST:B

+ FORTRAN/LIST:B

Both the above commands generate A.OBJ and B.LST as output files.

4-120

Keyboard Commands

FORTRAN

Remember that file options apply only to the file (or group of files that are
separated by plus signs) that they follow in the command string. For example:

B
+FORTRAN A/LIST

This command compiles A.FOR, producing A.OBJ and A.LST. It also compiles B.FOR, producing B.OBJ. However, it does not produce any listing file
for the compilation of B*FOR,

JOBJECT](:filespec] Use this option to specify a file name or device for the
object file. Note that anytime you type a colon after the /OBJECT option
(/OBJECT:) you must specify a device or a file specification after the colon.

Because FORTRAN creates object files by default, the following two commands have the same meaning:
+FORTRAN

+FORTRAN/OBJECT

Both commands compile A.FOR and produce A.OBJ as output. The
JOBJECT option functions like the /LIST option; it can be either a command
option or a file qualifier.

As a command option, /OBJECT applies across the entire command string.
The following command, for example, compiles A.FOR and B.FOR separately, creating object files A.OBJ and B.OBJ on RK1..
,FORTRAN/OBJECT:RK1:

A.B

Use /OBJECT as a file qualifier to create an object file with a specific name
or destination. The following command compiles A.FOR and B.FOR
together, creating files B.LST and B.OBJ.
FORTRAN A+B/LIST/0BJECT

INOOBJECT Use this option to suppress creation of an object file. As a
command option, /NOOBJECT suppresses all object files; as a file option, it
suppresses only the object file produced by compilation of the related input
files. In this command, for example, the system compiles A.FOR and B.FOR
together, producing files A.OBJ and B.LST. It also compiles C.FOR and produces C.LST, but does not produce C.OBJ.
,FORTRAN A+B/LIST,C/NOOBJECT/LIST

Keyboard Commands

4-121

FORTRAN

/ONDEBUG

Use this option to include debug lines (those that have
a D in
column one) in the compilation. Therefore, you do not
have to edit the file to
include these lines in the compilation or to logical
ly remove them. This
option is useful in debugging a program. You can
include messages, flags,
and conditional branches to help you trace progr
am execution and find an

error.

/RECORD:length Use this option to override the default
record length for
ASCII sequentially formatted input and output, usuall
y 132 characters. The
meaningful range for length is from 4 to 4095.

/SHOWI[:type]

Use this option to control FORTRAN listing output.

argument type represents a code that indicat

The

es which listings the compiler

is to produce. Table 4-6 summarizes the codes and their

meaning.

You can combine options by specifying the sum of their

example:

numeric codes. For

/SHOW:
7

/SHOW:ALL

The two options shown above have the same meaning.

the default value is 3, a combination of SRC and MAP.

If you specify no code,

Table 4-6: FORTRAN Listing Codes
Code

Listing Content

Diagnostics only

1 or SRC

Source program and diagnostics

2or MAP

Storage map and diagnostics

Diagnostics, source program, and storage map

4 or COD

Generated code and diagnostics

7 or ALL

Diagnostics, source program, storage map, and generat

ed code

/STATISTICS

Use this option to include compilation statistics in the
listing, such as amount of memory used, amount of time
elapsed, and length of
the symbol table.

/SWAP

Use this option to permit the USR (user service routin

over the FORTRAN program in memory. This is

4-122

Keyboard Commands

e) to swap

the default operation.

FORTRAN

INOSWAP

This option keeps the USR resident during execution of a

FORTRAN program. This may be necessary if the FORTRAN program uses

some of the RT—11 system subroutine library calls (see Chapter 4 of the
RT-11 Programmer’s Reference Manual). If the program frequently updates
or creates a large number of different files, making the USR resident can
improve program execution. However, the cost for making the USR resident
is 2K words of memory.

JUNITS:n Use this option to override the default number of logical units
(6) to be open at one time. The maximum value you can specify for n is 16.
/'VECTORS

This option directs FORTRAN to use tables to access multidi-

mensional arrays. This is the default mode of operation.

/NOVECTORS

This option directs FORTRAN to use multiplication oper-

ations to access multidimensional arrays.

/WARNINGS Use this option to include warning messages in FORTRAN
compiler diagnostic error messages. These messages call certain conditions
to your attention, but do not interfere with the compilation. A warning message prints, for example, if you change an index within a DO loop, or if you
specify a variable name longer than six characters.

/NOWARNINGS Use this option to exclude warning messages in
FORTRAN compiler diagnostic error messages. This is the default setting.

Keyboard Commands

4-123

FRUN
The FRUN command initiates foreground jobs. The default file type is .REL;

the default device is DK:.

FRUN

filespec [muwmm }
/NAME :name
/PAUSE
TERMINAL:n

In the command syntax illustrated above, filespec represents the program to

execute. Because this command runs a foreground job, it is valid for the

and XM monitors only.

If a foreground job is active when you issue the FRUN command, an error
message prints on the terminal. You can run only one foreground job at a

time. If a terminated foreground job is occupying memory, the
system
reclaims that region for your program. Then, if the system finds your
program and if your program fits in the available memory, execution begins.

Note that you can use the FRUN command to run a virtual foreground job,

and that you can use FRUN to run a virtual .SAV file in the foreground
under the XM monitor.
The following sections describe the options you can use with FRUN.
that the option must follow the file specification in the command line.

Note

/BUFFER:n

Use this option to reserve more space in memory than the
actual program size. The argument n represents, in octal, the number
of
words of memory to allocate. You must use this option to execute
a
FORTRAN foreground job. If you use /BUFFER for a virtual job linked
with

the /V option (or /XM), the system ignores /BUFFER because it has already

provided a buffer in extended memory.

The following formula determines the space needed to run a FORTRA
N program as a foreground job.

n = [1/2[504 + (35*N) + (R-136) + A*512]]

where:
A

represents the maximum number of files open at one time. Each
file
opened as double buffered should be counted as two files.

represents the maximum number (decimal) of simultaneously open
channels (logical unit numbers). This value is specified when the
compiler is built, and can be overridden with the /UNITS option
during main program compilation; the default value is 6. Make
sure you use a decimal point with this number.

4-124

Keyboard Commands

FRUN

represents the maximum formatted sequential record length. This
value is specified when the compiler is built and can be overridden
with the /RECORD option during main program compilation; the
default value is 136.

To specify a decimal number for n, include a decimal point (.) after the
number you specify. The formula for determining n calculates n as a decimal number, so include the decimal point when you specify the number.
This formula must be modified for certain system subroutine library (SYS- LIB) functions.

The IQSET function requires the formula to include additional space for
queue elements (qcount) as follows:

n = [1/2[504 +(35*N) + (R-136) + A*512]] + [10*qcount]
The ICDFN function requires the formula to include additional space for
the integer number of channels (num) as follows:

n = [1/2[504 + (35*N)+ (R-136) + A*512]] + [6*num]
The INTSET function requires the formula to include additional space for
the number of INTSET calls issued in the program as follows:
n = [1/2[504 +(35*N) + (R-136) + A*512]] +[25*INTSET]

Any functions, including INTSET, that invoke completion routines must
include 64(decimal) words plus the number of words needed to allocate the
second record buffer (default is 68 decimal words).
The length of the record buffer is controlled by the /RECORD option to the
FORTRAN compiler. If the /RECORD option is not used, the allocation in
the formula must be 136(decimal) bytes, or the length that was set at FORTRAN installation time. This modifies the formula as follows:
n = [1/2[504 +(35*N) + (R-136) + A*512]] +[64 + R/2]

If the /BUFFER option does not allocate enough space in the foreground on
the initial call to a completion routine, the following message appears:
PERR O NON-FORTRAN error call

This message also appears if there is not enough free memory for the background job or if a completion routine in the SJ monitor is activated during
another completion routine. In the latter case, the job aborts; you should
use the FB monitor to run multiple active completion routines.
/INAME:name Use this option to assign a logical name to the foreground
job. This option is valid only on a monitor that has system job support, a
special feature enabled by the system generation process.

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-125

FRUN

/PAUSE

Use this option to help you debug a program. When you type the

carriage return at the end of the command string, the system prints the

load address of your program and waits. You can examine or modify the
program (by using ODT, described in Chapter 20 of the RT-11 System
Utilities Manual) before starting execution. You must use the RESUME
command to start the foreground job.
The following command loads the program DEMOSP.REL, prints the load

address, and waits for a RESUME command to begin execution.
+FRUN DEMOSP/PAUSE

Loaded

1272706

+FRESUME

/TERMINAL:n

This option is meaningful only in a multiterminal sys-

tem. Use it to assign a terminal to interact with the foreground job. The
argument n represents a terminal logical unit number. If you do not use

this option, the foreground job shares the console terminal with the background job. By assigning a different terminal to interact with the foreground job, you eliminate the need for the foreground and background jobs
to share the console terminal.
Note that the original console terminal still interacts with the background
job and with the keyboard monitor, unless you use the SET TT:CONSOL

command to change this.

Version 5.1, July 1984

4-126

Keyboard Commands

GET
The GET command loads a memory image file into memory.

GET

(5P

filespec

In the command syntax shown above, filespec represents the memory image
file to be loaded. The default file type is .SAV. Note that magtape 1s not a
block-replaceable device and therefore is not permitted with the GET command. Use the GET command for a background job only. You cannot use
GET on a virtual program that executes under the XM monitor.
The GET command is useful when you need to modify or debug a program.

You can use GET with the Base, Deposit, Examine, and START commands

to test changes. Use the SAVE command to make these changes permanent.

You can combine programs by issuing multiple GET commands, as the following example shows. This example loads a program, DEMOSP.SAV, loads
ODT.SAV (on-line debugging technique, described in Chapter 20 of the
RT-11 System Utilities Manual), and starts the program using the address
of ODT’s entry point.
+GET

DEMOSP

GET

0ODT

START

opT

WO5.00

.W@thm
-,

If more than one program requires the same locations in memory, the program you load later overlays the previous program. Note that you cannot
use GET to load overlay segments of a program; it can load only the root. If
the file you need to load resides on a device other than the system device, the
system automatically loads that device handler into memory when you issue
the GET command. This prevents problems that occur if you use the START
command and your program is overlaid.

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-127

GT
The GT command enables or disables the VT11 or VS60 graphics display

hardware.

(5P

OFF
- ON
n

LER

When you issue the GT OFF command, you disable the display hardware.

The printing console terminal then becomes the device that prints output
from the system.

When you issue the GT ON command, the display screen replaces the printing console terminal. The display screen offers some advantages over the

printing terminal: it is quieter than a printing terminal, it is faster than a
printing terminal, it does not require a supply of paper, and it is the device

for which EDIT’s immediate mode is intended.

The display screen can speed up the editing process (see Chapter 6 for infor-

mation on how to use the text editor). You can use CTRL/A, CTRL/S, CTRL/

E, and CTRL/Q to control scrolling. These commands are explained in
Chapter 3.
Note that RT-11 does not permit you to use display hardware (with GT ON)
if you have multiterminal support (enabled by a user-generated monitor) or

if you have an 8K configuration. You cannot use GT ON or GT OFF when a
foreground or system job is active; this causes the system to print an error
message. Issue the GT ON command before you begin execution of the fore-

ground job.

ODT (on-line debugging technique, described in Chapter 20 of the
RT-11
System Utilities
Manual) is the only system program that cannot use the dis-

play screen. Its output always appears on the console terminal. You can use
VDT, a variant of ODT, because it can interact with the display hardware.
NOTE

If an indirect command file issues a GT ON command, part of

the command may echo on the terminal and the rest may echo
on the graphics screen. Also, if you type the GT ON command,

followed by CTRL/E, the initial line on the terminal overprints when you type GT OFF.

The following options control the number of lines that appear on the screen

and position the first line vertically.

Version 5.1, July 1984

4-128

Keyboard Commands

/Len Use this option to change the number of lines of text that display on
the screen. Table 4—7 shows the valid range for the argument n in decimal. If
you do not use this option the system determines the screen size and automatically assigns the largest valid value.

/T:n Use this option to change the top position of the scroll display. Table
4-7 shows the valid range for the argument n in decimal. If you do not use
this option, the system determines the screen size and automatically assigns
the largest valid value.

Table 4-7: Display Screen Values
Screen Size

Lines

Top Position

12-inch

1-31

1-744

17-inch

1-40

1-1000 (or larger)

Keyboard Commands

4-129

HELP
The HELP command lists information related to RT-11 comman

you remember command syntax, options, and so on, when

console.

HELP [{ [TERMINAL }] [ toplc [

ds to help

you are at the

subtoplc{:item] ][1]

/option

In the command syntax shown above, topic represents a subject about
which
you need information. In the help file supplied with RT-11, the
topics are
the keyboard monitor commands. The subtopic represents a category
within
a topic. In the RT-11 help file, the subtopics are SYNTAX,
SEMANTICS,
OPTIONS, and EXAMPLES. The item represents one member
of the subtopic group. You can specify more than one item in the comman
d line if you
separate the items by colons (:). If you type HELP followed
by a carriage
return, the system lists information on the HELP command.

The HELP command permits you to access the HELP text file. The
help file
distributed with RT—11 contains information about the keyboar
d monitor
commands and how to use them. However, the concept of the

help file is a
general one. That is, you can create your own help file to supply
quick reference material on any subject. For information on how to change
the HELP
text file, see the RT—11 Installation Guide.

There are only two options you can use with the HELP command.

/PRINTER and /TERMINAL.

/PRINTER

They are

Use this option to list information on the line printer.

/TERMINAL

This option lists information on the console terminal. This
is the default operation. When HELP information is listed on a video
terminal, and SET TT SCOPE is in effect, the display fills one screen
at a time.
Type a carriage return to view the next screen.

The following examples all make use of the standard RT—11 help file.
The following command lists all the topics for which assistance is availabl

+HELP
*
ABORT
ASSIGN

4-130

Terminates
Associates

Foredround/System

lodical

Sets

BACKUP

Backur/Restore

Keyboard Commands

relocation

device

Job

name

from

with

base

larde

files

random

the

console

phvsical

access

device

devices

HELP

The next command lists all the information about the DATE command.
DATE

,HELP

Sets or displavys the current svystem date

DATE
SYNTAX

DATEL

]
dd-mmm=-vyvy

SEMANTICS

A11 numeric values are decimali mmm rerpresents the first
Urnder RTEM-11:
three characters of the name of the month.
the

current

date

can not

chandged.

OPTIONS
None

EXAMPLES

1Z2-MAR-B3

DATE

The next command lists all the options that are valid with the DIRECTORY
command.

+HELP DIRECTORY OPTIONS
OPTIONS

ALLOCATE:s1ze

Use with /DUTPUT to reserve space for the output listing file

ALPHABETIZE

Sorts the directory in alephabetical order by file name and
Ltype

The next command lists information about the /BRIEF option for the
DIRECTORY command.

yHELP DIRECTORY OPTIONS:BRIEF
BRIEF

Lists only file names and file tvyees of filesi same as /FAST

The following command lists information about the DIRECTORY command

options that begin with B.
+HELP

DIRECTORY/B

BADBLOCKS

Scans the device for bad blocks and tvpes their octal number

BEFOREL:DD:MMM:YY]

Lists the files created before the specified date.
date

is omitted, the system date

is used.

I1f the

BEGIN

Lists the directorys starting with the file vou srpecify

BLOCKS

Lists the starting block numbers of the files

BRIEF

Lists only file names and file tvees of files’i same as /FAST

Keyboard Commands

4-131

INITIALIZE
Use the INITIALIZE command to clear and initialize a device directory.

INTIALIZE | /BACKUP

GP device

/DOS

WAIT

/INTERCHANGE

/WAIT

/BADBLOCKS[:RET]
FILE:filespec
/INOJQUERY
/REPLACE[:RET]

/SEGMENTS:n

/NOLUMEID[:ONLY]
WAIT

/RESTORE

In the command syntax illustrated above, device represents the volume you
need to initialize. The initialize operation must always be the first operation

you perform on a new volume after you receive it, formatted, from the man-

ufacturer. If the volume is not formatted, use the FORMAT command (see
the FORMAT command description) to format the volume. After you use the
INITIALIZE command, there are no files in the directory. If you use the
INITIALIZE command with no options, the system simply initializes the

device directory. You can enter the INITIALIZE command as one line, or

you can rely on the system to prompt you for the name of the device with

Device?.

The default number of directory segments for RT—11 directory structure
d
volumes is listed in Table 4-8. If any default is too small for your needs, see
the RT-11 Installation Guide for details on changing this default directory
size.

If the volume you are initializing has protected files, the system always

requests confirmation as in the following example.
+INIT

DLO:®

DLO:/Initialize}
Volume

contains

Are

vou

protected

sure?

files}

Are

vou

suureTM

The following sections describe the options you can use with INITIALIZE
and give some examples of their use.

/BACKUP

Use this option to initialize a backup volume to be used as an

output volume with the BACKUP command.

Qutput volumes for the

BACKUP command, except magtape, must be initialized by using this

option. (The system automatically initializes magtapes during BACKUP
operations; therefore, the /BACKUP option is invalid with magtape.)

Since backup output volumes cannot contain badblocks, this option also performs a bad block scan. If bad blocks are detected, the system instructs you

to use another volume for your backup operation.

4-132

Keyboard Commands

INITIALIZE

The system also warns you if you attempt to initialize a volume that already
contains files, and allows you to replace the volume.
The following command initializes a double-density diskette as a backup
volume.
+INITIALIZE/BACKUP

DY:

DYO:/BUP Initialized
Are vyou sure?
PYBUP-I-Bad blocK scan started.
..
"BUP-I~-No bad blocks detected

/BADBLOCKSI[:RET] Use this option to scan a volume (disk or DECtape)
for bad blocks and write .BAD files over them. For each bad block the system
encounters on the volume, it creates a file called FILE.BAD to cover it. After
the volume 1is initialized and the scan completed, the directory consists of
only FILE.BAD entries to cover the bad blocks. This procedure ensures that
the system will not attempt to access these bad blocks during routine operations. If the system finds a bad block in either the boot block or the volume
directory, it prints an error message and the volume is not usable.

DIGITAL recommends that you use the DIRECTORY/BADBLOCKS command after using the INITIALIZE/BADBLOCKS command so that you can
find out where the bad blocks are, if any.
The following command initializes volume DL1: and scans for bad blocks.
s INITIALIZE/BADBLOCKS

DLO:Initializes

Are

DL 1L

vour

sure?

If you use / BADBLOCKS:RET, the system will retain through initialization
all files with a .BAD file type that it finds on the volume, giving them the
name FILE.BAD. The system does not do a bad block scan. The advantage in
using :RET is that initializing takes less time.
Note that some volumes support bad block replacement; DIGITAL recommends you use the / REPLACE[:RET] option instead of BADBLOCKS[:RET]
for these volumes when scanning for bad blocks. If you use INITIALIZE/
BADBLOCKS with a volume that has been previously initialized with the
INITIALIZE/REPLACE command, .BAD files will be written over all bad
blocks and the bad block replacement table will be ignored by the system.

If the volume being initialized contains bad blocks, the system prints the
locations of the bad blocks in octal and in decimal, as in the following
example:
s INITIALIZE/BADBLOCKS

DLO:/Initializes
BlocK
QO0120

g0,

Hard

000471

313+
337,

Hard
Hard

000521
?DUP-W-Bad

DLO:

Are vyou
Tyee

bhlocks

detected

sure?

Keyboard Commands

4-133

INITIALIZE

The left column lists the locations in octal, and the middle column lists the

locations in decimal. The right column indicates the type of bad block found:
hard or soft.
/DOS

Use this option to initialize a DECtape for DOS—11 format.

/FILE:filespec

Use this option to initialize a magtape and create a bootable tape. For filespec, substitute dev:MBOOQOT.BOT. This file is distributed

with RT-11 for this purpose only. Consult the RT-11 Installation Guide for
more information.

The following example creates a bootable magtape.
+INITIALIZE/FILE:MBOOT.BOT

MTO:

/INTERCHANGE

Use this option to initialize a diskette for interchange
format. The following example initializes DX1: in interchange format.
+INITIALIZE/INTERCHANGE

DX1:/Init

Are

vou

sure?

DX¥1:

NOTE

The directory of an initialized interchange diskette has a sin-

gle file entry, DATA, that reserves the entire diskette. You

must delete this file before you can write any new files on the
diskette. Do this by using the following command:
DELETE/INTERCHANGE

DX1:DATA

This is necessary for IBM compatibility.
/QUERY

This option requests confirmation before it initializes a device.
Respond by typing Y or any string beginning with Y, followed by a carriage
return, to initiate execution of the command. The system interprets a

response beginning with any other character to mean NO. /QUERY is the

default operation.

/NOQUERY

Use this option to suppress the confirmation message the

system prints before it proceeds with the initialization.

/REPLACE[:RET]

If you have an RK06, RK07, RLO1, or RL0O2 disk, use
this option to scan a disk for bad blocks. If the system finds any bad blocks, it

creates a replacement table so that routine operations access good blocks
instead of bad ones. Thus, the disk appears to have only good blocks. Note,

though, that accessing this replacement table slows response time for routine input and output operations.

4-134

Keyboard Commands

INITIALIZE

If you use :RET with /REPLACE, the system initializes the volume and
retains the bad block replacement table (and FILE.BAD files) created by the
previous /REPLACE command.

Note that if the monitor file resides on a block that contains a bad sector
error (BSE) and you are doing bad block replacement, a boot error results
when you attempt to bootstrap the system. In this case, move the monitor.
Use the DIRECTORY/BADBLOCKS/FILES command to determine which
files reside on bad blocks.

With an RK06, RK07, RLO1, or RL02 disk, you have the option of deciding
which bad blocks you want replaced if there is a replacement table overflow.
The RK06s and RK07s support up to 32 bad blocks in the replacement table;
the RLO1s and RL02s support up to 10.

With an RK06 or RK07 disk, the system can replace only those bad blocks
that generate a bad sector error (BSE). With an RLO1 or RLO2 disk, the system can replace any kind of bad block. The following paragraphs describe
how to designate which blocks to replace on an RK06, RK07, RLO1, or RLO2
disk.

When you use /REPLACE, the system prints a list of replaceable bad blocks
as in the following sample:

+INITIALIZE/REPLACE DLO:
Tvee
Block
Rerplaceable
12754,
030722
Rerplaceable
39462,
115046
Rerplaceable
46981,
133617
Rerplaceable
48253,
136175
Rerlaceable
48319,
1367277

Rerplaceable
48385,
136401
Replaceable
49413,
140405
Rerlaceable
852394,
146252
DUP-I-Bad blocks detected 8.

If there is a replacement table overflow, the system prompts you to indicate
which blocks you want replaced as follows:
?DUP-W-Replacement
Tyrpe

<RET>s

Rerplace

bloch

table overflow DEV:

or mnnnnn

)
(SRET

The variable nnnnnn represents the octal number of the block you want the
system to replace.

After you enter a block number, the system responds by repeating the
Replace block # prompt. If you type a 0 at any time you do not want any
more blocks replaced, prompting ends and any blocks not placed in the
replacement table are marked as FILE.BAD.

Keyboard Commands

4-135

INITIALIZE

If you enter a carriage return at any time, the system places all bad blocks
you have not entered into the replacement table, starting with the first on

the disk, until the table is full. The system assigns the name FILE.BAD to
any remaining bad blocks and prompting ends.

If you use /NOQUERY with /REPLACE, and there is a replacement table

overflow, the effect will be as if you had entered a carriage return in
response to the first Replace block # prompt.

/RESTORE

Use this option to uninitialize a volume. That is, you can use
this option to restore the directory and files that were present on the volume

prior to the previous initialization. You can use /RESTORE only if no files

have been transferred to the volume since the last time it was initialized.

You cannot restore volumes that support bad block replacement if bad
blocks were found during initialization.
The /RESTORE option does not restore the boot blocks; so if you use
/RESTORE to restore a previously bootable volume, use the COPY/BOOT
command to make the volume bootable again.

/SEGMENTS:n

Use this option if you need to initialize a disk and also
change the number of directory segments. The number of segments in the
directory establishes the number of files that can be stored on a device. The
system allows a maximum of 72 files per directory segment, and 31 directory

segments per device. The argument n represents the number of directory

segments. The valid range for n is from 1 to 31 (decimal). Table 4—8 shows
the default values of n for standard RT-11 devices.

Table 4-8: Default Directory Sizes
Number (decimal) of
Segments in Directory

Device
DD

DW (RD50)

DW (RD51)

DY (single-density)

DY (double-density)

DZ (RX50)

DL (RLO1)

DL (RL02)

DU (Winchester disks)

DU (diskettes)

/VOLUMEID[:ONLY]

Use /VOLUMEID to write a volume identification

on a device when you initialize it. This identification consists of a volume ID

(up to 12 characters long for a block-replaceable device, up to 6 characters

long

for

Version 5.1, July 1984

4-136

Keyboard Commands

magtape,

interchange

diskette

when

used

with

INITIALIZE

/INTERCHANGE) and an owner name (up to 12 characters long for a blockreplaceable device, up to 10 characters long for magtape). If you use this
option with INTERCHANGE but you speciy no volume ID, the volume ID
RT11A is automatically assigned.

The following example initializes device RK1: and writes a volume identification on it.
INITIALIZE/VOLUMEID RK1:
RK1i:/Initializes Are vou sure®TM
Uolume ID? FORTRAN QOL
Jwner?

Marcy

Use /VOLUMEID:ONLY to write a new volume identification on a device
without reinitializing the device. You cannot change the volume ID of a
magtape without initializing the entire tape.

IWAIT The /WAIT option is useful if you have a single-disk system. When
you use this option to initialize a volume, the system begins the procedure
but then pauses and waits for you to mount the volume you want to initialize. When the system pauses, it prints the following prompt at the terminal:
Mount

ineut

volume

<devicers

Continue?

The variable <device> is the name of the device into which you mount the
volume to be initialized. Mount the input volume and type Y or any string
beginning with Y, followed by a carriage return, to continue the intialization operation. Type N or any string beginning with N, or two CTRL/Cs, to
abort the operation and return control to the keyboard monitor. Any other
response causes the message to repeat.

After the system completes the initialization process, the system prints the
following message prompting you to mount the system volume:
Mount

svystem

volume

<device>3

Continue?

Mount the system volume and type Y or any string beginning with Y, followed by a carriage return. If you type any other response the system continues to prompt you to mount the system volume until you type Y.
When you use /WAIT, make sure that DUP, and FILEX if necessary, are on
the system volume.

Keyboard Commands

4-137

INSTALL
The INSTALL command installs the device you specify into the system.

INSTALL

(SP)

device],...device]

In the command syntax shown above, device represents the name of the
device to be installed. The INSTALL command accepts no options. It allows

you to install into the system tables a device that was not installed into the

system when it was bootstrapped. (A device handler must exist in the system tables before you can use that device.) The device occupies the first

available device slot. Using the INSTALL command does not change the

monitor disk image; it only modifies the system tables of the monitor that is
currently in memory.

You can enter the command on one line, or you can rely on the system to
prompt you for information. The INSTALL command prompt is Device?.

When you specify a device name, the system searches the system volume for
the corresponding device handler file. For SJ and FB systems, if LP: is to be

installed, the INSTALL command searches for the file SY:LP.SYS. For XM
systems, INSTALL searches for SY:LPX.SYS. The INSTALL command does

not allow a device handler built for a different configuration of the system to
be installed in a given system. Note that you cannot install the device names

SY, DK, or BA, or a logical device name that is the same as an already
installed physical device name.

To permanently install a device, include the INSTALL command in the
standard, system start-up indirect command file. This file is invoked automatically when you boot the system. The INSTALL command also allows

you to configure a special system for a single session without having to
reconfigure to revert to the standard device configuration. If there are no

free device slots (use the SHOW DEVICES command to ascertain this), you
must remove an existing device (with the REMOVE command) before you

can install a new device.

The following command installs the serial line printer into the system tables
from the file LS.SYS. (The colon (:) that follows the device handler name is
optional.)
+ INSTALL

LS:

The next example installs the line printer, RK05, and DY.
+ INSTALL

4-138

LP: sRK:

Keyboard Commands

DY@

LIBRARY
——

The LIBRARY command lets you create, update, modify, list, and maintain
library files.

GP library [ filespecs H /REPLACE }]]

LIBRARY | /EXTRACT

/UPDATE

/CREATE
/DELETE

/PROMPT

/REMOVE

/MACRO[:n]
/CREATE
/PROMPT
sty

In the command syntax illustrated above, library represents the library file
name, and filespecs represents the input module file names. Separate the
library file specification from the module file specifications with a space.
Separate the module file specifications with commas.

The system uses .LST as the default file type for library directory listing
files. It uses .OBJ as the default file type for object libraries and object input
files, and .MAC for macro input files. The default output file type for macro
library files is .MLB. Object libraries contain machine-level object modules,
and macro libraries contain MACRO source modules. You cannot combine
object modules with MACRO modules.

The default operation, if you do not specify an option, is /INSERT. If you do
not specify a library file in the command line, the system prompts Library?.
If you specify /CREATE, /INSERT, or /MACRO and omit the module file
specification, the system prompts Files?. If you specify /EXTRACT, the system prompts File?. Note that no other option causes the File? or Files?
prompt.

The LIBRARY command can perform all the functions listed above on object
library files. It can also create macro library files for use with the
MACRO-11 assembler. A library file is a direct-access file (a file that has a
directory) that contains one or more modules of the same type. The system
organizes library files so the linker and MACRO-11 assembler can access
them rapidly. Each library is a file that contains a library header, library
directory, and one or more object modules. The object modules in a library
file can be routines that are repeatedly used in a program, routines that are
used by more than one program, or routines that are related and simply
gathered together for convenience. An example of a typical object library file
is the default system library, SYSLIB.OBJ, used by the linker. An example
Vo

of a macro library file is SYSMAC.SML.

Keyboard Commands

4-139

LIBRARY

You access object modules in a library file by making calls or references to
their global symbols; you link the object modules with the program that
uses

them by using the LINK command to produce a single executable module.
Each input file for an object library consists of one or more object modules,
and is stored on a device under a specific file name and file type. Once you

insert an object module into a library file, you no longer reference the module by the file name of which it was a part; reference it by its individual mod-

ule name. For example, the input file FORT.OBJ may exist on DT2: and can

contain an object module called ABC. Once you insert the module
into a

library, reference only ABC, and not FORT.OB.J.

The input files normally do not contain main programs but only subpro-

grams, functions, and subroutines. The library file must never contain
a
FORTRAN BLOCK DATA subprogram because there is no undefined global

symbol to cause the linker to load it automatically.

The following sections describe the LIBRARY command options and explain
how to use them. The last section under this command describes
the
LIBRARY prompting sequence and order of execution for commands
that
combine two or more LIBRARY options. Chapter 10 of the RT—11 System
Utilities Manual contains more detailed information on object and macro
libraries.

/ALLOCATE:size

Use this option only with /LIST or /OBJECT to reserve

space on the device for the output file. The value size represents the number

of blocks of space to allocate. The meaningful range for this value is from
1
to 65535. A value of -1 is a special case that allocates the largest area avail-

able on the device.

The following example uses /ALLOCATE to create the object library
MYLIB.OBJ from the object library MYFILE.OBJ. The argument,
—1, is
specified with /ALLOCATE.
LIBRARY/OBJECT:MYLIB/ALLOCATE:
-1

MYFILE

/CREATE

Use this option by itself to create an object library. Specify a
library name followed by the file specifications for the modules that are
to be
included in that library. The following command creates a library
called
NEWLIB.OBJ from the modules contained in files FIRST.OBJ
and
SECOND.OBJ.
+LIBRARY/CREATE

NEWLIB

FIRST

SECOND

/DELETE
Use this option to delete an object module and all its associated
global symbols from a library file directory. Since the module is deleted
only
from the directory (the object module itself is not deleted), the module
and
all global symbols that were previously deleted are restored wheneve
r you
update that library, unless you use /DELETE again to delete them.
Specify
the library name in the command line.

4-140

Keyboard Commands

LIBRARY

The system prompts you for the names of the modules to delete. The prompt
is:

Module

name?

Respond with the name of a module. (Be sure to specify a module name and
not a global name.) Follow each module name with a carriage return. Enter
a carriage return on a line by itself to terminate the list of module names.
The following example deletes modules SGN and TAN from the library
called NEWLIB.OBJ.

+LIBRARY/DELETE NEWLIB

Module
Module
Module

name? SGN
name? TAN
name®?

/JEXTRACT Use this option to extract an object module from a library and
store it in a file with the same name as the module and a file type of .OBJ.
You cannot combine this option with any other option.

The system prompts you for the name of the object module to be extracted.
The prompt is:
Global?

If you specify a global name, the system extracts the entire module of which
that global is a part. Follow each global name with a carriage return. Enter
a carriage return on a line by itself to terminate the list of global symbols.
The following example shows how to extract the module ATAN from the
library called NEWLIB.OBJ and store it in file ATAN.OBJ on DX1:.
LIBRARY/EXTRACT
Library? NEWLIB
? DX1:ATAN
File
Global 7 ATAN
Global =7

JINSERT Use this option to insert an object module into an existing
library. Although you can insert object modules that have duplicate names,
this practice is not recommended because of the difficulty involved in replacing or updating these modules. Note that INSERT is the default operation.
If you do not specify any option, insertion takes place.

The following example inserts the modules contained in the files
THIRD.OBJ and FOURTH.OBJ into the library called OLDLIB.OBJ.
LLIBRARY/INSERT OLDLIB THIRDFOURTH

Keyboard Commands

4-141

LIBRARY

/LIST[:filespec]

Use this option to obtain a directory listing of an object
library. Note that anytime you type a colon after the /LIST option
(/LIST:),

you must include a device or file specification following the

colon.

The following example obtains a directory listing of OLDLIB.OBJ
terminal (the line printer is the default device).
+LIBRARY/LIST:TT:

on the

OLDLIB

The directory listing prints global symbol names. A plus sign
(+) in the
module column indicates a continued line. See Section 10.2.8 in
Chapter 10
of the RT—-11 System Utilities Manual for a procedure to include
module

names in the directory listing.

You can also use /LIST with other options (except /MACRO)
to obtain a
directory listing of an object library after you create or modify
it. The following command, for example, inserts the modules contained
in the files
THIRD.OBJ and FOURTH.OBJ into the library called OLDLIB.
OBJ: it
then prints a directory listing of the library on the terminal.
W LIBRARY/INSERT/LIST:TT:

OLDLIB

THIRD:FOURTH

You cannot obtain a directory listing of a macro library.
Make sure when you use /LIST with LIBRARY that you use

it on the command side of the command string, and not after the file specifica
tion.

/MACROI[:n]

Use this option to create a macro library. The optional argu-

ment n represents the size (in blocks) of the macro name

directory. Note that

The following example creates a macro library called

NEWLIB.MLB from

this is the only valid function for a macro library. You can create
a macro
library, but you cannot list or modify it. To update a macro library,
simply
edit the ASCII text file and then reprocess the file with the
LIBRARY/
MACRO command.

the ASCII input file SYSMAC.MAC.
+LIBRARY/MACRO/CREATE

NEWLIB

SYSMAC

When you use /MACRO with LIBRARY, use it on the comman
command string, and not after the file specification.

d side of the

/OBJECT(:filespec]

The system creates object library files by default as a
result of executing a LIBRARY command. When you modify
an existing

library, the system actually makes the changes to the library

you specify,
thus creating a new, updated library that it stores under the same
name as
the original library. Use this option to give a new name
to the updated
library file and preserve the original library.

4-142

Keyboard Commands

LIBRARY

The following example creates a library called NEWLIB.OBJ, which consists of the library OLDLIB.OBJ plus the modules that are contained in files
THIRD.OBJ and FOURTH.OB.J.

,LIBRARY/INSERT/OBJECT:NEWLIB OLDLIB THIRD:FOURTH

/NOOBJECT

Use this option to suppress the creation of a new object

library as a result of a LIBRARY command.

/PROMPT Use this option to specify more than one line of input file specifications in a LIBRARY command. This option is valid with all other
library functions except the /EXTRACT option. You must specify // as the
last input in order to terminate the input list. Note that the file specifications you enter after typing the PROMPT option must conform to Command
String Interpreter (CSI) conventions.

The following example creates a macro library called MACLIB.MLB from
seven input files.

,LIBRARY/MACRO/PROMPT MACLIB As+B,C:D
#E »F »G
*//

/REMOVE This option permits you to delete a specific global symbol from
a library file’s directory. Since globals are deleted only from the directory
(and not from the object module itself), all the globals that were previously
deleted are restored whenever you update that library, unless you use
/REMOVE again to delete them. This feature lets you recover a library if
you have inadvertently deleted the wrong global.

The system prompts you for the names of the global symbols to remove. The
prompt is:
Glohal®?

Respond with the name of a global symbol to be removed. Follow each global
symbol with a carriage return. Enter a carriage return on a line by itself to
terminate the list of global symbols.

The following example deletes the globals GA, GB, GC, and GD from the
library OLDLIB.OBJ.
LLIBRARY/REMOVE
Global? GA
Global? GB
Global? GC
Global? GD

OLDLIB

Global®

Keyboard Commands

4-143

LIBRARY

/REPLACE
Use this option to replace modules in an existing object
library with modules of the same name contained in the files you specify.
The following example replaces a module called SQRT in
the library
‘MATHLB.OBJ with a new module, also called SQRT, from the
file called
MFUNCT.OBJ.
+LIBRARY

MATHLB

MFUNCT/REPLACE

Note that the /REPLACE option must follow each file specification
that contains a module to be inserted into the library. Note also that
you can use
/REPLACE only with modules, and never with library files.
/UPDATE
This option combines the functions of /INSERT and
/REPLACE. Specify it after each file specification to which it applies.
If the
modules in the input file already exist in the library, the system
replaces
those library modules. If the modules in the input file do not exist
in the
library, the system inserts them.
The following example updates the library OLDLIB.OBJ.
+LIBRARY

OLDLIB

FIRST/UPDATE SECOND/UPDATE

Note that the /UPDATE option must follow each file specification to
applies, and that you can use this option only with modules, not

which it

files.

You can combine the LIBRARY options with the exceptions of
/EXTRACT
and /MACRO, which you cannot combine with most of the other
functions.
Table 4-9 lists the sequence in which the system executes the
LIBRARY
options and prompts you for additional information.
Table 4-9: Execution and Prompting Sequence of
LIBRARY Options
Option

Prompt

/CREATE
/DELETE

Module name?

/REMOVE

Global?

/UPDATE
/REPLACE
/INSERT
/LIST

4-144

Keyboard Commands

LIBRARY

The following example combines several options.
LIBRARY/LIST:TT:/REMOVE/INSERT
Global®?

NEWLIB

LIBZ/REPLACELIB3

S50ORT

Global®TM

FRI
FRI

14-JAN-83 00:08:37
14-JAN-83 00:08:35

RT-11 LIBRARIAN
NEWLIB

V05,01

MODULE

GLOBALS

cos

SIN

DATAN
ATAN
DCOS

DATANZ
ATANZ
DSIN

GLOBALS

The command executes in the following sequence:
1.

Removes global SQRT from NEWLIB

Replaces any duplicates of the modules in the file LIB2.0BJ

Inserts the modules in the file LIB3.0OBJ

Lists the directory of NEWLIB.OBJ on the terminal

Keyboard Commands

4-145

LINK
The LINK command converts object modules into a format suitable for load-

may

LINK

-y

/ALPHABETIZE

ing and execution.

/INOIBITMAP

/BOTTOM:value
/BOUNDARY :value

mmu@[;fimmj

filespecs

| [FOREGROUND :stacksize

/DUPLICATE

/INOJEXECUTE[ filespec]
/ALLOCATE:slze

/LDA

/RUN
TOP:value

/EXTEND:n

/XM

/FILL:n
/GLOBAL
/INCLUDE

/LIMIT:n

/LIBRARY filespec

/LINKLIBRARY filespec

/MAP]-filespec]

/ALLOCATE :size

WIDE
/PROMPT
/ROUND:n

/SLOWLY
/STACK[:value]
/SYMBOLTABLE[:filespec]
/TRANSFER[:value]

The RT-11 system lets you separately assemble a main program and each of

its subroutines without assigning an absolute load address at assembly
time. The linker can then process the object modules of the main program

and subroutines to relocate each object module and assign absolute
addresses. It links the modules by correlating global symbols that are defined in one module and referenced in another, and it creates the initial control block for the linked program. The linker can also create an overlay

structure (if you specify the /PROMPT option) and include the necessary
run-time overlay handlers and tables. The linker searches libraries you
specify to locate unresolved global symbols, and it automatically searches

the default system subroutine library, SYSLIB.OBJ, to locate any remaining unresolved globals. Finally, the linker produces a load map (if you
specify /MAP) that shows the layout of the executable module. The linker
also can produce an STB file. See Chapter 11 of the RT—11 System Utilities
Manual for a more detailed explanation of the RT-11 linker.
In the command syntax illustrated above, filespecs represents the object
modules to be linked. Each input module should be stored on a randomaccess device (disk, diskette, or DECtape II); the output device for the load
map file can be any RT-11 device. The output for an .LDA file (if you specify

/LDA) can also be any RT—11 device, even those that are not block replace-

able such as paper tape.

The default file types are as follows:
Load Module:

Map Output:
Object Module:
Symbol Table File:

4-146

Keyboard Commands

SAV, RELV/FOREGROUND), .LDA(LDA)

MAP

.OBJ
.STB

LINK

If you specify two or more files to be linked, separate the files by commas.

The system creates an executable file with the same name as the first file in
the input list (unless you use /EXECUTE to change it).

Table 4-10 summarizes the LINK prompting sequence for commands that
combine two or more LINK options.

Table 4-10: Prompting Sequence for LINK Options

Option

Prompt

/TRANSFER

Transfer symbol?

/ISTACK

Stack symbol?

/EXTEND:n

Extend section?

/BOUNDARY:value

Boundary section?

/ROUND:n

Round section?

/INCLUDE

Library search?

/DUPLICATE

Duplicate symbol?

If you combine any of the options listed in Table 4-10, the system prompts

you for information in the sequence shown in the table. Note that the
Duplicate symbol? prompt is always last. This and Library search? are the
only prompts that accept more than one line as a response. For all the
prompts, terminate your response with a carriage return. Terminate your
list of responses to the Library search? and Duplicate symbol? prompts by
typing an extra carriage return. Note that if the command lines are in an
indirect file and the system encounters an end-of-file before all the prompting information has been supplied, it prints the prompt messages on the
terminal.

The LINK command options and explanations of how to use them follow.
/ALLOCATE:size Use this option with /EXECUTE or /MAP to reserve
space on the device for the output file. The argument size represents the
number of blocks of space to allocate. The meaningful range for this value is
from 1 to 65535. A value of —1 is a special case that creates the largest file
possible on the device. When used with /JEXECUTE, /ALLOCATE is valid
only when you are generating a .REL or .LDA file.

/ALPHABETIZE

When you use this option, the linker lists in the load

map your program’s global symbols in alphabetical order.
/BITMAP Use this option if you want the linker to create a memory usage
bitmap. This is the default setting.

Keyboard Commands

4-147

LINK

/NOBITMAP

Use this option if you do not want the linker to create

memory usage bitmap. This option is useful if you

are preparing your pro-

gram for ROM storage and its code lies between locatio
ns 360 and 377 inclusive. 'BITMAP is the default setting.

/BOTTOM:value

Use this option to specify the lowest address to be used
by the relocatable code in the load module. The argument value represen
ts a
six-digit unsigned, even octal number. If you do not use
this option, the
linker positions the load module so that the lowest address
is location 1000

(octal). This option is invalid for foreground links.

/BOUNDARY:value

Use the/ BOUNDARY option to start a specific pro-

gram section in the root on a particular address bounda

ry. The system generates a whole-number multiple of the value you specify
for the starting

address of the program section. The argument value must
be a power of 2.
The system extends the size of the previous program section
to accommodate
the new starting address for the specific section.
When you have entered the complete LINK command,
the system prompts
you for the name of the section whose starting address
you need to modify.

The prompt is:
Boundary

section?

Respond with the appropriate program section name and

response with a carriage return.

terminate your

/DEBUGI:filespec]

Use this option to link ODT (on-line debugging technique, described in Chapter 20 of the
RT-11 System Ultilities Manual) with

your program to help you debug it. If you supply
the name of another

debugging program, the system links the debugger you

specify with your

program. The system links the debugger low in memor
y relativ

program.

e to your

/DUPLICATE

Use this option to place duplicate copies of a library module in each overlay segment that references the module. This
option is useful
in reducing the size of the root segment of your program.

When you have entered the complete LINK command,
the system prompts
you for the names of the global symbols in the library
module you want to

duplicate. The prompt is:
Duplicate

symbol?

Respond by typing the name of each global symbol in a

duplicate. Type a carriage return after each global

return on a line by itself to terminate the list.

module you want to

symbol. Type a carriage

See Chapter 11 of the RT-11 System Utilities Manual for
more information
on duplicating library modules.
Version 5.1, July 1984

4-148

Keyboard Commands

LINK

/JEXECUTE[:filespec] Use this option to specify a file name or device for
the executable file. Note that anytime you type a colon after the EXECUTE
option (EXECUTE:), you must include a device or file specification following the colon. Because the LINK command creates executable files by
default, the following two commands have the same meaning:
LINK

MYPROG

JLINK/EXECUTE

MYPROG

Both commands link MYPROG.OBJ and produce MYPROG.SAV as a
result.

The /EXECUTE option has different meanings when it follows the command
and when it follows the file specification. The following command creates an
executable file called PROG1.SAV on device DL1.:.
+LINK/EXECUTE:DL1:

PROG1,PROGZ

The next command creates an executable file called MYPROG.SAV on
device DK:.
+LINK

RTN1sRTNZ »MYPROG/EXECUTE

/NOEXECUTE

Use this option to suppress creation of an executable file.

/EXTEND:n This option allows you to extend a program section to a specific octal value n. The resultant program section size is equal to or greater
than the value you specify, depending on the space the object code requires.

When you have entered the complete LINK command, the system prompts
you for the name of the program section you need to extend. The prompt is:
Extend

section?

Respond with the appropriate program section name, and terminate your
response with a carriage return.

/FILL:n Use this option to initialize unused locations in the load module
and place a specific octal value n in those locations. Note that the linker
automatically initializes to 0 unused locations in the load module; use this
option to place another value in those locations. This option can be useful in
eliminating random results that occur when a program references uninitialized memory by mistake. It can also help you to determine which locations
have been modified by the program and which remain unchanged.
/FOREGROUNDI:stacksize] This option produces an executable file in
relocatable (.REL) format for use as a foreground job under the FB or XM
monitor. You cannot use .REL files under the SJ monitor.

Keyboard Commands

4-149

LINK

This option assigns the default file type .REL to the executable file. The
argument stacksize represents the number of bytes of stack space to allocate

for the foreground job. The value you supply is interpreted as an octal num-

ber; specify an even number. Follow n with a decimal point (n.) to represent

a decimal number. The default value is 128 (decimal) or 200 (octal) bytes of
stack space. DIGITAL recommends that you allocate 256. bytes of stack
space when linking a FORTRAN program to run in the foreground.
You can use /FOREGROUND|:stacksize] with /XM to link privileged foreground jobs with virtual overlays. See Chapter 11 of the R7-11 System
Utilities Manual for more detailed information on linking privileged fore-

ground jobs with virtual overlays.

/GLOBAL

Use this option to generate a global symbol cross-reference section in the load map. The global symbols are listed alphabetically. Each
module in which a symbol is referenced or defined is listed in alphabetical
order after the global symbol. A number sign (#) after a module name indi-

cates that the global symbol is defined in that module. A plus sign (+
) after
a module name indicates that the module is from a library. See Chapter 11

of the RT-11 System Utilities Manual for an example of a load map that
includes a global symbol cross-reference table, and for a more detailed
description of how to interpret a load map.

Note that the system does not generate a load map by default. You must also
specify /MAP in the command line to get a cross-reference section.
The following command produces a map listing file, MYPROG.MAP, that
contains a global symbol cross-reference section:
+ LINK/GLOBAL/MAP:DL1:

MYPROG

When you request a global symbol cross-reference listing with the
/GLOBAL option, LINK generates the temporary file DK:CREF.TMP.

If DK: is write-locked or if it contains insufficient free space for the tempo-

rary file, you can designate another device for the file. To designate another
device for the temporary file, assign the logical name CF to the device by
using the following command:
+ ASS5IGN

dev:

If you have assigned CF to a physical device for MACRO cross-reference
listing temporary file CREF.TMP, that device will also serve as the default

device for the LINK global symbol cross-reference temporary file.
/INCLUDE

This option lets you take global symbols from any library and
include them in the linked memory image. When you use /IN CLUDE,
the
linker loads modules that are not called by other modules from a library
into the root.

Version 5.1, July 1984

4-150

Keyboard Commands

LINK

When you have entered the complete LINK command, the system prompts

you for a list of global symbols to include in the load module. The prompt is:
Library search?

Respond by typing the global symbols to be included in the load module.
Type a carriage return after each global symbol. Type a carriage return in
response to the Library search? prompt itself to terminate the list.
/LDA This option produces an executable file in LDA format. The
LDA—format file can be output to any device, including those that are not
block-replaceable. The default file type .LDA is assigned by /LDA to the
executable file. This option is useful for files that you need to load with the
Absolute Binary Loader.

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-150.1

LINK

/LIBRARY This option is the same as /LINKLIBRARY. It is included
here only for system compatibility.

/LIMIT:n Use the /LIMIT:n option with /XM to limit the amount of memory allocated by a .SETTOP programmed request to n (octal) K words. If you
do not use the /LIMIT option, a .SETTOP request allocates up to 32K words
or, if less than 32K words of physical memory are available, as much memory as is available.

/LINKLIBRARY:filespec You can use this option to include the library
file you specify as an object module library in the linking operation. Because
the system automatically recognizes library files in the linking operation
you do not normally need this option; it is provided for compatibility with
the EXECUTE command.

/MAPI:filespec] You must specify this option to produce a load map listing. Note that anytime you type a colon after the /MAP option (/MAP:), you
must include a device or file specification following the colon.

The /MAP option has different meanings depending on where you put it in
the command line. If you specify /MAP without a filespec in the list of
options that immediately follows the command name, the system generates
a listing that prints on the line printer. If you follow /MAP with a device
name, the system creates a map file on that device. If the device is a filestructured device, the system stores the listing file on that device, assigning
it the same name as the first input file and a .MAP file type.
The following command produces a load map on the terminal.
JLINK/MAP:TT:

MYPROG

The next command creates a map listing file called MYPROG.MAP on RK3:.
JLINK/MAP:RK3:

MYPROG

If the /MAP option contains a name and file type to override the default of
MAP, the system generates a listing with that name. The following com-

mand, for example, links PROG1 and PROGZ, producing a map listing file
called MAP.OUT on device DK:.
LLINK/MAP:MAP.,OUT

PROG1,PROGZ

Another way to specify /MAP is to type it after the file specification to which
it applies. To link a file and produce a map listing file with the same name,
use a command similar to this one.
+ LINK

WW@@K%WWW@%MEMHHMTK%MMW

Keyboard Commands

4-151

LINK

The command shown above links PROG1 and PROG?2
, producing files
PROG2.SAV and PROG2.MAP. If you specify a file
name on a /MAP option
following a file specification in the command line, it
has the same meaning
as when it follows the command.
/PROMPT

Use this option to enter additional lines of input. The

continues to accept lines of linker input until you

Chapter 11 of the RT-11 System Utilities Manua

system

enter two slashes (//).

l describes the commands

you can enter directly to the linker. When
you use the /PROMPT option,

note that successive lines of input must conform
to CSI conventions (see
Chapter 1, Command String Interpreter, in the RT—11
System Ultilities
Manual).

The example that follows uses the /PROMPT option

structure for the program COSINE.MAC:
+LINK/PROMPT

to create an overlay

COSINE

*TAN/O:1

%mmmifwgi

The /PROMPT option also gives you a convenient way
program from an indirect file. The file PROMPT.C

to create an overlaid

OM contains these lines:

A/PROMPT
SUB1/0:1

SUBZ/0:1
SUB3,5UB4/0:
1
/7

The following command produces an executable
file, DK:A.SAV, and a link
map on the printer.
+LINK/MAP

@PROMPT

/ROUND:n

This option rounds up the section you specify so that
the size
of the root segment is a whole-number multiple of the
value n you supply.
The argument n must be a power of 2.
When you have entered the complete LINK command,
the system prompts
you for the name of the section that you need to round
up. The prompt is:
Round

section?

Respond with the appropriate program section name,

response with a carriage return.

/RUN

Use this option to initiate execution of the resultant

option is valid for background jobs only. Do not

that requires a response from the terminal.

4-152

and terminate your

Keyboard Commands

SAYV file. This

use /RUN with any option

LINK

possible
/ISLOWLY This option instructs the system to allow the largesgt the
link
makin
of
e
expens
the
memory area for the link symbol table at
failed
am
progr
a
process slower. Use this option only if an attempt to link
because of symbol table overflow.

n
/ISTACK[:value] This option lets you modify the stack address, locatio
(SP).
r
pointe
stack
the
for
42, which is the address that contains the value
When your program executes, the monitor sets SP to the contents of location
42. The argument value is an even, unsigned, six-digit octal number that
defines the stack address.

When you have entered the complete LINK command, the system prints the
following prompt message if you did not already specify a value:
Stack

symbol?

Respond with the global symbol whose value is the stack address. You cannot specify a number at this point. Terminate your response with a carriage
return. If you specify a nonexistent symbol, the system prints an error message. It then sets the stack address to 1000 (for memory image files) or to the
bottom address if you used /BOTTOM.

/ISYMBOLTABLE[:filespec] When you use this option, the linker creates

a file that contains symbol definitions for all the global symbols in the load
module. Enter the symbol table file specification as the third output specification in the LINK command line. If you do not specify a file name, the
linker uses the name of the first input file and assigns the file type STB
Note that anytime you type a colon after the /ISYMBOLTABLE option
(/SYMBOLTABLE:), you must include a device or file specification following
the colon. By default, the system does not create a symbol table file.
The following example creates the symbol table file BTAN.STB
,LINK AOBJ BOBJ/SYMBOLTABLE:BTAN

/TOP:value Use this option to specify the highest address to be used by

the relocatable code in the load module. The argument value represents an
unsigned, even octal number.

'TRANSFER[:value] The transfer address is the address at which a program starts when you initiate execution with R, RUN, FRUN, or SRUN.
The /TRANSFER option lets you specify the start address of the load mod‘ule. The argument value is an even, unsigned, six-digit octal number that
defines the transfer address. If the transfer address you specify is odd,r.the
program does not execute after loading, and control returns to the monito
When you have entered the complete LINK command, the system prints the
following prompt message if you did not already specify a value:
Transfer

symbol?

Keyboard Commands

4-153

LINK

Respond with the global symbol whose value

cannot specify a number at this point.

is the transfer address. You

Terminate your response with a car-

riage return. If you specify a nonexistent symbo
and the linker sets the transfer address to

execute the program.

l, an error message prints
1 so that the system cannot

/WIDE

Use this option with /MAP to produce a wide
load map listing.
Normally, the listing is wide enough for three
global value columns, which
is suitable for paper with 72 or 80 columns.
The /WIDE option produces a
listing that is six global value columns wide,
which is equivalent to 132
columns.
/XM
When you use this option, you enable special
.SETTOP and .LIMIT
features provided in the XM monitor. This option
allows a virtual job to map

a scratch region in extended memory with
the .SETTOP programmed
request. See the RT-11 Programmer’s Refere
nce Manual and the RT-11

Software Support Manual for more details on these
use /XM with /FOREGROUNDV:stacksize]

with virtual overlays.

special features. You can

to link privileged foreground jobs

If you want to create an extended memory overla

gram, use the /PROMPT option. You can

y structure for your pro-

then specify on subsequent lines

the overlay structure using the LINK /V
option (see Chapter 11 of the
RT-11 System Utilities Manual). Note that
when you use /V to create an
overlay structure, the linker automatically
enables the special .SETTOP
and .LIMIT features.

4-154

Keyboard Commands

LOAD

The LOAD command loads a device handler into memory for use with foreground, background, system jobs, or BATCH.
LOAD

ce[]
= jobname]
device[ = jobnamel][,...devi

sents the device handler
In the command syntax shown above, device repre
er to the background
to be made resident; jobname assigns the deviceithandl
has the value F. The jobjob if it has the value B, or to the foreground if Unde
or that has
name specification is invalid with the SJ monitor.name rofaamonit
system job.
system job support, jobname can be the logical job
by bringing a device
The LOAD command helps control system execution
e to a job. The syshandler into memory and optionally allocating the devic
e you use a device in a
tem allocates memory for the handler as needed. Befor
er. Also, if you
foreground program, you must first load the device handl
rt, or if your
suppo
er
have generated an XM monitor without fetchable ehandl
handler is not fetchable, you must load the devic handler before the job is
executed.

round, background, or
A device can be owned exclusively by either the foreg
dered to be a background
system job. (Note that BATCH, if running, is consi
ownership prevents the
job under the FB and XM monitors.) This exclusiveinter
mixed on the same
input and output of two different jobs from being
non-file-structured device.

round job, while
In the following example, magtape belongs to the, backg
round, or system
RLO2 is available for use by either the background foreg
job; the line printer is owned by the foreground job. All three handlers are
made resident in memory.
,LOAD DLz +MT:=B,LP:=F

For a monitor with system job support, the following example reserves the
line printer for the system job QUEUE.
,LOAD LP:=0UEUE

ller can be owned by
Different units of the same random-access device contro
the background job,
different jobs. Thus, for example, DL1: can belongm to
while DL5: can belong to the foreground or syste job. If no ownership is
indicated, the device is available for use by any job.

Keyboard Commands

4-155

LOAD

NOTE

If you use the LOAD command to
load a non-file-structured
device handler, and assign ownership
of that handler to a job,
all units of that particular device beco
me assigned to that job.
This means no other job can use any
unit of that particular
device.
To change ownership of a device, use

essary to first unload the device.

another LOAD command. It is not nec-

For example, if the line printer

loaded into memory and assigned to

has been

the foreground job as in the example

above, the following command reass
igns it to the background job without
unloading the handler first.
+LOAD

LP:=B

Note, however, that if you interrupt

you must unload (with the UNL

an operation that involves magtape,

OAD command) then load the

device handler (MM, MT, or MS). Whe

monitor, this restriction does not apply.

appropriate

n using these handlers with the FB

You cannot assign ownership of the
system unit (the unit you bootstrapp
ed)
of a system device, and any attempt
to do so is ignored. You can, however,
assign ownership of other units of the
same type as the system device. LOA
D
is valid for use with logical names. For
example:
+ASSIGN
+LOAD

DL:

XY:=F

If you are using a diskette, loading the

ory can improve system performa

necessary device handlers into mem-

nce significantly, since no handlers

need

to
be loaded dynamically from the diske
tte. Use the SHOW command to display on the terminal the status of devic
e handlers and device ownership.

4-156

Keyboard Commands

MACRO

The MACRO command invokes the MACRO assembler to assemble one or
more source files.

MACRO

ICROSSREFERENCE[ typel....type]]

GP)

filespecs

[/LIBRARY]

/DISABLE itypel...:type]
/ENABLE typel...:type]
/LIST[:filespec]
size
/ALLOCATE:

/[NOJOBJECT:filespec]

mmmim
el...:type]

|/[NOISHOW :typ

In the command syntax shown above, filespecs represents one or more files
to be included in the assembly. If you omit a file type for an input file, the
system assumes .MAC. Output default file types are .LST for listing files and
.OBJ for object files.

To assemble multiple source files into a single object file, separate the files
by plus (+) signs in the command line. Unless you specify otherwise, the
system creates an object file with the same name as the first input file and
gives it an .OBJ file type. To assemble multiple files in independent assemblies, separate the files by commas (,) in the command line. This generates a
corresponding object file for each set of input files.

Language options are position-dependent — that is, they have different
meanings depending on where you place them in the command line. Options
that qualify a command name apply across the entire command string.
Options that follow a file specification apply only to the file (or group of files
separated by plus signs) that they follow in the command string.
You can enter the MACRO command as one line, or you can rely on the system to prompt you for information. The MACRO command prompt is Files?
for the input specification. The system prints on the terminal the number of
errors MACRO detects during an assembly.

Chapter 12 of the RT—11 System Utilities Manual and the PDP-11 MACRO
Language Reference Manual contain more detailed information about using
MACRO. The options you can use with the MACRO command follow.
/ALLOCATE:size

Use this option with /LIST or /OBJECT to reserve

space on the device for the output file. The argument size represents the
number of blocks of space to allocate. The meaningful range for this value is
from 1 to 65535. A value of —1 is a special case that creates the largest file
possible on the device.

ICROSSREFERENCE][:typel...:typell

Use this option to generate a

symbol cross-reference section in the listing. This information is useful for
program maintenance and debugging. Note that the system does not generate a listing by default. You must also specify /LIST in the command line to

Keyboard Commands

4-157

MACRO
get a cross-reference listing. The argument type represents a one-char

acter

code that indicates which sections of the cross-reference listing the assem-

bler should include. Table 4-11 summarizes the arguments and their
meaning.

Table 4-11: Cross-Reference Sections
Argument
S

Section Type

User-defined symbols
Register symbols

Macro symbolic names

C
E
None

Permanent symbols (instructions, directives)
Control sections (.CSECT symbolic names)

Error codes

Equivalent to :S:M:E

/DISABLE:typel...:type]l Use this option to specify a MACRO .DSABL
directive. See the PDP-11 MACRO Language Reference Manual
for a
description of the directive and a list of all valid types. Table 4-12
summa-

rizes the arguments and their meaning.

Table 4-12: .DSABL and .ENABL Directive Summary
Argument

Default

ABS

Disable

AMA

Disable

CDR

Disable

DBG

Disable

FPT

Disable

GBL

Enable

Enables or Disables
Absolute binary output
= Assembly of all absolute addresses as relative addresses

Treating source columns 73 and greater as comments

Generation of internal symbol directory (ISD) records during

assembly (See Chapter 8 of the RT-11 Software Support
Manual for more information on ISD records.)

Floating-point truncation
Treating undefined symbols as globals

Enable

LCM

Disable

LSB

Disable

PNC

tional assembly directives .IF IDN and .IF DIF
Local symbol block

Enable

REG

Binary output

Enable

Mnemonic definitions of registers

Accepting lowercase ASCII input
= Uppercase and lowercase sensitivity of MACRO-11 condi-

/ENABLE:typel...:type]l

Use this option to specify a MACRO .ENABL
directive. See the PDP-11 MACRO Language Reference Manual
for a
description of the directive and a list of all valid types. Table 4-12
summarizes the arguments and their meaning.

/LIBRARY

This option identifies the file it qualifies as a library file; use
it
only after a library file specification in the command line.
The MACRO

4-158

Keyboard Commands

MACRO

the
assembler looks first to the library file or files you specify and then to the
with
system library, SYSMAC.SML, to satisfy references (made
MCALL directive) from MACRO programs.

In the example below, the command string includes two user libraries.
,MACRO MYLIB1/LIBRARY+A+MYLIB2/LIBRARY+B

When MACRO assembles file A, it looks first to the library, MYLIB1.MAC,
and then to SYSMAC.SML to satisfy .MCALL references. When it assembles file B, MACRO searches MYLIB2.MAC, MYLIB1.MAC, and then
SYSMAC.SML, in that order, to satisfy references.

/LIST[:filespec] You must specify this option to produce a MACRO
assembly listing. Note that anytime you type a colon after the /LIST option
(/LIST:), you must include a device or file specification following the colon.
The /LIST option has different meanings depending on where you place it in
the command line.

The /LIST option produces a listing on the line printer when /LIST follows
the command name. For example, the following command line produces a
line printer listing after compiling a MACRO source file:
,MACRO/LIST MYPROG

If you specify /LIST without a file specification in the list of options that
immediately follows the command name, the MACRO assembler generates
a listing that prints on the line printer. If you follow /LIST with a device
name, the system creates a listing file on that device. If the device is a file-

structured device, the system stores the listing file on that device, assigning
it the same name as the input file and a .LST file type.
The following command produces a listing on the terminal.
+MACRO/LIST:TT:

The next command creates a listing file called A.LST on RK3:.
,MACRO/LIST:RK3:

Keyboard Commands

4-159

MACRO
If the /LIST option contains a name and

file type to override the default of
LST, the system generates a listing file with
that name. The following command, for example, assembles A.MAC and
B.MAC together, producing files
A.OBJ and FILE1.OUT on device DK:.
+MACRO/LIST:FILEL.DUT

A+B

You cannot use a command like the next
one. In this example, the second
listing file would replace the first one and
cause an error.
+MACRO/LIST:FILEZ

Another way to specify /LIST is to type it after
it applies. To produce a listing file with the

file, you can use a command similar to this
+MACRO

the file specification to which
same name as a particular input

one-

A+B/LIST:RK3:

The above command assembles A.MAC
and B.MAC, producing files
DK:A.OBJ and RK3:B.LST.
If you specify a file name on a /LIST optio
n following a file specification in
the command line, it has the same meaning
as when it follows the command.
The following two commands have the same
results:
+MACRO

A/LIST:B

+MACRD/LIST:B

Both commands generate output files A.OB

J and B.LST.

Remember that file options apply only to

separated by plus signs) they follow
+MACRO

the file (or group of files that are

in the command string. For example:

A/LIST,B

This command assembles A.MAC, produ
cing A.OBJ and A.LST. It also

assembles B.MAC, producing B.OBJ.

ing file for the assembly of B.MAC.

However, it does not produce any list-

/OBJECT(:filespec]

Use this option to specify a file name or devic
e for the
object file. Note that anytime you type
a colon after the /OBJECT option
(/OBJECT:), you must include a device
or file specification following the
colon.
Because MACRO creates object files by
default, the following two commands
have the same meaning:
+MACRO

+MACRO/0BJECT

4-160

Keyboard Commands

MACRO

Both commands assemble A.MAC and produce A.OBJ as output.

The /OBJECT option functions like the /LIST option; it can be either a command option or a file qualifier.

As a command option, /OBJECT applies across the entire command string.
The following command, for example, assembles A.MAC and B.MAC separately, creating object files A.OBJ and B.OBJ on RK1.:.
+MACRO/0OBJECT:RK1:

Use /OBJECT as a file qualifier to create an object file with a specific name
or destination. The following command assembles A MAC and B.MAC
together, creating files B.LST and B.OBJ.
+ MACRO A+B/LIST/0BJECT

INOOBJECT Use this option to suppress creation of an object file. As a
command option, /NOOBJECT suppresses all object files; as a file qualifier,
it suppresses only the object file produced by the related input files. In this
command, for example, the system assembles A.MAC and B.MAC together,
producing files A.OBJ and B.LST. It also assembles C.MAC and produces
C.LST, but does not produce C.OBJ.

MACRO A+B/LIST.C/NOOBJECT/LIST

/ISHOW:type Use this option to specify any MACRO LIST directive. The
PDP-11 MACRO Language Reference Manual explains how to use these
directives. Table 4-13 summarizes the arguments and their meaning. Note
that you must explicitly request a listing file with the /LIST option.
Table 4-13: .LIST and .NLIST Directive Summary
Controls

Argument Default
List

Source line sequence numbers

BIN

List

Generated binary code

MD
MC

List
List

SEQ

LOC

BEX
SRC
COM

MEB

CND
LD

TOC
TTM

SYM

List

List
List
List

Location counter

Binary extensions
Source code
Comments

Macro definitions, repeat range expansions
Macro calls, repeat range expansions

Nolist

Macro expansions
Macro expansion binary code

Nolist

Listing directives with no arguments

Nolist

List

List
Line printer
mode

List

Unsatisfied conditionals, .IF and .ENDC statements
Table of contents
Output format

Symbol table

Keyboard Commands

4-161

MACRO
/NOSHOW:type Use this option to specify any MACR
O .NLIST directive.
The PDP-11 MACRO Language Reference Manua
l explains how to use
these directives. Table 4-13 summarizes the valid argume
nts and their

meaning. Note that you must explicitly request a listing

option.

4-162

Keyboard Commands

file with the /LIST

MOUNT

The MOUNT command associates the logical disk unit you specify with the
file you specify.

MOUNT /[NO]WRITE SP) logical-disk-unit

filespec |

logical-device-name]

In the command syntax illustrated above, logical-disk-unit represents the
logical disk unit you want to mount. Specify the logical disk unit in the form
LDn: (the colon is optional), where n is an integer in the range 0-7; or you
can specify a logical device name that has already been assigned to the logical disk unit. The term filespec represents the file to be used as the logical
disk. The default file type is .DSK. The optional term logical-device-name
represents a logical device name you want to assign to the logical disk. The
logical device name can be one to three characters long, followed by an
optional colon (:). All alphanumeric characters are valid, but the first character must be a letter.

You can specify the entire command on one line, or you can rely on the system to prompt you for information. If you type MOUNT followed by a carriage return, the system prompts Device?. If you type the device name followed by a carriage return, the system prompts File?. The system does not
prompt you for an optional logical device name; enter the logical device
name on the same line as the file specification.

The following example associates logical disk unit 5 (LD5:) with the file
DATA.DSK on device DLO:.
+MOUNT LDS:

DLO:DATA

Use the SET LD CLEAN command to verify and correct logical disk assignments. See the SET command description for more information on SET LD
CLEAN.

The next example associates LD5: with the file DL0:DATA.DSK, after LD5:
has been assigned the logical device name OUT. When the command 1is
executed, the logical device name TST is also assigned to LD5:.
+ASSIGN LDS:
s MOUNT

Device?

OUT

0OUT

File? DLO:DATA T&T

NOTE

You must be careful to avoid accidentally destroying files
while performing logical disk subsetting. You can assign logical disk unit numbers to both protected and system (.SYS)
files, and write to those files.

Keyboard Commands

4-163

MOUNT
The following sections describe MOUNT comm
and options and include command examples.
/WRITE

Use this option to write-enable a logical disk.

This option allows

you read/write access to the logical disk
you specify. This is the default

mode.

The following example associates LD1: with
the file MYFILE.DSK on device
DY1:. When the command is executed, the logica
l disk is write-enabled.
+MOUNT/WRITE

LD1i:

DY1:MYFILE.DSK

/NOWRITE
Use this option to write-protect a logical disk.
This option
allows you read-only access to the logical disk
you specify. The default is
/WRITE.

The following example write-protects LDO:.
+MOUNT/NOWRITE

4-164

Keyboard Commands

LDO:

DY1:MYFILE.DSK

PRINT
The PRINT command lists the contents of one or more files on the line
printer.

‘

PRINT | | [/BEFORE[:date]

/SINCE[:date]
/DATE[.date]
. INEWFILES
/COPIES:n
/DELETE
INFORMATION
[NOJLOG
/PRINTER
JQUERY

GP) filespecs

/WAIT

/[NOJFLAGPAGE:n
/NAME:[dev:]jobname
/PROMPT
i

In the command syntax illustrated above, filespecs represents the file or files
to be printed. You can explicitly specify up to six files as input to the PRINT
command. The system prints the files in the order in which you specify them
in the command line. You can also use wildcards in the file specification. In
this case, the system prints the files in the same order as they occur in the
directory of the specified volume. If you specify more than one file, separate
the files by commas. If you omit the file type for a file specification, the system assumes .LST. You can specify the entire command on one line, or you
can rely on the system to prompt you for information. The PRINT command
prompt is Files?.

If you are running QUEUE or SPOOL as either a foreground or system job,
many of the PRINT commands are executed by these programs; therefore,
the keyboard monitor may return the dot prompt (.) immediately. See
Chapter 17 (QUEUE) or Chapter 18 (SPOOL) of the RT-11 System Ultilities
Manual for more information. If QUEUE is not running, some PRINT options are invalid (as noted below). Likewise, some PRINT options are invalid if QUEUE is running. You should use the LOAD command to assign
ownership of a non-file-structured device to QUEUE or SPOOL so that
another job will not intermix output on that device.

Some of the options accept a date as an argument. The syntax for specifying

the date is:

[dd]:mmm][:yy]
where:

represents the day (a decimal integer in the range 1-31)

mmm

represents the first three characters of the name of the month

represents the year (a decimal integer in the range 73-99)

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-165

PRINT
The default value for the date is the current system date. If you omit any of

the date values (dd, mmm, or yy), the system uses the values from the cur-

rent system date. For example, if you specify only the year ::82 and the current system date is May 4, 1983, the system uses the date 4:MAY:82. If the

current date is not set, it is considered O (the same as for an undated file in a

directory listing).

If you have selected timer support through the system generation process,
but have not selected automatic end-of-month date advancement, make sure

that you set the date at the beginning of each month with the DATE com-

mand. If you fail to set the date at the beginning of each month, the system
prints -BAD- in the creation date column of each file created beyond the end-

of-month. (Note that you can eliminate -BAD- by using the RENAME/
SETDATE command after you set the date.)
The PRINT command options follow; they include command examples.

/BEFORE[:date]

Use this option to print only those files created before
the specified date. If no date is specified the current system date is used. The

following command prints all .MAC files on DYO0: created before April 21,
1983:

+PRINT/BEFORE:21:APR:83

/COPIES:n

DYO:%,MAC

Use this option to print more than one copy of the file. The

meaningful range of values for the decimal argument n is from 1 to 32 (1 is

the default). The following command, for example, prints three copies of the

file REPORT.LST on the line printer.
+PRINT/COPIES:3

/DATE[:date]

REPORT

Use this option to print only those files with a certain cre-

ation date. If no date is specified the current system date is used. The following command prints all . MAC files created on April 21, 1983:
+PRINT/DATE:21:APR:83

DK:#*.MAC

/DELETE

Use this option to delete a file after it lists on the line printer.
This option must appear following the command in the command line. The

PRINT/DELETE operation does not ask you for confirmation before it
executes. You must use /QUERY for this function. The following example

prints PROG1.BAS on the line printer, then deletes it from DY1:.
+PRINT/DELETE

/FLAGPAGE:n

DY1:PROG1.BAS

Use this option if you want banner pages for each file
being printed, where n represents the number of banner pages you want for

4-166

Keyboard Commands

each file. This option is valid only if you are running QUEUE. If you specify
more than one file to be printed, QUEUE prints a banner page for each file.
If you use the /FLAGPAGE option but specify no value for n, the default
number of banner pages set with the QUEMAN/P option will be printed. If
the default number of banner pages set with the /P option is 0, n defaults to
1.

The banner page that QUEUE creates consists of a page showing the file
name in large, block letters. The banner page also includes a trailer that
lists the job name, the date and time the job was output, the copy number
and number of copies in the job, and the input file specification.
NOTE

If you use the PRINT command to output files, and QUEUE
is running, you may get banner pages even when you do not
specify /FLAGPAGE. This condition is due to a default value
you can set when you run QUEMAN, the background job
that serves as an interface between you and QUEUE. The
QUEMAN /P option sets the default number of banner pages
for output jobs, so that each time you output a job, you get
banner pages. This condition remains in effect until you reset
it with the QUEMAN /P option. For more information on
QUEMAN and the /P option, see Chapter 17, Queue Package,
in the

RT—11 System Utilities Manual.

If QUEMAN.SAV resides on the system device and you are using the trans-

parent spooler (SPOOL), you can use the /FLAGPAGE:n option to override
the default number of banner pages set with the SET SP FLAG=n command.

The following example prints three banner pages for each file in the command line.

,PRINT/FLAGPAGE:3 PROG1.MACPROGL.LST +PROGL1.STB

INOFLAGPAGE Use this option if you do not want any banner pages

printed for each of the files in the job you want printed. Use this option only
if you are running QUEUE. This option is useful if you have previously set
QUEMAN’s /P option to create banner pages each time a job is output (see
note above). The default setting is /NOFLAGPAGE unless you specify otherwise with the QUEMAN /P option.

AINFORMATION Use this option to change the severity level of the error message that prints when not all of the input files you specified are
found. If you do not use INFORMATION, the system prints an error mes-

sage when it is unable to find an input file, and execution halts after the
Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-167

command is processed. When you use /INFORMATI

ON, the system prints
an informational message to tell you which files it cannot
find, but execution continues.

In the following example,, the system prints input files FILE1.
TXT and
FILE3.TXT. However, since the system is unable to find
DLO:FILE2.TXT,
the system prints a message to inform you.
+PRINT/INFORMATION DLO:(FILEL1sFILEZFILE3),T¥T

PPIP-I-File not

found DLO:FILEZ2,TXT

/LOG

This option lists on the terminal the names of the files that
are
printed by the current command. Normally, the system prints
a log only if
there is a wildcard in the file specification. If you specify /QUERY
, the

query messages replace the log, unless you specifically type

in the command line.

/LOG/QUERY

The following example shows a PRINT command and the resultin

g log.

PRINT/LOG/DELETE
REPORT
Files copied/deleted:
DK:REPORT.+LST to LP:

/NOLOG This option prevents a list of the files copied from typing
out on
the terminal. You can use this option to suppress the log when
you use a
wildcard in the file specification.
/NAME:[dev:]jobname

Use this option to specify a job name for the files

you want printed. This option is valid only if you are runnin

can use up to six alphanumeric characters for the job name.

g QUEUE. You

If you specify a

device with the job name, you can send the files to that device,

you to send files to any valid RT-11 device. If you send

permitting

the files to a mass

storage volume, the system copies each input file to a separat
e output file
with the same file name and type as the input file. The job
name is used
only in the JOBNAME field of the banner page. The handler
for the output
device must be loaded in memory (see the LOAD command descript
ion).

The following example sends the files FILE1.LST, FILE2.
LST, and
FILE3.LST to files of the same name on DX1:. The job
name JOB5 appears
in the JOBNAME field of the banner page.
+PRINT/NAME:DX1:JOBS#FILEL1, FILE?, FILERD

The files from this example reside on DX1: as

JOB5.JOB.

/NEWFILES Use this option in the command line if you need
to print
only those files that have the current date. The following
example shows a
convenient way to print all new files after a session at the
computer.
+PRINT/NEWFILES #,LST
Files

corpied:

DK:OUTFIL.LST

to LP:

DK:REPORT.LST

to LP:

Version 5.1, July 1984

4-168

Keyboard Commands

/PRINTER Use this option to force files to be copied to the line printer.
Use this option when you are running QUEUE if you want to perform other
tasks while you want print a file. This option causes PIP to copy the file to
the line printer, which bypasses QUEUE processing.

to continue a command string on subsequent
/PROMPT Use this option
if you are running QUEUE. When you use
only
valid
is
lines. This option
/PROMPT, you can enter file specifications on subsequent lines directly to

QUEMAN, described in Chapter 17 of the RT—11 System Utilities Manual.

Terminate the command with two slashes (//).

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands 4-168.1

The following example uses /PROMPT to print FILEl,FILEZ,FILE:S,FILE&,
and FILES:

JPRINT/PROMPT FILE1L

*FILEZ:s

FILES3

*FILEA4

*FILED//

from you
/QUERY If you use this option, the system requests confirmation
on operbefore it performs the operation. /QUERY is particularly useful
the sysfiles
which
sure
ations that involve wildcards, when you may not be
PRINT
a
in
RY
tem selected for an operation. Note that if you specify /QUE
ication, the
command line that also contains a wildcard in the file specif
messages
confirmation messages that print on the terminal replace the logge
by typmessa
query
a
that would normally appear. You must respond to
initito
,
ing Y or any string beginning with Y, followed by a carriage return
any other
ate execution of a particular operation. The system interpretsThe
followion.
operat
c
specifi
response to mean NO; it does not perform the
ing example uses /QUERY.
JPRINT/QUERY #*.LST
Files

copied:

DK:OUTFIL.LST
DK :REPORT .LST

to LP:? N
to LP:27? Y

or after
/SINCE|[:date] Use this option to print only those files createisd on
the specified date. If no date 1s specified the current system date used.

The following command prints all) MAC files on DYO: created on or after
April 21, 1983:

L,PRINT/SINCE:21:APR:83 DYO:*.,MAC

. When
/WAIT The /WAIT option is useful if you have a single-disk system
then
but
you use this option, the system initiates the PRINT operation,
pauses and waits for you to mount the volume that contains the files you
-

want to print.

in <device>,
When the system pauses, it prints Mount input volumebegin
ning with
Continue?. Mount the input volume and type Y or any string ion. Type
N or
Y, followed by a carriage return, to continue the print operat
and
ion
operat
the
abort
to
any string beginning with N, or two CTRL/Cs,
mesthe
causes
return control to the keyboard monitor. Any other response
sage to repeat.

m prints the folAfter the system completes the PRINT operation the syste
e:
lowing message prompting you to mount the system volum
Mount system volume in {devicer’ Continue®?

Keyboard Commands

4-169

Mount the system volume and type Y or any strin
lowed by a carriage return. If you type any

ues to prompt you to mount the syste

g beginning with Y, fol-

other response the system contin-

m volume until you type Y.

The following command line prints ERRE

X.MAC from DLO:

+ PRINT/WAIT

Mount

DLOsERREY . MAC
volume in DLO:S Continue?
Vv
svystem volume in DLO:3s Conti
nue? v

input

In the case of PRINT, the system prints

prints Mount system volume in <devi

the file or files you specify before it

ce>; Continue?. Make sure when you

use /WAIT that PIP is on the syst
em volume. This option is invalid
if

QUEUE is running.

4-170

Keyboard Commands

PROTECT

file until
The PROTECT command protects a file so you cannot delete the
you remove the protection. (See the UNPROTECT command later in this
section.)

PROTECT

/BEFORE[:date] |

/SINCE[:date] |
/DATE[:date]
/NEWFILES
/EXCLUDE
/INFORMATION
/INOJLOG

filespecs

/QUERY

/SETDATE[:date]
/SYSTEM
/WAIT

or files
In the command syntax illustrated above, filespecs represents the file specify
you want to protect. You can explicitly specify up to six files. If you
more than one file, separate the files with commas. You can also useaswildcards in the file specifications. You can enter the PROTECT command one
line, or you can rely on the system to prompt you for information. The
PROTECT command prompt is F'iles?.

Some of the options accept a date as an argument. The syntax for specifying
the date is:

[dd][:mmm][:yy]
where:

represents the day (a decimal integer in the range 1-31)

represents the year (a decimal integer in the range 73-99)

mmm represents the first three characters of the name of the month

of
The default value for the date is the current system date. If you omit anycurthe date values (dd, mmm, or yy), the system uses the values from the current system date. For example, if you specify only the year ::82 and the the
rent system date is May 4, 1983, the system uses the date 4:MAY:82. Ifin a
current date is not set, it is considered O (the same as for an undated file
directory listing).

If you have selected timer support through the system generation process,
sure
but have not selected automatic end-of-month date advancement, make comDATE
the
that you set the date at the beginning of each month with
mand. If you fail to set the date at the beginning of each month,the system

endprints -BAD- in the creation date column of each file created beyond the ME/
RENA
the
using
by
-BADof-month. (Note that you can eliminate
SETDATE command after you set the date.)

Keyboard Commands

4-171

PROTECT
The following sections describe options you can use
with the PROTECT command and include command examples.
/BEFORE[:date] Use this option to protect only those
files created before
the specified date. If no date is specified the current system
date is used.
The following command protects all .MAC files
on DK: created before
March 20, 1983.
+ PROTECT/BEFORE:20:MAR:B3

Files

pProtected:

#.,MAC

DK:A.MAC
DK:B.MAC

DK:C.+MAC

/DATE[:date]

Use this option to protect only those files with a certain
creation date. If no date is specified the current system date
is used.

The following command protects all . MAC files on DK:

March 20, 1983.

+ PROTECT/DATE:20:MAR:83

Files

pProtected:

that were created on

*.,MADC

DK:A.MAC
DK:B.MAC
DK:C.MAC

/EXCLUDE

This option protects all the files on a device except

you specify. The following command, for exampl

the ones

e, protects all files on DYO:

except .SAV files.

+PROTECT/EXCLUDE DYO:%,SAY
PPIP-W-No ,8Y5 action
Files pProtected:

DYO:ABC,0OLD

DYO:AAF
. OLDY
D¥0O:COMB,
DYO:MERGE.,OLD

/INFORMATION

Use this option to change the severity level of the error

message that prints when not all of the input

files you specified are found. If

you do not use INFORMATION, the system prints an
is unable to find an input file, and execution halts

error message when it
after the command is proc-

essed. When you use INFORMATION, the system
prints an informational
message to tell you which files it cannot find, but

execution continues.

In the following example, the input files FILE1.TXT

protected. However, since the system is unable to
system prints a message to inform you.

and FILE3.TXT are

find DLO:FILE2.TXT, the

+ PROTECT/INFORMATION DLO:(FILEL1F
ILE2,FILE3) ,TXT
PPIP-I-File not found DLO:FILEZ.,T
Y

4-172

Keyboard Commands

PROTECT

protected by the
/LOG This option lists on the terminal a log of the files
use wildcurrent command. This is the default mode of operation when you
system does
cards in the file specification. Note that if you specify /LOG, the
/LOG and
both
Use
ds.
procee
not ask you for confirmation before execution
/QUERY to invoke logging and querying.

/NOLOG This option prevents a list of files being protected from printing
on the terminal.

/NEWFILES Use this option to protect only the files that have the current
system date. The following example protects the files created today.
,PROTECT/NEWFILES DY1:%*.,BAK

Files protected:
DY1:MERGE .BAK

before it
/QUERY Use this option to request confirmation from the systemions
protects each file. This option is particularly useful on operat the that
involve wildcards, when you may not be completely sure which filesates systhe
tem will select for the operation. Note that specifying /LOG elimin
query
the
retain
to
automatic query; you must specify JQUERY with /LOG
function. You must respond to a query message by typing Y or any string
ion of a
beginning with Y, followed by a carriage return, to initiate execut
NO; it
as
se
respon
other
any
particular operation. The system interprets
does not perform the operation.

The following example shows querying. Only the file DY1:AAF.MAC is
protected:

L PROTECT/QUERY DY1l:%®,.%
Files

protected:

? N
DY1:ABC . MAC
"y
DY1:AAF «MAC
DY1:MERGE.FOR 7 N

you
/ISETDATE[:date] This option causes the system to put the datem date
syste
t
curren
the
date
no
y
specify on all files it protects. If you specif
zeros in the
is used. If the current system date is not set, the system places the
existing
directory entry date position. Normally, the system preserves
file creation date when it protects a file.

The following example pmtects files and changes their dates to the current
system date.

,PROTECT/SETDATE DYO:%,FOR
Files

protected:

DYO:ABC.FOR
DYO:AAF .FOR
DYO:MERGE .FOR

Keyboard Commands

4-173

PROTECT
/SINCE[:date]

Use this option to protect only those
files created on or
after the specified date. If no date is
specified the current system date is
used.
The following command protects all M
. AC files on DYO: that were created on
or after April 21, 1983:
+PROTECT/SINCE:21:APR:87
Files

protected:

DYO:%*,MAC

DYO:A.MAC

DYO:B.MAC
DYO:C.MAC

/SYSTEM

Use this option if you need to protect

you use wildcards in the file type. If

system (.SYS) files and

you omit this option, the system files

excluded from the protect operation and

nal to remind you of this.

This example protects all files on DYO:

are

a message 1s printed on the termi-

with the file name MM, including

SYS files.

+PROTECT/SYSTEM
Files

DYO:MM,
*
pProtected:

DYO:MM,MAC
DYO:MM.0OBJ

DYO:MM,S5AY
DYO:MM,.5YS

/WAIT

When you use this option, the system

operation but then pauses for you to

initiates the PROTECT

mount the volume that contains the

files you want to protect. This option is espec
ially useful if you have a singledisk system.
When the system pauses, it prints Moun
t input volume in <device>;
Continue?, where <device> represents the
device into which you mount the
volume. Mount the volume and type Y
or any string beginning with Y, followed by a carriage return. Type N or any
string beginning with N, or two
CTRL/Cs, to abort the operation and retur
n control to the keyboard monitor.
Any other response causes the message
to repeat.

When the operation completes the syst

again. Mount the system volume and

followed by a carriage return. If you

prompts you to mount the system

em prints the Continue? message

type Y or any string beginning with

volume until you type Y. The syste

m then

prints the keyboard monitor promp

t. Make sure PIP is on your system

ume when you use the /WAIT option.

The following example protects the file
+PROTECT/WAIT

4-174

Mount

inPut

Mount

svstem

Keyboard Commands

FILE.MAC on an RL02 disk:

DLO:FILE.MAC

volume

DLOz3

DLO:S

type any other response the system

Continue?

vol-

The R command loads a memory image file from the system device into
memory and starts execution.

filespec

the program to be
In the command syntax shown above, filespec representsdevic
is SY:. The R
executed. The default file type is .SAV. The only validthe filee you
specify in
command is similar to the RUN command except that
R comthe
Use
an R command string must be on the system device (SY:).
leged jobs under the XM
mand only with background jobs including privijob
under the FB or XM
monitor. (Use FRUN to execute a foreground
monitor.)

The following command loads and executes MYPROG.SAV from device SY:.
R

MYPROG

l job under the
You can use the R command to execute a backgroundryvirtua
partition for the job,
XM monitor. The R command creates a virtual memo sets
up the user mapcreates a region 0 and window 0 definition block, and
ping registers.

Keyboard Commands 4-175

REENTER
The REENTER command starts the prog

ram at its reentry address (the

start address minus 2).

REENTER

The REENTER command accepts no optio
not clear or reset any memory areas. Use

gram for subsequent execution. You can

ns or arguments. REENTER does
it to avoid reloading the same pro-

use REENTER to return to a system program or to any program that allow
s for a REENTER after the pro-

gram terminates. You can also use
REENTER after you have used two

CTRL/Cs to interrupt those programs.

If you issue the REENTER command and
it is not valid, the message
?KMON-F-Invalid command is printed.
You must start that program with

an R or RUN command. Note that if
SET EXIT NOSWAP is in effect, you
may be unable to reenter the program.

In the following example the directory progr
am (DIR) lists the directory of
DK: on the line printer. Two CTRL/Cs inter
rupt the listing and return to the

monitor. REENTER starts DIR at its reent

line of input.
Rk

ry address, and DIR prompts for a

DIR

*LP:=DK:1%,%

CrRLO
CTRLD

+ REENTER

Note in the example above that using

REENTER does not mean that the
directory listing continues from where
it was interrupted, only that the
DIRECTORY program recommences execu
tion.

4-176

Keyboard Commands

REMOVE

The REMOVE command removes a device name from the system tables.

REMOVE

devicel,...device]

In the command syntax shown above, device represents the device to be
removed from the system tables. You can enter the REMOVE command on
one line, or you can rely on the system to prompt you for information. The
REMOVE command prompt is Device?.

Using the REMOVE command does not change the monitor disk image; it
only modifies the system tables of the monitor currently in core. This allows
you to configure a special system for a single session at the computer without having to reconfigure to return to your standard device configuration.
Bootstrapping the system device restores the original device configuration.
To permanently REMOVE a device, include the REMOVE command in the
standard system start-up indirect command file.

You cannot remove a loaded device, or any of the following handlers: SY:
(the handler for the system device), BA: (the BATCH handler), MQ (the message queue handler), or TT: (the terminal handler). If you attempt to
REMOVE a device that does not exist in the running monitor’s system table,
the system prints an error message. You can use the INSTALL command to
install a new device after using the REMOVE command to remove a device
(thus creating a free device slot).

The following command removes the line printer handler and the card
reader handler from the system. Note that the colons (:) are optional.
+ REMOVE

LP:CR:

Use the SHOW command to display on the terminal a list of devices that are
currently available on your system.

Keyboard Commands

4-177

RENAME
The RENAME command assigns a new name to an existing file.

RENAME

| /BEFORE[:date]

/SINCE[ :date]

input-filespecs

(SP)

output-filespecs

/DATE[:date]
INEWFILES
/INFORMATION
/[NOJLOG
[NOJPROTECTION

/QUERY
/INOJREPLACE
/SETDATE[:date]
ISYSTEM
/WAIT

In the command syntax illustrated above, input-filespecs represents the
file(s) to be renamed, and output-filespec represents the new name. You can
specify up to six input files, but only one output file. Note that the device

specification must be the same for input and output; you cannot rename a
file from one device to another. If a file exists with the same name and file

type as the output file you specify, the system deletes the existing file unless
you use the / NOREPLACE option to prevent this.

So that you do not rename system (.SYS) files by accident, the system

requires you to use the /SYSTEM option when you need to rename system

files and you use a wildcard in a file type. To rename files that cover bad
blocks (.BAD files), you must explicitly give the file name and file type of the
specified .BAD file. Since .BAD files cover bad blocks on a device, you usu-

ally do not need to rename or otherwise manipulate these files.

Note that because of the file protection feature, you cannot execute any
RENAME operations that result in deleting a protected file. For example,

you cannot rename a file to the name of a protected file that already exists

the same volume.

Some of the options accept a date as an argument. The syntax for specifying
the date is:

[dd][:mmm][:yy]
where:

represents the day (a decimal integer in the range 1-31)

mmm

represents the first three characters of the name of the month

represents the year (a decimal integer in the range 73—-99)

The default value for the date is the current system date. If you omit
any of
the date values (dd, mmm, or yy), the system uses the values from the
cur-

rent system date. For example, if you specify only the year ::82

and the current system date is May 4, 1983, the system uses the date 4-MAY:8
2. If the
current date is not set, it is considered 0 (the same as for an undated
file in a

directory listing).

4-178

Keyboard Commands

RENAME

If you have selected timer support through the system generation process,

but have not selected automatic end-of-month date advancement, make sure
that you set the date at the beginning of each month with the DATE command. If you fail to set the date at the beginning of each month, the system
prints -BAD- in the creation date column of each file created beyond the endof-month. (Note that you can eliminate -BAD- by using the RENAME/
SETDATE command after you set the date.)

The options you can use with the RENAME command follow.

/BEFORE]|:date] Use this option to rename only those files created before
the specified date. If no date is specified the current system date is used.

The following command renames all .MAC files on DYO: created before April
|

21, 1983:

. RENAME /BEFORE:21:APR:83 DYO:%,MAC DYO:*,BAK
Files

renameds:

DYO:A+MAC
DYO:B.MAC
DYO:C.MAC

to
to
to

DYO:A.BAK
DYO:B.BAK
DYO:C.BAK

/DATE[:date] Use this option to rename only those files with a certain
creation date. If no date is specified the current system date is used.

The following command renames all . MAC files created on March 20, 1982
to .BAK files:

. MAC *.BAK
+RENAME/DATE:20:MAR:82 DK:*
Files

renamed:

DK:A.MAC
DK:B.MAC
DK:C.+MAC

to
to
to

DK:A.BAK
DK:B.BAK
DK:C.BAK

/INFORMATION Use this option to change the severity level of the error
message that prints when not all of the input files you specified are found. If
you do not use INFORMATION, the system prints an error message when it
is unable to find an input file, and execution halts after the command is processed. When you use [INFORMATION, the system prints an informational
message to tell you which files it cannot find, but execution continues.

In the following example, the input files FILE1.TXT and FILE3.TXT are
renamed. However, since the system is unable to find DLO:FILE2.TXT, the
system prints a message to inform you.

ME DLO:(FILEL1,FILEZ2yFILE3).TX
/ INFORMATION
, RENA
PPIP-I-File not found DLO:FILEZ.TXT

/LOG This option lists on the terminal the files that were renamed by the
current command. Normally, the system prints a log only if there is a wild-

card in the file specification. If you specify /QUERY, the query messages

replace the log (unless you specifically type /LOG/QUERY in the command
line).

Keyboard Commands

4-179

RENA

This example demonstrates logging.
+RENAME
Files

DYO:(A*
., MAC

*,FOR)

revnamed:

DYO:ABC . MAC

DYO:AAF . MAC

DYQO:AB
. FOR
C

DYO:AAF.FOR

/NOLOG

This option prevents a list of the files that are renamed from
appearing on the terminal.

/INEWFILES
Use this option in the command line if you want to rename
only those files that have the current date. This is a convenient way to access
all new files after a session at the computer.

/PROTECTION

Use this option to give a file protected status so that it
cannot be deleted until you disable that status. Note that if a file is pro-

tected, you cannot delete it implicitly. For example, you cannot perform any
operations on a file that result in deleting a protected file. You can change

protected file’s name, but not its protected status, unless you also use

/NOPROTECTION option.

the

/NOPROTECTION

Use this option to enable a file for deletion. This
option disables a file’s protected status.

/QUERY

If you use this option, the system requests confirmation before it
performs the operation. /QUERY is particularly useful on operations that
involve wildcards, when you may not be sure which files the system selected

for the operation.

You must respond to a query message by typing Y or any string beginning
with Y, followed by a carriage return, to initiate execution of a particula
r
operation. The system interprets any other response to mean N O; it does
not
perform the specific operation. The following example demonstrates
querying.
+RENAME/QUERY
Files

DYO:(PIP1.SAY

PIP.SAW)

renamed:

DYO:PIP1.5AY

DYO:PIP,.5AY

Using the /QUERY option also provides a quick way of performing oper-

ations on several files. For example, renaming several files is easier if you
use /QUERY. You can then specify Y for each file you want renamed, as the

following example shows.
+SRENAME/QUERY

*,.,BAK

*,MAC

Files

4-180

renamed:
DK:PROG1.BAK

DK:PROGZ2.,BAK

DK:PROGI.MAC

DK:PROGZ2.MAC

VY
Y

DK:PROGG.BAK

DK:LMLBA.BAK

DK:PROGGB.MAC

DK:LMLS

DK:LMLBA.MAC

DK:LMLY

,BAK

Keyboard Commands

.MAC

RENAME

also contains a wilNote that if you specify /QUERY in a command line that
that print on the
deard in the file specification, the confirmation messages
appear.
terminal replace the log messages that would normally

ME com/REPLACE This is the default mode of operation for the RENA
output,
for
y
mand. If a file exists with the same name as the file you specifthe renam
e
the system deletes that duplicate file when it performs
operation.

operation if
/NOREPLACE This option prevents execution of the renamyeexists
on the
a file with the same name as the output file you specify alread
same device.

The following example uses /NOREPLACE. In this case, the output file
already existed and no action occurs.

Y
. RENAME /NOREPLACE DYO:TEST.SAV DYO:DUP.5A
performed

PPIP-W-Output file found:s no operation

DYO:TEST..S5AY

date you
/ISETDATE[:date] This option causes the system to put tthe
m date
specify on all files it renames. If you specify no date the curren syste
in the
zeros
places
m
syste
the
is used. If the current system date is not set,
ng
existi
the
ves
directory entry date position. Normally, the system preser
file creation date when it renames a file.

The following example renames files and changes their dates to the current
system date.

' RENAME/SETDATE DYO: (*,FOR ¥, 0LD)
Files

renamed:

DYO:ABC.FOR
DYO:AAF.FOR
DYO:MERGE.FOR

to DYO:ABC.OLD
to DYO:AAF.OLD
to DYO:MERGE.OLD

/ISINCE[:date] This option renames all files on a specified device create| d
on or after a specified date.
The following command renames only those MAC files on DK: created on or
after February 24, 1983.

JRENAME/SINCE:24:FEB:83 #.MAC * . BAK
Files

coried:

DK:A.MAC
DK:B.MAC
DK:C+MAC

to DK:A.BAK
to DK:B.BAK
to DK:C.BAK

m (.SYS) files and
/ISYSTEM Use this option if you need to rename systeoption
, the system
you use wildcards in the input file type. If you omit this ge is print
ed on the
messa
a
and
files are excluded from the rename operation
terminal to remind you of this.

Keyboard Commands

4-181

RENAME
This example renames all files on DY0:
with the file name MM, including
SYS files, to MX files:
+RENAME/SYSTEM

Files

renamed:

DYO:MM,
#

DYO:MM.MAC
DYO:MM,0BJ

DYO:MM,S5AY
DYO:MM.5YS

/WAIT

DYOeMMY ., %

DYO:MX.MAC

DYO:MX.0BJ

DYO:MX,5AY

DYO:MX.5YS

The /WAIT option is useful if you have a singl

e-disk system. When

you use this option, the system initia

tes the RENAME operation but then

pauses and waits for you to mount the

want to rename.

volume that contains the files you

When the system pauses, it prints Mount
input volume in <device>;
Continue?. Mount the input volume and type
Y or any string beginning with
Y, followed by a carriage return, to conti
nue the rename operation. Type N

or any string beginning with N, or two

CTRL/Cs, to abort the rename opera-

tion and return control to the keyboard monit

or. Any other response causes

the message to repeat.

After the system completes the rename opera
lowing message prompting you to mount the
Mount

svstem

volume

<devicer’

tion, the system prints the folsystem volume:

Continue?

Mount the system volume and type Y or any
string beginning with Y, followed by a carriage return. If you type
any other response the system

prompts you to mount the system

volume until you type Y. When you

/WAIT, make sure that PIP is on the syste

m volume.

use

The following command line renames
PRIAM.TXT to NESTOR.TXT.
PRIAM.TXT is on an RKO05 disk.
+RENAME/WAIT/NOLDG

4-182

Mount

input

Mount

svstem

Keyboard Commands

volume

RKO:PRIAM.TXT

RKO:§

NESTOR.TXT

Continue?

RESET

The RESET command resets several background system tables and does a
general clean-up of the background area.

RESET

The RESET command accepts no options or arguments.

It causes the system to purge all open input/output channels, initialize the

user program memory area, and release any device handlers that were not

explicitly made resident with the LOAD command. It also disables CTRL/O,
clears locations 40—53, resets the ring buffers, and resets the KMON (keyboard monitor) stack pointer.

Use RESET before you execute a program if a device or the monitor needs
reinitialization, or when you need to discard the results of previously issued
GET commands. The RESET command has no effect on the foreground or
system job.

The following example uses the RESET command before running a
program.

RESET

MYPROG

Keyboard Commands

4-183

RESUME
The RESUME command continues execution of the
from the point at which a SUSPEND command was

foreground or system job
1ssued.

RESUME [ jabmma]

If you have system job support enabled on your monito
r, jobname represents
the name of the foreground or system job you wish
to resume. (The RESUME

command accepts logical job names.) If you do

not have system job support

enabled on your monitor, do not include the name

wish to resume. When you issue the RESUME

of the foreground job you
command, the foreground or

system job enters any completion routines that
were scheduled while the job
was suspended. Note that RESUME is valid
only with the FB and XM

monitors.

The following command resumes execution of the
rently suspended.

foreground job that is cur-

The next command resumes execution of the syste

m job, QUEUE.SYS, that

is currently suspended.

You can also use the RESUME command to start

loaded with FRUN using /PAUSE. Likewise, you

a system job that you loaded with SRUN using

4-184

Keyboard Commands

a foreground job that you
can use RESUME to start

/PAUSE.

RUN

The RUN command loads a memory image file into memory and starts
execution.

RUN

GP) filespec [

GP)

input-list

argument

[ GP) thu’twtml}]

In the command syntax illustrated above, filespec represents the program to

be executed. The system assumes a .SAV file type for the executable file,
which can reside on any RT—11 block-replaceable device. The default device
is DK:. When used to execute a virtual job, the RUN command automatically loads the device handler for the device you specify if it is not already
resident. This eliminates the need to explicitly load a device handler when
you run an overlaid program from a device other than the system device.
The RUN command executes only those programs that have been linked to
run as background jobs. (Use FRUN to execute foreground jobs under the FB
or XM monitor.)

RUN is a combination of the GET and START commands. First it loads a
memory image file from a storage device into memory. Then it begins execution at the program’s transfer address.

You can use RUN to execute a privileged job under the XM monitor the
same way you execute any other background job under the FB or SJ monitor. However, a virtual job under the XM monitor requires special preparation for execution. The RUN command creates a virtual memory partition
for the job, creates a region 0 and window O definition block for the partition,
and sets up the user mapping registers.

The following command executes MYPROG.SAV, which is stored on device
DX1:.

YPRO
JRUN DX¥1:M

You can also pass an argument in the RUN command to the program, or

specify a list of input and output. This allows you to specify a line of input for
a user program or for a system utility program (which accepts file specifications in the special syntax described in Chapter 1 of the RT-11 System
Utilities Manual). The system automatically converts the input list and the

output list you specify into a format that the Command String Interpreter

(CSI) accepts. For example, to execute the directory program (DIR) and

obtain a complete listing of the directory of DX1: on the printer, you can use
the following command.

JRUN DIR DX1l:*.% LP:/E
L

Keyboard Commands

4-185

RUN
This command has the same effect as the following lines.
-

+RUN

DIR

*¥LP:/

E=DX1

%, %

*CTRLO
#

Note that when you use either an argument or an input
list and output list
with RUN, control returns to the monitor when the progra
m completes.

4-186

Keyboard Commands

SAVE

The SAVE command writes memory areas in memory image format to the
file and device that you specify.

SAVE

filespec [ (GP) parameters]

file to be saved
In the command syntax shown above, filespec representsfilethetype,
the system
a
y
specif
on a block-replaceable device. If you do not
saved.
be
to
uses .SAV. The parameters represent memory locations
Parameters are of the form:

address[-address(2)][,address(3)[-address(n)]]
where:

address is an octal value representing a specific block of memory locations to be saved. If you specify more than one address, each
address must be higher than the previous one.

that
RT-11 transfers memory in 256-word blocks, beginning on boundaries
block
a
are multiples of 256 (decimal). If the location(s) you specify make
that is less than 256 words, the system saves additional words to make a
256-word block.

ry address
The system saves memory from location 0 to the highest memo
ion 50 in
specified by the parameter list or to the program high limit (locatthe
start
the system communication area). Initially, the system gives
the
sets
and
0
value
t
address and the Job Status Word (JSW) the defaul
ses,
addres
ing
stack to 1000. If you want to change these or any of the follow command to
you can use the Deposit command to alter them and the SAVE
save the correct areas.

Area

Location

Start address
Stack
JSW
USR address
High address
Fill characters

40
42
44
46
50
56

ty to reset
If you change the values of the addresses, it is your responsibili
these
rning
conce
them to their default values. For more information l. Note that
the
addresses refer to the RT—11 Programmer’s Reference Manua
saves
ams; it
SAVE command does not write the overlay segments of progr
round or
foreg
for
and
comm
SAVE
the
only the root segment. You cannot use
virtual jobs.

Keyboard Commands

4-187

SAVE
The following command saves locations
10000 through 11777 and 14000
through 14777. It stores the conte
nts of these locations in the file
FILE1.SAV on device DK:.
+« SAVE

FILEL

10000-11000,14000-14100

The next example sets the reenter bit in

the JSW and saves locations 1000
e SY-.

through 5777 in file PRAM.SAV on devic
D

44=2000

+SAVE

4-188

SY:PRAM

Keyboard Commands

1000-5777

SET

The SET command changes device handler characteristics and certain system configuration parameters.

SET {phwinwfiwmm&} ©P) conditionl,...condition]
item

ents
In the command syntax illustrated above, physical-device-name repres
3—1
the device handler whose characteristics you need to modify. See Table
in this manual for a list of the standard RT-11 permanent device names.

to modify.
The argument item represents a system parameter that you need
EDIT),
(SET
The system items you can change include the default editor
(SET EXIT),
error handling (SET ERROR), program swapping upon exit
ct control
IND and KMON handling of indirect command files and indire
ing (SET
handl
rd
wildca
files (SET KMON), USR status (SET USR), and
as the
well
as
WILD). Table 414 lists the devices and items you can modify,
valid conditions for these devices and items.

command,
If you set more than one condition for a device in a single SET
TT,
the
of
ion
separate the conditions with commas. With the except locatesSET
file
the
SET USR, and SET item commands, the SET command nds are valid
SY:device.SYS and permanently modifies it. The SET comma permanently
for all three RT—11 monitors unless otherwise specified. Theythat the condimodify the device handlers (except where noted); this means that do not
tions remain set even across a reboot. For those SET commands
to the
permanently modify the device handlers, the conditions return
nent,
perma
r
appea
gs
settin
default setting after a reboot. To make these
ct
indire
up
start’s
include the appropriate SET commands in your system
combe
command file (see Section 4.4.3). The command you enter mustand will
comm
pletely valid for the modification to take place. The SETcurren
tly booted
the
to
ponds
modify only the device handler that corres
ng under
runni
while
monitor. For example, if you issue the SET command
the XM monitor, any device handlers modified will be of the form %%X.SYS.
NOTE

If a handler (except for TT: or the handler specified in SET dd:

[INOJWRITE commands) is already loaded when you issue a

SET command for it, you must unload the handler and load a
fresh copy from the system device for the modification to have
an effect on execution.

The colon (;) after each device name is optional.

Keyboard Commands

4-189

SET
Figure 4-2: Format of a 12-Bit Binary
Number (See
command for accompanying text)

SET CR: IMAGE

PDP-11 WORD
15

UNUSED (ALWAYS 0)
i

)

ZON
| ZONE
E | ZON
| ZONE
E | ZONE
5

Table 4-14: SET Device Conditions and Modif
ications
Device or
Item

Condition

Modification

CR:

CODE=n

Modifies the card reader handler to use either the
DEC 026 or
DEC 029 card codes. The argument n must be either
26 or 29.
The default value is 29.

CR:

CRLF

Appends a carriage return/line feed combination to
image. This is the normal mode.

CR:

NOCRLF

HANG

CR:

NOHANG

each card

Transfers each card image without appending
a carriage
return/line feed combination. The default is

CR:

CRLF.

Waits for you to make a correction if the reader is
not ready
at the start of a transfer. This is the normal mode.

Generates an immediate error if the device is not

start of a transfer. The handler waits (regard

ready at the

less of how the

condition is set) if the reader is not ready at some
ing a transfer (that is, the input hopper is empty,

point dur-

but an end-

of-file card has not been read). The default is HANG.
CR:

IMAGE

CR:

NOIMAGE

Causes each card column to be stored as a 12-bit
binary number, one column per word. The CODE option has
no effect in
IMAGE mode. Figure 4-2 illustrates the format
of the 12-bit
binary number. This format allows the system to
read binary
card images. It is especially useful if you use
a special encoding of punch combinations. Mark-sense cards
can be read in
this mode. The default is NOIMAGE.
Allows the normal translation (as specified by

option) to take place. The system packs data

the CODE

one column per

byte. It translates invalid punch combinations into
character, ASCII backslash (\), which is octal 134.

normal mode.

CR:

TRIM

the error

This is the

Removes trailing blanks from each card that
the system

reads. You should not use TRIM and
NOCRLF together

because card boundaries become difficult to read.
normal mode.

CR:

NOTRIM

TRIM is the

Transfers a full 80 characters per card. The default

is TRIM.

(Continued on next page)

4-190

Keyboard Commands

SET

Table 4-14: SET Device Conditions and Modifications (Cont.)
Device or

Item

dd:

Modification

Condition

CSR=n

Modifies the device handler to use n as the Control and

Status Register (CSR) address for the first controller.
The valid range for n is 160000 to 177570 (octal). This
option enables you to set a special CSR value in the
device handler itself without having to modify and reassemble the handler source code.

This command is valid for the following handlers:

DU:

TUS58
RLO1/02
RKO06/07
RC25, RA80, RD51, RX50

DX:

RXO01

DY:

RXO02

DD:
DL:
DM:

LP:

LS:

RK:

RKO05

XL:

dd:

CSR2=n

Modifies the device handler dd: to use n as the CSR

address for the second controller. This option is valid
only if you create the dd: dual controller handler
(through system generation).

This command is valid for the following devices:
DD:
DX:

DY:
DU:

dd:

RETRY =n

Allows you to change the number of times a device han-

dler attempts to recover from an error when the Error
Logger is running. The value n must be an integer in
the range 1 through 8. The default value for n is 8. The
variable dd: represents the device mnemonic of any device that the Error Logger supports:
DD:
DL:

DM:

DU:
DW:
DX:

DY:
DZ:
RK:

(Continued on next page)
Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-191

SET
Table 4-14: SET Device Conditions and Modifications (Cont.)
Device or
Item
dd:

Condition
SUCCES

Modification
Allows you to choose to log successful I/O transfers as

well as errors when the error logger is running. This is

the default mode. The variable dd: represents the device
mnemonic of any device that the Error Logger supports:

DD:

DL:
DM:

DU:

DW:
DX:

DY:

DZ:
RK:

dd:

NOSUCCES

Allows you to choose not to log successful I/O transfers

when the error logger is running. The default mode is

SET dd: SUCCES. The variable dd: represents the device mnemonic of any device that the error logger sup-

ports:

DD:
DL:
DM:

DU:

DW:

DX:
DY:

DZ.

RK:
dd:

VECTOR =n

Modifies the device handler to use n as the vector address for the first controller. The valid range for n is 100

to 474 (octal). This option enables you to set a special
vector value in the device handler without having to
modify and reassemble the handler source code.
]

This command is valid for the following handlers:

DD:

TU58

DL:

RLO01/02

DM:

RKO06/07

DU:

RC25, RA80, RD51, RX50

DX:

RXo01

DY:

RX02

LS:

XL:

LP:

RK:

RKO05

(Continued on next page)
Version 5.1, July 1984

4-192

Keyboard Commands

SET

Table 4-14: SET Device Conditions and Modifications (Cont.)
Device or

Item

dd:

Modification

Condition

VEC2=n

Modifies the device handler dd: to use n as the vector for

the second controller. This option is valid only if you
create the dd: dual controller handler (through system
generation).

This command is valid for the following devices:
DD:
DL:

DM:
DU:

DX:
DY:

DU:

CSR3=n

Modifies the DU: device handler to use n as the CSR

address for the third controller. This option is valid only
if you create the third DU: controller handler (through
system generation).

DU:

CSR4=n

Modifies the DU: device handler to use n as the CSR

address for the fourth controller. This option is valid
only if you create the fourth DU: controller handler
(through system generation).

DUn:

PART =x

DUn:

PORT =x

DUn:

UNIT=x

Defines the partition of a disk on which device unit n

resides. The variable x is an integer in the range 0-255,
depending on the size of the disk device (each partition
is 64K blocks). The default for x is 0. (See the RT-11
Software Support Manual for more information on
MSCP disk partitioning.)

Defines which port to access when device unit n is speci-

fied. The variable x is an integer in the range 0-3. (See
the RT-11 Software Support Manual for more information on using multiple ports with MSCP devices.)

Defines which unit plug number to access when device

unit n is specified. The variable x is an integer in the
range 0-251.

DU:

VEC3=n

Modifies the DU: device handler to use n as the vector

for the third controller. This option is valid only if you
create the third DU: controller handler (through system
generation).

DU:

VEC4=n

Modifies the DU: device handler to use n as the vector

for the fourth controller. This option is valid only if you
create the fourth DU: controller handler (through system generation).

WCHECK

Verifies output to RD50 or RD51 disks by reading data
after writing it to the disk.

(Continued on next page)
Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-193

SET
Table 4-14: SET Device Conditions and Modifications (Cont.)
Device or

Item

Condition

Modification

NOWCHECK

Does not verify output to RD50 and RD51 disks.

WRITE

Write-enables RD50/RD51 drive unit 0.

NOWRITE

Write-locks RD50/RD51 drive unit 0.

DXn:

WRITE

Write-enables RX01 drive unit n. The condition remains

set across a reboot unless DXn is the system device
when you issue the command. The default value for n is

DXn:

NOWRITE

Write-protects RX01 drive unit n. This condition re-

mains set across a reboot unless DXn is the system de-

vice when you issue the command. The default value for
nis 0,

DYn:

WRITE

Write-enables RX02 drive unit n. This condition re-

mains set across a reboot unless DYn is the system de-

vice when you issue the command. The default value for

nis 0.

DYn:

NOWRITE

Write-protects RX02 drive unit n. This condition re-

mains set across a reboot unless DYn is the system device when you issue the command. The default value for
n is 0.

EDIT

Invokes the text editor EDIT with the keyboard monitor
EDIT command. This is the normal mode. The system

returns to this condition after a reboot.

EDIT

KED

Invokes the keypad editor (KED) with the keyboard

monitor EDIT command. For more information on the

keypad editor, see the PDP-11 Keypad Editor User's
Guide. This condition is valid only for VT100-compati-

ble terminals. The system returns to EDIT after a re-

boot.

EDIT

KEX

Invokes the virtual form of the keypad editor (KEX)
with the keyboard monitor EDIT command. KEX runs
only as a background job, and only under the XM monitor. Otherwise, you use KEX just as you would KED.

See the PDP-11 Keypad Editor User’'s Guide for instruc-

tions on how to use KED. This condition is valid only for
VT100—compatible terminals. The system returns to

EDIT after a reboot.

EDIT

K52

Invokes the keypad editor (K52) with the keyboard

monitor EDIT command. This condition is valid only if

your terminal is

a VT52. For more information on the

keypad editor, see the PDP-11 Keypad Editor User’s
Guide. The system returns to EDIT after a reboot.

(Continued on next page)
Version 5.1, July 1984

4-194

Keyboard Commands

SET
Table 4—-14: SET Device Conditions and Modifications (Cont.)
Device or

Item

Modification

Condition

EDIT

TECO

EL:

LOG

EL:

NOLOG
|

Invokes the text editor TECO with the keyboard moni-

tor EDIT command. The default is EDIT. The system
returns to that condition after a reboot.

Used when running the Error Logger under the SJ mon-

itor. Turns on the Error Logger if the EL handler is
loaded and begins logging errors in an EL handler internal buffer. The Error Logger can be turned off by issuing SET EL NOLOG or by unloading the EL handler.
The system returns to SET EL: NOLOG after a reboot.

Used when running the Error Logger under the SJ mon-

itor. Turns off the Error Logger. This is the default condition.

(Continued on next page)
Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-194.1

SET

Table 4-14: SET Device Conditions and Modifications (Cont.)
Device or

Item

Condition

EL:

PURGE

Modification

r.
Used when running the Error Logger under the SJ monito
buffer.

Discards the contents of the internal Error Logger
This command is valid only if the Error Logger has been
enabled with the SET EL LOG command.

ERROR

r comCauses indirect command files and keyboardasmonito
EXECUTE,

mands that perform multiple operations (such
abort if
which combines assembling, linking, and running) toproduc
e
errors
These
occur.
errors
fatal
or
severe
or
errors
and
-F-,
-E-,
codes
y
severit
error messages that contain the
_U-. This setting causes indirect files and keyboard monitoer
commands to abort on MACRO assembly errors. An exampl

of an error is an undefined symbol in an assembly. An example of a severe error is a device that is write-locked when the
system attempts to write to it. If either condition occurs, the
indirect command file or keyboard monitor command aborts
the next time the monitor gets control of the system. This is
the normal setting. The system returns to this condition after
a reboot.

ERROR

FATAL

Causes indirect command files and keyboard monitor com-

mands to abort only if severe or fatal errors occur. These
errors produce error messages that contain the severity codes
-E-, -F-, and -U-. See SET ERROR ERROR, which is the
default setting. The system returns to that condition after a
reboot.

ERROR

NONE

Allows indirect command files and keyboard monitor com-

mands to continue to execute even though they contain significant errors. Most monitor fatal errors still cause the indirect command file or keyboard monitor command to abort.
Fatal errors that always abort indirect command files contain the -U- characters in the error messages. See SET
ERROR ERROR, which is the default setting. The system
returns to that condition after a reboot.

ERROR

SEVERE

ERROR

WARNING

Causes indirect command files and keyboard monitor com-

mands to abort only if severe or fatal errors occur. These
errors produce error messages that contain the severity codes
_F- and -U-. See SET ERROR ERROR, which is the default
setting. The system returns to that condition after a reboot.

Causes indirect command files and keyboard monitor com-

mands to abort if warnings, errors, or severe or fatal errors
occur. These errors produce error messages that contain the
severity codes -W-, -E-, -F-, and -U-. See SET ERROR
ERROR, which is the default setting. The system returns to
that condition after a reboot.

(Continued on next page)

Keyboard Commands

4-195

SET
Table 4-14: SET Device Conditions and
Modificati

ons (Cont.)

Device or
Item

Condition

EXIT

SWAP

Modification
When a program terminates, causes any

portion of the pro-

gram that resides in SWAP.SYS
to be written back into
memory. This is the default setting.

EXIT

NOSWAP

When a program terminates, prevents any

portion of the pro-

gram that resides in SWAP.SYS from
being written back

into memory. This may prevent you from

ter a program; however, it allows consid

being able to reen-

erably better perfor-

mance when using slower media (such

as TU58, RX01, and

RX02). The default setting is SET EXIT SWAP.

Causes IND

to execute a file specified in the command

spec as an IND control file. Causes

@file-

KMON to execute a file

specified in the command $@filespec as
,,,,,,,,,,

an indirect command

file. The default setting is SET KMON NOIND

KMON

NOIND

Causes KMON to execute a file specified
in the command

@filespec as an indirect command file. If you try to execute

an indirect control file, an error occurs.

This is the default

setting.

CLEAN

Verifies and corrects, if necessary, all curren

assignments by checking them against

t logical disk

the files on volumes

that are mounted. This command is most

have moved or removed files on a volume,

useful after you

or after you have

removed a volume from a device. If
a logical disk file has
moved, the new location is noted so that
you can continue to
use that logical disk. If you have deleted
a logical disk file or

the volume containing a logical disk
file is no longer
mounted, the logical disk assignment

is disconnected. In the

case of a volume that you have remove

d, the disconnect is
only temporary. You can reestablish the
assignment when

you remount the volume by using

the SET LD CLEAN com-

mand again. The keyboard commands SQUE

EZE and BOOT

automatically perform the SET LD CLEA

N operation.

LDn:

WRITE

Used during disk subsetting; defines logical
disk unit n as
being write-enabled (read/write access allowed
). The value n

must be an integer in the range 0 throu

gh 7.

LDn .

NOWRITE

Used during disk subsetting; defines logical
disk unit n as
being write-locked (read-only access
allowed). The value n
must be an integer in the range 0 throug

h 7.

LP:

Sends carriage returns to the printer. To

on the printer, use this condition for any

allow overstriking

FORTRAN program

that uses formatted input and output. Use
CR also for any
LS11 or LPO5 line printer to prevent loss
of the last line in
the buffer. LP NOCR is the normal mode.

(Continued on next page)

4-196

Keyboard Commands

SET

Table 4-14: SET Device Conditions and Modifications (Cont.)
Device or

Item

LP:

Modification

Condition
NOCR

Prevents the system from sending carriage returns to the

printer. This setting produces a significant increase in printing speed on LP11 printers, where the line printer controller
causes a line feed to perform the functions of a carriage
return. This is the default setting.

LP:

CSR=n

Modifies the line printer handler to use n as the Control and

Status Register (CSR) address for the line printer controller.
The value you supply must be an octal word address not less
than 160000. This option enables you to set a special CSR
value in the line printer handler itself, without having to

modify and reassemble the handler source code. Use this
option if you have installed the line printer controller at a
nonstandard address.

Passes all characters, including nonprinting control charac-

LP:

CTRL

LP:

NOCTRL

Ignores nonprinting control characters. This is the normal

LP:

FORM

Declares that the line printer has hardware form feeds, caus-

LP:

NOFORM

Causes the line printer handler to simulate hardware form

ters, to the printer. Use this condition to pass the bell character to the LA180 printing terminal. You can use this mode for
LS11 line printers. (Other line printers print a space for a
control character.) The default is NOCTRL.
mode.

ing the line printer handler to send form feeds to the controller. When you use this option, the line printer handler sends
the form feed character to the printer each time the handler
encounters a form feed. This is the default setting.

feeds by sending one or more line feeds to the printer. When
you use this setting, you must also use the LENGTH = n setting and position the paper at the top of a form (that is, at the
page perforation) before you start to use the printer. Using
the NOFORM condition is useful if you are using a preprinted form that has a nonstandard length. You must use

this setting if your printer does not accommodate form feeds.
FORM is the default setting.

Issues a form feed before a request to print block 0. This is the

LP:

FORMO

LP:

NOFORMO

Turns off FORMO mode, which is the default.

LP:

HANG

Waits for you to make a correction if the line printer is not

normal mode.

ready or is not ready at some point during printing. If you
expect output from the line printer and the system does not
respond or appears to be idle, check to see if the line printer is
powered on and ready to print. This is the normal mode.

(Continued on next page)

Keyboard Commands

4-197

SET
Table 4-14: SET Device Conditions and Modifications (Cont.)
Device or
Item

Condition

LP:

NOHANG

Modification
Generates an immediate error if the line printer is not
ready. Valid only when you are running under a monitor

with device timeout support (included during system generation). The default is HANG.

LP:

Allows the system to send lowercase characters to the
printer. Use this condition if your printer has a lowercase

character set. The default is

LP:

NOLC

Translates characters in

NOLC.

lowercase

printing. This is the normal mode.

LP:

LENGTH=n

SKIP=n

before

Causes the line printer to use n as the number of lines per
page. The default number of lines per page is 66. Use this

option with the

LP:

to uppercase

NOFORM and SKIP
=n settings.

Causes the line printer handler to send a form feed to the
printer when it comes within n lines of the bottom of a page.

Use this setting to prevent the printer from printing over

page perforations. The value you supply for n should be an

integer from 0 to the maximum number of lines on the paper. If you set SKIP=0, the handler sends lines to the
printer regardless of the position of the paper. If you have

set SKIP to a value other than 0, set SKIP =0 to disable this
condition. When you use this setting, you must also use the

LENGTH =n setting. The default is SKIP
= 0.

LP:

TAB

Sends TAB characters to the line printer. The default is

NOTAB.

LP:

NOTAB

Expands TAB characters by sending multiple spaces to the

line printer. This is the normal mode.

LP:

VECTOR=n

Modifies the line printer handler to use n as the vector of
the line printer controller. The value you supply for n must

be an even octal address below 500. This option enables you

to set a special vector value in the line printer handler itself,
without having to modify the handler source code and reas-

semble. Use this option if you have installed the line printer
controller at a nonstandard address.

LP:

WIDTH=n

Sets the line printer width to n, where n is a decimal integer between 30 and 255 inclusive. The system ignores any

characters that print past column n. The default is 132
LS:

Sends carriage returns to the printer. To allow overstriking

on the printer, use this condition for any FORTRAN program that uses formatted input and output. (Use CR also for

any LS11 or LPO5 line printer to prevent loss of the last line
in the buffer.) This is the normal mode.

(Continued on next page)
Version 5.1, July 1984

4-198

Keyboard Commands

SET

Table 4—~14: SET Device Conditions and Modifications (Cont.)
Device or
Item

Modification

Condition

LS:

NOCR

Prevents the system from sending carriage returns to the
printer. This setting may produce a significant increase in
printing speed on some line printers, where the printer controller causes a line feed to perform the functions of a carriage return. The default is CR.

LS:

CSR=n

Modifies the line printer handler to use n as the Control
and Status Register (CSR) address for the printer controller.
The value you supply for n must be an octal word address
not less than 160000. This option enables you to set a special
CSR value in the printer handler itself, without having to
modify the handler source code and reassemble. Use this
option if you have installed the printer controller at a nonstandard address.

LS:

CTRL

Passes all characters, including nonprinting control characters, to the printer. Use this condition to pass the bell character to the LA180 printing terminal. The default is NOCTRL.

LS:

NOCTRL

Ignores nonprinting control characters. This is the normal
mode.

LS:

FORM

Declares that the line printer has hardware form feeds, causing the line printer handler to send form feeds to the controller. When you use this option, the line printer handler sends
the form feed character to the printer each time the handler
encounters a form feed. This is the default setting.

LS:

NOFORM

Causes the line printer handler to simulate hardware form
feeds by sending one or more line feeds to the printer. When
you use this setting, you must also use the LENGTH=n
setting and position the paper at the top of a form (that is, at
the page perforation) before you start to use the printer.
Using the NOFORM condition is useful if you are using a
preprinted form that has a nonstandard length. You must
use this setting if your printer does not accommodate form
feeds. FORM is the default setting.

LS:

FORMO

Issues a form feed before a request to print block 0. This is
the normal mode.

LS:

NOFORMO

Turns off FORMO mode. The default is FORMO.

LS:

HANG

Waits for you to make a correction if the line printer is not
ready or becomes not ready during printing. If you expect
output from the printer and the system does not respond or
appears to be idle, check to see if the printer is powered on
and ready to print. This is the normal mode.

LS:

NOHANG

Generates an immediate error if the printer is not ready.
Valid only when you are running under a monitor with device timeout support (included during system generation).
The default setting is HANG.
(Continued on next page)
Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-199

SET
Table 4-14: SET Device Conditions and Modifications (Cont.)
Device or
Item
LS:

Condition
LC

Modification
Allows the system to send lowercase characters to the
printer. Use this condition if your printer has a lowercase
character set. This is the normal mode.

LS:

NOLC

Translates lowercase characters to uppercase before print-

ing. The default is LC.

LS:

LENGTH=n

Causes the printer to use n as the number of lines per
page. The default number of lines per page is 66. Use this

option with the

LS:

SKIP=n

NOFORM and SKIP =n settings.

Causes the line printer handler to send a form feed to the
printer when it comes within n lines of the bottom of a page.

Use this setting to prevent the printer from printing over

page perforations. The value you supply for n should be an
integer from 0 to the maximum number of lines on the paper. If you set SKIP=0, the handler sends lines to the
printer regardless of the position of the paper. If you have

set SKIP to a value other than 0, set SKIP =0 to disable this

condition. When you use this setting, you must also use the
LENGTH =n setting. The default is SKIP=0.

LS:

SPEED =n

Sets the printer to run at baud n, where n can be any of
the following baud rates:

150

1200

200

1800

3600
4800

110

300

2000

9600

134

600

2400

19200

This command is valid only when running on a Professional
300 series system.

You must specify a value for n in this command. If you do

not use this command, the printer runs at 4800 baud.

LS:

TAB

Sends TAB characters to the printer. The default is NOTAB.

LS:

NOTAB

Expands TABs by sending multiple spaces to the printer.

This is the normal mode.

LS:

VECTOR=n

Modifies the printer handler to use n as the vector of the
line printer controller. The value you supply for n must be

an even octal address below 500. This option enables you to

set a special vector value in the line printer handler itself,
without having to modify the handler source code and reas-

semble. Use this option if you have installed the printer controller at a nonstandard address.

LS:

WIDTH=n

Sets the printer to width n, where n is a decimal integer
between 30 and 255 inclusive. The system ignores any characters that print past column n. The default is 132.

Version 5.1, July 1984

4-200

Keyboard Commands

(Continued on next page)

SET

Table 4-14: SET Device Conditions and Modifications (Cont.)
Device or

Item

Condition

MM:

DEFALT=9

Modification

Returns to default settings for 9-track tape. The 9-track de-

faults are:

DENSE =809
ODDPAR
NODUMP

MM:

DENSE =[800

or 809
or 1600]

Sets density for the 9-track tape handler. Do not alter the

density setting within a volume. A density setting of 1600
bits/in automatically sets parity to odd. The valid density
settings for 9-track tape are:
800 bits/in
1600 bits/in

(Continued on next page)
Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-200.1

SET

Table 4—14: SET Device Conditions and Modifications (Cont.)
Device or
Item

Modification

Condition
ODDPAR

Sets parity to odd for 9-track tape. DIGITAL recommends
this setting.

NOODDPAR

Sets parity to even for 9-track tape. DIGITAL does not recommend this setting for normal operation, and provides it only
for compatibility with other systems.

MT:

DEFALT=9

Returns to default settings for 9-track tape:
DENSE =800
ODDPAR

MT:

DENSE =800
or 809

Sets density for 9-track tape. Settings 800 and 809 are the
only valid settings for 9-track tape. Thus, the valid density
setting is:

9-track:

800 or 809 = 800 bits/in
NOTE

These SET command options apply to all units of the magtape controller. Six-bit mode and core dump mode are
described in the RT-11 Software Support Manual.
ODDPAR

Sets parity to odd for 9-track tape. DIGITAL recommends
this setting.

MT:

NOODDPAR

Sets parity to even for 9-track tape. DIGITAL does not recom-

mend this setting for normal operation, and provides it only
for compatibility with other systems.

SL:

ASK

Allows the single-line editor to determine the type of termi-

nal you are using, so SL can use the proper escape sequences.

SL prints on the console the type of terminal you are using

and the type of support SL will provide for that terminal. If
SL does not support the terminal you are using, SL prints an
error message.

SL:

LEARN

Helps you learn to use the single-line editor by allowing you
to lock the help display on the top half of your screen. You
can use the bottom of your screen to type command lines and
display console output. After you issue the commands SET
SL ON and SET SL LEARN, type the PF2 key to display the
help frame and lock it on the screen. This command is valid
for VT'100-compatible terminals only.

SL:

NOLEARN

SL:

Unlocks the help display and allows it to scroll off the screen,
so you can use the entire screen to display console input and
output. This is the default setting. The SET SL: OFF command performs an automatic SET SL: NOLEARN command.
Loads and enables the single-line editor.

(Continued on next page)

Keyboard Commands

4-201

SET
Table 4-14: SET Device Conditions and Modifications (Cont.)
Device or

Item

Condition

Modification

SL:

OFF

Unloads and disables the single-line editor.

SL&Z

SYSGEN

Converts the system generation characteristics of SL.SYS
(under the SJ and FB monitors) or SLX.SYS (under the XM

monitor) to match those of the current monitor without
requiring you to reassemble SL.

SL:

TTYIN

Enables you to edit responses to prompts printed by the sys-

tem utilities. When SET SL: TTYIN in enabled, the prompt

prints on one line, and your response appears on the follow-

ing line. (This command allows SL to intercept and edit input
requests from "TTYIN. SL always intercepts and edits input

requests from .CSIGEN, .CSISPC, and .GTLIN.)
NOTTYIN

Disables your ability to edit responses to prompts printed by
the system utilities. When SET SL: NOTTYIN is enabled,

the prompt and your response appear on the same line. (This

command prevents SL from intercepting and editing input
requests from TTYIN. SL still intercepts and edits input
requests from .CSIGEN, .CSISPC, and .GTLIN.) This is the

default mode.
VTxxx

Tells the single-line editor which type of terminal you are

using, so SL can send the proper escape sequences. It is recommended that you use SET SL: ASK instead of this
command.

This command supports the following terminals:
VT52

(SETSL: VT52)

VT62

(SETSL: VT62)

VT100 (SET SL: VT100)
VT101 (SET SL: VT101)

VT102 (SET SL: VT102)
The default setting is SET SL VT'100.

SL:

WIDTH=n

Allows you to set the width of the terminal. The variable n
represents the maximum number of characters on a single

line on the terminal. The maximum allowable width of a line

you can input at the terminal is:

n - (width of prompt string including monitor prompt) — 1

For example, if you issue the command SET SL: WIDTH = 50,
and the prompt consists of only the keyboard monitor prompt
(.), then the maximum number of characters you can type as

input on one line is:

50—~1-1 = 48 characters

The default value for n is 79.

(Continued on next page)

4-202

Keyboard Commands

SET

Table 4-14: SET Device Conditions and Modifications (Cont.)
Device or
Item
SP

Modification

Condition
FLAG=n

Sets the number of flag pages to generate whenever
SPOOL begins printing a file. The default for n is 0. The
largest value for n is 4.

FORMO

Issues a form feed on the output device each time SPOOL
encounters block 0 of a file to be printed. Useful if the output
device handler does not support its own FORMO option. The
default mode is NOFORMO.

NOFORMO

Turns off FORMO0 mode. This is the default mode.

KILL

Removes all currently spooled output from SPOOL’s work

file.

WAIT

Stops sending output from the current file, discards the remaining spooled output for that file, and begins sending output from the next listing in SPOOL’s work file.

Suspends sending output from SPOOL’s work file to the
output device, but does not delete anything from the work
file. SPOOL continues to accept input with SET SP WAIT in
effect.

NOWAIT

Resumes sending spooled output suspended by the com-

WIDE

Causes SPOOL to generate 132-column flag pages.

NOWIDE

Causes SPOOL to generate 80-column flag pages.

TT:*

CONSOL=n

mand SET SP WAIT.

Directs the system to use the terminal whose logical unit
number you specify as the console terminal. The terminal
whose logical unit number you specify must not be currently
attached by the foreground or any system job. To use this
setting, you must have a multiterminal configuration. The
system returns to this default after a reboot. You cannot use
this setting for a remote line.

TT:*

CRLF

Issues a carriage return/line feed combination on the console terminal whenever you attempt to print past the right
margin. You can change the margin with the WIDTH command. This is the normal mode. This setting is invalid with
a non-multiterminal SJ monitor.

TT:*

NOCRLF

Takes no special action at the right margin. This setting is

invalid with a non-multiterminal SJ monitor. The default;
the system returns to this condition after a reboot.

Treats CTRL/B and CTRL/F (and CTRL/X in monitors that
include system job support) as background and foreground
program control characters and does not transmit them to

your program. This is the normal mode. This setting is not
valid for the SJ monitor. The system returns to this condition after a reboot.

*SET TERM can be substituted for SET TT:

(Continued on next page)
Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-203

SET
Table 4-14: SET Device Conditions and Modifications (Cont.)
Device or
Item

Condition

TT:*

NOFB

Modification
Causes CTRL/B and CTRL/F (and CTRL/X in monitors
that include system job support) to have no effect. Issue SET

TT: NOFB to KMON, which runs as a background job, to
disable all communication with the foreground or system
job. To enable communication with the foreground job, issue
the command SET TT FB. This setting is not valid for the SJ

monitor. The default is FB. The system returns to that con-

dition after a reboot.

TT:*

FORM

Indicates that the console terminal is capable of executing

hardware form feeds. This setting is invalid with a non-multiterminal SJ monitor.

NOFORM

Simulates form feeds by generating eight line feeds. This

setting is not valid for the non-multiterminal SJ monitor.,

This is the normal mode. The system returns to this condition after a reboot.

TT:*

HOLD

Enables the hold screen mode of operation for the VT50,
VT52, and VT61 terminals. The command has no effect on
any other terminals, but it can cause a left square bracket
([)
to print. This setting is valid for all monitors. NOHOLD
is

the default setting. The system returns to that condition af-

ter a reboot.

TT:*

NOHOLD

Disables the hold screen mode of operation for the VT50
terminal. The command has no effect on any other terminal,

but it can cause a backslash (\) to print. This setting is valid

for all monitors. The default is NOHOLD. The system returns to that condition after a reboot.

PAGE

Treats CTRL/S and CTRL/Q characters as terminal output
hold and unhold flags and does not transmit them to your

program. You must use this setting if you are using a VT100
terminal. This setting is not valid for the non-multitermina
l
SJ monitor. This is the normal mode. The system returns
to

this condition after a reboot.
NOPAGE

Causes CTRL/S and CTRL/Q to have no special meaning
.
This setting is not valid for the non-multiterminal SJ moni-

tor. The default is PAGE. The system returns to that condition after a reboot.

TT:*

QUIET

Prevents the system from echoing lines from indirect
files.
The default is NOQUIET. The system returns to that condi-

tion after a reboot.
TT:*

NOQUIET

Echoes lines from indirect files. This is the default mode.
The system returns to this condition after a reboot.

*SET TERM can be substituted for SET TT:

| 4-204 Kéyboard Commands

(Continued on next page)

SET

Table 4-14: SET Device Conditions and Modifications (Cont.)
Device or

Item

TT:*

Condition

SCOPE

Modification

Echoes DELETE or RUBOUT characters as backspace-

space-backspace. Use this mode if your console terminal is a
VT50, VT05, VT52, VT55, VT61, VT100, or if GT ON is in

effect. The default; the system returns to this condition after

a reboot. Note that you delete TAB characters by typing a
single RUBOUT or DELETE, even though the cursor does
not move back the correct number of spaces. This is a restriction in SCOPE modes.

Echoes DELETE or RUBOUT characters by enclosing the

TT:*

NOSCOPE

deleted characters in backslashes. SCOPE is the default.

TT:*

TAB

Indicates that the console terminal is capable of executing

TT:*

NOTAB

hardware tabs. This setting is not valid for the non-multiterminal SJ monitor. The default is NOTAB. The system returns to that condition after a reboot.

Simulates tab stops every eight positions. Many terminals

supplied by DIGITAL have hardware tabs. This setting is
not valid for the non-multiterminal SJ monitor. This is the
normal mode. The system returns to this condition after a
reboot.

TT:*

WIDTH=n

Sets the terminal width to n, where n is an integer be-

tween 30 and 255. The system initially sets the width to 80.
This setting is not valid for the non-multiterminal SJ monitor. (See SET TT CRLF). The system returns to 80 after a
reboot.

Allows the background job to place the User Service Rou-

USR

SWAP

USR

NOSWAP

BASE =nnnnnn Allows you to select the location in memory where block 0

tine in a swapping state. This setting is not valid for the XM
monitor. This is the normal mode for FB and SJ monitors.
The system returns to this condition after a reboot.

Prevents the background job from placing the User Service
Routine in a swapping state. This setting is not valid for the
XM monitor. The default is SWAP for FB and SJ monitors.
The system returns to that condition after a reboot.

of a virtual disk will begin (the base address). Since the base
address is a 22-bit address that must be represented in 16
bits, the bottom six bits (bits 0—5) are always 0. Therefore,
when specifying the value nnnnnn use only the top 16 bits of

the base address you want. For example, if you want the
base address to be 10025600 (octal), specify 100256 for
nnnnnn. The default value for nnnnnn is 1600 (octal) under
the SJ and FB monitors, and 10000 (octal) under the XM
monitor. (The address 10000 is the division between 18- and
22-bit addresses.)

*SET TERM can be substituted for SET TT:

(Continued on next page)
Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-205

SET
Table 4-14: SET Device Conditions and Modifications (Cont.)
Device or
Item
WILD

Condition
EXPLICIT

Modification
Causes the system to recognize file specifications exactly as

you type them. If you omit a file name or a file type in a file
specification the system does not automatically replace the
missing item with an asterisk (*). Wildcards are described in

Section 4.2 of this manual. The default is IMPLICIT. The
system returns to that condition after a reboot.

WILD

IMPLICIT

Causes the system to interpret missing fields in file specifications as asterisks (*). Wildcards are described in Section 4.2

of this manual. Table 4-2 shows how the system interprets
commands that have missing fields. This is the normal mode.
The system returns to this condition after a reboot.

SPEED =n

Sets the communication port to run at baud n, where n can
be any of the following baud rates:
o0

150

1200

3600

200

1800

4800

110

300

2000

9600

134

600

2400

19200

You must specify a value for n in this command. If you do
not use this command, the communication port runs at 1200

baud.

The following examples illustrate the SET command. This command allows

the system to send lowercase characters to the printer:
+SET LP LC

The next command sets the system wildcard default to implicit.
+SET WILD

IMPLICIT

As a result of this command the system inserts an asterisk (*) in place of a
missing file name or file type in a file specification. See Table 4-2 for a list

of these commands.

Version 5.1, July 1984

4-206

Keyboard Commands

SHOW
The SHOW command prints information about your RT-11 system on the
console terminal.

SHOW | (5P ( ALL

CONFIGURATION
DEVICES|:dd]
ERRORS

/ALL

FILE:filespec

FROM([ date]
/OUTPUT tilespec

< | PRINTER

/SUMMARY

TERMINAL

/TO[-date]

JOBS
MEMORY
QUEUE
SUBSET
g\mmmmm

The information includes hardware configuration, monitor version, total
amount of memory on the system and organization of physical memory,
special features in effect, device names and logical device name assignments, terminal characteristics for terminals currently active on a multiterminal system, logical disk subsetting, and device handler status. If you
are running the Error Logger, QUEUE, or SPOOL, the SHOW command
can provide information on errors and the update status of files waiting to
be sent to an output device.

If you specify SHOW without an option, SHOW displays your system’s
device assignments. The devices the system lists are those known by the
RT-11 monitor currently running. This list reflects any additions or deletions you have made with the INSTALL and REMOVE commands. The listing also includes additional information about particular devices. The informational messages and their meanings are:

Message

Indicated Condition

(RESORC)
or = RESORC

The device or unit is assigned to the background job RESORC (for FB and XM monitors
only).

(F)
or =F

The device or unit is assigned to the foreground
job (for FB and XM monitors only and monitors
without system job support).

(jobname)
or =jobname

The device or unit is assigned to the system or
foreground job (for FB and XM monitors that
have system job support), where jobname represents the name of the system or foreground job.

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-207

SHOW
o,

(Loaded)

The handler for the device has been loaded into
memory with the LOAD command.

(Resident)

The handler for the device is included in the
resident monitor.

=logical-device-name(1),

logical-device-name(2)...
Jlogical-device-name(n)
xx free slots

The device or unit has been assigned the indi-

cated logical device names with the ASSIGN
command.
The last line tells the number of unassigned, or

free, device slots.

The following example was created under an FB monitor that has system job
support. It shows the status of all devices known to the system.
+SHOW

(Resident)

(Resident)
RK1

&%y

RK2

LSTs

(Resident)

(Loaded)

DKy

OBJsy

SRCs

BIN

MAP

(Loaded)
KOs

LP:

(MYPROG)

(Loaded=QUEUE)

free

slots

The listing shows first that TT, MQ, and RK are resident in memory. The

other device handlers known to the system are MQ, DL, DM, DX, LP, and
MT. There are five free slots in the table. RKO: has the logical names SY,

DK, OBJ, SRC, and BIN. RK1: has the logical names LST and MAP. The DX
handler is loaded and device DXO0: belongs to the foreground job, MYPROG.
The LP: handler is loaded and belongs to the system job, QUEUE.
The options for the SHOW command follow.

ALL This option is a combination of CONFIGURATION, DEVICES,
device assignments (SHOW command with no option), JOBS, TERMINALS,
MEMORY, and SUBSET in that order.

CONFIGURATION This option displays the monitor version number
and update level, the monitor SET options in effect, the hardware configura-

tion, the total amount of memory on the system, and the special features in
effect (if any). The listing varies, of course, depending on which monitor and
which hardware system you are using.

First, the listing always shows the version number and update level of the
currently running monitor.

4-208

Keyboard Commands

SHOW

Next, information about the monitor is displayed. The first line indicates
the device from which the system was bootstrapped, and the next line indicates whether or not 22-bit addressing is on if you are running the XM
monitor, followed by whether any foreground jobs are loaded. Then the
listing shows whether the user service routine (USR) is set to SWAP or
NOSWAP, whether EXIT is set to SWAP or NOSWAP, whether KMON is
set to IND or NOIND, whether TT is set QUIET or NOQUIET, the severity
level to which ERROR is set, whether SL is set ON or OFF, and the default
editor. The indirect file nesting prints out as a decimal number, followed by
whether global .SCCA support is enabled or disabled.
Next, the listing displays the system hardware configuration. It lists the
processor type, which can be one of the following:
LSI 11
MICRO/PDP-11
PC325/PC350
PDT 130/150
PDP 11/04
PDP 11/05,10

PDP 11/15,20
PDP 11/24
PDP 11/34
SBC 11/21
SBC 11/21 PLUS
PDP 11/23

PDP 11/23 PLUS
PDP 11/35,40
PDP 11/44
PDP 11/45,50,55
PDP 11/60
PDP 11/70

Then, the total amount of memory your system contains is displayed; for
example:

56KB of memory

A separate line prints out for each of the following items that is present on
your system:

FP11 Hardware Floating Point Unit
Commercial Instruction Set (CIS)
Extended Instruction Set (EIS)
Floating Instruction Set (FIS)
KT11 Memory Management Unit
Parity Memory
Cache Memory

60 Cycle System Clock

If you have graphics hardware (VT11 or VS60), another line is printed out
to indicate it. The clock frequency (50 or 60 cycles) prints next, followed by
a line for the KW11-P programmable clock, if there is one on your system.

Finally, the listing either shows that there are no special features in effect,
or it lists the appropriate features from the following list:
Device I/O time-out support
Error logging support
Multi-terminal support
Memory parity support
SJ timer support

System job support

The following example was created on a PDP 11/23 processor:
Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-209

SHOW
+SHOW CONFIGURATION
RT-11FB

VOS
. ¥x

Booted

from

USR

set SWAP

is5

DLO:RTI11FB

EXIT is

set SWAP

KMON

set

set NOQUIET

IND

ERROR

set OFF

EDIT is

set ERROR

set EDIT

KMON nesting derpth
Global

PDP

.SCCA flad

is5 3
is

disabled

11723

1024KB of memory
Extended

Instruction Set (EIS)
KTi1 Memory Manadement Unit
Parity Memorvy

B0 Cvecle Svystem Clock

DEVICES[:dd]

This option displays the RT-11 device handlers and their
status, CSR addresses, and vectors. You can obtain this information for a

specific device by including the optional argument dd. The variable dd represents the two-letter permanent device mnemonic.

The messages for handler status are as follows:

Installed
Not installed

-Not installed (handler special features do not match those of the
monitor)
nnnnnn (load address of handler)

Resident

The following example illustrates SHOW DEVICES.
.SHOW

DEVICES

DEVICE

S5TATUS

CSR

VECTOR(S)

122620

177170

264

Installed

176500

300

Installed

174400

160

Not

installed

177170

264

Installed

L76500

300

Installed

177514

200

Installed

172522

224

Installed

172130

154

Installed

OOO0O00

Q00

Installed

DOO00O0

000
210

Installed

177440

Installed

177372

000

Resident

177400

220

Not

Q00000

000

Installed

172520

Not

172440

224

installed
installed

304

304
300

Because of its special format, the TT handler is never listed.

Version 5.1, July 1984

4-210

Keyboard Commands

SHOW

ERRORS The SHOW ERRORS command is valid only if you have error
logging enabled on your monitor. For a complete description of the Error
Logger and directions on how to start it, see Chapter 16 of the RT—-11 System
Utilities Manual, Error Logging. Note that error logging is a special feature,
available only through the system generation process. Because the Error
Logger can compile statistics on each I/0 transfer that occurs, in addition to
hardware errors that occur, it is a good idea to enable error logging on a
spare system volume that you use only when you want to compile error
statistics.

The SHOW ERROR command invokes ERROUT, one of the programs in the
error logging package. ERROUT runs as a background job under the FB and
XM monitors, and as the only job under the SJ monitor. ERROUT creates
reports on the I/O and error statistics the Error Logger compiles, and can
print the reports at the terminal, line printer, or store the reports in a file

you specify. If you type the SET dd: NOSUCCESS command before you use
the Error Logger, the Error Logger compiles statistics on only the errors
that occurred, not the successful I/O transfers. Therefore the reports generated when you type SHOW ERRORS will list only errors that occurred. For
complete descriptions of the reports ERROUT creates, see Chapter 16 of the
RT-11 System Utilities Manual, Error Logging.

ERRORS {eD

Prints a full report on each I/O transfer that

has occurred in addition to each /O, memory
parity, and cache memory error that has
occurred.

ERRORS/ALL

ERRORS/FILE:filespec

Same as SHOW ERRORS @eD

Prints a full I/O transfer and error report from

the file you specify. The file you specify must
be of the same format that the error logger
uses for its statistical compilations.

ERRORS/FROM:date

Prints a full I/O transfer and error report for

errors that occurred starting from the date
you specify. Enter the date as dd:mmm:yy,
where:

is a two-digit day

mmm is the first three characters of a month
name

ERRORS/TO:date

is the last two digits of a year

Prints a full /O transfer and error report for
errors that occurred up to the date you specify.

Keyboard Commands

4-211

ERRORS/OUTPUT: filespec

Enters the I/O transfer and error report in the

output file you specify. This is useful if you
want to save the error logging reports.

ERRORS/PRINTER

Prints the I/O transfer and error report at the

line printer.
ERRORS/SUMMARY

Prints a summary error report at the terminal. The summary error report lists only the

errors that occurred, not the successful I/O
transfers.

ERRORS/TERMINAL

Prints the I/O transfer and error report at the

terminal. TERMINAL is the default setting.

JOBS

This option displays data about the jobs that are currently

This option also tells the following:

® The job name and number (if you have not enable
d
your monitor, the foreground job name appear

is1)

loaded.

system job support on

s as FORE, and its priority

® The console the job owns (with a non-multiterminal

blank)

monitor, this space is

® The priority level of the job

® The job’s running state (running, suspended, or done

but not unloaded)

® 'The low and high memory limits of the job

® The start address of the job’s impure area

The example that follows displays data about currently
SHOKW

running jobs:

JOBS

JOB

NAME

CONSOLE

DUEUE

LEVEL

STATE

L O

SUSPEND

118224

IMPURE

RESORC

HIGH

RUN

130306

000000

115284

126110

132344

MEMORY

The SHOW MEMORY command lists the organi
zation of
physical memory. The listing displays such inform
ation as where jobs are
loaded, where devices handlers are loaded, where in memor
y KMON and the
USR will reside, and the number of words of memory
each occupies. Memory
addresses are displayed in octal.

If you are running under the XM monitor, the SHOW
MEMORY listing is
divided into two sections, the first for extended memor
y and the second for
kernal memory.

4-212

Keyboard Commands

SHOW

The following example displays the organization of physical memory when
running under the SJ monitor.
+ SHOW MEMORY
Address

160000
157400
127274
126112
001000

Module

Words

.
4096
120,

RMON

6170,

IOPAGE

313,

%lfififi%

217897,

The next example shows the organization of physical memory when running under the XM monitor.
+ SHOW MEMORY

Extended Memory

Address

01000000

00160000

Module

bbb

Words

393216,

102400,

Kernal Memory

Address

Module

Words

160000
157350
124144
122612
111610
QO1000

I0PAGE
RK
RMON
DY
USRK
s o BGe oy

4096.
140,
B970.,
365,
2305,
10620,

QUEUE Use the SHOW QUEUE command to get a listing of the contents

of the queue for QUEUE or SPOOL, or both if both are running. This option

is invalid if you are not running QUEUE or SPOOL (see the RT-11 System
Utilities Manual). The QUEUE listing shows the output device, job name,
input files, job status, and number ofcopies for each job that is queued. The
SPOOL listing shows whether the SPOOL output device is active or inactive, the number of blocks spooled for output, and the number of free blocks
in SPOOL’s work file. The sample command line that follows lists the current contents of the queue for QUEUE.
+ SHOW QUEUE

DEVICE

JOB

STATUS

LPO:

LABZ

LPO:
MT1:
LPO:

HODG
SZYM
JOYCE

0
©
Q

COPIES

FILES

PASS3 JLET

3
1
1

MESMAN.DOC
.
TX:
REFMAN
.DOC
S5M

2
2

PASS4 JLET
PASSS JL&T

DOCPLN.DOC
Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-213

SHOW
The job status column contains a P if the job is currently being
output, an S
if the job being output is suspended, or a Q if the Job is waiting
to be output.
If you have a large lineup of files, and your console is a video terminal
, you

can use the CTRL/S and CTRL/Q commands to control the

listing.

scrolling of the

SUBSET This option diplays the subsetting of physical disks
into logical
disks. The logical disk unit is displayed with the file name
to which it is
assigned and the size of the logical disk in decimal blocks.
The following sample command line displays the logical disks

physical disks DU: and DL1: are divided.
« SHOW

into which the

SUBSET

LDO

LDZ

LDl

DU:DISK.LSTL4000,
]
DL1:DISK.SRCL1200,]

DL1:WORK.DSKLGOO,
]

An asterisk (*) following the file information indicat

es that although the
logical disk assignment exists, the file does not exist on the
volume that is
currently mounted in the drive unit. A number sign (#)
indicates that the
device handler is not loaded. These symbols are especially
useful in determining the status of logical disk assignments after you
use the SET LD
CLEAN command.

If LD.SYS is not installed, the system prints the messag
e LD handler
unavailable. If no logical disk units have been mounte
d (by using the

MOUNT

command), the system prints No LD units mounted.

TERMINALS
This option indicates the status of and special feature
s in
effect for currently active terminals on multiterminal
systems. If the monitor does not include multiterminal support, the following messag
e prints:
No

multi-terminal

supPort

Multiterminal support is a special feature; it is not part
of the distributed
RT-11 monitors.

If the monitor includes multiterminal support, SHOW TERMI
NALS prints
a table of the existing terminals and lists the following informa
tion:

Unit number:

0-15

Owner:

‘Background, foreground, system job, or none

Type:

Local
Remote (dial-up)

Console

S-Console (shared by background and foreground or
system job)

Is attached to another job (the foreground)

4-214

Keyboard Commands

SHOW

Interface type:

DL or DZ

Width:

Width in characters, up to 255

SET options in effect:
TAB
CRLF
FORM

SCOPE

Baud rate if DZ; not applicable (N/A) if DL
The following example shows the terminal status of an RT-11 system.

Line speed:

+SHOW TERMINALS

Unit
0
1

Owner
RESORC
F

Tyre
S-Console DL
DL
Local

WIDTH TAB CRLF FORM SCOPE SPEED
N/A
Na
No
132 No Yes
Yes N/A
No
80 Yes No

Keyboard Commands

4-215

SQUEEZE
The SQUEEZE command consolidates all unuse

d blocks into a single area

on the device you specify and consolidates
the directory entries on the

device.

SQUEEZE

| /OUTPUT:device | 5P)
| INOJQUERY

device

WAIT

In the command syntax illustrated above, device

access volume to be compressed. To perform

represents the random-

a squeeze operation, the system

moves all the files to the beginning of the device

you specify, producing a sin-

gle unused area after the group of files. The
squeeze operation does not
change the bootstrap blocks of a device. The
system requests confirmation
before it performs the squeeze operation. You must
type Y followed by a carriage return to execute the command.
The squeeze operation does not move files with

prevents you from reusing bad blocks that

.BAD file types. This feature

occur on a disk. During a squeeze

operation, files with a .BAD file type will be
renamed FILE.BAD. The system inserts files before and after .BAD files
until the space between the last

file it moved and the .BAD file is smaller than the
next file to be moved. Note
that you should use the SQUEEZE command when
you get a directory full

error, even if there is still space remaining

on the volume.

If you perform a squeeze operation on the syste

m device, the system auto-

matically reboots the running monitor
when the compressing operation
completes. This reboot takes place in order
to prevent system crashes that
might occur when the monitor file or handl
er files are moved. The system

volume cannot be squeezed if a foreground or syste

m job is loaded.

You should not attempt a squeeze operation
on a volume that a running
foreground job is using. Data may be written over
a file that the foreground
job has open, thereby corrupting the file and
possibly causing a system
crash.
The options for the SQUEEZE command follow

/OUTPUT:device

Use this option to transfer all the files from
the input
device to the output device in compressed forma
t, an operation that leaves
the input device unchanged. The output devic
e must be an initialized
random-accesss volume. (Use the INITIALIZE
command to do this.)
Note
that the system does not request confirmati
on before this operation proceeds. If the output device is not initialized,
the system prints an error mes-

sage and does not execute the command.

Note that /OUTPUT does not copy

boot blocks; you must use the COPY/BOOT
command to make the output
volume bootable.

4-216

Keyboard Commands

SQUEEZE

The following example transfers all the files from RKO: to RK1: in compressed format, leaving RKO: unchanged.
+ SOUEEZE/QUTPUT:RK1:

RKO:

/QUERY This option causes the system to request confirmation before it
executes a squeeze operation. You must respond by typing a Y or any string
beginning with Y, followed by a carriage return, for execution to proceed.
This is the default operation. /QUERY is invalid with the /OUTPUT option.

/INOQUERY Use this option to suppress the confirmation message that
prints before a squeeze operation executes. The following command compresses all the files on device DY 1: and does not query.
+SQUEEZE/NOQUERY

DY1:

/WAIT When you use /WAIT, the system initiates the SQUEEZE operation, but then pauses and waits for you to mount the volume you want to
squeeze. This option is especially useful if you have a single-disk system.

When the system pauses, it prints Mount input volume in <device>;
Continue?. Mount the volume and type Y or any string beginning with Y,
followed by a carriage return, to continue the squeeze operation. Type N or
any string beginning with N, or two CRTL/Cs, to abort the squeeze operation and return control to the keyboard monitor. Any other response causes
the message to repeat.

When the squeeze operation is complete the system prompts you to remount
the system volume. Mount the system volume and type Y or any string

beginning with Y, followed by a carriage return. If you type any other
response the system prompts you to mount the system volume until you type
Y. The system then prints the keyboard monitor prompt. When you use the
/WAIT option, make sure DUP is on the system volume.
The following sample command line squeezes an RLO2 disk:
,SOUEEZE/WAIT

DLO:/Saueezes

Mount
Mount

DLO:

Are

vou

sure?

input volume in DLO:3 Continue? Y
svstem volume in DLO:§ Continue? Y

The system may repeat the mount input volume, mount output volume cycle
several times to complete the SQUEEZE operation.

Keyboard Commands

4-217

SRUN
The SRUN command initiates system jobs.

SRUN

(5P)

filespec | /BUFFER:n
/LEVEL:n
/NAME:logical-jobname
/PAUSE
TERMINAL:n

In the command syntax illustrated above, filespec represents the program to
be executed. Because this command runs a system job, it is valid only for FB
and XM monitors that have system job support, a special feature enabled
through the system generation process.
You can run up to six system jobs simultaneously, in addition to the foreground and background jobs. If you attempt to run a system job that is

already active, an error message prints on the terminal.

Note that when you issue the SRUN command, the monitor assumes a .REL
file type. The default device is SY:.

In an XM monitor, you can use the SRUN command to run a virtual .SAV
image program. You must type the file type explicitly.

The options that you can use with SRUN follow.
/BUFFER:n

Use this option to reserve space in memory over the actual
program size. The argument n represents the number of octal words of mem-

ory to allocate. You must use this option to run any FORTRAN program as a
system job. If you use this option for a virtual job linked with the /V option

(or /XM), the system ignores /BUFFER because the system provides a buffer

in extended memory.

/LEVEL:n

Use this option to assign an execution priority level to the job,
where n can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. If you attempt to assign the same priority

level to two system jobs, an error message prints at the terminal. If omitted,
the priority level defaults to the highest level that is unassigned.
/NAME:logical-jobname

Use this option to assign a logical job name to a
program. This is the name that programmed requests and SYSLIB calls use

to reference a system job. If you attempt to assign the same logical job name
to two system jobs, an error message prints at the terminal. If you do not

specify a logical job name, the system assumes the file name of the program.

/PAUSE

Use this option to help you debug a program. When you type the

carriage return at the end of the command string, the system prints the load

address of your program and waits. By means of ODT, you can examine or
modify the program before starting execution (see Chapter 20 of the RT—11

System Utilities Manual). You must use the RESUME command to restart
the system job.
Version 5.1, July 1984

4-218

Keyboard Commands

SRUN

The following command loads the program MFUNCT.SYS, prints the load
address, and waits for a RESUME command to begin execution.
,SRUN MFUNCT/PAUSE
Loaded at 1263556
,RESUME MFUNCT

m job.
TERMINAL:n Use this option to change the console of the syste
ble
availa
e
featur
special
a
Your system must have multiterminal support,
n
ent
argum
The
only through system generation, before you can use it.
al
ent termin
represents a terminal logical unit number. By assigning a differsystem
, forefor
need
the
ate
elimin
to interact with the system job, you
ground, and background jobs to share the console terminal.

round
Note that the original console terminal still interacts with the backg
job and with the keyboard monitor, unless you use the SET TT: CONSOL
command to change this.

Keyboard Commands 4-219

START

The START command initiates execution of the
program currently in memory (loaded with the GET command) at the addre
ss you specify.

START

[

(5P

address]

In the command syntax shown above, addre

senting any 16-bit address. If you omit

system uses the starting address that

ss is an even octal number repre-

the address or if you specify 0, the

is in location 40. If the address you

specify does not exist or is invalid for any

and the monitor prints an error message.

reason, a trap to location 4 occurs

Note that this command is valid
for background jobs only, and not for extended-m
emory virtual jobs.

The following example loads MYPROG-.SAYV
into memory and begins execution.
«GET

MYPROG

+START

The next example loads MYPROG.SAV,
which has previously been linked
with ODT, into memory and begins execu
tion at ODT’s starting address
(obtained from the link map).
+GET

MYPROG

+GET

0ODT

ODT

V05,00

4-220

Keyboard Commands

SUSPEND

The SUSPEND command temporarily stops execution of the foreground or
system job.

SUSPEND

jobname]

If you have system job support enabled on your monitor, specify the name of
the system or foreground job you wish to suspend. If you do not have system

job support, then do not include an argument with the SUSPEND command.
The SUSPEND command is not valid for the SJ monitor.

The system permits foreground input and output that are already in progress to finish; however, it issues no new input or output requests and enters
no completion routines (see the RT—11 Programmer’s Reference Manual for
a detailed explanation of completion routines). You can continue execution
of the job by typing the RESUME command.

The following command suspends execution of the foreground job that is currently running on a system that does not have system job support.
+ SUSPEND

The next command suspends execution of the system job, QUEUE, that is
currently running on a system that does have system job support.
,SUSPEND QUEUE

Keyboard Commands

4-221

TIME
Use the TIME command to set the time of day or to display the current
time
of day.

TIME

[

(EP)

hh:mm:ss]

In the command syntax shown above, hh represents the hour (from

0 to 23),

mm represents the minutes (from 0 to 59), and ss represen
ts the seconds

(from 0 to 59). The system keeps time on a 24-hour clock.

To enter the time of day, specify the time in the format described above.
You
should do this as soon as you bootstrap the system. The following
example

enters the time, 11:15:00 A.M.
«+TIME

11:15

As this example shows, if you omit one of the arguments the system

To display the current time of day, type the TIME command
argument, as this example shows.

assumes

without an

JTIME
11:15:01

When you install the standard RT-11 monitors, the clock rate is
preset to 60
cycles. Consult the RT—11 System Generation Guide for information
on set- ting the clock to a 50-cycle rate.

The FB and XM monitors automatically reset the time each day at
midnight
when a TIME command is used, or ifa .GTIM programmed request
is issued.
(The TIME command issues a .GTIM programmed request.)
The SJ monitor

resets the time under these conditions only if you select

ing the system generation process.

4-222

Keyboard Commands

timer support dur-

TYPE

The TYPE command prints the contents of one or more files on the terminal.
TYPE

| /BEFORE[:date]

filespecs

/SINCE[ :date]
/DATE[:date]
/NEWFILES
/COPIES:n

/DELETE
ANFORMATION
/[NOJLOG
/QUERY
IWAIT

files
In the command syntax illustrated above, filespecs represents the file or
TYPE
the
to
to be typed. You can explicitly specify up to six files as input
command. The system prints the files in the order in which you specify them
In
in the command line. You can also use wildcards in the file specification.the
in
occur
they
which
in
this case, the system prints the files in the order
directory of the device you specify. If you specify more than one file, separate
the files by commas. If you omit the file type for a file specification, the system assumes .LST. You can specify the entire command on one line, or you
can rely on the system to prompt you for information. The TYPE command
prompt is Files?.

Some of the options accept a date as an argument. The syntax for specifying
the date 1s:

[dd][:mmm][:yy]
where:

represents the day (a decimal integer in the range 1-31)
mmm represents the first three characters of the name of the month
represents the year (a decimal integer in the range 73-99)
yy

of
The default value for the date is the current system date. If you omit anycurthe
from
the date values (dd, mmm, or yy), the system uses the values
rent system date. For example, if you specify only the year ::82 and the curthe
rent system date is May 4, 1983, the system uses the date 4:MAY:82.fileIfin
a
d
undate
an
for
as
current date is not set, it is considered O (the same
directory listing).

If you have selected timer support through the system generation process,

sure
but have not selected automatic end-of-month date advancement, make comDATE
the
with
month
each
that you set the date at the beginning of
mand. If you fail to set the date at the beginning of each month, the system

Keyboard Commands

4-223

TYPE
prints -BAD- in the creation date column of

each file created beyond the end-

of-month. (Note that you can eliminate -BADby using the RENAME/
SETDATE command after you set the date.)
The TYPE command options and examples follow

/BEFORE[:date]

This option prints on the terminal all files on
a specified
volume created before a specified date. The
following command prints only
those .MAC files on DK: created before March 24,
1983.
+ TYPE/BEFORE:24:MAR:83

/COPIES:n

*,MAC

Use this option to list more than one copy

meaningful range of values for the decimal

of the file. The

argument n is from 2 to 32 (1 is

the default). The following command, for examp
le, prints three copies of the
file REPORT.LST on the terminal.
+ TYPE/COPIES:3

REPORT

/DATE[:date]

Use this option to print on the terminal only
those files
with a certain creation date. If no date is specif
ied the current system date is
used. The following command prints on the
console all .MAC files on DK:

created on March 20, 1983:
+ TYPE/DATE:20:MAR
: 83

DK:#*,MAC

/DELETE

Use this option to delete a file after it is typed
on the terminal.
This option must appear following the comm
and in the command line. The
TYPE/DELETE operation does not ask
you for confirmation before it
executes. You must use /QUERY for this functi

on.

The following example prints a BASIC progr
am on the terminal, then
deletes it from DY1:.
+TYPE/DELETE

DY1:PROG1.BAS

/INFORMATION

Use this option to change the severity level of the

message that prints when not all of the

error

input files you specified are found. If

you do not use INFORMATION, the system
prints an error message when it
is unable to find an input file, and execution
halts after the command is processed. When you use INFORMATION , the
system prints an informational

message to tell you which files it cannot find,

but execution continues.

In the following example, the input files FILE
1.TXT and FILE3.TXT are
printed. However, since the system is unabl
e to find DLO:FILE2.TXT, the
system prints a message to inform you.

« TYPE/INFORMATION DLO:(FILELFILE2
FILER)
PPIP-I-File not found DLO:FILEZ.
THT

4-224

Keyboard Commands

. TXT

TYPE

/LOG This option prints on the terminal the names of the files that were
printed by the current command. Normally, the system prints a log only if
there is a wildcard in the file specification. If you specify /QUERY, the query
messages replace the log, unless you specifically type /LOG/QUERY in the
command line.

The following example shows a TYPE command and the resulting log.
CTIYPE/LDG OQUTFILWLST
Files coried:

DK:0UTFIL.LST

TT:

/NOLOG This option prevents a list of the printed files from printing on
the terminal. You can use this option to suppress the log if you use a wildcard in the file specification.

/NEWFILES Use this option in the command line if you need to print only
those files that have the current date. The following example shows a convenient way to print all new files after a session at the computer.
« TYPE/NEWFILES
Files coried:
DK:REPORT . .LST

*,LET

TTz

/QUERY If you use this option, the system requests confirmation before it
performs the operation. /QUERY is particularly useful on operations that
involve wildcards, when you may not be sure which files the system selected
for an operation. Note that if you specify /QUERY in a TYPE command line
that also contains a wildcard in the file specification, the confirmation messages printed on the terminal replace the log messages that would normally
appear.

You must respond to a query message by typing Y or any string beginning
with Y, followed by a carriage return, to initiate execution of a particular
operation. The system interprets any other response to mean NO and does
not perform the specific operation.
TYPE/QUERY/DELETE *,LS8T
Files coried/deleted:
to TT:? NO
DK:OUTFIL.LST
to TT:? ¥
DK:REPORT.LST

/SINCE[:date] This option prints on the terminal all files on a specified
volume created on or after a specified date. The following command prints
only those .MAC files on DK: created on or after April 21, 1983.
+ TYPE/SINCE:21:APR:83

*.MAC

Keyboard Commands

4-225

TYPE
/WAIT

This option is useful if you have a single-disk system. When you

use this option, the system initiates the TYPE operation, but
then pauses
and waits for you to mount the volume that contains the volumes
you want

to print.

- When the system pauses, it prints Mount input volume in <device>
;
Continue?. Mount the input volume and type Y or any string beginni
ng with
Y, followed by a carriage return, to continue the operation. Type
N or any
string beginning with N, or two CTRL/Cs, to abort the the
operation and
return control to the keyboard monitor. Any other respons

e causes the mes-

sage to repeat.

After the system completes the operation, the system prints the
message prompting you to mount the system volume:

following

Mount svstem wmlumw in <device>’ Continue?

Mount the system volume and type Y or any string beginning with Y, fol-

lowed by a carriage return. If you type any other response the
system

prompts you to mount the system volume until you type

WAIT, make sure that PIP is on the system volume.

Y. When you use /

The following sample prints AJAX.DOC from an RL0O2 disk:
TYPE/WAIT DLO:AJAX.DOC
Mount

inPut

volume

DLO:3

Continue?

After the system has printed AJAX.DOC at the terminal, it issues

lowing prompt:
Mount

svystem

volume

DLO:
3

Continue?

the fol-

When you mount the system volume, and tYpe a Y followed by a carriage

return, you terminate the TYPE operation.

4-226

Keyboard Commands

UNLOAD

The UNLOAD command removes previously loaded handlers from memory,

thus freeing the memory space they occupied. It also removes terminated
foreground or system jobs.

UNLOAD [«mm{wmvm)
jot

[-..jot

e] |

In the command syntax shown above, device represents the device handler
and jobname represents the job to be unloaded. You can specify both device
handlers and job names on the same command line. The colon that follows
the device handler is optional with SJ, FB, and XM monitors and monitors
that do not have system job support. If your system has system job support, it
is recommended that you type the colon to unload a handler. If you do not
~ type a colon, the system checks the table of system jobs for a job with that
name before it checks the device table. Therefore, if you have a system job
with the same name as a device handler, you must include the colon to
remove the handler.

UNLOAD clears ownership for all units of the device type you specify. A
request to unload the system device handler clears ownership for any
assigned units for that device, but the handler itself remains resident. After
you issue the UNLOAD command, the system returns any memory it frees
to a free memory list. The background job eventually reclaims free memory.
Note that if you interrupt an operation that involves magtape, you must

unload and then load (with the LOAD command) the appropriate device
handler (MM, MT, or MS).

The system does not accept an UNLOAD command while a foreground job is
running if the foreground job owns any units of that device. This is because a
handler that the foreground job needs might become nonresident. You can

unload a device while a foreground job is running if none of its units belong
to the foreground job.

A special function of this command is to remove a terminated foreground or
system job and reclaim memory, since the system does not automatically
return the space occupied by the foreground or system job to the free mem|

ory list.

The following command unloads the foreground job and frees the memory it
occupied. This command is valid only if the foreground job is not running.
+ UNLOAD

Keyboard Commands

4-227

UNLOAD
The following command unloads the system job QUEUE.
+UNLOAD

QUEUE

The following command clears ownership of all units
system device, the RK handler itself remains resident.
JUNLOAD

of RK:. If RK: is the

RK:

The next command releases the line printer and RL0O2
handlers and frees
the area they previously held.
+UNLOAD

4-228

LP:

Keyboard Commands

DL :

UNPROTECT

The UNPROTECT command removes a file’s protected status so that you
can delete the file.

UNPROTECT

{ /BEFORE[:date] }
~

filespecs

/SINCE[:date]
/DATE[:date]
/NEWFILES
/EXCLUDE
/INFORMATION
/[NOJLOG
JQUERY

/SETDATE[:date]
/SYSTEM
WAIT

In the command syntax illustrated above, filespecs represents the file or files
whose protected status you want to remove. Use the DIRECTORY
/PROTECTION and /NOPROTECTION options to determine the protection
status of files on a volume. A P next to the block size number of a file’s directory entry indicates that the file is protected from deletion.

You can explicitly specify up to six files. If you specify more than one file,
separate the files with commas. You can also use wildcards in the file specifi-

cations. You can enter the UNPROTECT command as one line, or you can

rely on the system to prompt you for information. The UNPROTECT command prompt is F'iles?.

Some of the options accept a date as an argument. The syntax for specifying
the date is:

[dd][:mmm][:yy]
where:

represents the day (a decimal integer in the range 1-31)

mmm

represents the first three characters of the name of the month

represents the year (a decimal integer in the range 73-99)

The default value for the date is the current system date. If you omit any of
the date values (dd, mmm, or yy), the system uses the values from the current system date. For example, if you specify only the year ::82 and the current system date is May 4, 1983, the system uses the date 4:MAY:82. If the
current date is not set, it is considered 0 (the same as for an undated file in a
directory listing).

Keyboard Commands

4-229

UNPROTECT
prints -BAD- in the creation date column of each file created beyond
the endof-month. (Note that you can eliminate -BAD- by using the
RENAME/
SETDATE command after you set the date.)

The following sections describe options you can use with the UN
command and include command examples.

PROTECT

/BEFORE[:date]

Use this option to remove protection from only those
files created before the specified date. If no date is specified the current
system date is used. The following commmand removes the protecte
d status of
all MAC files on DK: created before March 20, 1983.
+UNPROTECT/BEFORE:20:MAR:83

Files

#*.,MAC

unprotected:

DK:A.MAC

DK:B.MAC
DK:CMAC

/DATE[:date]

Use this option to remove protection from only those files
with a certain creation date. If no date is specified the current system
date is
used. The following command removes the protected status of all
.MAC files
on DK: created on March 20, 1983.
+UNPROTECT/DATE:20:MAR:83

Files

%,MAC

unprotected:

DK:A.MAC
DK:B.MAC

DK:C.MAC

/EXCLUDE

This option removes protection from all the files on a device
except the ones you specify. The following command, for example
, removes
protection from all files on DYO0: except .SAYV files.
+UNPROTECT/EXCLUDE
PPIP-W-No

Files

.8YS

DYO:%.,5AY

action

uneprotected:

DXO:ABC.OLD
DXO:AAF
. OLD

KO:COMB
.,
DXO:MERGE.OLD

/INFORMATION

Use this option to change the severity level of the error

message that prints when not all of the input files you specifie

you do not use INFORMATION, the system prints an error

d are found. If

message when it
is unable to find an input file, and execution halts after the comman
d is processed. When you use INFORMATION, the system prints
an informational
message to tell you which files it cannot find, but executi

on continues.

In the following example, the system removes protection
from input files
FILE1.TXT and FILE3.TXT. However, since the system
is unable to find
DLO:FILE2.TXT, the system prints a message to inform you.
+UNPROTECT/INFORMATION

PPIP-I-File

4-230

Keyboard Commands

not

found

DLO:(FILE1+FILEZFILER),TXT

DLO:FILEZ,TXT

UNPROTECT
/LOG This option lists on the terminal a log of the files from which protection is removed by the current command. This is the default mode of operation when you use wildcards in the file specification. Note that if you specify
/LOG, the system does not ask you for confirmation before execution proceeds. Use both /LOG and /QUERY to invoke logging and querying.
/INOLOG

This option prevents a list of files from which protection is being

removed from appearing on the terminal.

/NEWFILES Use this option to remove protection from only the files that
have the current system date. The following example removes protection
from the files created today.
SJUNPROTECT/NEWFILES

DY1La#,.BAK

Files uneprotected:
DY1:MERGE.BAK 7 Y

/QUERY Use this option to request a confirmation message from the system before it removes protection from each file. This option is particularly
useful on operations that involve wildcards, when you may not be completely sure which files the system will select for the operation. Note that
specifying /LOG eliminates the automatic query; you must specify /QUERY
with /LOG to retain the query function.

The following example shows querying. Protection is removed from only the
file DY1:AAF.MAC:

+UNPROTECT/QUERY DY1low,.#
Files unprotected:
? N
DY1:ABC.MAC
G
DY¥1:AAF «MAC
DY1:MERGE.FOR 7 N

/SETDATE[:date] This option causes the system to put the date you
specify on all files from which it removes protection. If you specify no date
the current system date is used. If the current system date is not set, the system places zeros in the directory entry date position. Normally, the system
preserves the existing file creation date when it removes protection from a
file.

The following example removes protection from files and changes their dates
to the current system date.

+UNPROTECT/SETDATE DYO:#,.FOR
Files unprotected:
DYO:ABC.FOR
DYO:AAF .FOR
DYO:MERGE .FOR

Keyboard Commands

4-231

UNPROTECT
/SINCE[:date]
Use this option to remove protection from only those files
created on or after the specified date. If no date is specified the current system date is used. The following command removes protection from all .MAC

fileson DYO: created on or after April 21, 1983:
+UNPROTECT/SINCE:21:APR:83
Files

DYO:%,MAC

unprotected:

DYO:a.MAC
DYO:B.MAC

DYO:C.MAC

/SYSTEM

Use this option if you need to remove protection from system
(.SYS) files and you use wildcards in the file type. If you omit this option, the

system files are excluded from the unprotect operation and a message is
printed on the terminal to remind you of this. This example removes protec-

tion from all files on DYO: with the file name MM, including .SYS files.
+UNPROTECT/SYSTEM

DYOQO:MM,.
#
unprotected:

Files

DYO:MM.MAC
DYO:MM,OB.J

DYO:MM.58Y

DYO:MM,5YS

/WAIT

This option is useful if you have a single-disk system. When you
use this option, the system initiates the UNPROTECT operation but then

pauses for you to mount the volume that contains the files whose protection

status you want to change. When the system pauses, it prints Mount input

volume in <device>; Continue?, where <device> represents the device into
which you mount the volume. Mount the volume and type Y or any string

beginning with Y, followed by a carriage return. Type N or any string begin-

ning with N, or two CTRL/Cs, to abort the operation and return control to

the keyboard monitor. Any other response causes the message to be

repeated.

When the operation completes the system prints the Continue? message
again. Mount the system volume and type Y or any string beginning with Y,
followed by a carriage return. If you type any.other response the system

prompts you to mount the system volume until you type Y. The system then

prints the keyboard monitor prompt. Make sure PIP is on your system volume when you use the /WAIT option.

The following example removes protection from the file FILE.MAC on an

RLO2 disk:

+UNPROTECT/WAIT

Mount

inPut

DLO:FILE.MAC?

Mount

4-232

svystem

Keyboard Commands

DLO:FILE.MAC

volume

DLO:§

Continue?

V¥

volume

DLO:S

Continue?®

4.7

Concise Command Language (CCL)
Concise Command Language (CCL) allows you to run a program and pass it
a command string on a single command line.

When you type a CCL command, the keyboard monitor translates the command into a RUN SY: command followed by the program name you specify
and one or more lines of file specifications and options for that program.
When the operation completes, control returns to the keyboard monitor and
it prompts you for another command.

The syntaxes for CCL commands are:

out-filespecs|/options]

PROGNAM

in-filespecs[/options]

PROGNAM

out-filespecs|/options] = in-filespecs[/options]

where:

PROGNAM

represents the RT-11 utility program you want to run.
These programs are described in the RT-11 System
Utilities Manual.

in-filespecs

represents the device, file names, and file types of the

input files. Implicit wildcards are not allowed in file
specifications; you must use the wildcard symbols * and
%.

out-filespecs

represents the device, file names, and file types of the

output files. Implicit wildcards are not allowed in file
specifications; you must use the wildcard symbols * and
%. In the first syntax line shown above, out-filespecs i1s
optional.

[/options]

represents the single-character options for each utility

program, as described in the RT-11 System Utilities
Manual.

. AC creThe following example copies all files on DYO0: with the file type M
ated on or after January 12,1983 to DY 1..
+PIP DYO:% MAC/I:12,:JAN:B3:

DY1:%,*

The next example achieves the same results.
+PIP DY1:%,%=DY¥0:%.MAC/I1:12,:JAN:83.

The next example calls KED to inspect the file JMS.MAC.
+KED

JMS.MAC/I

Version 5.1, July 1984

Keyboard Commands

4-233

Chapter 5

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)
This chapter tells you how to create indirect control files for execution by the
Indirect Control File Processor (IND).

An indirect control file, or control file, consists of one or more lines of keyboard commands and special commands, called IND directives, that control
system execution. You can use control files to execute keyboard commands,
access files, and perform logical tests to control the flow of execution.

This chapter begins by describing how to create an indirect control file and
how to structure its command lines. The second section describes how to
execute the control files you create. Next follows a section of tables contain-a
ing brief descriptions of all the IND directives and special characters, and
section describing the use of symbols in control files. The chapter concludes
with detailed descriptions of how to use each IND directive.

5.1

Creating an Indirect Control File
An indirect control file consists of one or more lines of directives or keyboard
commands to be processed by IND. Each line of an indirect control file can
contain up to three elements, illustrated in Figure 5-1: a label, IND directives and keyboard commands, and a comment. Labels are used to mark
specific locations in a program. IND directives (or simply directives) andm
keyboard commands control the execution of your program and perfor
specific operations. Comments are used to document the program. These elements are described in the following sections.

Figure 5-1: Indirect Control File Line Elements
, SUBONE :

Label

,IFNDF SYM .GOSUB SUBTWO

- IND directive

,5CET DEFINITION OF SYM

Comment

In general, follow these rules of syntax when you create indirect control
files:

1. Separate directives from their arguments and from keyboard commands.
by at least one space or tab, unless otherwise indicated in this manual

5-1

However, do not place spaces or tabs between arithm

as plus signs (+) and minus signs (-), and their

the following command line is correct:

etic operators, such

arguments. For example,

+SETNNUM (2+3) %4

The next line is incorrect:
+SETNNUM (2 +3) %4

2. Using tabs and spaces allows you to format the control
ity. You can format control files by inserting spaces

in a command line in the following locations:
®

At the start of the command line

Immediately following the colon (:) of a label

files for readabiland horizontal tabs

Directly before the semicolon (;) or period-semicolon (.;)

of a comment

At the end of a command line
3. IND accepts up to 132 characters in a command line.
4. You can include up to 80 characters (before IND

.ASKN, and .ASKS prompts.

processing) in .ASK,

5. Keyboard monitor commands, concise command
language (CCL) commands, and commands that run system utility progra
ms must be complete on one line. For commands that query or prompt,
you must either
use /NOQUERY or the equivalent utility option, or
enter the responses to
the prompts at the terminal. The following example
shows an incorrect
method of running a utility program from within a
control file; the command is not complete on one line.
RUN MACRO

PROG=PROGA

5.1.1

Labels

A label assigns a name to a line in the control file
so that the line can be
referenced. Labels are from one to six characters
long, and must be prefixed
with a period (.) and suffixed with a colon(:). A label
may contain only alpha-

numeric or dollar sign ($) characters. For exampl
e, in the following line,

START is a label.
+OTART :

vASKS

ANS

YOU

HAVE

LINEPRINTER®?

Place labels at the beginning of a line. You may use
directives or keyboard commands, on a line with

-2

Indirect Control File Processor (IN D)

a label on a line that has

a comment, or on a line by

itself. You can place only one label on a line, but you need not use a label on
every line.

See Section 5.5.1 for more information on using labels.

5.1.2

IND Directives and Keyboard Commands

Control file lines may also contain IND directives, keyboard commands, and
CCL commands. Section 4.6 of this manual describes keyboard commands.
Section 4.7 describes CCL.

Dirvectives and keyboard commands can be used together on the same line or
on separate lines. Some directives can also be used on the same line with
other directives.

When processing a control file, IND reads the control file and interprets each
command line either as a command to be passed directly to the keyboard
monitor (KMON) or as a request for action by the indirect control file processor itself. IND directives, which are processed by the indirect control file processor, are preceded by a period. Keyboard commands have no preceding
characters when used in a control file.

5.1.2.1

IND Directives — Directives can be used on a line with a label or a

comment, or alone on a line. Directives must be placed after a label but
before a comment. The following line shows that the directive follows the
label and precedes the comment:
JJIDED:

JSETT

Label

IND directive

, JUIDED TERMINAL AVAILABLE

Comment

IND directives allow you to:
® Define labels

® Define and assign values to three types of symbols: logical, numeric, and
string

Create and access data files

Control the logical flow within a control file
Perform logical tests
@

s\%%%wmm%%%

Enable or disable operating modes

® Increment or decrement a numeric symbol
Perform time-based operations, if you have timer support

IND directives are described in detail in Section 5.5.

Version 5.1, July 1984

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-3

5.1.2.2

Keyboard Commands — Keyboard commands may appear with labels

but not on lines with comments. When IND encounters a keyboard com-

mand, IND passes the remainder of the command line to the keyboard mon-

itor. Since the keyboard monitor would be unable to interpret the comment,
an invalid command error results.

Keyboard commands used within an indirect control file must be complete
on one line. Therefore, if you use keyboard commands that query (such as

the DELETE command with wildcards) or prompt you (such as the LINK/

PROMPT command), you must either specify the /NOQUERY option or
enter the response to the query at the terminal when the command is
executed. You can, however, process commands with more than one line by

using the ENABLE DATA or .DATA directive to create and execute an

indirect file from within the control file.

The control file lines in the next two examples create and execute an indirect
command file that runs PIP, unprotects the file DY:FILE.TST, and copies

the file to DY1:. The first example uses the ENABLE DATA directive to create the control file:
+ASKS

DEV

+OPEN

COPY.TMP

+ENABLE

RUN

WHICH

DEVICE

CONTAINS

FILE.TST?

DATA

PIP

‘DEV/:FILE.TST/Z

DY1:FILE.TST="DEV
" :FILE.TST/W/Y
“r

+DISABLE

DATA

+CLOSE

$CCOPY.THMP

The second example uses the .DATA directive to create and execute the
same indirect file:
+ASKS

DEV

+OPEN

COPY.,TMP

+DATA

RUN

+DATA

"DEV ' :FILE.TST/Z

+DATA

DY1:FILE.TST='DEV':FILE.TST/W/Y

+DATA

WHICH

DEVICE

CONTAINS

FILE.TST?

PIP

°C

+CLOGE
$@COPY
. TMP

See Section 5.2.4 for information on executing indirect files from control
files. See Sections 5.5.9 and 5.5.14 for information on using the .DATA and
ENABLE DATA directives.
You can also issue CCL commands in control files to run the utility programs described in the RT-11 System Utilities
Manual. The following exam-

ple executes a CCL command if the RL0O2 device handler is loaded:
+ROUTN :

+ IFLOA

PIP

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

DL1:MYPROG,SAV=DLO:MYPROG,SAV

The following command line copies a diskette in image mode if a certain condition is true. The .IFT directive tests the condition represented by the symbol LOGSYM for a true or false value.
+IFT

LOGSYM

DUP

DY1:%=DYO:/1/%

As is true for keyboard commands, options that query or prompt are not

allowed unless you specify the option that prevents querying (as does /Y in
the above example), or unless you enter the response to the query at the terminal when the control file is executed.

Keyboard monitor commands are described in detail in Section 4.6 of this
manual, and the corresponding utility programs are described in the RT—-11
System Utilities Manual.

NOTE

The following keyboard commands should not be used in control files, as they will produce unpredictable results:
Base
Deposit
Examine
GET

5.1.3

R
REENTER
SAVE
START

Comments

You can document a control file by including comments. Comments provide

you with information but perform no operations.

){memw

You can include either external or internal comments in a control file.
During execution, IND prints external comments at the console. To define
an external comment, begin the comment with a semicolon (;). Internal comments are for documenting a control file internally and are never printed at
the console. To define an internal comment, begin the comment with a
period and semicolon (.;).

You can place an external comment on a line with a label and with directives that do not branch to another location. An external comment on a line
with a branching directive is never printed, because IND branches before
the comment is processed. You can place an internal comment on a line with
a label or with most directives. When used on a line with a label, or with
directives, the comment should be the last field on the line. However, you
can not place any comment on a line with a keyboard command, since the
keyboard monitor will interpret the comment as an invalid command.
Comments can include up to 80 characters including the period, semicolon,
carriage return, and line feed characters. IND ignores any characters that
exceed the 80-character limit.

Version 5.1, July 1984

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-5

The following line shows an internal comment on a line with a label

directives. The second half of the comment appears on a line by itself.
+DEVICE:

9.2

JIFLOA

DYOQ:

.GOSUB

COPY

+3DYO:

+ sCOPY

SUBROUTINE

LOADED,

and

Executing Indirect Control Files
You can execute indirect control files either from keyboard monitor level or

from within another indirect control file. Section 5.2.3 discusses executing
control files from within other control files. You can also execute indirect

command files from control files, as described in Section 5.2.4.

To execute an indirect control file from keyboard monitor level, you must

call IND as follows:
«R

IND

The Command String Interpreter (CSI) prints an asterisk at the left margin

of the terminal and waits for you to enter a command string. If you enter
only a carriage return, IND prints its current version number and the CSI
prompts you again for a command string.

You can type CTRL/C to halt IND and return to the keyboard monitor when
IND is waiting for input from the console terminal. You must type two
CTRL/Cs to abort IND at any other time.

The syntax of the command string is:
ctrl-filespec[/options][parameters]

where:

ctrl-filespec
options

represents the control file you want to execute. The
default file type is .COM.
is one or more of the options listed in Table 5-1. The

brackets surrounding the options are not part of the

command syntax. The options you specify are stored in

the local string symbol COMMAN with the entire com-

mand line, and in local string symbol P0. See Section
5.2.2 for more information on COMMAN and PO.

parameters

is one or more values (up to nine) that you want to pass

to the control file. The parameters you specify are stored

in local string symbols P1-P9. The brackets, which are
not part of the command syntax, indicate that the

parameters are optional. Separate the parameters you

specify with a space. See Section 5.2.2 for more informa-

tion on passing parameters.

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

You can also call IND and execute a control file by issuing the following
command:

LRUN IND ctrl-filespecl/opPtionsl

or simply:
JIND ctrl-filespecl/oprtionsl

However, you can not pass parameters when you use this syntax.
When SET KMON IND is in effect, you can use the following syntax to

execute a control file, in response to the keyboard monitor prompt (.):
@ctrl-filespec[/options][parameters]

You can run IND from the console by specifying the console device (TT:) as
the control file specificaton. IND prints an asterisk (*) to prompt you for a
single command line to execute. Since IND processes one command line at a
time when run from the console, labels have no meaning and branch instructions produce no results. This function is especially useful for testing the
results of individual command lines.

In the following example, IND executes one command line and prompts for
input.
+RUN

IND

TT:

*,ASKS NAM WHAT IS YOUR NAME?

* WHAT

IS YOUR NAME?

5.2.1

IND Options

[S1

JonRD

IND options (See Table 5-1) allow you to change the way IND processes and

displays a control file. The following sections describe the options you can
:

use in an IND command string.
Table 5-1: IND Options

Option

Section

Function

5.2.1.1

Deletes the control file when IND has finished processing that

/N
Q

5.2.1.2
5.2.1.3

5.2.1.4

Directs IND to ignore all keyboard commands in the control file.
Suppresses the display of keyboard commands and their results.
Displays each command line that has been processed.

file.

5.21.1 Delete Control File Option (/D) — Deletes the control file when IND has
finished processing that file. The processing of a control file is complete only
when IND executes the .EXIT directive or reaches the end of the control file.
Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-7

Therefore, if you use the /D option and IND encounters a .STOP

a slash (/) character, the file is not deleted. The .DISA

tive in a control file overrides the /D option.
5.2.1.2

directive or

BLE DELETE direc-

Suppress Keyboard Commands Option (/N) — When
you use the /N

option, IND processes all the directives in a control file,

any of the keyboard commands. This function is useful

but does not execute

if you wish to test the

logical flow of your control file without executing any of

mands within.

the keyboard com-

If /N is used when calling a nested control file, keyboa

rd commands are
.ENABLE DCL or

ignored until the previous control file is reentered, an

.ENABLE MCR directive is found in the control file, or process
ing at all levels is complete.
9.2.1.3

Suppress Console Display Option (/Q) — The /Q option

display of keyboard commands and their results as IND

suppresses the

executes the keyboard commands. The /Q option remains in effect even when
control passes

to a nested control file.
overrides the /Q option.
5.2.1.4

A .DISABLE QUIET directive in the control file

Command Tracing Option (/T) — When you use the
/T option, IND

prints on the console all directives or keyboard comma

nds as they are processed. This option is useful for testing and debugging control
files.

When you enable tracing, IND prints an exclamation mark
(1) on the console
before each line that begins with a directive. IND does not
print any characters before comments and keyboard commands as they are
processed.

If control branches to another location in the control file,
IND does not print
the command lines that have not been processed.
The /T option has the same effect as the .ENABLE TRACE

directive in a

control file and can be overridden from within the
control file by the

DISABLE TRACE directive.

9.2.2

Passing Parameters

Passing parameters allows you to define the contents
of certain symbols
when IND begins processing a file. You can pass as many
as nine param-

eters when you execute a control file. When you execute

a control file, either

directly from the terminal or by calling another control

file from within a

control file, IND stores the command line, including parame

ters, in the local
string symbol COMMAN. IND then stores the parame
ters separately in

local string symbols P1 through P9.

Passing parameters allows you to predetermine the value

when you begin execution of a control file. Parameter
symbols, numeric values, or character strings.

5—-8

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

of these symbols
values can be global

When the following command line is executed, IN"" stores in COMMAN the
string DX:COACHABD.
+R

IND

*DX:COACH A B D

IND breaks the command string into elements separated by spaces, which
IND stores in the local string symbols PO through P9. PO contains the file

specification and any options. P1 through P9 contain the parameters you

specify. P1 contains the first space-delimited parameter, P2 the second, and

so on. P9 contains any remaining parameters. Any parameter not present

results in the equivalent symbol being set to null. The number of symbols

set, excluding the symbols that contain null values, appears in the numeric
symbol <STRLEN>.

When IND processes the command line @DX:COACH A B D, it produces the
following symbols:

Symbol

Contents

COMMAN
PO

DX:COACHABD
DX:COACH

P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9

A
B
D
null
null
null
null
null
null

523 Nested Indirect Control Files You can call indirect control files from within an indirect control file. This
process is called nesting control files; the control file that is called from the
first control file is referred to as nested. You can nest up to three control files,
for a total of four levels of control files (including the first file).

Use a command line with the following syntax to call a control file from
within a control file:

@ctrl-filespecl/options][parameters]
where:

ctrl-filespec
options

represents the control file to which you want to branch.

The default file type is .COM.

is one or more of the options listed in Table 5-1. The

brackets shown in the syntax illustration are not part of
the command syntax. The options you specify are stored
in the local string symbol COMMAN with the entire
command line, and in local string symbol PO. See
Section 5.2.2 for more information on these symbols.
Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-9

parameters

1S one or more parameters (up to nine) that you

pass to the control file. The surrounding bracke

want to

ts in the

syntax illustration, which indicate that the param

eters

are optional, are not part of the command syntax

. The

parameters you specify are stored in local string

sym-

bols PO-P9. See Section 5.2.2 for more information

passing parameters.

You cannot include either internal or external comme
nts on this command
line.
The .ENABLE GLOBAL directive allows you to define

symbols as global to
n 5.4.1 for information

all nested indirect control file levels. Refer to Sectio

on defining global symbols. If you do not use this directi

enters a deeper level it masks all symbols defined

ve, each time IND

by the previous level out of

the symbol table, so that only symbols defined in the curren
t level are available. These symbols are recognized only within the level
of the control file in
which the symbols are defined. When control return
s to a previous level, the

symbols defined in that level become available again
and the symbols from
the lower levels are lost.

5.2.4

Executing Indirect Command Files from Control Files

The method for calling an indirect command file from
within an indirect control file is similar to calling a control file from
a control file (see Section
5.2.3). You can invoke an indirect command file from
a control file by placing
a dollar sign, at sign ($@) sequence before the name
of the indirect command file you wish to invoke. When you pass control
to an indirect command
file, the keyboard monitor processes and executes
the file. Control then
returns to the control file from which the indirect

command file was called.

The command to invoke an indirect command file is:

$@filespec
where:

filespec

represents the indirect command file you wish to invoke

The default file type is .COM.

For example, the following command line invokes the
indirect command file
DYOUT.COM:
$E@DYOUT

After the keyboard monitor has finished executing

the indirect command

file, IND resumes processing of the control file from which
was called.

9-10

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

the command file

5.3

Directive Summary

This section includes four tables of abbreviated information. The IND directives described in this chapter are listed in Table 5-2 by category. Use these
directives in your control files to direct execution. Table 5-3 lists the operatA
ing modes you can use with the ENABLE and .DISABLE directives.
in
ted
presen
is
mode
ing
detailed description of each directive and operat
alphabetical order in Section 5.5. Table 5—4 lists some special IND charac
you
ters, and Table 5-5 lists the arithmetic, logical, and relational operators
can use to form numeric expressions. Refer to Section 5.4.3.2 for more information on numeric expressions.

Table 5-2: IND Directive Summary

Directive
Label Definition

Jlabel:

5.5.1

Assigns a name, represented by label, to a line in the

5.5.3

Prints a prompt, and uses the response to define or

Symbol Definition

ASK

Function

Section

control file so that the line can be referenced.

redefine a logical symbol and assign the symbol a logical
(true or false) value.

ASKN

554

Prints a prompt, and uses the response to define or

redefine a numeric symbol and assign it a numeric
value.

Prints a prompt, and uses the response to define or

ASKS

5.56.5

DUMP

5.5.13

.ERASE

5.5.16

Displays local, global, and special symbol definitions.
Deletes local or global symbols from the symbol tables.

.PARSE

5.5.24

Breaks a string into substrings.

SETD/.SETO

5.5.28

Redefines a numeric symbol to decimal (.SETD) or octal

SETL

5.5.29

Defines or redefines a logical symbol and assigns it a

SETN

5.5.30

Defines or redefines a numeric symbol and assigns it a

SETS

5.5.31

Defines or redefines a string symbol and assigns it a

SETT/.SETF

5.5.32

Defines or redefines a logical symbol or redefines bits

redefine a string symbol and assign it a string value.

(.SETO) radix.
logical value.

numeric value.
string value.

within a numeric symbol, and assigns the symbol or bits
a true or false value.

TEST

5.5.34

Tests attributes of a symbol or string and stores the
results in special symbols.

(Continued on next page)

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-11

Table 5-2: IND Directive Summary (Cont.)
Directive

Section

Function

TESTDEVICE

5.5.35

Tests a specified device and stores the device attribut
es
in the special symbol <EXSTRI>.

TESTFILE

5.5.36

Determines if a file exists and stores the results
in the
special symbols <FILSPC> and <FILERR>.

.VOL

5.5.37

Assigns a volume ID to a string symbol.

.CHAIN

5.5.7

Closes the current control file, opens another control
file,
and resumes execution.

.CLOSE

5.5.8

Closes an output data file.

DATA

5.56.9

File Access

Specifies a single line of data to be sent to an output

data

Creates an output data file. If the file you specify

with

file.

.OPEN

5.6.23.1

.OPEN already exists, .OPEN creates a new file

and will

delete the existing file if you subsequently use
the
.CLOSE directive. Use the .OPEN directive only
when

you wish to write to a file.

.OPENA

5.5.23.2

Opens an existing file and appends subsequent data to
it.
If the file you specify does not exist, .OPENA creates
a
new file. Use this directive only when you wish to write
to a file.

.OPENR

5.5.23.3

Opens an existing file for use with the .READ directiv
e.
Use this directive only when you wish to read from
a file.

.PURGE

5.5.25

Discards or closes an output file without making
any
changes to the file.

.READ

5.5.26

Reads the next record from a file into a string variable
.
The file must have been previously opened
with
.OPENR.

Logical Control
BEGIN

5.5.6

Marks the beginning of a begin-end block.

.END

9.5.15

Marks the end of a begin-end block.

EXIT

5.5.17

Terminates processing of either the current control

or a begin-end block, and returns control to the

level; can also assign a value to the numeric
<EXSTAT>

(see

the

description in Table 5-6).

special

file

symbol
symbol

(Continued on next page)

9—-12

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

Table 5-2: IND Directive Summary (Cont.)

Function

Directive

Section

.GOSUB

5.5.18

Branches to a subroutine within the control file.

.GOTO

5.5.19

Branches to another location in the control file.

.ONERR

5.5.22

.RETURN

5.5.27

Returns control from a subroutine to the line immedi-

STOP

5.5.33

Terminates control file processing

On detecting an error, branches to another location in

the control file.

ately following that subroutine’s call.

Logical Tests

%Q@WWW‘”%N

Determines whether a symbol satisfies one of several

5.5.20.1

JIFDF/IFNDF

5.5.20.2

Determines whether a symbol is defined or not defined.

JFENABLED/
JFDISABLED

5.5.20.3

Determines whether an operating mode is enabled or
disabled. See Section 5.5.14 for descriptions of the oper-

IFLOA/IFNLOA

5.5.204

JFT/IFF

5.5.20.5

Determines whether a logical symbol is true or false, or

5.5.11

Delays control file processing for a specified period of

possible conditions.

ating modes.

Determines whether a device handler has been loaded or

has not been loaded.

tests specific bits in a numeric symbol.

Execution Control

.DELAY

time.

Enable/Disable Operating Modes

.DISABLE

5.5.12

Disables the operating modes. See Table 5-3 and

Sections 5.5.12 and 5.5.14 for more information on the

operating modes.

.ENABLE

5.5.14

Enables the operating modes. See Table 5-3 and
Sections 5.5.12 and 5.5.14 for more information on the

operating modes.

Increment/Decrement Numeric Symbols

.DEC

5.5.10

Subtracts one from the value of a numeric symbol.

IANC

5.5.21

Adds one to the value of a numeric symbol.

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-13

Table 5-3:

Operating Modes

These operating modes are arguments for the .ENABLE and .DISAB

LE
directives. The entry in the scope column refers to whether the operatin
g
mode automatically returns to its default setting or remains
at its cur-

rent setting when control passes to a nested control file. Local

modes return to their default settings; global operating modes

operating

keep their

current settings. See Sections 5.5.12 and 5.5.14 for more informat

ion on

operating modes.
Operating Mode

Default

Scope

Function

ABORT

Enabled

Global

When ABORT is enabled, a control file
can be aborted by typing a double CTRL/C.

CONTROL-Z

Enabled

Global

When CONTROL-Z is enabled, typing a
CTRL/Z in response to an .ASK, .ASKN or
ASKS prompt aborts the control file.

DATA

Disabled

Local

When DATA is enabled, IND sends to an

output file all lines that follow the .ENABLE DATA directive until a .DISABLE

DATA or .CLOSE directive is encountered.

DCL

Enabled

Local

When DCL is disabled, IND suppresses
execution of keyboard commands in a con-

trol file.

DELETE

Disabled

Local

When DELETE is enabled, control files
are deleted after execution of the file has

completed.

ESCAPE

Disabled

Global

When ESCAPE

is enabled, IND recog-

nizes the escape character as a valid response to an .ASK, .ASKS, or .ASKN direc-

tive.

GLOBAL

Disabled

Global

When GLOBAL is enabled, symbol names
that begin with a dollar sign ($) are recognized as global symbols; that is, these sym-

bols are recognized throughout all levels of
control files.

LOWERCASE

Enabled

Global

When LOWERCASE is enabled, charac-

ters typed in response to an .ASKS direc-

tive are stored in the string symbol with-

out automatic lowercase to uppercase con-

version.

MCR

Enabled

Local

When MCR is disabled, IND suppresses
execution of keyboard commands in a con-

trol file.

OCTAL

Enabled

Global

When OCTAL is enabled, the default ra-

dix of responses to .ASKN directives and of
numeric symbol definitions is octal.

PREFIX

Enabled

Global

When

PREFIX

disabled,

IND

suppresses printing of the asterisk (*) be-

fore all prompts that result from .ASK,
ASKN, and .ASKS directives, and the

semicolon (;) in front of comments.

Version 5.1, July 1984

5-14

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

(Continued on next page)

Table 5-3: Operating Modes (Cont.)

Operating Mode

Default

Scope

QUIET

Disabled

Local

SUBSTITUTION

Enabled

Global

Function
When QUIET is enabled, IND does not

display keyboard command lines.

When SUBSTITUTION is enabled, IND

replaces symbols with their assigned values.

Enabled

SUFFIX

When

Global

SUFFIX

1is

disabled,

IND

suppresses printing of the question mark
and [Y/N] notation at the end of an .ASK
prompt, and suppresses range, default,
timeout and question type notations for all
ASK directive prompts.

Disabled

TIMEOUT

When TIMEOUT is enabled, IND recog-

Global

nizes the timeout parameter for ASK directives if your monitor includes timer support.

TRACE

Disabled

Local

When TRACE is enabled, IND displays

TYPEAHEAD

Enabled

Global

When TYPEAHEAD is enabled, characters

Table 54

the command line processed.

typed before an .ASK, .ASKN or .ASKS
prompt are included in the prompt response.

Special IND Characters

This table lists a set of characters which have special meaning during
control file execution.

Function

Character

Used as a prefix character for all IND directives and labels, and as a
suffix character for all integers that have a decimal radix.

Used as a prefix character to define a response to an .ASKN directive

prompt as octal. Also used as a prefix character for file numbers specified
with the .CLOSE, .DATA, .OPEN, .OPENA, .OPENR, and .PURGE
directives.

Used before a nested control file specification to pass control to that file.

Used as a prefix character to define symbols as global.

Used before an indirect command file specification to pass control to that
file.

Used as an end-of-file character. This character has the same effect as the

Concatenates string symbols (see Section 5.4.4).

;

Indicates the start of an external comment. During execution, IND prints
external comments at the console. These comments can have up to 132
characters. If you use the period-semicolon (.;) to begin a comment, the

STOP directive. See Section 5.5.2 for more details.

comment is an internal comment, which IND does not print.

Version 5.1, July 1984

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-15

Table 5-5: Arithmetic, Logical, and Relational Operators

This table lists the arithmetic, logical, and relational operators you can use
to form numeric expressions.
Character

5.4

Function

Add

Subtract

Multiply

Divide

Logical inclusive OR

Logical AND

Logical NOT

EQor =

Equal to

NE or <>

Not equal to

GE or > =

Greater than or equal to

LEor <=

Less than or equal to

GT or >

Greater than

LT or <

Less than

Symbols
You can use symbols in your control files as variables that represent logical,
numeric, or string values. By testing or comparing these symbols, you can

control the flow of execution. You can also substitute symbols for keyboard
commands, data records or data files, or comments to be displayed on the
console.

All symbols are from one to six characters in length. Symbols can include

alphanumeric characters and dollar signs ($).

Symbols can be one of three types: logical, numeric, and string. Any of these
symbols can be local or global.

You use directives to define a symbol’s type and value. You can redefine a
symbol’s value throughout a control file, but you cannot redefine its type

except within a begin-end block. See Section 5.5.6 for more details on begin-

end blocks.

5-16

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5.4.1

Local and Global Symbols

ed as either local or global.
Logical, numeric, and string symbols caninbethedefin
begin-end block or control file
Local symbols are recognized only with ed. Glob
al symbols are recognized
in which the local symbols are definfiles.
throughout all levels of nested control
including the .ENABLE GLOBAL
You can define a symbol as global by the
.ENABLE GLOBAL directive,
directive in your command file. After
defined as global. Local symbols
symbols that begin with a dollar sign ($) are
are those that are defined previous to the ENABLE GLOBAL directive,
after a dollar sign ($).

cannot change its scope.
Once a symbol is defined as global or local you
r sign ($) is defined before the
Therefore, if a symbol that begins with a dolla
ins
ENABLE GLOBAL directive, the symbol is defined as local and remaBLE

tive. After an .ENA
local even after a later .ENABLE GLOBALthedirec
same name is defined, there
GLOBAL directive, if another symbol with
will be two symbols with the same name: one local symbol and one global
symbol.

5.4.2

Logical Symbols

s. You can define or redefine a
Logical symbols represent true or false value.SET
T, or .SETF directive. See
logical symbol by using the ASK, .SETL,
Section 5.5.

5.4.3

Numeric Symbols

use numeric symbols to
A numeric symbol represents an integer. You can
and you can combine them
represent integer arguments in command lines,form
arithmetic expressions.
with other numeric symbols and constants toa numeric
symbol is 0 to 65535
The valid range for an integer represented by
(decimal) or 177777 (octal).

a numeric symbol is
5.4.3.1 Defining the Radix of a Numeric Symbol — When
default radix (octal or decidefined using the .ASKN or .SETN directive,bythe
s of the OCTAL opermal) of the symbol definition is determined theolstatu
ition is stored as an
defin
ating mode. When OCTAL is enabled, the symb ol defin
ition is stored as a
octal number; when OCTAL is disabled, the symb
decimal number.

lt radix by specifying deciWhen you use .ASKN, you can control the defau
timeout indicator values.
mal or octal values for range, default,al and
point (.) are interpreted as deciIndicator values you specify with a decim speci
fied, or when octal mode is
mal. When decimal indicator values are store
d in decimal. IND indicates
disabled, the response to the prompt will be

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-17

this by printing a (D) decimal indic
ator when it processes the .ASKN

prompt. If an octal response is give

n by placing a number sign (#)

number, the response is stored as

before the

its decimal equivalent. When octal

mode is
indicator values, the response will
be
stored as an octal value; IND print
s an (O) octal indicator instead. If
a decimal response is given by placing a
decimal point (.) after the number,
the

enabled and you specify no decimal

response is stored as its octal equiv

alent. See Section 9.5.4 for more

tion on the A
. SKN directive.

informa-

When you use the .SETN directive, you
can override the octal default radix
by specifying decimal values in the nume
ric expression that defines the symbol. Values you specify with a decimal
point (.) are interpreted as decimal. If
octal

mode is enabled and you specify no
decimal values, the expression is
evaluated and stored as an octal value
. When you use all decimal values
in
the expression, or when octal mode is
disabled, the expression is evaluated
and stored as a decimal value. When
you use both octal and decimal values
and octal mode is enabled, all octal
values are converted to decimal befor
e
the expression is evaluated and the symb
ol is stored as a decimal value. See

Section 5.5.30 for more information on the

SETN directive.

Once a numeric symbol is defined as
an octal or decimal value, you can
change the symbol’s radix by using
the .SETD and .SETO directives. See
Section 5.5.28 for more information on
these two directives.
9.4.3.2

Numeric Expressions — You can

operators to combine numeric symb

form numeric expressions by usin

ols and constants.

Operator

Function

Addition

Subtraction

Division

Multiplication
Logical OR
Logical AND

&
EQor =

NE or <>

GE or >=
LEor <=
GTor >
LT or <

Equalto
Not equal to

Greater than or equal to
Lessthanor equal to
Greater than
Less than

When you divide numeric symbols,
IND always truncates the dividend
to
yield an integer.

Numeric expressions are evaluated

from left to right, unless you use pare
ntheses to form subexpressions which
IND evaluates first. Do not put blan
ks
or
tabs between operators and nume
ric symbols.

lines assign numeric symbol N3 the valu

e 24 (octal):

5-18

+SETN

N1+N2Z#*4

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

The following directive

In the next'example, IND assigns the symbol N3 the value 16 (octal):
+SETN N1 2
+SETN NZ 3

+SETN N3 Ni+(NZ*4)

5.4.4

String Symbols

characYou can use a string symbol to represent a string of up to 132 ASCII
ives.
ters. You assign string symbols with the ASKS and .SETS direct
ter
When you assign a character string to a string symbol, enclose the charac
the
to
string
a
s
assign
which
e,
string with quotes, as in the following exampl
string symbol PROMPT:

,SETS PROMPT "DO YOU HAVE ANY PROTECTED FILES"

IND permits you to break string symbols into substrings. You can use
e,
substrings with only the .SETS and .IF directives. In the following exampl
string symbol ALPHA2 is assigned four characters from the string represented by BETAZ:

,SETS BETA2 "DEVICE DX1: DXZ2: RK1:"
,SETS ALPHAZ BETAZI[B.:11.]

2
In this example, [8.:11.] indicates that characters 8 to 11 (decimal) of BETA
ters
are to make up ALPHA2. ALPHA2 consequently contains the charac
DX1:. The square brackets are part of the command line; you must use them
when you specify the range for a substring. If you use a decimal point with
either number in the range specification (that is, the numbers that appear
between the brackets), IND interprets both numbers as decimal.

e,
String symbols can also represent other string symbols. In the next exampl
d
define
usly
previo
a
of
ts
the string symbol NAME is assigned the conten
string symbol, VOLID.

,SETS NAME VOLID

You can concatenate string symbols with other string symbols, substrings,
ve
and character strings by using the plus sign (+). The .SETS directi
description (Section 5.5.31) provides more details on concatenating string
symbols.

5.4.5

Special Symbols

s,
In addition to the symbols that you create, IND has its own special csymbol
system
specifi
to
ing
listed in Table 5—6. IND sets these symbols accord
nd file
characteristics and responses to queries presented during comma
execution; you cannot set them directly. You can, however, test these symbols to determine system characteristics IND special symbols are enclosed in
angle brackets so you can distinguish them from symbols you create.

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-19

Table 5-6: IND Special Symbols
Symbol

Value

Logical Symbols
<ALPHAN>

Set to true if last string entered in respon

contains only alphanumeric characters.

directives can set <ALPHAN> to true or
<ALPHAN>

se to an .ASKS directive

The .TEST and TESTFILE

false. An empty string sets

to true, and any embedded blank

sets <ALPHAN> to

false. If lowercase mode is disabled, a lowerc

ase response to a query

sets <ALPHAN> to false.

Set to true if the last query was answered with

acter. Otherwise set to false.

Set to true if response to last query was a defaul

t response (that is, a

carriage return was entered).
<EQF>

Set to true after the
Otherwise set to false.

<FALSE>

Permanently set to false; can be used to specify

.READ directive encounters end-of-file.

an .ASK directive.

<OCTAL>

a single escape char-

a default response for

Set to true if IND is running under the
XM monitor; false if
otherwise.,

Set to true if the last numeric symbol tested with

contained an octal value; false if the last

the .TEST directive

numeric symbol contained a

decimal value. Also set to true if a numeric

symbol defined using the
SETN or .ASKN directive was assigned
an octal value; false if

assigned a decimal value.
<RAD50>

Set to true if last string entered in response to

an .ASKS directive, or

tested with a . TEST or TESTFILE directive,

contains only Radix—50

Set to true if the last response to an ASK

directive exceeded the

characters. The period and dollar sign are valid
Radix-50 characters,
but blank characters and lowercase alphabe
tic characters are not.
An empty string sets <RAD50> to true.
<TIMOUT>

timeout count; false if otherwise.
<TRUE>

Permanently set to true; can be used to specify
a default response for
an .ASK directive.

Numeric Symbols
<ERROR>

Permanently assigned the value 2 (octal) to

Assigned the exit status value of 0, 1,

represent an error.

2, or 4 according to the contents of the user error byte as a result of
the last keyboard command
executed. The values 0, 1, 2, and 4 indicat

Warning

Success

Error

Severe error

This special numeric symbol is modified
at the completion of each
keyboard command. The .EXIT direct
ive can also modify
<EXSTAT>. The value is returned from

the task that has completed

(Continued on next page)
5-20

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

Table 5-6: IND Special Symbols (Cont.)
Value

Symbol

if you have used the .EXIT directive to specify an exit status
value. Otherwise, the value is returned from KMON.

Assigned a numeric status code indicating whether a file opera-

tion was successful. The codes returned, along with their descriptions, are:

Success

372
366

No room to fetch handler
End-of-file detected

363
351
346
343
340
337

Data overrun
Device full
No such file
File accessed for write
Device read error
Device write error

333
327
325
324
313

No file accessed on channel
File exceeds space allocated
Bad record type (non-ASCII)
File accessed for read
File already open

312
244

Bad file name
Invalid device or unit

Permanently assigned the value 4 (octal) to represent a severe
error.

Assigned an octal number to represent the amount of space avail-

able, in bytes, in the symbol table. IND uses a minimum of 10
bytes (octal) for each symbol.

Assigned the length, in octal, of the string entered in response to

the last .ASKS directive or the string tested by the last . TEST
directive.

Permanently assigned the value 1 (octal) to represent success.

Assigned a numeric code to represent the type of symbol tested by
a .TEST directive. The codes represent the following:

2
4

Logical symbol

Numeric symbol
String symbol

Assigned an octal number to represent the operating system on
which IND is running. The octal numbers represent one of the
following:

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10

RSX-11D
RSX-11M
RSX-11S
IAS
RSTS
VAX/VMS
RSX-11M-PLUS
RT-11 (SJ monitor)
RT-11 (FB monitor)

If <MAPPED> is true, the XM monitor is running.

Assigned the unit number of the user’s system device (SY:).
Permanently assigned the value 0 (octal) to represent a warning.
(Continued on next page)

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-21

Table 5-6: IND Special Symbols (Cont.)

Symbol

Value

String Symbols
<DATE>

Assigned the current date; format is dd-mmm-yy. The length of
the value of <DATE> is predetermined (nine characters). If date

is defined with less than nine characters, the value is padded with
blank characters in the symbol table. If no date has been assigned, <DATE> contains nine blank characters.
<EXSTRI>

Assigned the physical device name, device size, and attributes of a

device tested with the TESTDEVICE directive. The following
mnemonics are found in <EXSTRI>:

NSD

No such device

LOD

Device handler loaded

UNL

Device handler not loaded

ONL

On line

OFL

Off line

UNK

Unknown

MTD

Mounted

NMT

Not mounted

For word positions, see TESTDEVICE description, Section 5.5.35.
<FILSPC>

Assigned the full file specification (device, file name, and file

type) of the file tested with the TESTFILE directive, opened with
the .OPEN, .OPENA, or .OPENR directive, or opened when a
control file is called to begin execution.

Assigned the name of the currently running monitor. The length

of the value of this special string symbol is predetermined (six
characters). Therefore, if <MONNAM> is defined with less than
six characters, the value is padded with blank characters in the

symbol table.

Assigned the device mnemonic of the user’s system device.

<TIME>

Assigned the current time; fornat is hh:mm:ss.

5.4.6

Symbol Value Substitution

Symbol value substitution is a means of replacing a symbol you use in a

command line with that symbol’s contents. When you use the .ENABLE

SUBSTITUTION directive and enclose a symbol in apostrophes, IND re-

places that symbol with the value assigned to it. This process is known as

substitution. You can enable substitution in any line of a control file. Using
substitution, you have a quick way to print character strings and prompts
at the console, and you can manipulate symbol values neatly and efficiently
in your control files.

If IND encounters an apostrophe when substitution is enabled, IND treats

the subsequent text, up to a second apostrophe, as a symbol name. IND
then substitutes the value of the symbol in the command line in place of the
symbol. You can also use substitution within the comments that IND prints

at the console.

The following example illustrates substitution. The lines below appear in a

control file.

+ENABLE SUBSTITUTION
+ASKS DEV ENTER

Version 5.1, July 1984

5-22

ASSICGN

"DEVY INP

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

INPUT DEVICE

When IND processes the above lines, it prints the following at the console:
¥ ENTER INPUT DEVICE [S1: DY
INP

+ASSIGN DY

ayed prompt. This reply
In the example above, DY is the response to the displ
Then when IND read
assigned the string value DY to string symbol DEV.
assigned to DEV;
ASSIGN ‘DEV’ INP, it substituted for ‘DEV’ the value
y have
would
that is, DY. If substitution mode was not enabled, INDfile (thatsimpl
GN
ASSI
is,
passed the line to KMON as it appeared in the control
‘DEV’ INP).

s the beginning of a
If substitution mode is enabled, an apostrophe signal
within a command
string symbol. Thus, to include an apostrophe as text
single aposline, rather than as the start of a symbol, you must replace the
tution
substi
if
le,
examp
For
trophe with two consecutive apostrophes ("").
mode is enabled, IND displays the control file line:
' ‘'S VALUE
;THE SYMBOL
as.

'S VALUE
;THE SYMBOL

5.5

IND Directives

The sections that follow give detailed information on the IND directives and
also provide examples.

NOTE

In the sections that follow, unless specified otherwise, square

brackets ([]) that enclose directive arguments indicate that
the arguments are optional. They are not part of the directive
syntax.

Define a Label (.label:)

5.5.1

l file so that
The .label: directive assigns a name to a location in your contro
the location can be easily referenced. The .label: directive has the following
syntax:

Jlabel:
where:

label represents the name you want to assign to a location in your control file

d (.) and folLabels must be from one to six characters, prefixed with a perio
of a line.
ning
begin
lowed by a colon (). Labels must always appear at the
Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-23

You can use labels as reference points in your

only within the level of the indirect contr

control files. A label is known

ol file in which the label is defined.

5.5.1.1

Label Processing — When your contr

a label, IND

ol file instructs IND to branch to

first determines whether or not the label

(See Section 5.5.1.2). If not, IND

is a direct access label
searches for the label from the current posi-

tion in the file to the end of the file. If

the label is not found, IND searches

from the beginning of the file toward the
current position. When IND finds
the label, processing continues on that
line. If IND cannot find the label it

prints an error message.
9.5.1.2

Direct Access Labels — Direct access

to quickly. You can define a direct acces

labels are labels IND can branch

s label by placing a label on a line by

itself. When processing a control file, IND

recognizes these labels as direct
access labels and records the label and
its location in an internal table.

When a direct access label is referenced,
IND checks the direct access table
and jumps directly to the proper location
without having to search the file.
IND then continues processing at the state
ment directly below the direct

access label.

You can define up to 20 direct access label
s within an indirect control file. If
you define more than 20, the newly defin
ed labels replace the already defined labels in order, beginning with the
first direct access label defined.
Direct access labels that are replaced
are thereafter treated as nondirect
access labels.
In the following example, 100 is a direc

t access label, while 200 is not:

+THIS

THE

START

WANT

CONTINUE

SUBROUTINE

+RETURN

¢ 200

5.5.2

+ASK

«IFT

GOSUB

YOU

100

Define Logical End of File (/)

The logical end-of-file directive, the slash
essing. You cannot assign an exit statu

acter. The slash character performs

tive (see Section 5.5.33).

the same function as the .STOP direc

When IND encounters the slash, it print

sole:
@

9—-24

<EDF:

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

character (/), terminates file proc-

s value when you use the slash char-

s the following message at the con-

IND ignores any characters that follow the slash on the same line. You can

use this directive at any location in the control file to quickly terminate file
processing.

The following example uses the end-of-file directive:
,ASK CONT DO YOU WISH TO CONTINUE
JIFT CONT

GOTO

100

«100:

In the last example, execution halts if the logical symbol CONT is defined as
false.

.ASK Directive

5.5.3

The .ASK directive sets the value of a specified logical symbol to true or
false. The .ASK directive prints a question at the console, waits for a yes or
no response, and sets a specified logical symbol to a value of true for yes or
false for no. If the symbol has not already been defined, IND makes an entry
in the symbol table. If the symbol has been defined, IND resets its value
according to the response. IND prints an error message and exits if the symbol was previously defined as a numeric or string symbol.
5.5.3.1 Syntax—The .ASK directive has the following syntax:
ASK [def:time] logsym prompt
where:

def

represents the default response that is used when only a carriage return is entered as a response, or when a specified time
interval elapses and no response is given. Specify the default
response by using a logical or special symbol (such as
<TRUE> or <FALSE>) that is assigned a true or false value.
If no default response is specified, the default response is no.

time

represents the timeout count. If the timeout count is exceeded
and no response is given, IND uses the default response and

the special symbols <DEFAUL> and <TIMOUT> are set to

true. A timeout count can be used only if you have enabled
timeout mode by means of the ENABLE TIMEOUT directive.
Also, your configuration must include a system clock and your

monitor must include timer support. If you specify a timeout
count in a control file, and any of these conditions is not met,
the timeout indicator is not displayed in the resulting prompt
and the timeout count is ignored.

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-25

The timeout count syntax is nnu. The variable
nn represents
the number of time units to count before the
timeout occurs,
and u represents one of the following time units:
T
S
M
H

Ticks
Seconds
Minutes
Hours

IND interprets nn as an octal number unless
you use a decimal
point (.) following the number to denote decim
al. If you specify
an invalid timeout parameter, an error occurs
.

logsym

represents a logical symbol to be set to true or false.

prompt

represents the question to be printed
at the console. The
prompt you specify can include up to 80 charac
ters.

The brackets surrounding the optional parameters
def and time are part of
the syntax; you must include them if you specif
y a value for either param-

eter. Although both parameters are optional,
they are position-dependent
within the brackets. If you specify time witho
ut specifiying a default, you
must delimit the position of the default param
eter with a colon (;).

The following command line specifies a timeo
ut count but no default

response. If no response is given within

15 (decimal) seconds, IND assigns

the value false (for no) to the logical symbol DONE

+ASK

9.5.3.2

[:15.,51

DONE

ARE

YOU

FINISHED

Question Display — When IND processes an .ASK

mand line, IND prints an asterisk followed by

specified (prompt), and a question mark (?),

directive in a com-

a space (*), the question you
followed by response informa-

tion, taken from the optional parameters, in
brackets. For example, when
IND processes the command line shown above, IND
prints:
*

ARE

YOU

FINISHED?

[Y/N

D:N

T:15.81

The Y/N indicates that a yes or no response 1s
required. The notation D:N
indicates that the default response is no. The notati
on T:15.S indicates that
the default response will be used if no response
1s given within 15 (decimal)
seconds.
9.5.3.3

Responses —IND

interprets any string that begins with a

yes, and sets the specified logical symbol to

Y to mean

a value of true. IND interprets

any string that begins with an N to mean
no, and the logical symbol is set to
a value of false. A response that begins with
any other character causes IND
to reprint the question.

If only a carriage return is typed in response to
the question, IND uses the
default response indicated within the bracke
ts. This response also sets
<DEFAUL> to true.

5-26

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

If the response ESORE) is typed while escape recognition is enabled (with the
ENABLE ESCAPE command), the special symbol <ESCAPE> is set to
true and the symbol is set to true if it is undefined. However, if the symbol
has been previously defined its value remains unchanged. If the response
ESO@D is typed while escape recognition is disabled (by the .DISABLE ESCAPE directive), <ESCAPE> is set to false and IND prints an error message.

The response CTRL/Z causes IND to print the following message, then terminate processing:
@EOF

.ASKN Directive

5.5.4

The .ASKN directive sets the value of a specified numeric symbol to a
numeric value. The .ASKN directive prints a question or prompt at the console, waits for a numeric response, and sets the specified numeric symbol to
the value of the response. If the symbol has not already been defined, IND
makes an entry in the symbol table. If the symbol has been defined, IND
resets its value according to the response and the default radix mode
enabled (octal or decimal). IND prints an error message and exits if the symbol was previously defined as a logical or string symbol.
5.5.4.1

Syntax —The .ASKN directive has the following syntax:

ASKN [low:high:def:time] numsym prompt
where:

low:high

represents the inclusive numerical range within which the

response must fall. The default range is 0 through 177777
(octal), or 0 through 65535 (decimal). If you specify values for
low and high, they must fall within the default range. You
can specify these values as numbers or as numeric
expressions.

def

represents the default response that is used when only a carriage return is entered as a response, or when a specified

time interval elapses and no response is given. You can
specify the default response either as a number or as a
numeric expression. If no default response is specified, the
default response is assigned the value of the low limit of the
range (either the assigned range or the default range if none
is assigned).

time

represents the timeout count. If the timeout count is
exceeded and no response is given, IND uses the default
response and the special symbols <DEFAUL> and
<TIMOUT> are set to true. A timeout count can be used

Version 5.1, July 1984

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-27

only if you have enabled timeout support by means of the
.ENABLE TIMEOUT directive. Also, your configuration

must include a system clock and your monitor must include

timer support. If you specify a timeout count in a control file,
and any of these conditions is not met, the timeout indicator

is not displayed in the resulting prompt and the timeout

count is ignored.

The timeout count syntax is nnu. The variable nn represents
the number of time units to count before the timeout occurs,
and u represents one of the following time units:

Ticks

S
M

Seconds
Minutes

Hours

If you specify an invalid timeout count, an error occurs.
numsym

represents a numeric symbol to be assigned the value of the
response

prompt

represents a string of characters to be printed at the console.

If the prompt is a question, you must include the question
mark as part of prompt. The prompt you specify can include

up to 80 characters.

The brackets surrounding the optional parameters low, high, def and time

are part of the syntax; you must include them if you specify a value for any

of these parameters. Although all four parameters are optional, they are
position-dependent within the brackets. You must use a colon to delimit the

position of any parameter you exclude if you want to specify a parameter

that follows it within the brackets.

The following command line specifies high value for the range and a timeout

count, but no low limit or default response. If no response is given within 15
seconds, IND assigns the value 0 (the default value of the low limit) to the
numeric symbol NUM.
+ASKN

5.5.4.2

[:7::155]1

NUM

LINEPRINTERS

CONFIGURATION?

Determining the Radix — The radix is determined by the .ENABLE/

DISABLE OCTAL directive. The radix affects how range, default, and
timeout indicators are displayed in a resulting prompt, and the radix of the
response.

If the default radix, octal, is in effect IND considers the indicators you
specify to be octal. However, if decimal mode is in effect (the .DISABLE
OCTAL directive has been issued), IND interprets the indicators you spec-

ify as decimal.

You can override octal mode by placing a decimal point (.) after any of the
values you specify within the brackets. IND considers values that you
Version 5.1, July 1984

9-28

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

values within the
specify with a decimal point () to be decimal values. Anyare
interpreted as
point
al
same set of brackets specified without a decim
printing
before
octal, but IND converts them to their decimal equivalents values specif
ied
the resulting prompt. When decimal mode 1s in effect, all
within the brackets are considered decimal; using a decimal point (.) has no
effect.

d. When IND
For example, in the following control file octal mode is enable
ut valprocesses the .ASKN directive, IND interprets the default and timeo
octal
from
values
range
the
ues as decimal numbers. However, IND converts
to decimal.

+ENABLE OCTAL

LASKN [0:10:3.,:20.,81 ERR NO. OF ERROR CODES TO USE

Therefore, the valid range for the response is 0—8 (decimal), thes.default
response is 3 (decimal), and the timeout count is 20 (decimal) second
or default
When you use numeric symbols or expressions to specify the range
response, the radix of the numeric symbols determines the radix of the range
and default values.

554.3 Question Display — When IND processes an ASKN directive in a
command line, IND prints an asterisk followed by a space (*) and the prompt
you specified, followed by response indicators taken from the optional values

you specify, in brackets. For example, when IND processes the command
line shown above, IND prints:

¥ NO. OF ERROR CODES TO USE [D R:0.-8B. D:3. T:20.81

Since decimal values were specified within the brackets in the original coml.
mand line, all values within the resulting prompt are shown as decimase,
respon
t
defaul
range,
(The decimal points (.) following the values for the
on
and timeout count indicate that these are decimal numbers.) The notati
R-0 —8. indicates that the value must be a number in the range 1 to 8 3;(decimal) inclusive; the notation D:3. indicates that the default response is ifand
the notation T:20.S indicates that the default response will be used no
response is given within 20 (decimal) seconds.

se 1s
The D indicates that for this example the default radix for the respon
decimal, and that response will be always stored as a decimal number.
would
If octal values had been specified in the original command line, IND of
print the O (octal) indicator instead, meaning the default radix the
response is octal and the response will be stored as an octal value.

octal or
5.5.4.4 Responses—The response to an ASKN directive must be an D
decimal number within the range specified by the prompt. The O or radix
indicator tells you the radix in which the response is stored.

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-29

If the radix indicator within the prompt

brackets is O, IND assumes the

response is an octal value. You can specif

y a decimal value by typing a deci-

mal point (.) after the response. IND
stores the response as its octal
equivalent.

If the radix indicator is D, IND assumes the

can specify an octal value by typing a

response 1s a decimal value. You

number sign (#) before your response.

IND stores the response as its decimal equiv

alent.

If only a carriage return is typed in respo
nse to the question, IND uses the
default response indicated within the brack
ets. This response also sets
<DEFAUL> to true.

If the response E0RED is typed while escap

e recognition is enabled (with the
ENABLE ESCAPE command), the specia
l symbol <ESCAPE> is set to

true and the numeric symbol is set to

0 if the symbol has not yet been defi-

ned. If the symbol was previously define
d, its value remains unchanged.
However, if escape recognition is disabled,
<ESCAPE> is set to false and
IND prints an error message and reprompts
for a valid response.

The response CTRL/Z causes IND to print

minate processing:

the following message, then ter-

BEOF

5.5.5

.ASKS Directive

The .ASKS directive sets the value of a specif
string. The .ASKS directive prints a quest

for an ASCII string response, and sets

ied string symbol to an ASCII

ion or prompt at the console, waits

the specified string symbol to the
value of the response. If the symbol has
not already been defined, IND
makes an entry in the symbol table. If the
symbol has been defined, IND

resets its value according to the response.

IND prints an error message and
exits if the symbol was previously defined as
a logical or numeric symbol.
5.5.5.1

Syntax — The .ASKS directive has the follo

wing syntax:

ASKS [low:high:“def’:time] strsym promp
t
where:

low:high

represents the inclusive number of characters
permitted in
the response string. The default range
is 0 through 204
(octal), or 0 through 132 (decimal). If you
specify values for
low and high, they must fall within the defau
lt range. You

can

specify

expressions.

“def”

these

values

numbers

represents the default response that is used

carriage return is entered as a response,

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

numeric

when only a

or when a spec-

ified time interval elapses and no response

5-30

is given. You

can specify the default response either as a string, string
symbol, or string expression. The quotation marks are part
of the directive syntax if you specify a string.

time

represents the timeout count. If the timeout count 1is

exceeded and no response is given, IND uses the default
response and the special symbols <DEFAUL> and
<TIMOUT> are set to true. A timeout count can be used
only if you have enabled timeout support by means of the
ENABLE TIMEOUT directive. Also, your configuration

must include a system clock and your monitor must
include timer support. If you specify a timeout count in a

control file, and any of these conditions is not met, the
timeout indicator is not displayed in the resulting prompt
and the timeout count is ignored. If these conditions are all
met and you specify a timeout count but no default
response, an error results and IND will not execute the
command line.

The timeout count syntax is nnu. The variable nn represents the number of time units to count before the timeout
occurs, and u represents one of the following time units:
T

S
M
H

Ticks

Seconds

Minutes
Hours

If you specify an invalid timeout count, an error occurs.

strsym

represents a string symbol to be assigned the value of the

prompt

represents a string of characters to be printed at the console. If the prompt is a question, you must include the
question mark as part of prompt. The prompt you specify

response

can include up to 80 characters.

def, and time
The brackets surrounding the optional parameters low, high,
value for any
a
y
specif
are part of the syntax; you must include them if you
they are
of these parameters. Although all four parameters are optiontoal,delim
it the
colon
position-dependent within the brackets. You must usetoaspecif
eter
param
a
y
want
position of any parameter you exclude if you
that follows it within the brackets.

the range, a default
The following command line specifies a low value for specif
ied, the default
is
response, and a timeout count. Since no high limit
n 15 seconds,
withi
given
is
nse
high limit 204 (octal) 1s assumed. If no respo
IND assigns the value DYO to the string symbol DEV.

,ASKS [3::"DYO":1551 DEV DEVICE TO USE FOR DEFAULT?

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-31

9.5.5.2
range

Determining the Radix of Range and Timeo

and

timeout

values

ut Values — The radix of the

determined by the

OCTAL directive. The radix of these value

.ENABLE/DISABLE

s determines how they are dis-

played in the resulting prompt.

If the default radix, octal, is in effect IND consi
ders the numbers you specify
to be octal. However, if decimal mode is
in effect (the .DISABLE OCTAL
directive has been issued), IND inter
pretes the values you specify as
decimal.
You can override octal mode by placing a
decimal point (.) after any of the
values you specify within the brackets.
IND considers values that you
specify with a decimal point (.) to be decim
al values. Any values within the

same set of brackets specified witho

ut a decimal point are interpreted as

octal, and IND converts them to their decim

al equivalents. When decimal
n the brackets are considered deci-

mode is in effect, all values specified withi

mal; using a decimal point (.) has no effect

For example, in the following control file

processes the .ASKS directive, IND

mal number. However, IND converts the
+ENABLE
+ASKS

octal mode is enabled. When IND

interprets the timeout value as a deci-

range values from octal to decimal.

DCTAL

[0:10:"RT11A":20,51

m
VOLID

TYPE

YOUR

VOLUME

Therefore, the response must contain from
characters, the default response is RT1 1A,

mal) seconds.

0 (decimal) to 8 (decimal) ASCII
and the timeout count is 20 (deci-

When you use numeric symbols or expression

of the numeric symbols determines the radix

s to specify the range, the radix

of the range.

5.5.5.3

Question Display — When IND proce
sses an .ASKS directive in a
command line, IND prints an asterisk
followed by a space (*) and the prompt
you specified, followed by response
information taken from the optional

parameters, in brackets. For examp
le, when IND processes the comm
and

line shown above, IND prints:
*

TYPE

YOUR

VOLUME

L[S

R:0.-8,

D:"RTIIA"

T:20,851

The S indicates that the response must be
an ASCII string. The notation
R:0.-8. indicates that the response strin
g can be from 0 to 8 (decimal) char-

acters long, inclusive. The notation

D:-“EBCDIC” indicates that the defau

volume ID is “EBCDIC”. (If no default respo

nse was specified, the D: is not
displayed.) The notation T:20.S indicates
that the default response will automatically be used if no response is given
within 20 (decimal) seconds. Note
that IND indicates decimal values by print
ing a decimal point (.), and indi-

cates octal values by excluding the decim

al point.

5.5.5.4

Responses — The response to an .ASK

string whose length is within the range

932

Indirect Control File Processor (IN D)

S directive must be an ASCII

specified by the prompt.

to the question, IND uses the
If only a carriage return is typed in response ets.
response also sets
default response indicated within the brack beenThis
specified, the symbol is
<DEFAUL> to true. If no default response has
set to null.

n is enabled (with the
If the response ESOGED is typed while escape recognitio
APE> is set to
ENABLE ESCAPE command), the special symbol <ESC
defined). If the symtrue and the symbol is defined as null (if not previously
nged. However, if
bol was previously defined, the definition remainstouncha
and IND prints an
false
escape recognition is disabled, <ESCAPE> is set
error message and reprompts for a valid response.

The response CTRL/Z causes IND to print the following message, then terminate processing:
BREOF

5.5.6 Begin Block (.BEGIN)

structure the control file in
The BEGIN and .END directives permit you toare
to debug and mainblocks. Modular, block-structured control files e easy
local symbol definitions
tain. More importantly, begin-end blocks isolat defin
e a symbol, IND creand thus conserve symbol table space. When you
ates an entry in an internal symbol table.

s throughout the control file
The symbol table entries retain their definition
s of control files if defined
execution if defined locally, or throughout all level
, however, are defined only
globally. Local symbols defined within a block
when IND encounwithin that block; they are erased from the symboledtable
a logical, numeric, or
ters an .END directive. Thus, if a symbol is defincanasredef
the symbol to
string symbol outside of a begin-end block, youver, when ine
from the
you
another type within the begin-end block. Howed and the symbol exit
ns to its
retur
begin-end block, the redefined symbol is erase
previous type.

a begin-end block. All local
The .BEGIN directive marks the beginningtheofblock
instead of to the entire
symbols following the directive are local to
control file. The .ERASE LOCAL directive erases all local symbols within
the block.

depth of 127, but IND usuBegin-end blocks can be nested up to a maximumreach
ed.
ally exhausts stack space before this limit can be
The .BEGIN directive has the following syntax:
BEGIN

Anything that follows a .BEGIN directive on the same line is ignored.
The block must be terminated by an .END directive. Each .BEGIN directive
must have a corresponding .END directive.

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-33

3.5.7

Chain to Another File (.CHAIN)

The .CHAIN directive closes the curr

ent indirect control file, disregards all

current local symbols, and continues

processing by using commands from

another indirect control file. The .CHA

IN directive does not close data files

or change the control file level.

The .CHAIN directive has the following

syntax:

.CHAIN filespec [/options]

where:
filespec

represents the indirect control file to

which control is to be

represents one of the options described

in Section 5.2.1

passed

/options

In the following example, IND passes contr

ol to the file DK:OUTPUT.COM:

+CHAIN

5.5.8

QUTPUT

Close File ((CLOSE)

The .CLOSE directive closes the file open
ed by the .OPEN, .OPENA, and
.OPENR directives. You must close
any open files before passing control
from IND to the keyboard monitor. The
.CLOSE directive disables data

mode. When you use the .CLOSE direc
tive, make sure you use a file number
with the file specification.

The .CLOSE directive has the following

syntax:

.CLOSE [#n] [filespec]
where:

represents an optional file number from

number is 0). If substitution is enabl

symbol for n by enclosing the symb

O to 3 (the default file

ed, you can substitute a

ol in apostrophes.

filespec

represents the name of the file you are closi

Using a file specification with .CLO

control file more readable.

SE causes no action but can make your

If you use the .CLOSE directive after
.OPENR, .CLOSE has the same effec
t
as the .PURGE directive.

9.5.9

Send Data to File (.DATA)

The .DATA directive writes a record
or .OPENA directive.

to a file previously opened by an .OPE

The .DATA directive has the following synta

.DATA [#n] text-string

9-34

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

where:

represents an optional file number from O to 3 (the default

file number is 0). If substitution is enabled, you can substitute a symbol for n by enclosing the symbol in apostrophes.
text-string represents text to be sent to the output file. (If substitution
is enabled, text-string can be a string symbol in apostro-

phes.) You can send blank lines as text to an output file, as
well as characters.

The .DATA command line cannot exceed 132 characters.

In the following example, IND sends the string THIS IS DATA to the output
file TEMP.DAT (file number 0):
. OPEN

TEMP

,DATA THIS

IS DATA

» CLOSE

In the next example, IND sends the output file COMMAN.DAT (file number
1):

.OPEN #1

.,DATA #1
+CLOSE

COMMAN

.DISABLE DATA

execute
The DATA directive is also useful for creating indirect files that
creates and

commands that use more than one line. The following exampleects the file
executes an indirect command file that runs PIP, unprot
DY:FILE.TST, and copies the file to DY1:.
.OPEN COPY.TMP
.DATA RUN PIP
,DATA DY:FILE.TST/Z

,DATA DY:FILE.TST=DY1:FILE.TST/W/Y
+DATA "C
» CLOSE

. .TMP
$@COPY

5510 Decrement Numeric Symbol (.DEC)
The .DEC directive decrements a numeric symbol by one.
The .DEC directive has the following syntax:
.DEC numsym
where:

numsym represents the numeric symbol to be decremented

IND prints an error message and terminates processing if you use a logical
or string symbol with .DEC.

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-35

5.5.11

Delay Execution (.DELAY)

The .DELAY directive delays control

file processing for a specified period of
time. The directive is valid only if your
monitor includes timer support and

your configuration includes a clock.

The .DELAY directive has the following

general syntax:

.DELAY nnu
where:
nn

represents the number of time

execution
u

represents one of the following

Ticks

S
M

Seconds
Minutes

Hours

units for which you wish to delay

time units:

IND interprets the number you specify
for nn as octal, unless you use a decimal point to denote decimal.
When .DELAY suspends execution, IND

console:

prints the following message at the

Delaving, b o4

When execution resumes, IND prints the

following at the console:

cesbOntinuing

In the following example, DELAY delay

s execution for 8 seconds (10 octal):

+DELAY

108

In the following example, .DELAY delay

s execution for 25 (decimal) sec-

onds:

+DELAY

9.5.12

25.85

Disable Option (.DISABLE)

The .DISABLE directive disbles a
specified operating mode. See the
.ENABLE directive for details on enabl
ing operating modes.

The .DISABLE directive has the following
.DISABLE

5-36

syntax:

op-mode[,op-mode,op-mode...]

Indirect Control File Processor (IND

)

where:

op-mode

represents one or more of the following operating modes:
GLOBAL
LOWERCASE
MCR
OCTAL
PREFIX
QUIET

ABORT
CONTROL-Z
DATA
DCL
DELETE
ESCAPE

SUBSTITUTION
SUFFIX
TIMEOUT
TRACE
TYPEAHEAD

Each operating mode is independent of the others; all can be disabled at the
same time. You can disable more than one operating mode with one .DISABLE directive by separating the operating modes with commas. The
DATA operating mode is an exception; the .DISABLE DATA directive
must appear on a line by itself. If you disable more than one operating
mode on one line and an error occurs, none of the operating modes are
disabled.

In the following example, the SUBSTITUTION and GLOBAL operating
modes are disabled with one directive.

+DISABLE SUBSTITUTION,GLOBAL

Operating modes can be local or global in scope. Local operating modes auto-

matically return to their default settings when you enter a nested control

file. You must explicitly enable or disable local operating modes when you
enter a nested file. Conversely, when you return from a nested control file to
the previous level file, the operating mode returns to its previous setting as
specified for that file. However, global operating modes remain enabled or
disabled throughout all levels of control files until you explicitly change the

setting. Table 5-7 in Section 5.5.14 lists the scope of each operating mode.
The .DISABLE DATA directive requires special treatment. Like other
DISABLE directives, you can place the .DISABLE DATA directive in any
column of your control file. Therefore, you can format the control file by
using spaces and tabs before the DISABLE DATA directive on a command
line. However, .DISABLE DATA must be the first and only command on the
line, and you may not use labels on the same command line with a
.DISABLE DATA directive.

When IND is processing a control file and you type CTRL/O, IND suppresses
terminal output until it encounters a ..DI\(SABLE QUIET directive.
5.5.13

Display Symbol Table (.DUMP)

The .DUMP directive displays the contents of the local, global, or special
symbol table, or displays the contents of all symbol tables. See Section 5.4
for a description of local, global, and IND special symbols.
The .DUMP directive has the following syntax:
DUMP [symboltable]
Version 5.1, July 1984

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-37

where:
symboltable

represents the symbol table whose contents you want

to display: LOCAL, GLOBAL, or SPECIAL. If you do
not specify a symbol table, IND prints the contents of

all three.
IND

first indicates what type of symbols will be displayed. When displaying

the contents of all symbol tables, IND lists the special symbols first, followed
by the global symbols and lastly the local symbols. Each line of the symbol
table display is formatted as follows:

SYMBOL(TYPE):

VALUE

where:

SYMBOL

represents the symbol name

TYPE

represents the type of symbol:
L

VALUE

Logical symbol
Octal numeric symbol

Decimal numeric symbol

String symbol

represents the symbol’s value: T or F for a logical symbol,

a number for a numeric symbol, or an ASCII string in
quotation marks for a string symbol.

Local symbols are displayed in reverse order of definition; the last local symbol defined is listed first. If you use the .DUMP LOCAL directive and the
local symbol table is empty, IND prints:
*¥¥%k%%There

are

local

symbols**#

Global symbols are listed in order of definition; the first global symbol defined is listed first. If you use the .DUMP GLOBAL directive and the global

symbol table is empty, IND prints:
*#¥¥%%¥There

are

dlobal

svymbols#*%x#

IND may also print one or both of these messages when displaying all three

symbol tables (the DUMP directive with no argument). Note, however, that
the special symbol table is never empty because IND special symbols are

permanent symbols.

The following example displays the contents of all three symbol tables.
+ DUMP

mmmwmmmmw

wWmmmmvom

5-38

wmmwm%mmm

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

qummmmmmm

wmmmmmwmm

wwmmwmwmr

wmmmmmmmm

(0):

SYMTYP(O)
FILERRCO)=
STRLENCO)&
SYUNIT(O)=
EXSTAT(O)=
SUCCES(O)=

WARNINCO)=
ERROR (O):
=
SEVERE(O)
SYSTEM(O)=

T
rsd = =

(L)

SPACE

GGE

(L)

OCTAL

TRUE

(L):

(L) &
TIMOUT

an i MO

(L)

FALSE

EOF

=
ALPHANCL)

)

ESCAPE(L)=
DEFAUL (L)
=
RADSO (L)

DR
D
e

MAPPED (L) =
(L ) =
ALTMOD

T T T T T T

symbols:

Special

MONNAM(S):
SYDISK(S):
(S5):
DATE
(S):
TIME
FILSPC(S):

"RT11GJ"
"DLTM
"Z2Z0-MAR-83"
"00:06:14"
"TT:"

EXSTRI(S):

Global svmbols:
¥%¥%¥There
Local

dlobal

svymbols¥¥%¥

svmbols:

(5):
NAME
UNITS (0):
SUSPND(L):
(g§)ys:
P3
(g8)y:
P8
(5):
P7
(§)y:
PG
(§)y:
P>
(g)y:
P4
(§):
P3
(5):
P2
(5)y:
P1

(8):
PO
COMMAN(S):

5.5.14

are

"JON"
4
T
"
""
"*"
"*
"""
""
""
"*"
"

"TT:"
"TT:"

Enable Option (.(ENABLE)

You can use the .ENABLE directive to invoke one of the operating modes
listed in Table 5-7.

The .ENABLE directive has the following syntax:
.ENABLE op-mode[,op-mode,op-mode...]

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

5-39

where:
op-mode

represents one or more of the operating modes.

Each mode is independent of the others; all can be active simultaneously.

You can enable more than one operating mode with one .ENABLE directive

by separating the operating modes with commas. The DATA operating mode
is an exception; the ENABLE DATA directive must appear on a line by

itself. If you enable more than one operating mode on one line and an error
occurs, none of the operating modes are enabled.

In the following example, the LOWERCASE and TIMEQUT operating
modes are enabled with one directive.
+ENABLE

LOWERCASE »TIMEOUT

Operating modes can be local or global in scope. Local operating modes automatically return to their default settings when you enter a nested control

file. You must explicitly enable or disable local operating modes when you

enter a nested file. Conversely, when you return from a nested control file to

the previous level file, the operating modes return to their previous settings

as specified for that file. However, global operating modes remain enabled or
disabled throughout all levels of control files until you explicitly change the

settings.

Table 5-7 lists the operating mode default settings and the scope of each
mode.

Table 5-7:

IND Operating Modes

Mode

Default

Scope

ABORT

Enabled

CONTROL-Z

Global

Enabled

DATA

Global

Disabled

DCL

Local

Enabled

DELETE

Local

Disabled

ESCAPE

Local

Disabled

GLOBAL

Global

Disabled

LOWERCASE

Global

Enabled

MCR

Global

Enabled

Local
Global

OCTAL

Enabled

PREFIX

Enabled

QUIET

Global

Disabled

SUBSTITUTION

Local

Enabled

SUFFIX

Global

Enabled

TIMEOUT

Global

Disabled

TRACE

Global

Disabled

TYPEAHEAD

Local

Enabled

Global

Descriptions and examples of each of the operating modes follow.

e Abort Mode (ABORT)
The IND directives .ENABLE ABORT and .DISABLE ABORT enable
and disable abort mode. In abort mode, you can abort a control file by
typing a double CTRL/C. If you disable abort mode (DISABLE ABORT),
Version 5.1, July 1984

540

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

IND ignores CTRL/C characters typed at the terminal. Abort mode remains disabled until the currently executing control file (including control files nested within it) exits or until you issue the .ENABLE ABORT
. NABLE ABORT.
directive. The default setting is E

DISABLE ABORT is available only if you have included global .SCCA
support in your monitor through the system generation process. If you
issue the .DISABLE ABORT directive and your monitor does not include
global .SCCA support, IND returns the value 0 (for warning) in the special symbol <EXSTAT> when the directive is processed.
In the following example, double CTRL/C aborts are disabled during an
INITIALIZE operation.

,ASKS DEY What disk do vou want to initialize®
JIF DEV EQ ""

,GOTO 10

,3Disable abort so user cannot abort INITIALIZE
s iwith double CTRL/C
+DISABLE ABORT

INITIALIZE/BADBLOCKS/NOQUERY ‘DEV '
+ENABLE ABORT
10

Abort mode also enables or disables the ability to abort a control file by
typing CTRL/Z in response to an .ASK, .ASKN, or .ASKS directive.
e Control-Z Mode (CONTROL-Z)

The IND directives ENABLE CONTROL-Z and .DISABLE CONTROL-Z
enable and disable CONTROL-Z mode. When CTRL/Z is enabled, a

<CTRL/Z> typed in response to an .ASK, ASKN, or .ASKS prompt aborts

the control file. If you disable CTRL/Z (DISABLE CONTROL-Z), IND
ignores <CTRL/Z> characters typed at the terminal. CTRL/Z remains
disabled until the currently executing control file (including control files
nested within it) exits or until you issue the .ENABLE CONTROL-Z
directive. The default setting is .ENABLE CONTROL-Z.
e Data mode (DATA [#n])

In data mode, IND sends to an output file lines that follow the directive

line .ENABLE DATA. (To send a single line of text to a file, see the

DATA directive description.) When you use .ENABLE DATA, blank lines
are ignored; this allows you to format your control file.
In the .ENABLE DATA [#n] directive, n represents an optional file number in the range 0-3. (The default is 0.) If substitution is enabled, you
can substitute a symbol for the value n by enclosing the symbol in apostrophes.

When the control file contains:
+OPEN SECFIL.DAT
# "NUM"
BLE
DATA
ENA

,DISABLE DATA # "NUM"
. NABLE and .DISABLE
IND writes the lines that fall between the E

directives to the file SECFIL.DAT.

Version 5.1, July 1984

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

541

NOTE
If you have enabled data mode for one file and wish to send
data to a second file, you must disable data mode for the

first file before you enable it for the second file. If you fail to

disable data mode for the first file, the data you direct to the
second file is sent to the first file.

Data mode is also useful for creating indirect files that execute commands
that use more than one line. The next example creates an indirect file
that runs PIP, unprotects the file DY:FILE.TST, and copies the file to

DY1..

+OPEN COPY.TMP
+ENABLE DATA

RUN PIP
DY:FILE.TST/Z

DY :FILE.TST=DY1:FILE.TST/MW/Y
‘0

+DISABLE DATA
+CLOSE

$@COPY
. TMP

DCL command mode (DCL)

In DCL mode, IND passes lines it does not recognize to the keyboard
monitor to be executed. When the control file contains:
+ASKS DEY WHICH DEVICE WILL YOU USE FOR THE LOG FILE? DYO:
‘DEV’ LOG

ASSIGN

and DCL mode is enabled, the keyboard command ASSIGN DYO0: LOG is
executed. If DCL mode is disabled, or if the /N option was used, this
command is ignored.
®

Delete mode (DELETE)
When delete mode is enabled in a control file, the control file is deleted

when IND is through processing it. Processing is complete when IND
executes the .EXIT directive or reaches the end of the control file.
The .ENABLE DELETE directive has the same effect as the /D option.

Escape recognition mode (ESCAPE)
Escape recognition permits the escape character to be a valid response to
an .ASK, .ASKS, or .ASKN directive. A question answered with a single

escape character sets the special logical symbol <ESCAPE> to true. The
escape character, followed by a carriage return, must be used only as an

immediate terminator to the question; if one or more characters precede
or follow the escape, IND will print the following error message:
PIND-E~Invalid Answer or Terminator

IND will then repeat the query. If you type EORED in response to an .ASK
directive, the specified logical symbol will be set to true if the symbol has
Version 5.1, July 1984

542

not previously been defined; otherwise, it remains unchanged.

IndirectC ontrol File Processor (IND)

When the control file contains:
sIF YOU WANT A LIST OF OPTIONSs TYPE <ESCH<RET?>

sENABLE ESCAPE
+ASKS A ENTER OPTION

+IFT <ESCAPE> .GOTO LIST

LLIST:

SOPTIONS ARE: A (ADD)» 5 (SUBTRACT)+» D (DIVIDE)

key, followed by a carriage return, in response to
and you type the
corresponding lines displayed at the terminal are:
the
ENTER OPTION,
s 1F YOU WANT A LIST OF OPTIONS, TYPE <ESC»<RET:
¥ ENTER OPTION [81: <ESC><RET>
sOPTIONS ARE: A (ADD) + 8§ (SUBTRACT)» D (DIVIDE)

Global symbol mode (GLOBAL)

In global symbol mode, symbol names that begin with a dollar sign ($) are
defined as global to all levels of control files; once such a symbol has been
defined, all levels recognize it. Symbols that do not begin with a dollar
sign are local to the level that defines them.

The file LORRAN.COM contains the following lines:
JENABLE SUBSTITUTION
PN

When the control file contains:
+ENABLE GLOBAL
+SETS $X "TEST"
BLORRAN.COM

IND prints at the console:
STEST

Lowercase mode (LOWERCASE)

When lowercase mode is enabled, IND stores responses to .ASKS directive prompts, and strings that define symbols with the .SETS directive, in
the string symbol as the characters are typed (uppercase characters are
stored in uppercase, lowercase characters are stored in lowercase). When
lowercase mode is disabled, IND stores all characters as uppercase characters, regardless of whether they were typed as uppercase or lowercase
characters.

Character case is significant when comparing strings; the .IF and .TEST
directives discriminate between lowercase and uppercase characters, regardless of whether lowercase mode is enabled or disabled. Also, if lowercase mode is disabled and the response to a query is in lowercase, the
special logical symbol <ALPHAN> will be set to false.
When the control file contains:
,ENABLE SUBSTITUTION LOWERCASE
,ASKS A DEFINE STRING SYMBOL A
;ffil

Version 5.1, July 1984

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

543

IND prints at the console:
# DEFINE STRING SYMBOL A

[8]:

SORT Subroutine

ySORT Subroutine

e MCR command mode (MCR)
In MCR mode, IND passes lines it does not recognize to the keyboard
monitor to be executed. When the control file contains:
+ASKS DEV DEVICE TO USE FOR LOG FILE?T DYOu
'DEV’ LOG

ASSIGN

and MCR mode is enabled, the keyboard command ASSIGN DYO0: LOG is

executed. If MCR mode is disabled, or if the /N option was used, this
command is ignored.
® Octal mode (OCTAL)
In octal mode, numeric symbols and .ASKN directive responses are interpreted as octal rather than decimal. For example, if octal mode is enabled

and the control file contains the line:
+ASKN VECTR ENTER VECTOR ADDRESS OF FIRST CONTROLLER

IND prints the following and interprets the response to be an octal num-

ber:

¥ ENTER VECTOR ADDRESS OF FIRST CONTROLLER

[O1:

The .ENABLE OCTAL directive can be overridden by specifying decimal

numbers in the range specification, or by issuing the .DISABLE OCTAL

directive.

¢ Prefix mode (PREFIX)

In prefix mode, IND prints an asterisk and a space in front of all prompts
resulting from .ASK, .ASKN, and .ASKS directives, and prints semico-

lons ;) in front of all external comment lines. For example, suppose a
control file contains the following lines:
+ENABLE PREFIX
+ASK CONT DO YOU WANT TO CONTINUE
+IFF CONT .GOTO SUBZ
+ D0 NOT CONTINUE
sCONTINUE

When IND

processes these lines, IND prints the following on the console:

¥ DO YOU WANT TO CONTINUE?
sCONTINUE

[Y/N D:NI:

Y<RET>

If prefix mode had been disabled, IND would print the same lines but
without the asterisk-space combination and semicolon.

¢ Quiet mode (QUIET)
In quiet mode, IND does not display keyboard command lines. The com-

mand lines are executed normally, and if they return a message or display, the message or display is printed on the console.

Version 5.1, July 1984

544

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

When the control file contains:
,ASK QUIET DO YDU WANT COMMAND LINES SUPPREGSED
IFT QUIET JENABLE QUIET
+IFF QUIET .DISABLE QUIET

ASSIGN DX OUT

and the response is affirmative, IND processes the ASSIGN command but

does not display it on the console.

Substitution mode (SUBSTITUTION)

In substitution mode, IND replaces a symbol with its assigned value. The
symbol must be enclosed by apostrophes. For example, if the string symbol A has been assigned the string value THIS IS A TEST, then every
occurrence of ’A’ will be replaced by THIS IS A TEST. When substitution
mode is enabled, IND performs substitutions on each line before scanning
the line for directives and keyboard commands.
When the control file contains:
,ENABLE SUBSTITUTION
,ASKS FIL SPECIFY SOURCE FILE
MACRO

‘FIL’

IND prints at the console:
¥ SPECIFY SOURCE FILE [S51:S0URCE
+MACRO SOURCE

Suffix mode (SUFFIX)

In suffix mode, IND prints a question mark after all . ASK prompts, and
response specifications after all prompts that result from .ASK, .ASKN,
and .ASKS directives. For example, suppose a control file contains the
following line:

JASKN [1:9,:11 INIT NO., OF DISKS TO INIT?

If suffix mode is enabled, IND prints the following on the console:
* NO, OF DISKS TO INIT? [D R:1-9 D:11

If suffix mode is disabled, IND prints only the following:
¥ NO,

OF DISKS TO INIT?

Even when suffix mode is disabled, the response specifications are still
used to check the validity of the response.

Timeout mode (TIMEOUT)

In timeout mode, IND recognizes timeout counts used with ASK directives, if the monitor includes timer support and the configuration includes

a system clock. (If the monitor does not include timer support or your

configuration lacks a system clock, IND returns the value 0, for warning,
in the special symbol <EXSTAT> when the directive is processed). If
timeout mode is disabled, timeout counts are ignored.
If the control file contains the following line and timeout mode is enabled,
IND waits 15 (decimal) ticks for a response before using the specified
default response VT100:

LASKS [::"VUT100":15,T1 TERM CONSOLE TYPE BEING USED?
Version 5.1, July 1984

Indirect Control File Processor (IND)

545

If timeout mode is disabled or the monitor does not inciude timer support,

you must enter a response or carriage return to proceed.

Trace mode (TRACE)

In trace mode, IND prints on the console each command line in a control
file as the command line is processed. IND prints an exclamation mark (1)
before each command line containing directives. No leading characters
are placed before lines containing only keyboard monitor commands or

comments.

When trace mode is enabled, the effect is the same as using the /T option
in the CSI command string.

Type-Ahead Mode (TYPEAHEAD)
The IND directives .ENABLE TYPEAHEAD and .DISABLE TYPEAHEAD enable and disable type-ahead mode. When type-ahead is enabled,

IND uses characters you type before an .ASK, .ASKN, or .ASKS prompt

in the response. If you disable type-ahead (.DISABLE TYPEAHEAD),
IND discards characters that have been typed before processing .ASK,

ASKN, and .ASKS directives. Consequently, if you respond to a prompt
before IND prints the prompt, your response is discarded. The default
setting is . ENABLE TYPEAHEAD.

In the following example, type-ahead is disabled until the directory operation is complete. Therefore, any characters typed before the .ASKS

prompt is printed are discarded.
+DISABLE TYPEAHEAD
DIR DL:
+10ince

tvpeahead

+iquestion will

v3listing has

not

disabled,s

accepted

answer

until

the

following

DIRECTORY

/S[:category]

/OUTPUT filespec

DIR,

1st
output

file
spec.

(Continued on next page)

Monitor Command Abbreviations and System Utility Program Equivalents

A-5

Monitor
Command

Option

System Utility
Program
FILEX

Option
1st
output

file
spec.

JOWNER[:nnn,nnn]
/POSITION
/PR NTER

FILEX
DIR
DIR,

[UIC]
/B

LP: as
1st
output
spec.

FILEX

LP: as
1st
output

file
spec.

/PROTECTION
INOPROTECTION
/REVERSE
/SINCE[:date]
/SORT(:category]

DIR

DIR
DIR

/U
/R

DIR
DIR

/J[:date]

/Sl:category]

/START:n
SUMMARY

DUP

/G:n

DIR

[TERMINAL

DIR,

TT: as
1st
output
spec.

FILEX

TT: as
1st
output
spec.

TOPS
/VOLUMEID[:ONLY]

FILEX

DIR,

FILEX
/WAIT

DISMOUNT
DUMP

DUP,FILEX

/VI:ONL]
W

RDUMP

—

/INOASCII

—
DUMP
DUMP

—

/BYTES

DUMP

/ALLLOCATE:size
/ASCII

/END:n
FOREIGN
IGNORE
/ONLY:n
/OUTPUT: filespec

DUMP

/E:n

DUMP

DUMP
DUMP
DUMP

G
/O:n
1st
output

file
spec.

NTER

DUMP

LP: as
1st
output
spec.

(Continued on next page)

A-6

Monitor Command Abbreviations and System Utility Program Equivalents

Monitor
Command

System Utility
Progr

Option

/ISTART:n

DUMP

Option

/S:n
1st
output

spec.

/WORDS
i

EDIT

DUMP

EDIT,TECO,KED,
KEX, K52
/ALLOCATE:size

EB
—

[n]

/CREATE
/EDIT
/EXECUTE:filespec
/INSPECT
/KED
/KEX

EDITOR
EDIT
TECO
EDITOR
KED
KEX

—_
—
—
—
—
-

1K52

K52

—

/OUTPUT: filespec

EDITOR

—

/TECO

TECO

—

—
—

—
[n]

EXECUTE
/ALLOCATE:size
/ALPHABETIZE
/BOTTOM:n
/BUFFERING
/CODE:type
/CROSSREFERENCE[typel....type]]
/DEBUG(filespec]
/DIAGNOSE
|
/DIBOL
/DISABLE:typel...:.type]
/DUPLICATE
/ENABLE:typel....typel
/EXECUTE!:filespec]

DIBOL
LINK
DIBOL
FORTRAN
= DIBOL,MACRO
LINK
FORTRAN
DIBOL
MACRO
LINK
MACRO
LINK

/A
/B:n
/B
T:type
/C
—
/B
/D
/D
/E
1st
output

file
spec.

/JEXTEND
/FORTRAN
/GLOBAL
/HEADER
/14
/LIBRARY
/LINENUMBERS
/NOLINENUMBERS
,
/LINKLIBRARY :filespec

/LIST filespec]

FORTRAN
FORTRAN
LINK
FORTRAN
FORTRAN
MACRO
DIBOL, FORTRAN
DIBOL,
FORTRAN

/E
—
/N
/0
/T
M
—
/0
/S

LINK
—

—
2nd
output

file
spec.

(Continued on next page)

Monitor Command Abbreviations and System Utility Program Equivalents

A-7

Monitor
Command

Option

System Utility
Program

Option

/LOG

DIBOL

MACRO

—_—

/MAPI:filespec]

LINK

2nd
output

file
spec.

/OBJECT! filespec]

—

1st
output

file
|

spec.

/ONDEBUG
PAGE:n
/PROMPT

DIBOL, FORTRAN
DIBOL
LINK

/D
/P:n
/!

/RECORD:length
/RUN

FORTRAN
RUN

/R:length
—

/INORUN

—

FORTRAN, MACRO
MACRO

/L[:value]
/N[:value]

FORTRAN
FORTRAN
FORTRAN
DIBOL

/A
—_—

- /ISHOWI[:type]
/INOSHOWI[:type]

/STATISTICS
/SWAP
INOSWAP
/TABLES
/JUNITS:n
/VECTORS
/INOVECTORS
/WARNINGS

FORTRAN
FORTRAN
FORTRAN

/U
/S
/N:n
—
vV
W

DIBOL

—_

FORTRAN

/INOWARNINGS

DIBOL

/WIDE

FORTRAN
LINK

—
W

—

FORMAT

- /PATTERN/:value]
/QUERY
/INOQUERY
SINGLEDENSITY
/VERIFY[:ONLY]
WAIT

FORMAT
FORMAT
FORMAT
FORMAT

/Pl:value]
—

FORMAT
FORMAT

/V[:ONLY]
/W

RFORTRAN

—

/ALLOCATE:size
/[CODE:type

.
FORTRAN

[n]
/I:type

FORTRAN

/DIAGNOSE

FORTRAN

/EXTEND
/HEADER

FORTRAN
FORTRAN

/E
/0

14
/LINENUMBERS
/NOLINENUMBERS

FORTRAN
FORTRAN
FORTRAN

/T
—
/S

/LISTI:filespec]

FORTRAN

2nd
output

file
spec.

/OBJECT! filespec]

FORTRAN

1st
output

file
spec.

(Continued on next page)

A-8

Monitor Command Abbreviations and System Utility Program Equivalents

Monitor
Command

System Utility
Program

Option
INOOBJECT

FORTRAN

Option
null
1st
output
spec.

/ONDEBUG
/RECORD:length
ISHOW/:typel]
/STATISTICS
ISWAP
/INOSWAP
/UNITS:n
/VECTORS
/INOVECTORS
/WARNINGS
/INOWARNINGS
FRUN

FORTRAN
FORTRAN
FORTRAN
FORTRAN
FORTRAN
FORTRAN
FORTRAN
FORTRAN
FORTRAN
FORTRAN
FORTRAN

/D
/R
/Li:value]
/A
—
J
/N:n
—
Y
/W
—_—

—

—_

/BUFFER:n
/INAME:name

e
o

—
e

/PAUSE

—

_—

/TERMINAL:n

—_—

GET

—

GT OFF

—

/Lin

—
e

—
—

MTn

—

GT ON

HELP

—

—_—

/PRINTER

—

/TERMINAL

—

—_

DUP

IZ
/Z
/B
/S
1st

INITIALIZE

/BACKUP
/BADBLOCKS[:RET]
/DOS
/FILE: filespec

BUP
DUP
FILEX
DUP

output
spec.

/INTERCHANGE

FILEX

/QUERY
/INOQUERY

DUP, FILEX
BUP, DUP, FILEX

—
Y

/REPLACE[:RET]

DUP

/RESTORE

DUP

/SEGMENTS:n

DUP

/N:n

/VOLUMEID[:ONLY]

DUP,

/V[:ONL]

/WAIT

DUP,FILEX

—

R LIBR
—
LIBR
LIBR

—
[size]

INSTALL

LIBRARY
/ALLOCATE:size
/CREATE
/DELETE

—

(Continued on next page)

Monitor Command Abbreviations and System Utility Program Equivalents

A-9

Monitor
Command

Option
/EXTRACT

/ANSERT
/LIST( filespec]

System Utility
Program

Option

LIBR
LIBR

/E
—

LIBR

2nd
output

file
spec.

/MACROI:n]

LIBR

/OBJECT filespec]

LIBR

/M[:n

1st
output

file
/INOOBJECT

spec.

LIBR

null
1st
output
spec.

[PROMPT

LIBR

/
IG

/REMOVE

LIBR

/REPLACE

LIBR

/UPDATE

LIBR

118}

R LINK

/ALLOCATE:size

—_

LINK

/ALPHABETIZE
/BITMAP
INOBITMAP

/BOTTOM:value
/BOUNDARY:value

[n]

LINK
LINK

/A
_—

LINK

/B:n

LINK

/Y:value

/DEBUGH:filespec]

LINK

/DUPLICATE

—

LINK

/EXECUTEI:filespec]

LINK

1st
output

file
spec.

INOEXECUTE

LINK

null
1st
output
spec.

/EXTEND:n
/FILL:n

LINK

/E:n

LINK

/FOREGROUNDI:stacksize]

1Z:n

LINK

/Rl:stacksize]
/GLOBAL

LINK

ANCLUDE
LDA

LINK
LINK

1
/L

/LIBRARY filespec

LINK

/LIMIT[:n]

—

LINK

/K[:n]

LINK

—

/LINKLIBRARY filespec

/MAP/:filespec]

LINK

2nd
output

file
spec.

/[PROMPT

/ROUND:n
/RUN

LINK

LINK
LINK, RUN

/U:n
—

(Continued on next page)

A-10

Monitor Command Abbreviations and System Utility Program Equivalents

Monitor

Option

Command

/SLOWLY
/STACK][:value]
/SYMBOLTABLEI:filespec]

System Utility

Program

LINK
LINK
LINK

Option
/S
/M[:n]
3rd
output

file
spec.

/TOP[:value]
/TRANSFER|:value]
/WIDE
/XM

LINK
LINK
LINK
LINK

/H[:value]
/T:n]
/W
Y%

_—

—

/ALLOCATE:size

R MACRO
_—

—
[n]

/CROSSREFERENCE[:typel....type]]

MACRO

/DISABLE:typel...:.type]
/ENABLE:typel...:typel
/LIBRARY

MACRO
MACRO
MACRO

/D
/E
M

/LISTY:filespec]

MACRO

LOAD
MACRO

2nd
output

file
spec.

/OBJECT!:filespec]

MACRO

1st
output

file
spec.

/INOOBJECT

MACRO

null
1st
output
spec.

MOUNT

/SHOW:type

MACRO

/INOSHOW:type

MACRO

LD
/WRITE
/NOWRITE

/L
LD
LD

/W
/R

/BEFORE|:date]

PIP,

/J[:date]

/DELETE

QUEMAN
PIP, QUEMAN
PIP,
QUEMAN
PIP, QUEMAN

/FLAGPAGE:n
/INOFLAGPAGE
/[INFORMATION
/LOG
/NOLOG
/NAME:[dev:]jobname

QUEMAN
QUEMAN
PIP, QUEMAN
PIP, QUEMAN
PIP, QUEMAN
QUEMAN

/COPIES:n
/DATE[.date]

/K:n
/Cl:date]
/D

/H:n
/N
/X
/W
—
1st
output

file
spec.

(Continued on next page)

Monitor Command Abbreviations and System Utility Program Equivalents

A-11

Monitor

System Utility

Command

Option

Program

Option

NEWFILES

PIP,QUEMAN

/PRINTER

PIP

LP: as
1st
output
spec.

PROMPT
/QUERY
/SINCE][:date]

QUEMAN
PIP,QUEMAN

//
Q

PIP,

/1[:date]

QUEMAN

/W AIT

PIP
PIP

/BEFORE[:date]

PIP

/J[:date]

PIP
PIP
PIP
PIP

/Cl:date]
/P
/X
W

PIP

—

PROTECT

DATE[:date]
EXCLUDE
ANFORMATION
/LOG
/NOLOG

INEWFILES
/QUERY

/SETDATE[:date]
/SINCE[:date]
SYSTEM
/W AIT

PIP

PIP
PIP

/T[:date]
/[:date]

PIP
PIP

Y
/E

REENTER

—

REMOVE

RENAME

/BEFORE|[:date]
/DATE|:date]
ANFORMATION

PIP

—

PIP

/J[:date]

PIP
PIP

/Cl:date]
/X

LOG

PIP

INOLOG

PIP

NEWFILES

PIP

/PROTECTION
/NOPROTECTION

PIP

/C
/K

PIP
PIP
PIP
PIP

/Z
Q
—
/N

PIP
PIP
PIP
PIP

/T[:date]
[:date]
/Y
/E

RESET

—_

RESUME

—

RUN

—

—_—

SAVE

—

SET

—

QUERY
/REPLACE
NOREPLACE
SETDATE[:date]
/SINCE[:date]
SYSTEM
/WAIT

(Continued on next page)

A-12

Monitor Command Abbreviations and System Utility Program Equivalents

Monitor
Command
SHOW

Option
ALL
CONFIGURATION
- DEVICES[:dd]
ERRORS
/ALL
/FILE:filespec

System Utility
Program
RESORC
RESORC
RESORC
ERROUT
ERROUT
ERROUT

Option
/A
/7,
/DI:dd]
/A
input
file
spec.

/FROM][:date]
/OUTPUT:filespec

ERROUT
ERROUT

/F
1st
output

file
spec.

/PRINTER

ERRQUT

LP: as
1st

output
spec.

/[ISUMMARY
/TERMINAL

ERROUT
ERROUT

/S
TT: as
1st
output
spec.

/TO[:date]

ERROUT

JOBS
MEMORY

RESORC
RESORC

1J
/X

QUEUE

QUEMAN

TERMINALS

RESORC

DUP

SQUEEZE

/OUTPUT:filespec

DUP

1st
output

file
spec.

/QUERY

DUP

/WAIT

DUP

/BUFFER:n

/LEVEL:n

/NAME:logical-jobname

/PAUSE

/TERMINAL:n

—

START

SUSPEND

TIME

/COPIES:n

PIP

/K:n

/DATE[:date]

PIP

/Cl:date]

SRUN

TYPE

/BEFORE[:date]

PIP

/J[:date]

(Continued on next page)
Version 5.1, July 1984

Monitor Command Abbreviations and System Utility Program Equivalents

A-13

Monitor
Command

Option

System Utility
Program

Option

/DELETE

PIP

/INFORMATION

PIP

/LOG

PIP

/NOLOG

/INEWFILES

PIP

/QUERY

PIP

/WAIT

PIP

—

/SINCE|:date]

UNLOAD

PIP

—

Nl:date]

UNPROTECT

A-14

PIP

/BEFORE]|:date]|

PIP

/J[.date]

/DATE|:date]

PIP

/Cl:date]

/EXCLUDE

PIP

/INFORMATION

PIP

/LOG

PIP

/NOLOG

PIP

/NEWFILES

PIP

/QUERY

PIP

/SETDATEI:date]

PIP

/T[.date]

/SINCE]:date]

PIP

/Il:date]

/SYSTEM

PIP

/WAIT

PIP

Monitor Command Abbreviations and System Utility Program Equivalents

INDEX

ABORT keyboard command, 4-24
ABORT operating mode (IND), 540
effect on CTRL/C, 541
Absolute addresses
assigning, 4-146
Absolute Binary Loader
creating files for, 4-150
Absolute binary loader
and .LDA files, 3-2

IND special symbol, 5-20

IND special symbol, 5-20
/ALWAYS option

DIFFERENCES keyboard command,

arguments, 6-21
/ALLOCATE option

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-36
COPY keyboard command, 444
CREATE keyboard command, 4-58
DIBOL keyboard command, 4-68

DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-73

DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-82

DUMP keyboard command, 4-94
EDIT keyboard command, 4-100
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-104
FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-118

LIBRARY keyboard command, 4-140
LINK keyboard command, 4-147
MACRO keyboard command, 4-157
COMPILE keyboard command, 4-36
DIBOL keyboard command, 4-68
DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-82

Advance (A) command (EDIT), 6-21

/ALPHABETIZE option

EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-105
LINK keyboard command, 4-147

4-73

American Standard Code for Information
Interchange

See ASCII format
ANSI codes

setting terminal for, 7-6
ANSWERBACK:/message/
SETUP mode, 7-3
" (append symbol)
used with UCL, 4-16
ASCII files, 3-2
copying with /ASCII, 4-44
ASCII format, 3-2
/ASCII option

COPY keyboard command, 4—44
DUMP keyboard command, 4-94
ASK directive (IND), 5-25
maximum number of characters
allowed in prompt for, 5-2
question display, 526

responses to prompts printed by, 5-26

ASKN directive (IND), 5-27
maximum number of characters
allowed in prompt for, 5-2

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-1

question display, 5-29

radix, 528
responses, 5—29

ASKS directive (IND), 5-30
maximum number of characters

allowed in prompt for, 5-2
question display, 5-32
responses, 5-32

Assembler

function of, 2—-1

Assembly listing
creating a, 4-108

generating, 4-38

including symbol and label table in,
4-111

including symbol cross-reference listing
in, 4-37

including symbol cross-reference
section in, 4-105
Assembly listings

creating, 4-159
including a symbol cross-reference

section in, 4-157

ASSIGN keyboard command, 4-25
* (asterisk)
used with UCL, 4-16
Audit trail
specifying for SLP, 4-74
/AUDITTRAIL option
DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-74

DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-82

INITIALIZE keyboard command,
4-132

Backup utility program

See BUP
Backup volumes (BUP)
initializing, 4-132
Bad block scans

performing, 4-133, 4-134
specifying last block for, 4-86
specifying starting block for, 4-90
Bad block table
preserving on output volume with

/RETAIN, 4-53

Bad blocks
covering with .BAD files, 4-133

finding, 4-83
listing files that contain, 4-86
replacing, 4-134
treatment during a squeeze operation,
4-216

BAD files
copying, 4-43

deleting, 4-63
renaming, 4-178
/BADBLOCKS option

DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-83

INITIALIZE keyboard command,
4-133

Banner pages

B keyboard command, 4-27
Background job
communicating with

See CTRL/B
Background jobs
executing, 4-185

running, 4-152

Backing up files or volumes

for storage
See BACKUP keyboard command
BACKSPACE key

with single-line editor, 4-14

BACKUP keyboard command, 4-28
backup process, 4-28
/DEVICE option, 4-29
initializing backup volumes for, 4-29

/RESTORE option, 4-29
using wildcards with, 4-28

valid input devices for, 4-28
valid output devices for, 4-28

/BACKUP option

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-2

preceding files with, 4-166
suppressing printing of, 4-167

Base-line monitor

See BL monitor
BATCH

description of, 1-9
BCD

SETUP mode, 7-11
/BEFORE option

COPY keyboard command, 4-44
DELETE keyboard command, 4-64
DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-83

PRINT keyboard command, 4-166
PROTECT keyboard command, 4-172
RENAME keyboard command, 4-179

TYPE keyboard command, 4-224
UNPROTECT keyboard command,
4-230

.BEGIN directive (IND), 5-33

/BEGIN option

DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-84
Begin-end blocks (IND), 5-33, 546
exiting, 547

Beginning (B) command (EDIT), 6-20
Binary coded decimal

‘See BCD

Binary Comparison Program

software bootstrap, 4-32
with a single-disk system, 4-33

/BOTTOM option

EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-105
LINK keyboard command, 4-148
/BOUNDARY option
LINK keyboard command, 4-148
/BRIEF option

See BINCOM
Binary files
comparing, 4-74

DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-84

comparing to create SIPP input file,

4-76

hardware bootstrap, 4-32

copying with /BINARY, 4-44
Binary format, 3-2
Binary number
format of (figure), 4-190

/BINARY option

COPY keyboard command, 4-44
DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-74

BINCOM

description of, 1-6
Bit-map graphics
setting terminal for, 7-8
/BITMAP option
LINK keyboard command, 4-147
BL monitor

advantages of, 1-3
features of, 1-3
/BLANKLINES option

DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-75

BLOCK

SETUP mode, 7-3
Block-replaceable devices
See Devices
/BLOCKS option

DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-84

BOLD

SETUP mode, 7-7
BOOT keyboard command, 4-32

/FOREIGN option, 4-33
valid devices for, 4-32
/WAIT option, 4-33
/BOOT option

COPY keyboard command, 4-45
Bootable volume
creating, 4-45

/BUFFER option

FRUN keyboard command, 4-124
SRUN keyboard command, 4-218
/BUFFERING option
COMPILE keyboard command, 4-36
DIBOL keyboard command, 4-68

EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-105
BUP

description of, 1-6
/BYTES option
DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-75

DUMP keyboard command, 4-94

CAPS
SETUP mode, 7-4
Card reader
modifying card codes for, 4-190
setting device conditions for, 4-190

Cassettes
deleting files from, 4-66
CCL
function of, 4-233
syntax, 4-233

using in control files, 54

CF
LINK listing logical device, 4-150

.CHAIN directive (IND), 5-34
Change (C) command (EDIT), 6-29
arguments, 6-29

JCHANGEBAR option
DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-75

Character strings
parsing in control files, 5-56

CLEAR
SETUP mode, 7-7
CLICK
SETUP mode, 74

Bootstrap

Clock modes

copying with /BOOT, 4-45
Bootstrapping a monitor file, 4-32
Bootstrapping the system, 3—-1

CLOCK SHOW

See SETUP
SETUP mode, 7-12
Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-3

.CLOSE directive (IND), 5-34
CLOSE keyboard command, 4-34
closing a file opened with EDIT, 6-3
/CODE option

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-36
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-105
FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-119

Color monitors
changing color on, 7-4
CCLOR on COLOR
SETUP mode, 7-4
132COLUMNS
SETUP mode, 7-7
80COLUMNS
SETUP mode, 7-7

/COLUMNS option
DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-84

COMMAN
IND local string symbol, 5-8

Command lines
abbreviating commands and options,
4-5

abbreviating using file specification
factoring, 44

continuing to the next line, 4-2

deleting
See Single-line editor, 4-13

deleting characters in, 4-14
editing
See Single-line editor
reproducing

See Single-line editor

Commands
multiline
using in a control file, 54

Comments

suppressing line numbers in, 4-69

FORTRAN
creating, 4-119
generating, 4-38

including symbol cross-reference listing
in, 4-37

including symbol cross-reference
section in, 4-105
COMPILE keyboard command, 4-35

/ALLOCATE option, 4-36
[ALPHABETIZE option, 4-36
/BUFFERING option, 4-36

/CODE option, 4-36
/CROSSREFERENCE option, 4-37
default file types, 4-35
/DIAGNOSE option, 4-37
/DIBOL option, 4-37
/DISABLE option, 4-37

/ENABLE option, 4-37
[EXTEND option, 4-37
/FORTRAN option, 4-37

/HEADER option, 4-37

/14 option, 4-37

/LIBRARY, 4-37
/LINENUMBERS option, 4-38
/LIST option, 4-38

/LOG option, 4-39
/MACRO option, 4-39

/NOLINENUMBERS option, 4-38
/NOOBJECT option, 4-40

/INOSHOW option
and MACRO .LIST directive, 4-40
INOSWAP option, 4-41

/NOVECTORS option, 4-41
INOWARNINGS option, 4-41
/OBJECT option, 4-39

in control files, 5-5

/ONDEBUG option, 4-40
/PAGE option, 4-40

external, 5-5

/RECORD option, 4-40

internal, 5-5

/COMMENTS option
DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-75

Compilation listing
creating (DIBOL), 4-69

creating a, 4-108
DIBOL

including line numbers in, 4-69
including symbol and label table in,
4-41

including symbol and label tables in,
4-71

including symbol cross-reference in,
4-69

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index—4

/SHOW option, 440
/STATISTICS option, 4-40

/ISWAP option, 4-41
/TABLES option, 4-41

/UNITS option, 441
/VECTORS option, 4-41
/WARNINGS option, 4-41
/CONCATENATE option
COPY keyboard command, 4-46
Concise command language

See CCL
Console
assigning to another terminal, 4-203
setting width for, 4-205
with hardware tabs, 4-205

with simulated tab stops, 4-205
Console output
resuming, 4-204
suspending, 4-204
Control files, 5-2

See also IND, IND command lines
See Indirect control files
arithmetic operators in, 5-2
begin-end blocks in, 5-33, 546
exiting, 5—47

branching

to a command line, 548
to subroutines, 5-48
when errors occur, 5-54
CCL commands in, 54
chaining between, 5-34
closing open files, 5-34

command line in (example), 5-1

commenting
See Comments

contents of, 5-1
creating, 5-1

general rules for, 5-1
debugging with /T, 5-8
default file type, 5-6
delaying processing of, 5-36

deleting after processing completes, 5-7
displaying processing of command lines
in, 5—46

ESCAPE recognition in, 542
executing, 5-6

from keyboard monitor level, 5-6, 5-7
exiting, 547

formatting, 52

global symbol definition in, 543
global symbols in, 5-17
IND directives in, 5-3

keyboard commands in, 5-3, 54
suppressing display of, 5-8, 544
suppressing execution of, 5-8
labels in, 5-2

See Labels
local symbols in, 5-17
logical symbols in

See also Logical symbols
lowercase characters in, 5-43
multiline commands in, 54

nesting, 5-9

numeric expressions in, 5-16, 5-18

numeric symbols in
See Numeric symbols
opening data files from, 5-55
parsing strings from within, 5-56

passing parameters when executing,
5-8

returning from subroutines within, 5-59
sample line from, 5-3
string symbols in
See String symbols
symbols in, 5-16

terminating processing of, 5-24, 5-63
testing device characteristics, 5-65
testing existence of a file, 5-67
testing the starting position of an
ASCII string, 5-64

uses for, 5-1

CONTROL~Z operating mode (IND),
5-41

/COPIES option

PRINT keyboard command, 4-166
TYPE keyboard command, 4-224
COPY keyboard command
/ALLOCATE option, 4-44

/ASCII option, 4-44
assigning a date, 4-54
/BEFORE option, 4-44

/BINARY option, 4-44
/BOOT option, 445

/CONCATENATE option, 4-46
copying files in image mode, 448
/DATE option, 4-46
/DELETE option, 4-46
/DEVICE option, 4-46
/DOS option, 4-47
/END option, 4-47

[EXCLUDE option, 4-48
/FILES option, 4-48

function of, 442
/IGNORE option, 4-48

/IMAGE option, 4-48
/INFORMATION option, 4-49
/INTERCHANGE option, 4-49
/LOG option, 4-49

/MULTIVOLUME option, 4-50
/INEWFILES option, 4-50
/NOLOG option, 4-50
/NOPROTECTION option, 4-52
INOQUERY option, 4-53
/NOREPLACE option, 4-53
/OWNER option, 4-51
/PACKED option, 4-51
/POSITION option, 4-51
/PREDELETE option, 4-52
/PROTECTION option, 4-52
/QUERY option, 4-53
/REPLACE option, 4-53
/RETAIN option, 4-53
Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-5

/ISETDATE option, 4-54
/SINCE option, 4-54

/ISLOWLY option, 4-54

CTRL/W, 3-8, 4-15
CTRL/X, 3-8
treating as a program control character,

/START option, 4-54

4-203

syntax for specifying date, 4-43
ISYSTEM, 4-54
/TOPS option, 4-55

with EDIT, 6-3
CTRL/Z, 3-9
CURSOR

using wildcards with, 4-43

SETUP mode, 7-5

/VERIFY option, 4-55
/WAIT option, 4-55

Copy operations
changing volumes during, 4-55
verifying with /VERIFY, 4-55
CREATE keyboard command, 4-58
/ALLOCATE option, 4-58
JEXTENSION option, 4-58
/ISTART option, 4-59

/CREATE option
EDIT keyboard command, 4-101
LIBRARY keyboard command, 4-140

CREF.TMP
assigning a device to, 4-150
LINK temporary file, 4-150

/CROSSREFERENCE option
COMPILE keyboard command, 4-37
DIBOL keyboard command, 4-69
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-105
MACRO keyboard command, 4-157

CSR addresses
changing in device handlers, 4-191,
4-197, 4-199

CTRL key, 3-7
CTRL/A, 3-7

CTRL/B, 3-7
treating as a program control character,
4-203

/D
IND option, 5-7
D keyboard command, 4-60

DARK

SETUP terminal mode, 7-5
DATA directive (IND), 5-34
creating an indirect command file with,
5-4, 5-35
Data format

ASCII, 3-2
binary, 3-2
DATA operating mode (IND), 5-41

Date
displaying the, 4-61
setting the, 4-61
DATE keyboard command, 4-61
/DATE option

COPY keyboard command, 4-46
DELETE keyboard command, 4-64
DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-85

PRINT keyboard command, 4-166

PROTECT keyboard command, 4-172
RENAME keyboard command, 4-179
TYPE keyboard command, 4-224

UNPROTECT keyboard command,
4-230

CTRL/C, 3-7
including in text with EDIT, 6-2
with EDIT, 6-2

DATE[:dd:mm:yy]

CTRL/E, 3-7
CTRL/F, 3-8

SETUP mode, 7-12
Daylight saving time

treating as a program control character,
4-203

CTRL/O, 3-8

disabling, 4-183, 4-204
enabling, 4-204
with EDIT, 6-3

CTRL/Q, 3-8
CTRL/R, 3-8, 4-15

CTRL/S, 3-8
disabling, 4-204
enabling, 4-204
CTRL/U, 3-8, 4-14
with EDIT, 6-3

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index—6

<DATE>

IND special symbol, 5-22

See DST
DCL operating mode, 5-42

DEASSIGN keyboard command, 4-62
/DEBUG option
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-105
LINK keyboard command, 4-148
Debugging a program, 4-148
Debugging programs

See ODT and VDT
DEC directive (IND), 5-35
DECsystem—10 files
transferring to RT-11 format with

/TOPS, 4-55

DECsystem—10 format files

obtaining directory listings of, 4-91
<DEFAUL>

IND special symbol, 5-20

changing error logging retry attempt
number in, 4-191
changing vector addresses in, 4-192,
4-193

and .ASK directive, 5-26
and .ASKN, 5-30
DEFAULT

changing vectors in, 4-198, 4-200

SETUP control, 7-13
DELAY directive (IND), 5-36

setting to log only unsuccessful /O

Delete (D) command (EDIT), 6-27
arguments (table), 6-27
DELETE key
for single-line editor, 4-13

setting to log successful I/O transfers

with EDIT, 6-3

DELETE keyboard command, 4-63
/BEFORE option, 4-64
/DATE option, 4-64
/DOS option, 4-64
/ENTRY option, 4-64

loading into memory, 4-155
releasing if not loaded, 4-183
transfers, 4-192

and errors, 4-192
unloading from memory, 4-227
Device names
removing from the system tables, 4-177

/DEVICE option
BACKUP

keyboard command, 4-29

COPY keyboard command, 4-46
DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-75

/EXCLUDE option, 4-65

Device utility program

/INFORMATION option, 4-65
/INTERCHANGE option, 4-65
/LOG option, 4-65

Devices

/NEWFILES option, 4-65
/INOQUERY option, 4-66

See DUP
assigning to a job, 4-155

binary comparison of

See Volumes

/POSITION option, 4-66

block-replaceable, 3—6

/QUERY option, 4-66

copying

/SINCE option, 4-67
/ISYSTEM option, 467
/WAIT option, 4-67

DELETE operating mode (IND), 542
/DELETE option
COPY keyboard command, 4-46
LIBRARY keyboard command, 4-140
PRINT keyboard command, 4-166
TYPE keyboard command, 4-224
/DELETED option
DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-85

Deleting characters on console, 4-205
DENSE

SETUP mode, 7-8

See COPY keyboard command
file-structured, 3—6
installing into the system, 4-138

nonfile-structured, 3—6
random-access, 3—6
RT-11 directory-structured, 3—6
sequential-access, 3—6
structures of (table), 3—7
testing characteristics of, from control

files, 5-65
testing in control files to see if loaded,

5-51
Devices handlers

displaying status of, 4-210
/DIAGNOSE option

Device assignments

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-37

displaying, 4-207

EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-105

Device attributes reply
setting like VT100, 7-6
setting to GENERIC100, 7-5
Device driver
See Device handler
Device handler

definition, 1-5

Device handlers
changing CSR addresses in, 4-191,
4-197, 4-199

FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-119
DIBOL compiler

directing to use single buffering, 4-68
using single buffering, 4-105
DIBOL keyboard command, 4-68
/ALLOCATE option, 4-68

/ALPHABETIZE option, 4-68

/BUFFERING option, 4-68
/CROSSREFERENCE option, 4-69
/LINENUMBERS option, 4-69

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-7

/LIST option, 4-69

/SLP option, 4-76

/LOG option, 4-70

/ISPACES option, 4-76

/NOLINENUMBERS option, 4-69

/START option, 4-77

/NOOBJECT option, 4-71
/INOWARNINGS option, 4-71
/OBJECT option, 4-70
/ONDEBUG option, 4-71

/TERMINAL option, 4-77

/TRIM option, 4-79
using wildcards with, 4-72
Differences listing

/PAGE option, 4-71

creating a, 4-76

/TABLES option, 4-71

displaying on the console, 4-77

/WARNINGS option, 4-71

example, 4-77

DIBOL keyboard monitor command

including form feeds in, 4-75

default file types for, 4-68
DIBOL object file

interpretation of, 4-78

allocating space for, 4-68
/DIBOL option
|
COMPILE keyboard command, 4-37
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-105
DIBOL program
including line numbers in, 4-38
DIBOL programs

printing, 4-76
suppressing terminal display of, 4-76

DIR

description of, 1-7
Direct access labels (IND), 5-24
Directories

clearing, 4-132
DIRECTORY keyboard command, 4-80

compiling, 4-35

/ALLOCATE option, 4-82

See DIBOL keyboard command
compiling with single buffering, 4-36

/ALPHABETIZE option, 4-82

debugging, 4-71, 4-110

/BADBLOCKS option, 4-83

debugging with /ONDEBUG, 4-40

/BEFORE option, 4-83

excluding line numbers from, 4-38
Differences file

/BEGIN option, 4-84
/BLOCKS option, 4-84

excluding source program comments

from, 4-75

/BACKUP option, 4-82

/BRIEF option, 4-84

/COLUMNS

option, 4-84

including changebars in, 4-75

/DATE option, 4-85

including source program comments in,

/DELETED option, 4-85

4-75

DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-72

/DIRECTORY option, 4-90
/DOS option, 4-86

/END option, 4-86

/ALLOCATE option, 4-73

/EXCLUDE option, 4-86

/ALWAYS option, 4-73

/FAST option, 4-86

/AUDITTRAIL option, 4-74

/FILES option, 4-86

/BINARY option, 4-74

/FREE option, 4-86
/FULL option, 4-87

/BLANKLINE option, 4-75
/BYTES option, 4-75

/INTERCHANGE option, 4-87

/CHANGEBAR option, 4-75

/INEWFILES option, 4-87

JCOMMENTS option, 4-75

/INOPROTECTION option, 4-89

default file types for, 4-72
/DEVICE option, 4-75

/OCTAL option, 4-87

/END option, 4-75

/OUTPUT option, 4-89

/FORMFEED option, 4-75

/OWNER option, 4-89
/POSITION option, 4-89

/MATCH option, 4-75
/NOCOMMENTS option, 4-75
/INOSPACES option, 4-76

/NOTRIM option, 4-79
JOUTPUT option, 4-76
/PRINTER option, 4-76

/ORDER option, 4-88

/PRINTER option, 4-89
/PROTECTION option, 4-89

/REVERSE option, 4-90
/SINCE option, 4-90

/ISTART option, 4-90

/QUIET option, 4-76

/SUMMARY option, 4-90

/SIPP option, 4-76

/TERMINAL option, 4-91

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-8

/TOPS option, 4-91
/VNOLUMEID option, 4-91
/WAIT option, 4-91
Directory listing program
See DIR
Directory listings
abbreviated, 4-84, 4-86
displaying on the console, 4-91

for backup volumes created with BUP,
4-82

for magtapes, 4-89
how to read, 4-80

including file starting block numbers,
4-84

including files sizes in octal, 4-87
including volume ID and owner name,
4-91

obtaining on a single-disk system, 4-91
of DECsystem—10 format volumes, 4-91
of deleted files, 4-85
of DOS format volumes, 4-86
of interchange diskettes, 4-87

of protected files, 4-89
of RSTS/E format volumes, 4-86
of unprotected files, 4-89
of unused areas on volumes, 4-86
printing, 4-89

reverse sorting for, 4-90
sorting, 4-88, 4-90
by date, 4-88
by file name, 4-88
by file size, 488
by file type, 4-88
by position on volume, 4-88
sorting alphabetically, 4-82

specifying the number of columns in,

4-84
Directory segments

INITIALIZE keyboard command,
4-134

DOS-11 format files
deleting, 4-64

obtaining a directory of, 4-86
DOS-11 format volume
initializing, 4-134

Double-density diskettes
formatting for single-density, 4-116
DOWN

SETUP mode, 7-8
DRAFT

SETUP mode, 7-8
DSABL directive arguments (MACRO),
4-158

DST
SETUP mode, 7-12
DU handler

changing CSR address in, 4-193
changing vector in, 4-193

defining disk partition size in, 4-193
defining ports in, 4-193

defining valid unit plug numbers in,
4-193

DUMP

description of, 1-7
.DUMP directive (IND), 5-37
DUMP keyboard command, 4-93
/ALLOCATE option, 4-94
/ASCII option, 4-94

/BYTES option, 4-94
/END option, 4-94

/FOREIGN option, 4-94

/IGNORE option, 4-94
/INOASCII option, 4-94
/ONLY option, 4-94

/OUTPUT option, 4-94
/PRINTER option, 4-94

default number of (table), 4-136

/RADS0 option, 4-94

number of
changing, 4-136

/TERMINAL option, 4-94

.DISABLE directive (IND), 5-36
DISABLE OCTAL directive (IND)
effect on .ASKN directive, 5-28
/DISABLE option

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-37
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-106
MACRO keyboard command, 4-158
DISMOUNT keyboard command, 4-92

/DOS option

COPY keyboard command, 4-47
DELETE keyboard command, 4-64
DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-86

/ISTART option, 4-94
/WORDS option, 4-95
Dump utility program

See DUMP
DUP

description of, 1-7
/DUPLICATE option
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-106
LINK keyboard command, 4-148
DW handler
disable writing to, 4-194
not verifying output to, 4-194
verifying output to, 4-193
write-enabling, 4-194
Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-9

E keyboard command, 4-98

utility, 6-31

EDIT, 6-1 to 6-41

‘verify current line, 6-26

buffers, 6-11
calling, 6-1

write text buffer to output file, 6-16,
6-18

character deletion, 6-3
character-oriented commands, 6-7
command arguments (table), 6-5

commands (table), 64

command mode, 61
command repetition, 6-9
command strings, 6-6

deleting of all characters on current

command syntax, 6-5
commands, 6-12, 6-15

current location pointer (cursor), 67

determining the location of, 6-26
line, 6-3

display editor, 6-36
format, 6-36
using with graphics terminals, 6-37

advance by lines, 6-21

error conditions, 640

change characters, 6-29
change lines of text, 6-30
delete characters, 6-27

example, 6-39

delete lines of text, 6-28

function of, 6-1
ignoring current command string with,
6—3

display EDIT version number, 6-34

immediate mode for graphics terminals,

effects on output files (table), 6-15
effects on text buffer (table), 6-15

key commands (table), 62

enable uppercase or lowercase mode,

line-oriented commands, 6—8

6-35

execute command stored in Macro
buffer, 6-34
for closing files, 6-14
for creating a backup file, 6-14
for opening files, 6-12, 6-13
for reading files, 6-12
for writing files, 6-13

immediate mode, 6-39
insert text, 6-26

6—-38

memory usage, 6—11

processing, 6—1

terminating, 6-2

text buffer, 6-11

filling, 6-11
text mode, 6-1

Edit Backup (EB) command (EDIT),
6-14

Edit Console (EC) command (EDIT),
637

insert text saved in external buffer,

Edit Display (ED) command (EDIT),

6-32
list lines of text buffer, 6-24

Edit File (EF) command (EDIT), 6-14

move location pointer a number of

EDIT keyboard command, 4-99

spaces, 6—20

move locaton pointer to text buffer

beginning, 6-20
read files into text buffer, 6-15
save text in external (macro) buffer,
6—-33

save text in external (save) buffer,
6-31

search, 6-22
search entire file for text string, 6-23

search for text string and write buffer
to output file, 6-24

search text buffer for text string,
622

terminate editing session, 6-19

6-37

/ALLOCATE option, 4-100
/CREATE option, 4-101
/EDIT option, 4-101
/EXECUTE option, 4-101

/INSPECT option, 4-101

/K52 option, 4-101
/KED option, 4-101
/OUTPUT option, 4-102
/TECO option, 4-102

Edit Lower (EL) command (EDIT), 6-35
/EDIT option
EDIT keyboard command, 4-101

Edit Read (ER) command (EDIT), 6-12
EDIT text editor

terminating, 62

calling, 4-101

text listing, 6-24
text modification, 6-26

processing, 4-99

using arguments in, 6-5

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-10

setting as default editor, 4-194
Edit Upper (EU) command (EDIT), 6-35

Edit Version (EV) command (EDIT),
634

Edit Write (EW) command (EDIT), 6-13
Editors

See Text editors

.ENABL directive arguments (MACRO),
4-158

.ENABLE DATA directive (IND)
using to create an indirect command
file, 54

.ENABLE directive (IND), 5-39
.ENABLE GLOBAL directive (IND)
defining global symbols with, 5-17

.ENABLE OCTAL directive (IND)
effect on .ASKN directive, 5-28
/ENABLE option

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-37
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-106
MACRO keyboard command, 4-158
.ENABLE SUBSTITUTION directive
(IND), 5-22

.END directive (IND), 5-46
/END option

COPY keyboard command, 4-47
DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-75

DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-86

DUMP keyboard command, 4-94

IND special symbol, 5-20
Errors

during copy operations
overcoming with /IGNORE, 4-48
during copy operations
overcoming with /SLOWLY, 4-54
ESCAPE key
with EDIT, 6-2
ESCAPE operating mode (IND), 5-42
<ESCAPE>

IND special symbol, 5-20
and .ASK directive, 5-27
and .ASKN, 5-30
and .ASKS, 5-33
Exchange (X) command (EDIT), 6-30
arguments (table), 6-31
/EXCLUDE option

COPY keyboard command, 4-48

DELETE keyboard command, 4-65
DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-86

PROTECT keyboard command, 4-172
UNPROTECT keyboard command,
4-230

Executable files
creating at link time, 4-149
suppressing creation of at link time,
4-149

EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-103

/ENTRY option

/ALLOCATE option, 4-104

<EOF>

/BOTTOM option, 4-105

IND special symbol, 5-20
ERASE directive (IND), 5-46

/CODE option, 4-105

DELETE keyboard command, 4-64

Erasing a line
See CTRL/U
Error Logger

description of, 1-8
displaying errors logged by, 4-211

logging only unsuccessful I/O transfers,
4-192

logging successful I/O transfers, 4-192
SJ

clearing internal buffer, 4-195

disabling, 4-194
enabling, 4-194
Error logging program
See Error Logger

Error severity level to abort indirect
command files
changing, 4-195

Error severity level to abort keyboard
commands, 4-195
<ERROR>

/ALPHABETIZE option, 4-105
/BUFFERING option, 4-105

/CROSSREFERENCE option, 4-105
/DEBUG option, 4-105
default file types, 4-103
/DIAGNOSE option, 4-105
/DIBOL option, 4-105

/DISABLE option, 4-106
/DUPLICATE option, 4-106
/ENABLE option, 4-106
/EXECUTE option, 4-106
/EXTEND option, 4-107

/FORTRAN option, 4-107
/GLOBAL option, 4-107
/HEADER option, 4-107
/14 option, 4-107
/LIBRARY option, 4-107
/LINENUMBERS option, 4-108
/LINKLIBRARY option, 4-108
/LIST option, 4-108

/LOG option, 4-109
/MACRO option, 4-109

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-11

/MAP option, 4-109

/NOLINENUMBER option, 4-108
/NORUN option, 4-111
/NOSHOW option, 4-111

/INOSWAP option, 4-111
/NOVECTORS option, 4-112
INOWARNINGS option, 4-112

/OBJECT option, 4-109
/ONDEBUG option, 4-110
/PAGE option, 4-110
/PROMPT option, 4-110
/RECORD option, 4-111

/RUN option, 4-111
/SHOW option, 4-111
/ISTATISTICS option, 4-111

/ISWAP option, 4-111
/TABLES option, 4-111
/UNITS option, 4-112
[VECTORS option, 4-112
/WARNINGS option, 4-112
/WIDE option, 4-112

Execute Macro (EM) command (EDIT),
6-34
/EXECUTE option
EDIT keyboard command, 4-101

EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-106
LINK keyboard command, 4-149

Executing programs, 4-111
Executing sequential commands

See Indirect command files

Exit (EX) command (EDIT), 6-19
EXIT directive (IND), 5-47
Exit status

of control files, 5-20
<EXSTAT>

IND special symbol, 5-20
<EXSTRI>

IND special symbol, 5-22
/EXTEND option

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-37
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-107

FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-119
LINK keyboard command, 4-149
Extended memory monitor

See XM monitor
/EXTENSION option
CREATE keyboard command, 4-58
/EXTRACT option

LIBRARY keyboard command, 4-141

DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-86

FB monitor

advantages of, 14
features of, 1-4
minimum requirements, 14
processing priorities, 1-4

File exchange utility program

See FILEX
File names, 3—4

/FILE option

INITIALIZE keyboard command,
4-134

File specifications

factoring, 44
restrictions, 4—4
syntax of, 4-3

File types, 3—4

default, 4-5
standard, 3—4
File-structured devices

See Devices
<FILERR>

IND special symbol, 5-21
Files

ASCII

See ASCII files
binary
See Binary format
See Binary files, 4-44

changing volumes while deleting, 4-67
comparing, 4-72

binary, 4-74
by bytes, 4-75
excluding spaces and tabs, 4-76
including spaces and tabs, 4-76
concatenating

See /CONCATENATE option, 4-46
copying

See COPY command
creating, 4-58, 4-59

creating over a tentative file, 4-58
creating with a text editor, 4-101

deleted
recovering, 4-85

restoring (example), 4-59

deleting
using DELETE command, 4-63

deleting after copy, 4-46
deleting on output volume before copy,

<FALSE>

IND special symbol, 5-20
/FAST option

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index—-12

4-52

dumping contents of, 4-93

dumping contents of (example), 4-95
extending, 4-58

Form feeds

naming, 3—4

object
See Object Files
object (MACRO)
creating, 4-160
suppressing creation of, 4-161
printing, 4-165

sending to the console, 4-204
sending to the line printer, 4-197,
4-199

FORMAT

renaming, 4-178

description of, 1-7
FORMAT keyboard command, 4-113
devices supported by, 4-113
INOQUERY option, 4-116
/PATTERN option, 4-114
/QUERY option, 4-116
/[SINGLEDENSITY option, 4-116
[VERIFY option, 4-116
devices supported by, 4-113

tentative

Formatting a disk

printing more that one copy of, 4-166
protecting during copy, 4-52
protecting from deletion, 4-171
removing protection from, 4-229
removing protection from on a
single-disk system, 4-232
showing status of, 4-207
making permanent, 4-34

/FILES option

COPY keyboard command, 448
DIRECTORY keyboard command,

reasons for, 4-113

Formatting a volume

on a single-disk system, 4-117
while the foreground job is loaded,
4-114

4-86

Formatting utility program

Filespec

See File specifications
FILEX

See FORMAT
[FORMFEED option

DIFFERENCES keyboard command,

description of, 1-7

4-75

/FILL option

LINK keyboard command, 4-149

IND special symbol, 5-22
Find (F) command (EDIT), 6-23
/FLAGPAGE option
PRINT keyboard command, 4-166
Foreground job
communicating with
Foreground jobs

aborting from system console, 4-24
assigning logical names to, 4-125
assigning terminals to interact with,
4-126

/WAIT option, 4-117

FORTRAN

accessing multidimensional arrays
using multiplication, 4-41
accessing multidimensional arrays
using tables, 4-41
FORTRAN compiler
examining internal errors of, 4-105
FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-118
JALLOCATE option, 4-118
/CODE option, 4-119
/DIAGNOSE option, 4-119
/EXTEND option, 4-119
/HEADER option, 4-119

creating executable files for, 4-149

/14 option, 4-119

debugging, 4-126
FORTRAN
running, 4-124

/LIST option, 4-119

/LINENUMBERS option, 4-119

running, 4-124

/NOLINENUMBERS option, 4-119
/INOOBJECT option, 4-121
/INOSWAP option, 4-123

suspending, 4221

/NOVECTORS, 4-123

and reserving memory for, 4-124

with assigned private console, 4-24

/FOREGROUND option
LINK keyboard command, 4-149
Foreground/background monitor
See FB monitor
/FOREIGN option

BOOT keyboard command, 4-33
DUMP keyboard command, 4-94

INOWARNINGS option, 4-123
/OBJECT option, 4-121
/ONDEBUG option, 4-122

/RECORD option, 4-122
/ISHOW option, 4-122
/ISTATISTICS option, 4-122
/ISWAP option, 4-122
/UNITS option, 4-123

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-13

/VECTORS option, 4-123

/WARNINGS option, 4-123

.GOSUB directive (IND), 5-48
.GOTO directive (IND), 5-48

FORTRAN listing codes (table), 4-122

GRAPHIC

FORTRAN logical units

SETUP mode, 7-8
Graphics display paging

overriding default number with
/UNITS, 4-41

FORTRAN multidimensional arrays
accessing with multiplication, 4-123
accessing with multiplication
operations, 4-112

accessing with tables, 4-112, 4-123

/FORTRAN option

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-37
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-107
FORTRAN programs
changing to two-word default integer
data type, 4-37
compiling, 4-35, 4-118

debugging with /ONDEBUG, 4-40
excluding line numbers from, 4-38

including line numbers in, 4-38
permitting USR to swap over, 441,
4-122

preventing USR from swapping over,
441, 4-111, 4-123

USR swapping over, 4-111
FORTRAN record length
overriding default with /RECORD,
4-40

/FREE option

DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-86

FRUN keyboard command, 4-124

See CTRL/A

Graphics terminal display
with console terminal display

See CTRL/E
Graphics terminals
disabling, 4-128
display screen values (table), 4-129
enabling, 4-128

GT keyboard command, 4-128
/L option, 4-129
/T option, 4-129

GT OFF keyboard command, 4-128
GT ON keyboard command, 4-128
and EDIT, 6-37

Hardware
components (table), 1-2

Hardware characteristics program
See SETUP
Hardware configuration

displaying, 4-208
Hardware, minimum configuration, 1-1
/HEADER option

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-37
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-107
FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-119
HELP

SETUP control, 7-13

/BUFFER option, 4-124

Help key

/NAME option, 4-125

Single-line editor, 4-10
HELP keyboard command, 4-130

/PAUSE option, 4-126

/TERMINAL option, 4-126
/FULL option

DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-87

/PRINTER option, 4-130
/TERMINAL option, 4-130

HORIZONTAL
SETUP mode, 7-9
12HOUR

GENERIC100

SETUP mode, 7-5
Get (G) command (EDIT), 6-22
GET keyboard command, 4-127

GLOBAL operating mode (IND), 5-43
/GLOBAL option
|
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-107
LINK keyboard command, 4-150

Global symbols
in control files, 5—17

including during link, 4-150

GOLD key
use of with Single-Line Editor, 4-10

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-14

SETUP mode, 7-11
24HOUR

SETUP mode, 7-11
I/O channels
open

purging, 4-183
I’O transfers

logging only unsuccessful, 4-192
logging successful, 4-192
/14 option

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-37
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-107

FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-119

IBM 3741-compatible diskettes
copying with /INTERCHANGE, 4-49
IF directive (IND), 549
JFDF directive (IND), 5-50
JFDISABLED directive (IND), 5-50
JFENABLED directive (IND), 5-50

JFF directive (IND), 5-51

labels in, 5-2

maximum number of characters
allowed in, 5-2
sample, 5-3
IND command lines (example), 5-1
IND control files
See Indirect control files
IND directives, 5-23 to 5-67

JFLOA directive (IND), 5-51

functions of, 5-3

JFNDF directive (IND), 5-50

in control files, 5-3

JFNLOA directive (IND), 5-51

separating from arguments, 5-1

JFT directive (IND), 5-51

IND directives (table), 5-11 to 5-13

/IGNORE option

IND operating modes (table), 5-14

COPY keyboard command, 4-48
DUMP keyboard command, 4-94
Image mode copying, 448
/IMAGE option

IND symbols

COPY keyboard command, 4-48
Immediate mode (EDIT), 6-38
commands, 6-39
INC directive (IND), 5-53
/INCLUDE option
LINK keyboard command, 4-150
IND, 5-1 to 5-67
See also Control files
arithmetic operators (table), 5-16
characters with special meaning, 5-15
command string syntax, 5—6
|
logical operators (table), 5-16
logical tests, 549
operating modes
testing to see if enabled, 5-50
options, 5-7, 5-8

deleting definitions of, 5-46
displaying definitions of, 5-38
enabling symbol substitution for, 5-45

logical
See Logical symbols
numeric

See Numeric symbols
special, 5-19

logical, 5-20
numeric, 5-20
string, 5-22

special (table), 5-20
string

See String symbols
substituting values for, 5-22
substituting values for (example), 5-22
testing to see if defined, 5-50
testing type of, 5-64

Indirect command files

options (table), 5-7

accepting keyboard input, 4-17

parameter passing, 58

changing error severity level to abort,

processing of command lines, 5-3

processing single command lines with,
5-7

relational operators (table), 5-16
running, 5—6

from the console (TT:), 5-7
symbol tables
displaying, 5-37
symbols, 5-16

4-195

commenting, 4-19

compared to BATCH processing, 4-16
creating, 4-16

within a control file, 5—4
default file type, 4-16
definition of, 4-16
executing, 4-19

from within a control file, 5-10

global, 5-17

executing a MACRO program in, 4-21

local, 5-17

executing with SET KMON IND in

terminating, 5-6
timeout count, 5-25, 5-27, 5-31, 545
IND command lines

effect, 4-19, 4-196
including CTRL/C in, 4-16
keyboard commands in, 4-16

See also Control files
CCL commands in, 54

nesting, 4-21

comments in, 5-5

running utility programs in, 4-16

IND directives in, 5-3

specifying an overlays structure in,

keyboard commands in, 5-3, 54

placing responses to prompts in, 4-17

4-18

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-15

start-up, 4-22

suppressing execution printout, 4-21
using commands that query in, 4-17

using INITIALIZE command in, 4-18

using LINK commands in, 4-17
Indirect Control File Processor
See IND
Indirect control files
See Control files
definition of, 4-16
echoing lines in, 4-204
executing with SET KMON IND in
effect, 4-196
lengthy

/INSERT option

LIBRARY keyboard command, 4-141
/INSPECT option

EDIT keyboard command, 4-101

INSTALL keyboard command, 4-138
Interchange diskettes
initializing, 4-134

obtaining directory listings of, 4-87
Interchange format files

deleting, 4-65
INTERCHANGE option

COPY keyboard command, 4-49
DELETE keyboard command, 4-65
DIRECTORY keyboard command,

partitioning, 4-17

setting severity of error that terminates

4-87

INITIALIZE keyboard command,

execution, 4-21

suppressing echoing of lines in, 4-204
terminating, 4-21

4-134

INTERLACE
SETUP mode, 7-5

using CTRL/Cs in, 4-17
Indirect files

See Indirect command files
creating an overlay structure in, 4-110
/INFORMATION option
COPY keyboard command, 4-49
DELETE keyboard command, 4-65
PRINT keyboard command, 4-167
PROTECT keyboard command, 4-172

Jobs
currently loaded

displaying status of, 4-212
displaying, 4-208
JUMP

SETUP mode, 7-6
Jump (J) command (EDIT), 6-20
arguments, 6-20

RENAME keyboard command, 4-179
UNPROTECT keyboard command,
4-230

/INFORMATION option

TYPE keyboard command, 4-224

INITIALIZE keyboard command, 4-132
/BACKUP option, 4-132
/BADBLOCKS option, 4-133

/K52 option
EDIT keyboard command, 4-101
K52 text editor

calling, 4-101
setting as default editor, 4-194
/KED option
EDIT keyboard command, 4-101

/DOS option, 4-134

KED text editor

/FILE option, 4-134

calling, 4-101

INTERCHANGE option, 4-134
/INOQUERY option, 4-134

/QUERY option, 4-134
/REPLACE option, 4-134

setting as default editor, 4-194
Keyboard click

enabling and disabling, 7—4
Keyboard command

/RESTORE option, 4-136

ISEGMENTS option, 4-136
/VOLUMEID option, 4-136

SAVE

/WAIT option, 4-137

Initializing a volume, 4-132
for use as a backup (BUP) volume,
4-132

on a single-disk system, 4-137
with protected files, 4-132

Input/output
See 1/O
Insert (I) command (EDIT), 6-26

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-16

See E keyboard command
See SAVE keyboard command
Keyboard command options
mutually exclusive, 4-2
Keyboard commands

SQUEEZE
See SQUEEZE keyboard command
Keyboard commands

abbreviating, 4-5
ABORT

See ABORT, 4-24

See GET keyboard command

ASSIGN
See ASSIGN

GT
See GT keyboard command

HELP

See B keyboard command
BACKUP
See BACKUP keyboard command
BOOT
See BOOT keyboard command
changing error severity level to abort,

See HELP keyboard command
in control files, 5-3, 54

suppressing display of, 5-8
suppressing execution of, 5-8

INITIALIZE

See INITIALIZE keyboard
command
INSTALL

See CLOSE keyboard command
COMPILE

LIBRARY

4-195

See COMPILE keyboard command
COPY
See COPY keyboard command
CREATE
See CREATE keyboard command
D

See INSTALL keyboard command
See LIBRARY keyboard command
LINK

See LINK keyboard command,
4-146

LOAD

See LOAD keyboard command,

See D Keyboard command
DATE

4-155

MACRO

See DATE keyboard command

See MACRO keyboard command,

DEASSIGN

4-157

See DEASSIGN keyboard command
DELETE
See DELETE keyboard command

monitor restrictions, 4-22

DIBOL

See DIBOL keyboard command
DIFFERENCES

prompts, 4-5

See DIFFERENCES keyboard
command
DIRECTORY

See DIRECTORY keyboard
command
DISMOUNT
See DISMOUNT keyboard
command
DUMP
See DUMP keyboard command
EDIT

See EDIT keyboard command
error messages for, 4-23
EXECUTE

See EXECUTE keyboard command

MOUNT

See MOUNT keyboard command
See PRINT keyboard command

PROTECT
See PROTECT keyboard command
R

See R keyboard command
radix of arguments, 422

REENTER

See REENTER keyboard command
REMOVE

See REMOVE keyboard command
RENAME

See RENAME keyboard command
RESET
See RESET keyboard command
RESUME
See RESUME keyboard command,

FORMAT

See FORMAT keyboard command
FORTRAN

See FORTRAN keyboard command
FRUN
See FRUN keyboard command,
4-124

function of, 4-1
GET

4-184

RUN
See RUN keyboard command
SET

See SET keyboard command

SHOW

See SHOW keyboard command
SRUN
See SRUN keyboard command

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-17

START

LIBR

See START keyboard command
suppressing control file display of, 5-44
SUSPEND

Librarian

See SUSPEND keyboard command
syntax, 4-1

syntax illustration (sample), 4-3
syntax illustration conventions, 4-2
that should not be used in control files,
5-5

TIME

See TIME keyboard command
TYPE
See TYPE keyboard command
UNLOAD
See UNLOAD keyboard command
UNPROTECT
See UNPROTECT keyboard
command
unrecognized, 4-23
Keyboard monitor
See KMON
Keyboard monitor commands
See Keyboard commands
Kill (K) command (EDIT), 6-28
arguments, 628
KMON

definition of, 1-3
KMON stack pointer
resetting, 4-183

description of, 1-7
function of, 2—-2

Librarian utility
See LIBR
Library files

accessing object modules in, 4-140
copying, 4-44

default system
See SYSLIB.OBJ
including during link, 4-151
macro

changing, 4-142
creating, 4-142

definition of, 4-139

object
creating, 4-140, 4-142

definition of, 4-139
deleting global symbols from the
directory of, 4-143

deleting modules from, 4-140
extract modules from, 4-141

inserting modules into, 4-141
obtaining directory listings of, 4-142
replacing modules in, 4-144
suppressing creation of, 4-143

updating, 4-144
with duplicate module names, 4-141
specifying during MACRO assembly,
4-158

/L option

GT keyboard command, 4-129
Labels
in control files, 5-2

structure of, 4-139
system macro

See SYSMAC.SML
LIBRARY keyboard command, 4-139

defining, 5-23

/CREATE option, 4-140

direct access, 524
processing of, 524

/EXTRACT option, 4-141

Jabel: directive (IND), 5-23
LANG:code

SETUP mode, 7-9
Languages
supported by RT-11, 1-9
LD
description of, 1-7
.LDA files

/DELETE option, 4-140

/INSERT option, 4-141
/LIBRARY option, 4-140, 4-142
/MACRO option, 4-142

/INOOBJECT option, 4-143

/OBJECT option, 4-142
/PROMPT option, 4-143
prompting sequence (table), 4-144

/REMOVE option, 4-143

See Load image file

/REPLACE option, 4-144

creating, 4-150

specifying more than one line for,

/LDA option
LINK keyboard command, 4-150
LETTER

SETUP mode, 7-9
/LEVEL option
SRUN keyboard command, 4-218

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-18

4-143

/UPDATE option, 4-144
Library modules

duplicating, 4-106

duplicating in overlay segments, 4-148
/LIBRARY option

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-37
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-107
LINK keyboard command, 4-151
MACRO keyboard command, 4-158
LIGHT
SETUP mode, 7-5

default file types, 4-146
/DUPLICATE option, 4-148
entering on more than one line, 4-152
/EXECUTE option, 4-149

/EXTEND option, 4-149
/FILL option, 4-149

/LIMIT option

/FOREGROUND option, 4-149

LINK keyboard command, 4-151
Line printer characteristics
See SETUP
Line printer handler
changing CSR addresses in, 4-197,

/GLOBAL option, 4-150

4-199

changing vectors in, 4-198, 4-200
Line printers

allowing corrective action while hung,
4-197, 4-199

generating an error when hung, 4-198,
4-199

passing nonprinting control characters
to, 4-197, 4-199

sending carriage returns to, 4-196,
4-198

sending lowercase characters to, 4-198,
4-200

sending only uppercase characters to,
4-198, 4-200

sending spaces instead of TAB
character to, 4-198, 4-200
sending TAB characters to, 4-198,
4-200

setting baud rate for, 4-200
setting bottom of page for, 4-198,
4-200

setting length of page for, 4-198, 4-200
setting width of output to, 4-198, 4-200
suppressing passing nonprinting control
characters to, 4-197, 4-199

suppressing sending carriage returns to,
4-197, 4-199
/LINENUMBERS option

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-38
DIBOL keyboard command, 4-69
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-108
FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-119
LINK

description of, 1-7
LINK keyboard command, 4-146
/ALLOCATE option, 4-147
/ALPHABETIZE option, 4-147
/BITMAP option, 4-147
/BOTTOM option, 4-148

/BOUNDARY option, 4-148
/DEBUG option, 4-148

/INCLUDE option, 4-150

/LDA option, 4-150
/LIBRARY option, 4-151
/LIMIT option, 4-151

/LINKLIBRARY option, 4-151
/MAP option, 4-151
/INOBITMAP option, 4-148
INOEXECUTE option, 4-149

/PROMPT option, 4-152
prompting sequence, 4-147

/ROUND option, 4-152

/RUN option, 4-152

/ISLOWLY option, 4-153
/ISTACK option, 4-153

/ISYMBOLTABLE option, 4-153
/TOP option, 4-153
/TRANSFER option, 4-153

/WIDE option, 4-154
/XM option, 4-154

Link maps

See Load maps
Linker

function of, 2-2
Linker utility

See LINK
Linking a program
specifying the lowest address to use,
4-105

/LINKLIBRARY option

EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-108
-LINK keyboard command, 4-151
List (L) command (EDIT), 6-24
arguments, 6-25

LIST directive (MACRO)
arguments (table), 4-161

specifying with MACRO command,
4-161

/LIST option

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-38
DIBOL keyboard command, 4-69
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-108
FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-119
LIBRARY keyboard command, 4-142
MACRO keyboard command, 4-159

LISTING
SETUP mode, 7-9

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-19

Load image file, 3-2
LOAD keyboard command, 4-155

Load map
global symbols
listing in alphabetical order, 4-147

Load maps
creating, 4-109, 4-151

include global symbol cross-reference
section in, 4-107
including global symbol cross-reference
section in, 4-150

verifying and correcting assignments,
4-163, 4-196

write-enabling, 4-164, 4-196
write-protecting, 4-164, 4-196

Logical symbols (IND)

defining, 5-59, 5-62
defining with .ASK directive, 5-25
in control files, 5-17
testing to see if true or false, 5-51

LOWERCASE operating mode (IND),
5-43

wide
creating, 4-154

Load module
initializing unused locations in, 4-149

specifying lowest address to use in
relocatable code in, 4-148
Load modules
relocatable code in
specifying highest address for, 4-153
Local symbols
in control files, 5-17

Macro (M) command (EDIT), 6-33
arguments (table), 6-33

MACRO assembler

calling, 4-109, 4-157
MACRO keyboard command, 4-157

/ALLOCATE option, 4-157

/CROSSREFERENCE option, 4-157

/DISABLE option, 4-158
/ENABLE option, 4-158
/LIBRARY option, 4-158

LOCK key

/LIST option, 4-159

setting function of, 74
/LOG option

/INOSHOW option, 4-162

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-39
COPY keyboard command, 4-49
DELETE keyboard command, 4-65
DIBOL keyboard command, 4-70
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-109
PRINT keyboard command, 4-168

/INOOBJECT option, 4-161

/OBJECT option, 4-160
/ISHOW option, 4-161
Macro libraries

definition of, 4-139
Macro library files

changing, 4-142

PROTECT keyboard command, 4-173

creating, 4-142

RENAME keyboard command, 4-179

identifying in a command line, 4-37,

TYPE keyboard command, 4-225
UNPROTECT keyboard command,
4-231

Logical device names
and device-independent programming,
4-25

assigning, 4-25

to logical disks, 4-163

canceling, 4-62
displaying assignments of, 4-208
listing, 4-26

syntax of, 4-25
Logical disk subsetting handler
See LD
Logical disks

assigning logical device names to,
4-163

4-107

/MACRO option

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-39
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-109
LIBRARY keyboard command, 4-142
MACRO programs
assembling, 4-35, 4-39, 4-157
Magtape

copying with /FILES, 4-48
copying with /POSITION, 4-51

Magtapes

bootable
how to create, 4-134
obtaining directory listings of, 4-89
returning to 9-track default settings for,

4-200, 4-201

setting 9-track density, 4-200

assigning to files, 4-163

setting density for, 4-201

displaying assignments of, 4-208, 4-214

setting parity to even for, 4-201

freeing from current file assignment,
4-92

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-20

setting parity to odd for, 4-201

/MAP option

EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-109
LINK keyboard command, 4-151
<MAPPED>

IND special symbol, 5-20

4-231

NEWLINE

SETUP mode, 7-6

MARGINBELL

Next (N) command (EDIT), 6-18

SETUP mode, 7-5
/MATCH option

NLIST directive (MACRO)

DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-75

MCR operating mode (IND), 5-44
MEMO

SETUP mode, 7-10
Memory

‘depositing values in with D keyboard
command, 4-60
examining with E command, 4-98
Memory available on system

displaying, 4-208
Memory image files, 3—2
See .SAV files
Memory layout
displaying, 4-208, 4-212
Memory locations
writing contents to a file, 4-187

arguments (table), 4-161

specifying with MACRO command,
4-162

/NOASCII option
DUMP keyboard command, 4-94
NOBCD

SETUP mode, 7-11
/NOBITMAP option

LINK keyboard command, 4-148
NOBOLD
SETUP mode, 7-7

NOCLICK
SETUP mode, 7-4
/INOCOMMENTS option

DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-75

NOCURSOR
SETUP mode, 7-5

Memory usage bitmap
creating, 4-147

NODST

suppressing creation of, 4-148
Minimum hardware configuration, 1-1

/INOEXECUTE option

Monitor

INOFLAGPAGE option

definition, 1-3
<MONNAM>

IND special symbol, 5-22
MOUNT keyboard command, 4-163
INOWRITE option, 4-164
/WRITE option, 4-164
/MULTIVOLUME option

COPY keyboard command, 4-50

SETUP mode, 7-12
LINK keyboard command, 4-149
PRINT keyboard command, 4-167
/NOLINENUMBERS option

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-38
DIBOL keyboard command, 4-69

EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-108
FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-119
/NOLOG option
COPY keyboard command, 4-50
PRINT keyboard command, 4-168
PROTECT keyboard command, 4-173
RENAME keyboard command, 4-180

/N
IND option, 5-8

INAME option

FRUN keyboard command, 4-125
PRINT keyboard command, 4-168
SRUN keyboard command, 4-218
/INEWFILES option

COPY keyboard command, 4-50
DELETE keyboard command, 4-65
DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-87

WWWWM%

UNPROTECT keyboard command,

PRINT keyboard command, 4-168
PROTECT keyboard command, 4-173
RENAME keyboard command, 4-180
TYPE keyboard command, 4-225

TYPE keyboard command, 4-225

UNPROTECT keyboard command,
4-231

NOMARGINBELL
SETUP mode, 7-5
NONEWLINE

SETUP mode, 7-6
Nonfile-structured devices
See Devices
/NOOBJECT option

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-40
DIBOL keyboard command, 4-71
FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-121
LIBRARY keyboard command, 4-143
Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-21

MACRO keyboard command, 4-161

/INOPROTECTION option

Numeric symbols (IND)
decrementing, 5-35

COPY keyboard command, 4-52
DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-89

defining, 5-59, 5-60
in control files, 5-17
incrementing, 5-53

RENAME keyboard command, 4-180
/INOQUERY option

radix of, 5-17, 5-28
testing, 5—64

COPY keyboard command, 4-53
DELETE keyboard command, 4-66
FORMAT keyboard command, 4-116
INITIALIZE keyboard command,

Object files, 3—2
creating, 4-109, 4-121

creating during DIBOL compilation,

4-134

4-70

SQUEEZE keyboard command, 4-217
NOREPEAT
SETUP mode, 7-6
/INOREPLACE option
COPY keyboard command, 4-53
RENAME keyboard command, 4-181
/NORUN option
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-111
/NOSHOW option
COMPILE keyboard command, 4-40
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-111
MACRO keyboard command, 4-162
/INOSPACES option

DIFFERENCES keyboard command,

creating with COMPILE keyboard

command, 4-39
MACRO
creating, 4-160
suppressing creation of, 4-161
suppressing creation of, 4-40, 4-121
suppressing creation of during DIBOL

compilation, 4-71

Object libraries
definition of, 4-139
Object library files
creating, 4-140, 4-142

deleting global symbols from the

directory of, 4-143

4-76

deleting object modules from, 4-140

/INOSWAP option

extracting object modules from, 4-141

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-41
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-111
FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-123

NOTABS

SETUP mode, 7-10
/NOTRIM option
DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-79

SETUP mode, 7-10
COMPILE keyboard command, 4-41
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-112

FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-123
/NOWARNINGS option

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-41
DIBOL keyboard command, 4-71

EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-112
FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-123
NOWRAP
SETUP mode, 7-11
|

MOUNT keyboard command, 4-164
Numeric expressions

evaluation of, in control files, 5—-18

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-22

suppressing creation of, 4-143

updating, 4-144
with duplicate module names, 4-141

Object module patch program
/OBJECT option

/NOVECTORS option

forming, in control files, 5-18

replacing modules in, 4-144

See PAT

NOUNDERLINE

INOWRITE option

inserting object modules into, 4-141

obtaining directory listings of, 4-142

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-39
DIBOL keyboard command, 4-70
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-109

FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-121
LIBRARY keyboard command, 4-142
MACRO keyboard command, 4-160
OCTAL operating mode (IND), 5-44
/OCTAL option

DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-87
<OCTAL>

IND special symbol, 5-20

OoDT
description of, 1-9
linking with your program, 4-148
On-line debugging technique
See ODT

/ONDEBUG option

COMPILE keyboard command, 440
DIBOL keyboard command, 4-71
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-110
FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-122
.ONERR directive (IND), 5-54
/ONLY option
DUMP keyboard command, 4-94
.OPEN directive (IND), 5-55
.OPENA directive (IND), 5-55
.OPENR directive (IND), 5-55

Operating modes (IND), 5-40
default settings, 540
disabling, 5-36

/PATTERN option

FORMAT keyboard command, 4-114
/PAUSE option

FRUN keyboard command, 4-126

SRUN keyboard command, 4-218
Peripheral devices

specifying

See Physical device names
Peripheral interchange program
See PIP
Permanent devices names

See Physical device names
PF1 key
use of with single-line editor, 4-10

enabling, 5-39

Physical device names

global, 5-40

local, 5—40

for peripheral devices, 3—3
Physical device names (table), 3—3

testing to see if enabled, 5-50

PIP

/ORDER option

DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-88

/OUTPUT option

SQUEEZE keyboard command, 4-216
/OUTPUT option
DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-76

DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-89

DUMP keyboard command, 4-94
EDIT keyboard command, 4-102

Owner name
writing, 4-136

/OWNER option

COPY keyboard command, 4-51
DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-89

description of, 1-7
Position (P) command (EDIT), 6-24

/POSITION option
COPY keyboard command, 4-51
DELETE keyboard command, 4-66
DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-89

/PREDELETE option

COPY keyboard command, 4-52
PREFIX operating mode (IND), 5-44
PRINT keyboard command, 4-165
/BEFORE option, 4-166

/COPIES option, 4-166
/DATE option, 4-166
/DELETE option, 4-166
/FLAGPAGE option, 4-166

overriding SET SP FLAG =n, 4-167
restriction with QUEMAN/P option,
4-167

P-sects

See Program sections
P1 through P9

IND local string symbols, 5-8

ANFORMATION option, 4-167

/LOG option, 4-168
/INAME option, 4-168
INEWFILES option, 4-168

/PACKED option

INOFLAGPAGE option, 4-167

COPY keyboard command, 4-51
/PAGE option

/INOLOG option, 4-168

/PROMPT option, 4-168

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-40

/QUERY option, 4-169

DIBOL keyboard command, 4-71

/SINCE option, 4-169

EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-110

specifying on more than one command

PAGELENGTH:n
SETUP mode, 7-10
PARSE directive (IND), 5-56
PAT

description of, 1-9
Patch programs

See PAT, SIPP, and SLP

line, 4-168
/WAIT option, 4-169

when running QUEUE, 4-165
when running SPOOL, 4-165
Printer modes

See SETUP
/PRINTER option

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-23

DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-76

on a single-disk system, 4-174
/PROTECTION option

DIRECTORY keyboard command,

COPY keyboard command, 4-52
DIRECTORY keyboard command,

4-89

DUMP keyboard command, 4-94

4-89

HELP keyboard command, 4-130
Printing files

and specifying a job name, 4-168
and then deleting, 4-166
excluding banner pages when, 4-167

RENAME keyboard command, 4-180
Protection status

of a file
determining, 4-229
PURGE directive (IND), 5-58

on the line printer, 4-165

with a single-disk system, 4-169
with banner pages, 4-166
Priority level

assigning for a system job, 4-218
Program sections

IND option, 5-8

/QUERY option
COPY keyboard command, 4-53

DELETE keyboard command, 4-66

changing the size of during link, 4-152

FORMAT keyboard command, 4-116

extending at link time, 4-149

INITIALIZE keyboard command,

specifying a starting address boundary
for, 4-148

PRINT keyboard command, 4-169

Programs

debugging, 4-105

4-134

PROTECT keyboard command, 4-173

RENAME keyboard command, 4-180

developing, 2—-1

SQUEEZE keyboard command, 4-217

developing (figure), 2-3

TYPE keyboard command, 4-225

executing, 4-111

UNPROTECT keyboard command,

running, 4-220

suppressing execution of, 4-111
/PROMPT option

EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-110
LIBRARY keyboard command, 4-143
LINK keyboard command, 4-152
PRINT keyboard command, 4-168
PROTECT keyboard command, 4-171
/BEFORE option, 4-172

4-231

Queue
deleting a job from, 4-64
listing the contents of the, 4-213
Queue package
description of, 1-8
QUIET operating mode (IND), 5-44

/QUIET option
DIFFERENCES keyboard command,

/DATE option, 4-172

4-76

/EXCLUDE option, 4-172
/INFORMATION option, 4-172

R keyboard command, 4-175

/LOG option, 4-173
/NEWFILES option, 4-173

/RADS50 option
DUMP keyboard command, 4-94

/NOLOG option, 4-173

<RAD50>

/QUERY option, 4-173
/SETDATE option, 4-173

/SINCE option, 4-174
/ISYSTEM option, 4-174
/WAIT option, 4-174

Protected files
deleting, 4-63
obtaining directory listings of, 4-89
Protected status
assigning to files, 4-52
removing from files, 4-52

IND special symbol, 5-20

Radix
setting octal default, in control files,
5-44
Random-access devices

See Devices
RD50/RD51 drives
disable writing to, 4-194
enable writing to, 4-194
verifying output to, 4-193

Read (R) command (EDIT), 6-15

Protecting files

READ directive (IND), 5-58

while renaming, 4-180
Protecting files from deletion, 4-171

/RECORD option
COMPILE keyboard command, 4-40

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-24

EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-111
FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-122
REENTER keyboard command, 4-176

COPY keyboard command, 4-53
Retry attempts
changing number to be performed,

with EDIT, 6-3

.REL file
See Relocatable image file
Relocatable image file, 3—2
Relocation base
setting

See B keyboard command
REMOVE keyboard command, 4-177
/REMOVE option

LIBRARY keyboard command, 4-143
RENAME keyboard command, 4-178
/BEFORE option, 4-179
/DATE option, 4-179

/INFORMATION option, 4-179

/LOG option, 4-179
INEWFILES option, 4-180
/NOLOG option, 4-180
/NOPROTECTION option, 4-180
/NOREPLACE option, 4-181
/PROTECTION option, 4-180
/QUERY option, 4-180
/REPLACE option, 4-181

/[SETDATE option, 4-181
/SINCE option, 4-181
/ISYSTEM option, 4-181
/WAIT option, 4-182
Renaming files

on a single-disk system, 4-182

4-191

RETURN directive (IND), 5-59
/REVERSE option
DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-90

Ring buffers
resetting, 4-183

RMON
definition of, 1-3
/ROUND option
LINK keyboard command, 4-152

RSTS/E format files
deleting, 4-64
obtaining a directory of, 4-86
RT-11 directory structured devices
See Devices

RUN keyboard command, 4-185
/RUN option
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-111
LINK keyboard command, 4-152
RXO01 drives
write-enabling, 4-194
write-protecting, 4-194

RXO02 diskettes
See Double-density diskettes

RXO02 drives
write-enabling, 4-194
write-protecting, 4-194

REPEAT

SETUP mode, 7-6

/REPLACE option
COPY keyboard command, 4-53
INITIALIZE keyboard command,
g“fifiw ) %

4-134

LIBRARY keyboard command, 4-144
RENAME keyboard command, 4-181
RESET

SAV files

See also Memory image file
executing, 4-175, 4-185

loading into memory, 4-127
running, 4-152

SAVE

SETUP control, 7-13
Save (S) command (EDIT), 6-31

SETUP control, 7-13
RESET keyboard command, 4-183

Save image patch program

Resident Monitor

SAVE keyboard command, 4-187

See RMON
RESORC
description of, 1-7
Resource program
See RESORC
/RESTORE option
BACKUP keyboard command, 4-29
INITIALIZE keyboard command,

Screen cursor

4-136

RESUME keyboard command, 4-184
/RETAIN option

See SIPP

setting type of, 7-3

turning on and off, 7-5

Screen scrolling
JUMP or SMOOTH, 7-6
Search commands (EDIT), 6-22
/ISEGMENTS option
INITIALIZE keyboard command,
4-136

Sequential access devices
See Devices

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-25

SET CR CODE =n command, 4-190
SET CR CRLF command, 4-190
SET CR HANG command, 4-190
SET CR IMAGE command, 4-190
SET CR NOCRLF command, 4-190
SET CR NOHANG command, 4-190
SET CR NOIMAGE command, 4-190
SET CR NOTRIM command, 4-190
SET CR TRIM command, 4-190
SET dd CSR2=n command, 4-191
SET dd CSR =n command, 4-191
SET dd NOSUCCES command, 4-192
SET dd RETRY =n command, 4-191
SET dd SUCCES command, 4-192
SET dd VEC2 =n command, 4-193
SET dd VECTOR =n command, 4-192

SET LP CSR =n command, 4-197

SET DU CSR4 =n command, 4-193
SET DU VEC3 =n command, 4-193
SET DU VEC4 =n command, 4-193
SET DUn PART =x command, 4-193
SET DUn PORT =x command, 4-193
SET DUn UNIT =x command, 4-193
SET DW NOWCHECK command, 4-194
SET DW NOWRITE command, 4-194
SET DW WCHECK command, 4-193
SET DW WRITE command, 4-194
SET DXn NOWRITE command, 4-194
SET DXn WRITE command, 4-194
SET DYn NOWRITE command, 4-194
SET DYn WRITE command, 4-194
SET EDIT EDIT command, 4-194
SET EDIT K52 command, 4-194
SET EDIT KED command, 4-194
SET EDIT keyboard command, 4-99
SET EDIT TECO command, 4-194
SET EL LOG command, 4-194

SET LP WIDTH =n command, 4-198
SET LS CR command, 4-198
SET LS CSR =n command, 4-199

SET EL NOLOG command, 4-194

SET LS WIDTH =n command, 4-200

SET EL PURGE, 4-195

SET MM DEFALT =9 command, 4-200

SET ERROR ERROR command, 4-195
SET ERROR FATAL command, 4-195
SET ERROR NONE commana, 4-195
SET ERROR SEVERE command, 4-195
SET ERROR WARNING command,

SET MM DENSE command, 4-200
SET MM NOODDPAR command, 4-201

SET DU CSR3 =n command, 4-193

4-195

SET EXIT NOSWAP command, 4-196
SET EXIT SWAP command, 4-196
SET keyboard command, 4-189
SET KMON IND command, 4-196

SET KMON NOIND command, 4-196
SET LD CLEAN command, 4-196
SET LDn NOWRITE command, 4-196
SET LDn WRITE command, 4-196
SET LP CR command, 4-196

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-26

SET LP CTRL command, 4-197
SET LP FORM command, 4-197

SET LP FORMO command, 4-197
SET LP HANG command, 4-197
SET LP LC command, 4-198
SET LP LENGTH =n command, 4-198
SET LP NOCR, 4-197
SET LP NOCTRL command, 4-197

SET LP NOFORM command, 4-197
SET LP NOFORMO command, 4-197
SET LP NOHANG command, 4-198

SET LP NOLC command, 4-198
SET LP NOTAB command, 4-198

SET LP SKIP =n command, 4-198

SET LP TAB command, 4-198
SET LP VECTOR
=n command, 4-198

SET LS CTRL command, 4-199

SET LLS FORM command, 4-199
SET LLS FORMO command, 4-199
SET LS HANG command, 4-199
SET LS LC command, 4-200

SET LS LENGTH =n command, 4-200
SET LS NOCR, 4-199

SET LLS NOCTRL command, 4-199
SET LS NOFORM command, 4-199
SET LS NOFORMO command, 4-199
SET LS NOHANG command, 4-199
SET LS NOLC command, 4-200

SET LS NOTAB command, 4-200
SET LS SKIP =n command, 4-200
SET LS SPEED =n command, 4-200
SET LS TAB command, 4-200

SET LS VECTOR
=n command, 4-200

SET MM ODDPAR command, 4-201
SET MT DEFALT =9, 4-201
SET MT DENSE command, 4-201

SET MT NOODDPAR command, 4-201

SET MT ODDPAR command, 4-201
SET options in effect
displaying, 4-208
SET SL ASK command, 4-201
SET SL LEARN command, 4-201
SET SL NOLEARN command, 4-201
SET SL NOTTYIN command, 4-202
SET SL OFF command, 4-202
SET SL ON command, 4-201

SET SL SYSGEN command, 4-202

SETO directive (IND), 5-59

SET SL TTYIN command, 4-202
SET SL VTxx command, 4-202

SETS directive (IND), 5-61
SETT directive (IND), 5-62

SET SL WIDTH =n command, 4-202

Setting hardware characteristics

SET SP FLAG=n
overridden by PRINT/FLAGPAGE,

See SETUP
SETTOP programmed request

4-167

by, 4-151

SET SP FORMO command, 4-203
SET SP KILL command, 4-203

SETUP, 7-1 to 7-15

SET SP NEXT command, 4-203
SET SP NOFORMO, 4-203

BCD, 7-11

SET SP NOWAIT command, 4-203
SET SP NOWIDE command, 4-203
SET SP WAIT command, 4-203
SET SP WIDE command, 4-203
SET TERM
See SET TT
SET TT CONSOL
=n command, 4-203
SET TT CRLF command, 4-203
SET TT FB command, 4-203
SET TT FORM command, 4-204
SET TT HOLD command, 4-204
SET TT NOCRLF command, 4-203

DATE[:dd:mm:yy], 7-12

SET TT NOFB command, 4-204
SET TT NOFORM command, 4-204
SET TT NOHOLD command, 4-204
SET TT NOPAGE command, 4-204
SET TT NOQUIET command, 4-204
SET TT NOSCOPE command, 4-205
SET TT NOTAB command, 4-205
SET TT PAGE command, 4-204
SET TT QUIET, 4-21

limiting amount of memory allocated

SET SP FLAG =n command, 4-203

clock modes, 7-11 to 7-12
CLOCK SHOW, 7-12

DST, 7-12
12HOUR, 7-11
24HOUR, 7-11
NOBCD, 7-11
NODST, 7-12
TIME[:hh:mm:ss], 7-12
controls, 7-13
DEFAULT, 7-13

HELP, 7-13

RESET, 7-13
SAVE, 7-13

SHOW, 7-13
description of, 1-8
device restrictions, 7—1
indicated defaults, 7-2
introduction to, 7—1
restrictions for, 7-3

summary of modes and controls, 7-14
terminal and printer modes, 7-7 to
7-11

SET TT QUIET command, 4-204
SET TT SCOPE command, 4-205
SET TT TAB command, 4-205
SET TT WIDTH =n command, 4-205

BOLD, 7-7
CLEAR, 7-7
DENSE, 7-8
DOWN, 7-8

SET USR NOSWAP command, 4-205
SET USR SWAP command, 4-205

DRAFT, 7-8
GRAPHIC, 7-8

SET VM BASE =nnnnnn command,
4-205

HORIZONTAL, 7-9

LANG:code, 7-9

SET WILD EXPLICIT command, 4-206
SET WILD IMPLICIT, 4-206
SET XC SPEED =n command, 4-206
SETD directive (IND), 5-59
/ISETDATE option
COPY keyboard command, 4-54
PROTECT keyboard command, 4-173
RENAME keyboard command, 4-181
UNPROTECT keyboard command,
4-231
SETF directive (IND), 5-62
SETL directive (IND), 5-59

LETTER, 7-9
LISTING, 7-9
MEMO, 7-10
NOBOLD, 7-7

.SETN directive (IND), 5-60

VERTICAL, 7-11

NOTABS, 7-10

NOUNDERLINE, 7-10

NOWRAP, 7-11
PAGELENGTH:n, 7-10

TABS:n, 7-10
TEXT, 7-8
UNDERLINE, 7-10
UP, 7-10

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-27

WRAP, 7-11

terminal modes, 7-3 to 7-7

ANSWERBACK:/message/, 7-3
BLOCK, 7-3
CAPS, 7-4
CLICK, 74
COLOR on COLOR, 74
132COLUMNS, 7-7
80COLUMNS, 7-7
CURSOR, 7-5
DARK, 7-5

GENERIC100, 7-5
INTERLACE, 7-5
JUMP, 7-6
LIGHT, 7-5
MARGINBELL, 7-5

SHOW ERRORS FROM:date keyboard
command, 4-211

SHOW ERRORS keyboard command,
4-211

SHOW ERRORS/FILE:filespec keyboard
command, 4-211
SHOW ERRORS/OUTPUT:filespec
keyboard command, 4-212
SHOW ERRORS/PRINTER keyboard
command, 4-212

SHOW ERRORS/SUMMARY keyboard
command, 4-212

SHOW ERRORS/TERMINAL keyboard
command, 4-212

SHOW ERRORS/TO:date keyboard
command, 4-211

NEWLINE, 7-6

SHOW JOBS keyboard command, 4-212

NOCLICK, 7-4

example, 4-212
SHOW keyboard command, 4-207
SHOW MEMORY keyboard command,

NOCURSOR, 7-5
NOMARGINBELL, 7-5

NONEWLINE, 7-6
NOREPEAT, 7-6
REPEAT, 7-6
SHIFT, 7-4
SMOOTH, 7-6
UNDERSCORE, 7-3
VT100, 7-6
VT52, 7-7
terminals
valid terminals for, 7-2
valid abbreviations for, 7-3
SETUP commands
description of, 7—1

valid destinations for, 7-1

SETUP control commands
example of syntax, 7-2

SETUP mode commands
command syntax, 7-1
example of syntax, 7-2
<SEVERE>

IND special symbol, 5-21
SHIFT
SETUP mode, 74
SHOW
SETUP control, 7-13
SHOW ALL keyboard command, 4-208
SHOW CONFIGURATION keyboard
command, 4-208
example, 4-210

SHOW DEVICES|:dd] keyboard
command, 4-210
SHOW ERRORS ALL keyboard
command, 4-211

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-28

4-212

example, 4-213

/ISHOW option
COMPILE keyboard command, 440
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-111

FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-122
MACRO keyboard command, 4-161

SHOW QUEUE keyboard command,
4-213

example, 4-213
restriction for, 4-213

SHOW SUBSET keyboard command
example, 4-214

SHOW SUBSET keyboard command,
4-214

SHOW TERMINALS keyboard
command, 4-214

example, 4-215
restriction with UCL, 4-16

/SINCE option
COPY keyboard command, 4-54
DELETE keyboard command, 4-67
DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-90

PRINT keyboard command, 4-169

PROTECT keyboard command, 4-174
RENAME keyboard command, 4-181
TYPE keyboard command, 4-225

UNPROTECT keyboard command,
4-232

Single-job monitor
See SJ monitor
Single-line editor

deleting characters with, 4-13, 4-14
deleting lines with, 4-13
executing a command line edited with,
4-14, 4-15

function keys (table), 4-11
function of, 4-9
GOLD key, 4-10

See SRCCOM
Source files
comparing (example), 4-77

comparing to create SLP input file,
4-76

Source language patch program
See SLP

help key, 4-10
learning to use, 4-201

<SPACE>

loading and enabling, 4-201
matching system generation
characteristics for, 4-202
moving cursor with, 4-11

ISPACES option

PF1 key, 4-10

redisplay line before last, 4-15
redisplaying current line with, 4-15
reproducing last command line with,
4-12

restoring deleted characters with, 4-13
restoring deleted command line, 4-13
switching characters with, 4-14
turning off, 4-10
turning on, 4-10
unloading and disabling, 4-202
/ISINGLEDENSITY option

FORMAT keyboard command, 4-116
SIPP
description of, 1-9

/SIPP option

DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-76

SJ monitor
advantages of, 1-3
features of, 1-3

SL
See Single-line editor
SLMIN.SYS
smaller SL handler, 4-10
/ISLOWLY option

COPY keyboard command, 4-54
LINK keyboard command, 4-153

SLP
description of, 1-9
/SLP option

DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-76

SMOOTH
SETUP mode, 7-6
SOFT RESET
performing a, 7-7
/SORT option
DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-90

Source file comparison program

IND special symbol, 5-21
DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-76

Special function keys, 3—6
SPOOL
132-column flag pages, 4-203
80-column flag pages, 4-203
description of, 1-8

form feed at block 0, 4-203
no form feed at block 0, 4-203
removing spooled files, 4-203

resume sending output, 4-203
setting number flag pages, 4-203

stop and delete/send next file, 4-203
stop this/no delete file, 4-203
SQUEEZE keyboard command, 4-216
/OUTPUT option, 4-216
SQUEEZE keyboard command
INOQUERY option, 4-217
/QUERY option, 4-217
/WAIT option, 4-217

Squeeze operation
on a single-disk system, 4-217
SRCCOM
description of, 1-8
SRUN keyboard command, 4-218
/BUFFER option, 4-218
default file type, 4-218
/LEVEL option, 4-218

/INAME option, 4-218
/PAUSE option, 4-218
[TERMINAL option, 4-219

/STACK option

LINK keyboard command, 4-153
Stack pointer

modifying the address of, 4-153
Stack size
changing, 4-153

START keyboard command, 4-220
/START option

COPY keyboard command, 4-54
CREATE keyboard command, 4-59
DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-77

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-29

DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-90

DUMP keyboard command, 4-94
Start-up indirect command files, 3—2
See Indirect command files
Start-up messages, 3—1

in control files, 5-16, 5-17
/ISYMBOLTABLE option

LINK keyboard command, 4-153
<SYMTYP>

IND special symbol, 5-21

SYS files

STARTF.COM, 3-2
Starting RT-11
See Bootstrapping the system, 3—1
STARTS.COM, 3-2

copying, 4-43, 4-54

deleting, 4-63, 4-67
protecting from deletion, 4-174
renaming, 4-178, 4-181

STARTX.COM, 3-2

SYSLIB.OBJ, 4-139

/ISTATISTICS option

SYSMAC.SML, 4-139

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-40

System communication area

EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-111

FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-122

clearing locations in, 4-183

System device

STOP directive (IND), 5-63
String symbols (IND)

squeezing, 4-216

System files

breaking into substrings, 5-19

See .SYS files

concatenating, 5-19

removing protection from, 4-232

defining, 5-19, 5-61

System generation options

testing for alphanumeric or RAD50,
5—-64

displaying, 4-208

System jobs

assigning a logical job name to, 4-218

IND special symbol, 5-21

assigning priority levels for, 4-218

Subroutines

communicating with

calling within a control file, 5-48

See CTRL/X

returning from, in control files, 5-59

debugging, 4-218

SUBSTITUTION operating mode (IND),
5-45
<SUCCES>

running, 4-218

suspending, 4-221

/ISYSTEM option

IND special symbol, 5-21

COPY keyboard command, 4-54

SUFFIX mode (IND), 5-45
/ISUMMARY option

DELETE keyboard command, 4-67

PROTECT keyboard command, 4-174

DIRECTORY keyboard command,

RENAME keyboard command, 4-181

4-90

SUSPEND keyboard command, 4-221
ISWAP option

UNPROTECT keyboard command,
4-232

System resources

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-41
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-111

displaying, 4-207
<SYSTEM>

FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-122

Swapping program into memory, 4-196

IND special symbol, 5-21
<SYUNIT>

preventing, 4-196

IND special symbol, 5-21

IND special symbol, 5-22

Symbol definitions file
creating, 4-153

Symbol substitution (IND)
enabling, 5-45

Symbol table overflow
preventing, 4-153

Symbol tables (IND)

deleting definitions from, 5-46
displaying contents of, 5-37

Symbols

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-30

IND option, 5-8
/T option

GT keyboard command, 4-129

TAB key
with EDIT, 6-3

/TABLES option

COMPILE keyboard command, 441
DIBOL keyboard command, 4-71
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-111
TABS:n

SETUP mode, 7-10
/TECO option
EDIT keyboard command, 4-102
TECO text editor
calling, 4-102
setting as default editor, 4-194
Terminal modes

See SETUP
/TERMINAL option

IND, 5-25, 5-27, 5-31, 545

TIMEOUT operating mode (IND), 5-45
<TIMOUT>

IND special symbol, 5-20

/TOP option

LINK keyboard command, 4-153
/TOPS option

COPY keyboard command, 4-55
DIRECTORY keyboard command,

DIFFERENCES keyboard command,
4-77

DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-91

DUMP keyboard command, 4-94
FRUN keyboard command, 4-126

HELP keyboard command, 4-130

SRUN keyboard command, 4-219
Terminal output
resuming

4-91

TRACE operating mode (IND), 5-46
Transfer address

specifying, 4-153
/TRANSFER option
LINK keyboard command, 4-153

Transparent spooler package

See SPOOL
/TRIM option
DIFFERENCES keyboard command,

See CTRL/Q
suppressing

See CTRL/O
suspending

See CTRL/S
Terminals

4-79
<TRUE>

IND special symbol, 5-20
TYPE keyboard command, 4-223
/BEFORE option, 4-224
/COPIES option, 4-224

displaying assignments of, 4-208

/DATE option, 4-224

displaying files on, 4-223

/DELETE option, 4-224

displaying status of, 4-214

setting width of, 7-7
Terminating program execution

See CTRL/C
TEST directive (IND), 5-64

TESTDEVICE directive (IND), 5-65

/INFORMATION option, 4-224

/LOG option, 4-225
/INEWFILES option, 4-225
/NOLOG option, 4-225

/IQUERY option, 4-225
/SINCE option, 4-225

.TESTFILE directive (IND), 5-67

/WAIT option, 4-226
Type-ahead, 3—-10

TEXT

TYPEAHEAD operating mode (IND),
5-46

SETUP mode, 7-8
Text editors
calling, 4-99

UCL

for hard copy terminals, 1-6

. appending information to, 4-16

for video terminals, 1-6

command abbreviations, 4-16

function of, 4-99

definition syntax, 4-15

RT-11, 1-6

deleting commands from, 4-16

setting default, 4-99

description of, 4-15

types of, 4-99
Time

displaying, 4-222
setting, 4-222
TIME keyboard command, 4-222
<TIME>

IND special symbol, 5-22
TIME[:hh:mm:ss]
SETUP mode, 7-12
Timeout count

displaying command definitions, 4-16
redefining commands, 4-16

UNDERLINE
SETUP mode, 7-10
UNDERSCORE

SETUP mode, 7-3
/UNITS option
COMPILE keyboard command, 441
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-112
FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-123

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-31

UNLOAD keyboard command, 4-227

UNPROTECT keyboard command,
4-229

/BEFORE option, 4-230

/DATE option, 4-230

Verifying a volume

process of, 4-113
VERTICAL

SETUP mode, 7-11
Virtual terminal communications

/EXCLUDE option, 4-230
/INFORMATION option, 4-230

package

See VTCOM

/LOG option, 4-231

.VOL directive (IND), 5-67

/INEWFILES option, 4-231

Volume

/NOLOG option, 4-231

copying using SQUEEZE command,

/QUERY option, 4-231

/ISETDATE option, 4-231
/SINCE option, 4-232
/ISYSTEM option, 4-232
/WAIT option, 4-232

Unprotected files
|
obtaining directory listings of, 4-89
Unprotecting files
while renaming, 4-180

4-216

Volume ID
testing from within a control file, 5-67

Volume identification
writing, 4-136

/VOLUMEID option
DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-91
INITIALIZE keyboard command,

Unsave (U) command (EDIT), 6-32
arguments (table), 6-32
UP
SETUP mode, 7-10
/UPDATE option
LIBRARY keyboard command, 4-144

User command linkage
See UCL
User program memory area
purging, 4-183

User Service Routine

See USR
USR
definition of, 1-3
enabling swapping of, 4-205
preventing from swapping over

FORTRAN programs, 4-123
preventing swapping of, 4-205

swapping over FORTRAN programs,
4-111, 4-122

Utility programs
list of, 1-6

4-136

Volumes
binary comparison of, 4-75
copying

See COPY keyboard command
directory of

clearing, 4-132
initialized
restoring an, 4-136

listing unused areas on, 4-86

verifying, 4-113

VT100

SETUP mode, 7-6
VT52

SETUP mode, 7-7
VT52 codes

setting terminal for, 7-7

VTCOM

description of, 1-8
setting baud rate, 4-206
/WAIT option

BOOT keyboard command, 4-33
Vectors

changing in device handlers, 4-192,
4-193, 4-198, 4-200

/VECTORS option

COPY keyboard command, 4-55
DELETE keyboard command, 4-67
DIRECTORY keyboard command,
4-91

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-41

FORMAT keyboard command, 4-117

EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-112

INITIALIZE keyboard command,

FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-123
Verify (V) command (EDIT), 6-26

PRINT keyboard command, 4-169

/VERIFY option

PROTECT keyboard command, 4-174

4-137

COPY keyboard command, 4-55

RENAME keyboard command, 4-182

FORMAT keyboard command

SQUEEZE keyboard command, 4-217
TYPE keyboard command, 4-226

devices supported by, 4-113

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index-32

UNPROTECT keyboard command,
4-232
<WARNIN>

IND special symbol, 5-21
/WARNINGS option

COMPILE keyboard command, 4-41
DIBOL keyboard command, 4-71
EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-112
FORTRAN keyboard command, 4-123
/WIDE option

EXECUTE keyboard command, 4-112
LINK keyboard command, 4-154
% wildcard
See Wildcards, 4-7
* wildcard
See Wildcards, 4-6
Wildcards

commands that support (table), 4-7
default usage of, 4-8
embedded, 4-7
enabling use of implicit, 4-206
suppressing use of implicit, 4-206

use of, 4-6
using with DIFFERENCES keyboard
command, 4-8

/WORDS option

DUMP keyboard command option,
4-95

WRAP

SETUP mode, 7-11
Write (W) command (EDIT), 6-16
arguments (table), 6-17
/WRITE option

MOUNT keyboard command, 4-164
Write-enabling RX01 drives, 4-194
Write-enabling RX02 drives, 4-194

Write-protecting RX02 drives, 4-194
Write-protecting RX01 drives, 4-194

XM monitor
features of, 1-4
minimum requirements, 1-5

/XM option

LINK keyboard command, 4-154

;fl/&"?wm%w

Version 5.1, July 1984

Index—-33

HOW TO ORDER
ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTATION

From

Cali

Chicago

312-640-5612

Digital Equipment Corporation

8:15 am t0 5:00 pm. CT

Accessories & Supplies Center

Write

1050 East Remington Road
Schaumburg, IL 60195

San Francisco
‘.

Alaska, Hawaii

408-734-4915

Digital Equipment Corporation

8:15am.t0 5:00p M. PT

Accessories & Supplies Center

603-884—-6660
830am to6:00 M ET

632 Caribbean Drive
Sunnyvale, CA 94086

408-734-4915
8:15 am. to 5:00 pm. PT

New Hampshire

Rest of U.S.A.,
Puerto Rico*

603-884-6660

Digital Equipment Corporation

830 AMm. to 6:00 PM ET

Accessories & Supplies Center

1-800-258—-1710
8:30 AM. to 6:00 pM. ET

P.O. Box CS2008
Nashua, NH 03061

*Prepaid orders from Puerto Rico must be placed with the local DIGITAL subsidiary (call 809-754-7575)

Canada
British Columbia

Ottawa-Hull

1-800-267-6146

Digital Equipment of Canada Ltd

8:00 aAm. to 5:00 P M. ET

940 Belfast Road

613-234-7726
8:00 am. to 5:00 PMm. ET

Elsewhere

Ottawa, Ontario K1G 4C2
Attn: A&SG Business Manager

112-800-267-6146
8:00 am to 500 pPm ET

Elsewhere

Digital Equipment Corporation

A&SG Business Manager*
*c/o DIGITAL's local subsidiary or approved distributor

RT-11 System
User’s Guide
AD-5279C-T1

READER’S COMMENTS

NOTE: This form is for document comments only. DIGITAL will use comments submitted on this form at the

company’s discretion. If you require a written reply and are eligible to receive one under Software
Performance Report (SPR) service, submit your comments on an SPR form.

Did you find this manual understandable, usable, and well organized? Please make suggestions for improvement.

Did you find errors in this manual? If so, specify the error and the page number.

Please indicate the type of user/reader that you most nearly represent.

—

Assembly language programmer

—

Higher-level language programmer

—

Occasional programmer (experienced)

—

User with little programming experience

—

Student programmer

—

Other (please specify)

Name

Date

Organization

Telephone

Street

City

State

Zip Code
or Country

wa———

———

——————

No Postage

Necessary
if Mailed in the

United States

e
s

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

—

FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO.33 MAYNARD MASS.

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

]

e
SSG/ML PUBLICATIONS, MLO5-5/E45

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION

146 MAIN STREET

MAYNARD, MA 01754-2571

SEE

Do Not Tear — Fold Here

—

Cut Along Dotted Line